Month: September 2020

  • Extreme Hoards: Race, Reality Television & Real Estate Value During the 2008 Financial Crisis

    Michelle Chihara (bio)
    Whittier College

    Two hit reality television shows, just before 2008 and in the foreclosure crisis just after, disciplined particular economic subjects and naturalized historically specific immanent power structures. Extreme Makeover: Home Edition re-imagined the leveraged construction of massive houses in the exurbs. Its sentimentality and its reliance on ethnic minorities dove-tailed with the rhetoric of social justice that politicians used to push for deregulation of mortgage financing, then later facilitated the popular right-wing narrative blaming minorities. After the crash, Hoarders visually mimicked the stages of foreclosure. While Extreme Home Makeover sought to contain the bodies of the poor as static reserves of value in their own neighborhoods, Hoarders re-identified real estate value with normative mental health and commensurable white feminine domesticity.

    Extreme Makeover: Home Edition or Extreme Home Makeover was an iconic reality television show for the real estate bubble fueled by subprime loans before 2008. Its racial dynamics supported the rhetoric of social justice, used—largely cynically—by politicians and real estate moguls to argue for the deregulation of mortgage financing and underwriting standards. The show’s emphasis on ethnic minorities inflated its sense of moral purpose, as it built more than a third of its homes for such minorities.1 But after the show went off the air, its emphasis on minorities prompted a backlash—an early indication of the turn against both progressive anti-racist ideas and against the financial elite that helped bring Donald Trump to power.2 Hoarders can be similarly analyzed as an iconic show for the foreclosure crisis that succeeded the bubble. 3 An analysis of these popular shows helps reveal how reality television participated in constructing popular economic logics that fed the later political ramifications of the 2008 crisis.

    Before the crash, Extreme Home Makeover naturalized the economic logic of building McMansions in the exurbs and sought to regulate the bodies of the poor by keeping them as static reserves of value in their own neighborhoods. After the crash, Hoarders naturalized a logic that sought to re-circulate homes and re-identify real estate value with easy-to-sell white feminine domesticity. Hoarders visually mimicked the foreclosure process—staging work with trash-out crews, the owner under pressure to sell—as the return path to good mental and economic health. In the immediate run-up to and aftermath of the crash, homes on these shows illustrate what Melinda Cooper and Martijn Konings describe as the “double movement of capitalist life” in popular cultural forms (248): the essential emotional logic of capitalism. A house is both a happy ending and a new beginning, a stable space outside the market and a liquid asset. Homes are the icon of the 2008 bubble, the signs of “a process regulated by the affectively charged tension between the necessity of contingency and the anticipation of certainty” (Cooper Konings 241). My argument amplifies the work of other critics who have discussed reality television’s formation of the neoliberal subject, including Laurie Ouellette’s important analysis of Extreme Home Makeover, which focuses on reality television’s manufacture of “‘idealized’ citizen subjectivities” (Ouellette, “Take Responsibility,” 224). Anna McCarthy insists on the historic specificity of the reality show and on its importance as an “arena in which to observe the vernacular diffusion of neoliberal common sense,” where the makeover is “key to social mobility, stability and civic empowerment” (1).4 The sentimental narratives of these shows disciplined and seduced particular subjects to participate in economic processes, instantiating the economic forces and reactionary racial and gendered logics that drove real estate markets and reality television to work together.

    The specific economic pressures at work in the televised narratives can be understood through a Marxist account of hoard formation as a specific structural and necessary tendency of the cycle of production and circulation, which also manifests in psychological excess. Extreme Makeover Home Edition and Hoarders—prototypical of reality television subgenres like Flip This House and other makeover and hoarding shows—engages in the moral and financial regulation of the hoard. Marx describes the hoard in relation to the general equivalent and the specific functions of money, while recognizing the psychological aspect of a hoarder’s insatiable greed. Marx sees the hoarder as engaged in a fantasy about supreme equivalence, a fantasy that is itself partly driven by an economic need to preserve the value of the general equivalent.5 While these shows are not about gold, I argue that real estate and the dream of the American home bear a special relationship to money and the general equivalent during the housing bubble and crisis. The houses on Extreme Home Makeover are hoards to be kept out of circulation, while the houses on Hoarders are hoards that needed to be put back into circulation. The shows created and refurbished actual assets owned by families, overlaying these powerfully sentimental narratives with commercial activity; through real estate transactions and product integration, the shows both created participatory financial structures and shaped economic fantasies about the crisis.

    Since the global financial crisis, in the media of the populist right as well as among many real estate agents, the communities that lost the most in 2008 have been held up as moral failures. In this narrative of blame, ethnic minorities are responsible for both the policy shifts that led to the crisis and for the collapse itself.6 In American Quarterly’s special issue about the subprime crisis, Paula Chakravartty and Denise Ferreira da Silva read the high-risk borrower and the “subprime” as a “racial/postcolonial, moral and economic referent” (364) on a continuum with the trope of the “welfare queen,” (372), part of a logic of blame which exonerates those at the ‘top of the guilt [profit] hierarchy’”(363). Since the crisis, bailouts and gains have increasingly gone to that top, while the losses and blame have been disproportionately distributed among the original borrowers. Extreme Home Makeover and Hoarders played a role in disciplining economic participation and Gramscian common sense around the responsibilities borne by the poor.7 While Chakravartty and da Silva focus on ways that the global crisis rendered these high-risk borrowers “invisible,” my analysis focuses on spectacular rehearsals of the economic logic that made subprime borrowers and then foreclosure victims the protagonists, setting them up to be blamed after the shows had been produced and aired.

    Race, the Rhetoric of Social Justice, and Big New Houses in the Exurbs

    In 2006, Extreme Home Makeover found Eric Hebert’s family both needy and noble, so they tore down his existing home and replaced it with a large ersatz mountain lodge. Before the crisis, the Hebert family took out loans against the lodge. When the family hit harder times, the house fell into foreclosure. The community that had helped Hebert then blamed him. The Wall Street Journal wrote: “‘It’s kind of like we have egg on our face,’ said Sydney Icardo, a realtor with Century 21 RiverStone, who cut down aspen trees used to decorate Mr. Hebert’s bedroom. ‘It cuts deep. We’re a tight community’” (2010). This volunteer who helped build the mansion reacted with a powerful sense of betrayal at Hebert’s further loss. For volunteers and journalists who ran articles like the “Extreme Stories” series in the Wall Street Journal, any move by the families to use their homes as financial assets was a failure on the part of the family or on the part of the show—regardless of the crisis, this was a scandal apart, where the community was betrayed by working class and poor families or by a powerful media company.8 The Journal and myriad Internet commentators rarely if ever suggested that the show or society could have done more to help.9 Instead, the families were shamed for not being worthy of the gift they were given. 10

    The show was also criticized for its extremity, for making the houses too big and too lavish. But just as the families’ troubles were representative of much greater societal needs, the homes were representative of building trends during the show’s run, not actually that far above a historically specific average. Some of the homes built during the bubble might seem lavish in retrospect, but during the show’s run, Extreme Home Makeover echoed actual construction taking place in peripheral and conventionally working-class neighborhoods. Its popularity coincided with a North American boom in housing construction, in real estate prices and in national household debt. A graph of the show’s ratings would track the housing bubble almost exactly (see Levy and Sacks): the show ran from 2003 to 2012 and peaked in 2005 as one of the most popular shows in America with 16 million viewers a week. Housing prices peaked in 2005–6. Housing debt doubled between 2000 and 2007, and household debt in America grew from 66.1 percent of GDP to 99.9 percent of GDP in the decade before 2007 (Blackburn 66, Brenner 38).

    The size of the average new house peaked in 2007 at 2,500 square feet, with many outer suburban developments reaching 5,000 (the average has been shrinking since 2007) (Snyder). The homes on the show reached 5,000 but were usually around 3,000 square feet—bigger and more eccentric than many McMansions, but not by much. And during a boom in household debt, while changing underwriting standards led to the origination and distribution of “NINJA” loans (to people with No Income, No Job or Assets), Extreme Home Makeover created ownership investments for a specific group of people who seemed reliable but could not show proof of income. In other words, Extreme Home Makeover sentimentally justified the leveraged construction of massive structures in extra-urban areas.

    Mr. Hebert was one African American person who lost his home at the beginning of a foreclosure crisis that ultimately affected more than 10 million Americans, and African American and Latino neighborhoods suffered the worst effects of the foreclosure crisis.11 Between 1998 and 2006, African Americans are estimated to have lost somewhere between $71 billion and $93 billion in asset values due to subprime lending practices. For previous generations, housing discrimination had functioned largely through redlining, where the Federal Housing Administration and banks drew red lines around integrated or predominantly ethnic neighborhoods and then refused to back loans in those areas. Redlined loan restrictions were replaced by predatory lending during the boom, and by evictions after the crash. Yet the rhetoric driving these regulatory changes under both President Clinton and President Bush suggested that home ownership by any means would help redress the history of redlining and racial prejudice; Clinton identified homeownership as the “rising tide that lifts all of America’s boats” (Katz 30),12 where “affordable housing” meant cheap loans for single family homes at market prices. In the name of helping to stabilize minority communities, predatory lending was ushered in along with financial deregulation, beginning with the dismantling of Glass-Steagall in 1996. As the barriers to private sector gambles in derivatives dropped away, it created incentives for mortgage originators to continually relax underwriting standards for loans they were immediately passing on to securitizers. Fannie Mae CEO James Johnson published a book of sentimental rhetoric about American homes that would not have seemed out of place on Extreme Home Makeover, writing that deregulation and new lending standards would “ensure truly equal access to home ownership,” and that ownership itself was a panacea. The stabilizing nature of home ownership was paramount to Johnson’s case, echoing Clinton’s earlier rhetoric: “nothing would do more to advance social justice, heal the wounds of past discrimination, and bank the fires of future tension and division” (Johnson 4).13 With its aura of a community-based religious movement, Extreme Home Makeover compounded the suggestion that owning a (big) home would stabilize and anchor families of color, both morally and financially. On the contrary, the subprime bubble de-stabilized the nation and hurt people of color in particular. But in part because politicians had used social justice rhetoric to emphasize deserving minorities in their deregulatory efforts, those minorities were blamed when financial policies failed. When leveraged construction and baroque securitization failed to bring about ownership utopia despite the rhetoric about community and antiracism, the Icardos of the world displayed a fragile white readiness to see the entire situation as one created by the Heberts.

    Extreme Home Makeover’s special appeal combined “house porn” with a naturalization of this racial dynamic within subprime lending. Like other reality shows, Extreme Home Makeover diverted attention away from systemic economic and social problems and towards a narrow definition of individual responsibility, as Ouellette and other critics have argued. But this doesn’t explain why Extreme Home Makeover out-performed and out-lasted a number of what Ouellette calls the “Good Samaritan” shows by a wide margin, including all of the other Extreme Makeover shows in health and beauty, and many other television shows of all types during the bubble.14 Extreme Home Makeover was one among many in the explosion of home-and-garden programming on television, online and in magazines during the asset price bubble.15 The Extreme website clearly fit into this content boom, with pictures and linked advertising for every provider of Italianate kitchens and tropically landscaped waterfalls. The supposed transcendence of granite countertops helped to explain the increasingly vast amounts of money being invested in and borrowed against homes during the bubble. Extreme Home Makeover rendered mortgage originators, investment bankers, and building corporations less visible by making subprime borrowers both visible and liable. The moral argument for the houses on Extreme Home Makeover combined individual responsibility with an economic narrative circulating both in real estate markets and on HGTV about the supreme equivalence of home, or more prosaically, about the idea that home prices could always go up because the American home was a fairytale solution to all problems. Both the Structured Investment Vehicles and the Extreme homes rested on the idea that housing prices could go up even if the incomes of the working poor and of targeted minorities were the ultimate backstop for such investments.

    The fantasy of transcendent value behind the “ownership society” relies on this nostalgic understanding of the stabilizing power of American homes. The economic assumption that home ownership anchors families rests on limited empirical observations of Americans under conditions that no longer pertained in 2008. Deregulation erased both the old underwriting standards and the financial policies that separated American mortgages from the speculative practices of investment banks. Earlier underwriting standards were enforced by bank agents who, like Extreme Home Makeover’s producers, assessed a borrower’s “character” and long-term prospects before giving a long-term loan.16 Before the bubble, specific agents at local banks could hold long-term relationship with individuals, and those relationships did have a stabilizing or controlling effect. During the bubble, liquidity in the financial markets was funneled into mortgage-backed securities, which in turn drove a vast demand for new loans. These loans were primarily pushed on the public by sales agents for mortgage-originators, companies that did not hold the loans on their books but were rewarded simply for signing people up. They had no relationship with and no incentive to assess borrowers. “NINJA” loans and “balloon mortgages” were rampant; balloon loans had interest rates that spiked up after the first three to five years of the loan period. When the balloon interest rates began to spike, foreclosure became inevitable for many subprime borrowers. Defaults on the McMansions in the exurbs hit historic highs. Many of the new breed of loans were made to people who were much less financially stable than the Extreme Home Makeover families. Also, the Extreme houses were outright gifts, not mortgages made with punitive terms. The show’s families actually did much better than the national average, partly because the show did the work that local banks used to do, creating both social pressure and economic conditions conducive to stability. The families on the show served as narrative justification for subprime loans, including an insistence on the continued presence of an institution that would assess character before bestowing a home. That institution was the show itself, which became indistinguishable from “the community,” which became indistinguishable from the advertisers, including many banks. 17 The show dramatized both the good character of the families and its good work in finding and rewarding them, relying on a financial nostalgia for the stabilizing power of American homes.

    Of course, outside the show, both local banks and stable real estate investments were a thing of the past. Even the dataset underlying the mortgage-backed securities was a period piece. NINJA loans are pooled and then cut into securitized tranches. The investment vehicles made up of those tranches are priced by algorithms, which assess the securities’ level of risk. During the bubble, ratings agencies gave most of those tranches A-level grades. Those A-level grades rested in part on pricing algorithms assumed mortgage risk would be uncorrelated (to other mortgages), and that families would always pay the mortgage first. The securities were sold based on the assumption that people would behave as they had under the old underwriting standards.18 The volatile securities that drove demand for new homes and less financially stable borrowers were being pooled and priced, in part, based on the same nostalgia.

    At a moment when huge numbers of Americans in general and African Americans in particular were facing pressure from salesmen to take on debt, Extreme Home Makeover gave a few hundred families a valuable asset that they could—legally—use as collateral. Despite this, only a small number of the Extreme families used it that way. The families who did try to use the Extreme homes as financial assets acted in response to the same desperate problems that brought the show to their doors. Nevertheless, the general tenor of any coverage when Extreme families sold was censorious and scandalized. The house was somehow supposed to obviate all other needs, and the families were blamed if it did not. It was considered a great betrayal for the families to want to, for example, sell their homes in order to move to a neighborhood with better schools.

    Extreme Home Makeover’s depiction of the transformative gift of a house was meant to serve as both a righteous expression of community support for minorities, and as the revealed value of those minorities. During the national housing bubble, the show provided an implicit dramatization of the push to get minority families into “the ownership society” as the democratic community’s response to a history of redlining and housing discrimination. Extreme Home Makeover supplemented the narrative about “deserving” minorities who needed new underwriting standards and other financial de-regulation, and then after the crash the show was itself blamed along with suddenly “undeserving” minorities for the losses they suffered at the hands of the investment banks.

    Building Something “Sustainable”

    Counter to the scandalized coverage, most families did keep the Extreme homes because Makeover put enormous effort into making the homes something the families could sustain. In light of the show’s failed political consciousness and its role in political rhetoric about social justice, it’s worth noting that the direst effects of neoliberal housing and health care policies never made it on screen.19 The families on the show were often poor but never truly destitute; like a good subprime investment, they were marginal but stable. The houses were both just rewards and relatively good investments. Extreme Home Makeover could show only families who already owned houses, no matter how dilapidated. Houses were not given to the strata of society that falls entirely outside of the social safety net, to whom loans could not be made. Interviews with producers and the longest-term showrunner on Extreme Home Makeover, alongside a careful review of the show, indicate that it predominantly built lavish homes that its recipients could and would keep.20 The show told a story about a wide swath of diverse families who were both hard-working and needy: people who showed an extraordinary strength of character and a baseline financial stability. One father lost his job as a trucker and took out a second mortgage to pay his young daughter’s chemotherapy bills. But a few families who appeared on the show later had trouble paying the suddenly outsized property taxes and utility bills, and there are valid ethical concerns about building mansions that dwarf their neighbors in the community. Producers in later seasons did build smaller homes and toned down the outlandish features. They began leaving out pools, working in solar panels, and finding people jobs.21 But given the broader economic realities, it’s actually remarkable how few of the homes from the show ended up in foreclosure. To date, the Wall Street Journal has found only five troubled owners out of more than two hundred (that’s under 3%, compared with the 50% default rates in the worst tranches of the mortgage-backed securities).22

    Extreme Home Makeover’s producers were under direct orders to build something “sustainable” (as per interviews), and families were cut from consideration if they posed too high a credit risk. Off-screen, the show encouraged sponsors and communities to set up funds for utilities, gave families financial counseling, and carefully selected baseline stable families. On-screen, this allows the show to depict families whose need seems momentary, like bad luck, and not like the result of systemic problems. “I don’t care how professional, or uncaring, you are,” one casting producer told me. “Once you’ve spent hours and hours with a six-year-old who has cancer, who started a foundation, and you’re in love with this kid, and then you can’t…” he trailed off, still emotional about the experience. For every family on the show, there were nine families who were interviewed at length and then denied—all some of “the best people you’ve ever talked to, with the worst luck you’ve ever heard of.” The casting producers who did these interviews performed the surplus emotional labor of witnessing and then suppressing the truly punitive economic realities for American families at the margins. Years after working on the show, the producer quoted above claimed that he still woke up at night thinking about families he wasn’t able to help. He said he had watched a number of his colleagues quit because they were so devastated by the experience of denying people help. “The people who really needed the very very most were in too much trouble for us to help,” he said. “If they were already truly struggling to pay the taxes or utilities, then you know they would just have to sell the house. That was my biggest regret. That we couldn’t do more for people who weren’t at least somewhat stable” (emphasis added).23 Pre-existing stability was necessary to avoid the pressure to liquidate. Casting producers knew from the beginning that if the family sold the house, the show had failed. The show’s primary intentions included this drive to hide the true range of suffering of working families of all colors, suffering that might demonstrate the need for collective action or explicit governmental policies beyond an occasional carefully bestowed mansion. The scandalized reaction to the extremity of the show after a handful of foreclosures drew attention away from the hard-won success that the show’s producers had for portraying good emotional investments as equivalent to good financial investments.

    Product Integration, Invisible Corporations, and Authentic Communities

    Extreme Home Makeover used deeply-embedded product integration not only to equate emotional investment with financial investment, but to characterize corporate activity itself as “authentic” community involvement. Extreme Home Makeover didn’t sell corporate interference or activity as a panacea; rather, it became the iconic pinnacle of a trend towards integrated product placement in reality television. The special genius of Extreme lay in its use of corporate sponsorship to produce sentiment, which thus functioned as a mark both of authenticity and of a free market.24 Out-sized sentiment matched the size of the homes, where deserving families received structures as big and beautiful as their lives were difficult (Jacobson). But the show never created the impression that specific corporations or corporate actors were coming forward to take care of these families. Instead, the “community” seemed to surge forward naturally, such that the logic of the market itself became embodied as a sentimental tsunami of support. As a result, there was little to no resistance to the idea that corporations were profiting off Extreme families’ misfortunes because the show was not perceived as an ad. Instead, the corporate donations became the mark of the human communities they represented and helped. Beyond home improvement, reality television’s “core brand identity” involves a promise of an unmediated “special access to ‘reality’” (Deery 2), meaning both intimate spaces and authentic feelings. That sense of special access helps to break down audiences’ documented resistance to messages perceived as ads (Gutnik). Extreme Home Makeover uses the sheer intensity of emotion generated by the sponsor involvement to mark it as “real,” both of the market and not of the market, with product placement itself as a sign of authentic community engagement.

    Home improvement television shares a particularly synergistic relationship with the real estate market, and with the home decoration and building industries via explicit partnerships and sponsor relationships.25 The drive to manufacture emotion for television coincided with economic boom times for contractors, builders and housing-ware companies who needed a way to place goods without losing audience. Survivor and American Idol were at the forefront of integrated branding in 2000 (Deery 3), and integrated deals went on to dominate the wider genre (Williams).26 Endemol, Extreme Home’s production company, is a pioneer in the field.27 As a leader in the television industry and the reality genre, the show is one of many new forms of content that increasingly blurred the line between “fiction” and reality, between ads and shows, between consumers and citizens, between sponsors and “real” volunteers participating in the show.

    The perception that advertiser involvement is the mark of authentic community in Extreme Home Makeover is the show’s greatest and most profitable illusion, a pinnacle in the home improvement reality genre’s long history of close relationships with major corporations.28 When Sears eventually signed on as the show’s central sponsor, the New York Times reported that the deal was one of the biggest integrated marketing contracts in the industry. Sears paid to play a central role on the show, apart from their potential purchase of any ads during commercial breaks.29 And because Disney owns and operates ABC, on which the show aired, Extreme Home Makeover also sent most of its families to Disney World while their original homes were destroyed. In order to accommodate the needs of another major sponsor, the show sought to cast families facing increasingly obscure medical conditions whose pharmaceutical needs could be fulfilled by CVS (Smoking Gun). Yet the profusion of sponsors (and the Smoking Gun story) never prevented Extreme Home Makeover from delivering both strong branding recall and a large and passionately loyal viewership that never saw itself as in thrall to corporate advertising or to branded content in service of the banks.30

    It was always the “community,” and not corporate sponsors or even television producers, that supposedly effected change on the show. In this too, Endemol got a great deal. All building materials and labor were donated: Endemol funded the show but did not pay to build the homes. Instead, it served as a financial intermediary (almost like a mortgage originator), transferring ownership after the build. A primary builder in each city recruited its own volunteer subcontractors, suppliers, and hundreds upon hundreds of volunteer workers. These people participated in fervent tent revivals and worked many days for free. In each town, thousands of people gathered in local high school gymnasiums to participate in pre-build “pep rallies.” Executive producers from the show gave inspiring speeches alongside the sponsors and sometimes local politicians.31 Local newspapers provided free publicity by covering the builds and the stories of the families as “news.” The intense fervor generated by Extreme Home Makeover’s rallies and builds blurred the categories of citizen, consumer, and sponsor beyond recognition: the self-interested advertiser did not buy an ad to display in the community so much as became an avatar of the community.32 The pep rallies and shoots combined the passion of a rock concert with the fervent spirituality of a barn raising. After speeches in the big tent, the visual gestalt of the army of volunteers marching to rebuild a home in matching jumpsuits and banners recalls The Salvation Army: Extreme homes are both sign and means of salvation. Charitable volunteers are indistinguishable from contract laborers who could not say no to the large companies sponsoring the build. Smaller companies also needed to please larger sponsors. Charity and possibly semi-coerced labor, good will and marketing, citizenship, community spirit and strong branding were irrevocably fused.33

    Authentic Hoards, Petrified Reserves, and Rooms for Children

    Week after week, Extreme Home Makeover dramatizes the rightness of subprime lending and massive building projects, where the homes were assets that would stabilize and immobilize minority families. Like subprime borrowers, the owners on the show are not meant to be full economic actors. Chakravatty notes that “Black and Latino/a holders of subprime loans . . . are not constructed as referents of either the relationship between persons presumed in commerce,” nor as having “the capacity that according to Karl Marx ultimately determines their value of exchange.” Subprime owners are instead identified with the house, with the thing itself: “As with other improper economic subjects, the excess value of the Black and Latino/a subprime mortgage holder refers to their ontological deficiency, or as G.W.F. Hegel describes Africa, for being a thing” (Chakravatty 33). Racial Otherness amplifies the families’ authenticity and identifies them with the thing-ness of the house. Black authority can rely on authenticity, even (or particularly) in service of hegemonic discourses exerting control over black bodies: “Black authority was and still is characterized by knowledge of vernacular (i.e. “authenticity”) and adherence to a moral code that is organized around a proprietary relationship to the black body and, by extension, its image” (Fusco 12). In that proprietary relationship, the bodies of minorities are understood to lend authenticity to the homes as hoards: as static and illiquid reserves that shore up the supreme equivalence of home. Extreme homes would not put inflationary liquidity into minority families’ hands, nor would they proffer social mobility into other neighborhoods.

    While Marx explains hoarding in relation to gold—the traditional form of the precious (see endnote 6)—television shows regulating value through the home emerged in part from the close correlation of the home with the form of the precious to a qualitatively new degree. After Americans staked unprecedented portions of their financial worth on homes, the Federal Reserve shifted too. Vested with the power to create American money, the Fed has traditionally owned no assets besides gold certificates. As a “gold custodian,” it holds five thousand metric tons of gold reserves in a vault and waxes poetic in its brochures about gold’s supreme value. After the crisis, however, the Fed purchased trillions in bonds, mortgage securities, and other assets.34 In an unprecedented move in 2008, it also launched the Mortgage Backed Securities Purchase Program, through which it created almost $2 trillion to buy back inflated American home mortgages. These post-crisis programs required the largest creation of money in the Federal Reserve’s history. Houses became more like gold, their fantasy value backing paper money, and mortgage-backed securities became more like fiat paper money from the Fed.

    Extreme Home Makeover provoked and regulated anxiety about money’s authenticity, the idealized supreme value of home, and the threat of devaluation that lurked beneath extremely high housing prices. The final proof that Extreme homes were intended as petrified reserves—hoards to shore up value while remaining out of circulation—lays in the details of the children’s rooms. The most extreme aspects of the houses are always the mini-carousels, pirate ships, fairy castles and dirt bike tracks that embody the presumed desires of sometimes very young, very sick, or disabled children. While the living rooms and master bedrooms are almost uniformly decorated in a bland style perhaps best described as “contemporary country,” the designs for the kids are anything but. Designers elicited preferences and hobbies in pre-production interviews;35 if a young boy said he liked Nascar, his bed would be a chassis. If he said bikes, the walls would be made out of spokes and tires. Producers specifically avoided asking the kids directly what they wanted in order to elicit surprise and delight at the moment of the reveal. While producers said in interviews that they did try to think about whether kids were likely to change their minds within a year or two, they nonetheless built somewhat loony features for the kids.

    These children’s rooms in fact made the homes extremely hard to sell. In order to sell, homes must be unique, but not too unique. David Harvey’s discussion of monopoly rents explains that a home’s “special qualities” are crucial to its value, while at the same time “the requirement of tradability means that no item can be so unique or so special as to be entirely outside the monetary calculus” (92). A contradiction arises in the dilemma between the standardizing pressures of commercialization and marks of distinction (Harvey 92). The kids’ rooms help make a TV show about specific people instead of about the transfer of generic suburban model homes built by corporate contractors, and their extravagance makes the homes feel unique and therefore authentic. However, they also put the houses perilously close to falling outside the monetary calculus. There is a certain cruelty in reifying and freezing in time a six-year-old’s offhand remark to a stranger that he likes bikes. But as built connections to innocence and family life, the children’s rooms situate the Extreme homes above the realm of purely commercial products.36 The homes were precious to the family at the time of the reveal, but the indoor pirate ship slides marks them as not commensurable on the market. Located in working class neighborhoods miles away from any comparable homes (which are key to pricing real estate), the carousels and car-body beds are at once priceless and un-priceable.

    The adult rooms in the houses, meanwhile, specifically avoid styles that could have changed the perceived fundamental class status of the owners, who again were meant to remain static. While the designers worked with a new builder and a new family every week, the diversity of styles on the show never stretches to one particular style: the clean lines, expanses of glass, and emphasis on building materials characterized as “modern” or “midcentury modern.” The show invited families neither to move to better neighborhoods, nor to participate in aesthetic practices that might suggest a move to the upper class. Modern style, like the latter magazines’ readerships, is coded as white and upper-class (Leslie, Reimer); it correlates predominantly with bubble markets and upper-class white buyers (Asabere).37 The aesthetic of the show was always, to use popular-culture shorthand, more geared to the ideal domesticity of Better Homes & Gardens magazine than to that of Dwell or Domino (Jones, Ives). Just as these families were not being entrusted with injections of liquid capital, so the homes stood as built improvements on ethnically and socioeconomically Other bodies that were expected to remain in their rightful place. Modern homes would have signified a different kind of intervention and transformation, an unintended invitation into whiteness and circulating value. Extreme families were unique and worthy and “contemporary country,” outside of dense urban centers. They helped to suggest that the rising prices in those urban bubble markets might spill out to other, non-modern neighborhoods and lift all boats. But class mobility would also have threatened to liquidate the hoard both as a reserve of value, and as a reserve of deserving authentic Otherness.

    Hoarders, the Foreclosure Crisis, and Re-circulation

    I have already alluded to Marx’s recognition of the psychological excess in the hoarding impulse, a libidinal greed born of structural need. But when there is a run on the bank or a freeze in circulation, the structural imperative must dissolve that psychology and push the hoard back into circulation. When the 2008 crash prompted a foreclosure crisis, Hoarders at once represented and regulated the act of hoarding as psychological impulse and as economic process. When the idealized supreme value of home receded and devaluation began, Hoarders pathologized the hoard and also reverted back to a white heteronormative vision of the value of home. Like Extreme Home Makeover and the bubble, the ratings success of Hoarders correlates almost exactly with the foreclosure crisis; it debuted as A&E’s “most-watched series” in 2009.38 Reality television had seen a number of other cleaning shows fail on various networks. The VP of development at the production company called Hoarders a “long-developing surprise hit” (Davidson), and credited its success to “persistence in the development process.” But Hoarders took off with the first great wave of foreclosures, precisely one month after Flip This House went off the air on the same network. Beginning in late 2009 after the commercial markets froze, the number of homes falling into foreclosure in the US reached unprecedented levels. By 2012, in Stockton, California, one in 67 homes was bank-owned, and the national average was around one in every 250 houses entering foreclosure (Levy). Flip closed after six seasons, and the headlines announcing its cancellation appeared the same month as headlines announcing the end of the foreclosure crisis.39

    Hoarders depicts a mental disorder and its resolution through the home. Host personalities try to help people whose psychology led them to pile up objects, from newspapers and cans to clothes and furniture. On Hoarders, the sick person learns that the things she values intrinsically as part of herself are value-less. Once she realizes this, the designers’ cameras can heal by aestheticizing the exchangeable value of the house. All owners on home shows learn to re-value themselves through their homes, and Hoarders delivers the same emotional pay-off as countless other home improvement shows: in the “reveal,” the camera follows a host and an owner through a transformed space in what many critics and bloggers have called the “money shot” of lifestyle television (see Grindstaff). On Hoarders, getting rid of clutter and junk becomes the primary emotional task. The owner re-calibrates her evaluation of her things and her house, re-entering circulation as a more authentic and more exchangeable version of herself. The definition of hoarding as a psychological disorder itself relies on normative market judgments about real estate; in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, hoarding is ostensibly a “difficulty discarding or parting with possessions, regardless of their actual value,” and its symptoms include “possessions that congest and clutter active living areas and substantially compromise their intended use.” In order to diagnose a hoarder, then, psychologists must evaluate the intended use of items and the boundaries between living and storage space. Hoarders can hoard cheap or expensive objects, but the psychologist—like a real estate agent—must decide whether the space in question is a closet or a living area. Rich people with ample closet space are, by definition, better able to avoid the diagnosis and the medicalization of their practices. The show’s choice to over-index white women in particular also interacted with the normative and class-based judgment built into the psychiatric definition of hoarding. In a complete content analysis of the first two seasons of the show, Samantha Redwine finds

    a disproportionate representation of female and white individuals….The presentation of gender within the two seasons suggests that women are more predisposed to hoarding behavior than men; however, research states that men are more likely to display these behaviors than women.(63)

    In addition,

    Only three of the hoarding central characters were people of color out of the total forty-three featured hoarders. The presentation of race within the two seasons of the series suggests that white people are more prone to display hoarding behavior than [people of] any other race. (63)

    If the show had been designed to represent the actual socioeconomic status of most Hoarders and the racial distribution of poverty in the United States, “there should be more minority members featured” (Redwine 63). The predominance of white and female Hoarders is, in other words, a scripted aspect of the show.

    That script supports Hoarders’ need to convert the home into a liquid asset; the home as a locus of white, feminine domesticity is the conventional norm, and therefore the most marketable and most easily traded. Its emphasis on white women reflects the turn from illiquid reserves to the pressure to liquidate. Hoarders is motivated to render people and objects mobile and commensurable, and therefore to feature the conventional. Sarah Banet-Weiser argues that the market specifically situates hygiene, health, and purity in the feminine “white bourgeois body” (7). Health and trade-ability are re-identified on Hoarders with a “neutral” baseline of white bourgeois and female bodies, with all other marks of distinction and Otherness erased. In contrast, the Extreme hoard is meant to stay put; authentic ethnic minorities act as marks of distinction on reserves of value, without moving black or brown bodies into new locations. After the bubble popped, disciplining white women reflected the market’s demands for liquid reserves. Hoarders re-asserts the healthy home’s identification with white women, aligning value with white feminine domesticity as an inherently exchangeable universal norm.40

    On Hoarders, building extreme closets to store the stuff is never an option. The marks of distinction are always minor “personal touches” that could easily be rendered commensurable on the real estate market, like a row of small river rocks on a shelf in the bathroom. If Extreme Home Makeover suggests that the logic of the market would help the poor without actually turning them into rich people, Hoarders suggests that the market can heal sick homeowners without actually turning them into poor people. In an historically specific moment when foreclosed homes needed to get sold, the show provided a fantasy version of liquidating the hoard that looked systemically and personally healthy.41 In Extreme homes, ethnic Otherness helps identify the home as unique, while remaining precious and static, while Hoarders associates the home’s exchange value with newly hygienic and ostensibly neutral feminine bodies. Both shows regulate value and the value of the subject through the home.

    Concluding Speculations

    Before the election of a reality television star to the U.S. presidency, sociologist Jennifer de Silva documented an entire generation’s struggles and failures to meet the financial benchmarks of American adulthood. In her Coming Up Short, young people can’t pay off their student debts, get married, or buy homes. While the populist right continues to blame minorities, politicians, and global elites, the rage at the banks remains unfocused. After the 2008 bail-outs, the major financial institutions in the United States consolidated and met stricter capital requirements, but speculative financial practices continue apace and the power of the major banks remains unchecked. Small businesses and families can’t get loans. Houses remain expensive. The sentimental Extreme homes now seem dated, because most American families can’t even dream of a subprime mortgage in the exurbs. After the original Hoarders went off the air in 2013, Mother Jones reported that private equity firms and hedge funds were buying up foreclosed homes, renting them, and securitizing those rental income streams. Roughly coincident with that development, shows like Storage Wars, Auction Hunters, and Storage Hunters gained popularity (Sellers). In these shows, auctioneers sold off the contents of storage lockers and container units that owners had abandoned. These shows depicted possessions with no clear owner, not located in a house. They framed and branded the process of clearing inventory and re-circulating value in a complete absence of home ownership. But the logics that gave America the crash are still with us. Critics should therefore stay attuned to the cultural products that frame new economic narratives in the wake of the rage against progressive neoliberalism. Something will have to replace America’s appetite for watching workers get fired on The Apprentice. As temporary rentals through companies like Airbnb intensify gentrification and housing shortages, it’s worth asking what the next generation of narratives naturalizing the logic of the on-demand “gig economy” will look like. At least one reality television casting call in June of 2016 asked for gig economy workers to audition: “examples of gig worker. dog walker, Uber driver, tutor, swim instructor, home cook, Fiverr user etc [sic].”42 At the very least, critics can help contingent and vulnerable workers defend against any notion that they—the drivers and tutors and cooks and nomads struggling to pay off student loans—are to blame for the next inevitable crash.

    Footnotes

    1. See McMurria 9, or Janet Wasko who writes that the show attempted to “decouple race from its social contexts and to resituate it as one commodity among others” (399).

    2. I use this term in the way that Nancy Fraser uses it in “The End of Progressive Neoliberalism.”

    3. I use “iconic” advisedly, with Martijn Konings’s definition of the term in The Emotional Logic of Capitalism in mind. I rely on his insight that “What often eludes progressive commentary is not only the paradoxical way in which the malfunctioning of capitalist economy triggers emotional responses that serve to affirm and restore its key signs; but also how this iconophilia is driven by an iconoclastic spirit that levels its harsh charges of idolatry at the progressive project itself” (12).

    4. I use “common sense” as Hall and O’Shea define it in Neoliberal Common Sense, as the legitimating processes that forms society as a market. When I use the term “neoliberal,” I refer specifically to the historically specific definition that Philip Mirowksi puts forward in Never Let a Serious Crisis Go to Waste.

    5. Marx’s hoarder acts on an obsession with the perceived transcendence of the supreme equivalent, whatever it is (usually gold). In Marxist theory, Money works in three irreconcilable ways: as a measure of exchange value (price); as a method of circulation (currency); and as an instrument of hoarding. This third role for money serves a regulatory function. Monetary troubles represent inherent disequilibriums in the circulation of commodities. Hoards, as reserves of value, help to sustain the value of the general equivalent. As Suzanne de Brunhoff explains it, when there is too much money in circulation, hoards absorb the excess. Hoarding is an “interruption in the circulation of commodities” where money becomes “petrified,” and “helps to adjust the relationship between the measure of value and the medium of circulation” (40). For the hoarder, hoarding acts out a fantasy of absolute or transcendent value embodied in the commodity. And yet, in order to right a disequilibrium and restore value, the hoarder must be able to liquidate his precious pile. Of course, real estate is fundamentally different from the commodity of gold as money on which Marx bases his theory. But during and after the 2008 crisis, I argue, the economic relationship between mortgage-backed securities and money became meaningfully close. Thus, cultural efforts to preserve homes as different from all other commodities or properties, and narratives about the transcendence of home, were fundamentally like the hoarder’s effort to preserve the money form as distinct from all other commodities.

    6. This story was widespread in the right-wing press. See Skullduggery and Munro for representative examples of the narrative that blames the crisis on minorities and President Obama. I interviewed three real estate agents during the foreclosure crisis who believed that politicians had forced Fannie Mae to give loans to minorities, and who understood that view to be commonly held. See Chapter 5 of Mirowski for the focused blame on Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and “the willful blurring of the line between a private firm and a political instrument.” See Mirowski and Nik-Khah for “agnotology,” the creation of doubt for political purposes.

    7. I cite Gramsci here, but specifically avoid Foucault, despite my use of the term “discipline.” Agamben and Konings both articulate my concerns about Foucault’s “economistic account of economy” (Konings 29). McCarthy and others’ use of Foucault is compelling, but I agree with Mirowski that, while Foucault was prescient about many aspects of neoliberalism, he eventually came to accept the concept of the market as a powerful information processor. As Mirowski writes, for Foucault “‘market’ (always referenced as a monolithic entity) provides the boundary condition for governmentality, because it alone knows things we can never know” (98).

    8. While the Extreme Home Makeover “scandal” occurred after the long 1980s, I place it in the context of La Berge’s account of that period, where scandals and abstractions work “together to give finance its sense of identity and possibility.” The show was narratively involved in financial culture, and “the financial scandal provides a narrative organization” to the subprime failures. Scandal, after the fact, “isolates fixtures and figures of financial culture and provides them a manageable form in which to circulate” (15).

    9. The Journal dedicated real reporting resources to the aftermath of Extreme Home Makeover, but see also Jezebel, as a representative scandal rag.

    10. See Graeber 2008 for the complexity of gift-giving. The negative press was also in part a reaction to underlying cultural norms about gifts, and cultural pressure not to sell things that are received as gifts.

    11. See Hannah-Jones and Harvey, Enigma 1–25.

    12. Real estate interests constituted “the most generous lobby in Washington” in that they “helped create a climate in which the very possibility of government policies that might set reasonable limits on lending have been rendered unthinkable—a threat to recovery and the economy as a whole” (Katz 225).

    13. Johnson stood to benefit greatly from the changes he suggested, although the discrimination he spoke of was real. The Clinton administration pushed for deregulation while pushing for more loans to low-income families as part of Clinton’s National Homeownership Strategy. Also see Weiss. It’s important to note, however, that while Johnson wrote as the head of Fannie Mae, the role that Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac played in the crisis has been exaggerated by the same right-wing narrative that blames minorities (see Mirowski Chapter 5).

    14. James McMurria, Laurie Ouellette and James Hay have argued that “Good Samaritan” TV generally puts forward corporate benevolence as a panacea for social ills, as part of a neoliberal pressure towards increased self-governance in all aspects of life. I amplify such critiques, but I seek to explain the particular success of Extreme Home Makeover. The moralistic Miracle Workers, about an elite team of medical professionals for the extremely sick, premiered on ABC in 2006, for example, failed quickly. Mark Greif argues that Extreme Home Makeover introduced market norms into spaces that should have been immune to them: “the flow back of norms justified by industry into norms for inner spaces…the spaces that have nothing to do with either public life or work, and should offer safety from their demands. I am thinking of the home and the integral body, underneath the skin.” This is a representative example of what Konings call the progressive argument for “disembedding” money and the market. Like Cooper and Konings, I hope to move away from this critique of neoliberal politics that “tends to focus on its presumed inability to recognize the proper limits of the market” (Cooper 3). Extreme Home Makeover insisted on home as a place whose value on the market is related to its sanctity and independence off the market. Konings’s iconic view of money is as a sign always already “capable of speaking to our most intensely felt individual needs.” His goal is not to disembed the market, but to think more deeply about the question, “How do we in fact relate to [money] even before we raise the question of how we should think about it?” (Konings 19).

    15. “In the years following HGTV’s auspicious fin-de-siècle premiere, the cable network (coupled with its website) claims to have ‘outperformed all projections’ beginning with its remarkable launch into 6.5 million homes in 44 cable markets” (Everett 161).

    16. “In the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, however, credit evaluation experienced what economic historians have termed a ‘quantitative revolution.’ Creditors turned away from subjective, qualitative, narrative forms of credit evaluation and toward objective, quantitative, data-driven models of credit scoring. They did so in part because they wanted to limit their exposure to charges of racial bias and other forms of discrimination” (McClanahan 33).

    17. While ABC.com does not have a category, on its featured sponsors page, for banks and lenders, the individual websites for each build almost all feature a bank or a mortgage lender, or two or three, as sponsors.

    18. A Morgan Stanley banker explained on NPR’s Planet Money that bankers based their mathematical models on the assumption that people always paid the mortgage first and housing prices always went up. As the reporter put it: “As we now know, they were using the wrong data.” “They looked at the recent history of mortgages and saw that the foreclosure rate is generally below 2%. So they figured, absolute worst-case scenario, the foreclosure rate might go to 8 or 10 or even 12%. But the problem with that is that there were all these new kinds of mortgages given out to people who never would have gotten them before. So the historical data was irrelevant. Some mortgage pools today are expected to go beyond 50% foreclosure rates.” See “Return to the Giant Pool of Money,” WBEZ This American Life and Planet Money: September 25, 2009 (radio transcript).

    For a more sophisticated account of how the credit ratings agencies and other financial actors in the housing bubble used models to create a “fiction” about the market that ‘induces only an illusion of understanding,’ see Pénet and Mallard, p. 7.

    19. If, as Ann Douglas writes, “sentimentalism might be defined as the political sense obfuscated or gone rancid,” then each tear-jerking episode of Extreme Home Makeover was sentimentalism extraordinaire. “Sentimentalism, unlike the modes of genuine sensibility, never exists except in tandem with failed political consciousness” (254).

    20. The quotes from an unnamed casting producer, and some other information about Extreme Makeover Home Edition, come from interviews I conducted on 15 and 16 September, 2012 with production staff. Besides Anthony Dominici, these producers must remain anonymous because of the binding Non-Disclosure Agreements they signed with Endemol.

    21. See Wotapka, 2011, and interview with Anthony Dominici. Also, the TV show couldn’t protect families from unforeseen medical bills, especially not when it explicitly sought families facing difficult medical problems. See The Smoking Gun’s 2006 “creepy wishlist of woe.” ABC asked for victims of hate crimes, violent home invasions, families coping with the loss of a child killed by a drunk driver, people coping with from Lou Gehrig’s disease, muscular dystrophy or Down Syndrome, a child with a congenital insensitivity to pain, and hopefully someone with Progeria, “aka little old man disease” (Smoking Gun).

    22. This is my own tally, using the Journal’s numbers, and combined with numbers that producers of the show gave me.

    23. Anonymous interview.

    24. Reality television “relishes contradictions” such as this, “for all of its emphasis on ‘being real’, participants nonetheless perform themselves in spectacular ways; for all of the language of ordinariness, participants are consistently positioned as extraordinary” (Kavka 179).

    25. Home improvement shows were exemplary of a larger trend within reality television that links access and audience participation to the authentic (Deery), and home improvement TV resembles Bourdieu’s description of real estate advertisements, which don’t feel like ads to their audiences because of the “mythopoetic” cultural investment in the symbols and words surrounding home. Home promises special access to near-sacred, intimate space (Bourdieu 24).

    26. Facing shrinking television audiences and increased audience use of DVR technology to skip over commercial breaks, producers had come to depend on Reality’s relatively high profit margins and its innovations in product placement (Gutnik). Product placement contracts reached $3.7 billion in the U.S. in 2008 (Williams, 4).

    27. In 2009, Endemol had two of the top ten shows, ranked by dollar amount of integrated marketing. In 2009 the company purchased a Spanish technology start-up to help retroactively and dynamically incorporate products into content online (to tailor the brand of soft drink that a character holds, dynamically, in online videos) (PR Newswire).

    28. Home Depot and Lowe’s, two major home improvement businesses, both made major product placement and exclusive integration deals with Trading Spaces, the original break-out home improvement reality hit on TLC, which also starred Ty Pennington, the host of Extreme.

    29. The design team on Extreme visited Sears on air; workers from Sears were featured delivering products to the home; Sears featured products from the show on their website (Elliott).

    30. When a BusinessWeek blogger called Extreme Home Makeover the “best example of appropriate product placement on the air today” in 2005 (Kiley), he referred to fact that there seemed to be no audience resistance to it. The 2012 “Neighborhood Watch” episode of This American Life features a mother who cites “move that bus” as the national ideal of community involvement.

    31. The pep rallies didn’t air as part of the show, but can be viewed online. See for example the rally at Grace Church in McKean Township on June 19, uploaded to YouTube on June 23, 2009.

    32. Audience engagement mimics democratic practices in participatory formats like the call-in voting and text-in campaigns that determine American Idol’s winning singer, part of a “neoliberal rhetoric that erases the distinction between consumer and citizen” (Nightingale). Extreme Home Makeover created the consumer citizen subject in a peculiarly intense way.

    33. The home improvement shows instantiate the prize that gives purpose and meaning to a supposedly fair playing field, as opposed to dramatizing a fair and glorious meritocracy as on competition shows, like The Apprentice or Joe Schmo (Shields 105).

    34. In an old “Key to the Vault” brochure, distributed at 33 Liberty Street in Manhattan, the Fed writes: “people are still intrigued by the power, mystery and brilliance” associated with gold. Quoting Charles de Gaulle, it calls gold “eternally and universally accepted as the unalterable fiduciary value par excellence.”

    35. Anonymous interviews, and Anthony Dominici interview. It’s important to note that I believe the designers, as with all of the producers, were well-intentioned.

    36. These rooms also express the desires of people who are perceived as transcendentally innocent and outside of the demands of the market economy. For sentimental constructions of the child, for example, see Steedman.

    37. Modern design has a complex relationship with masculinity, but simply put, midcentury modern architecture and design is coded as more masculine and tends to be introduced at the top of the market. See Leslie and Reimer.

    38. Hoarders’s third season debut became the network’s most-watched season premiere in 2010 (A&E website). The man who created Flip This House also went on to create Storage Wars, another extremely popular A&E show I mention below. Collection Intervention debuted on Syfy in August of 2012. The less psychologically-minded Clean House was on Style Network from 2003–2011, but was never as popular, and Hoarders and Hoarding: Buried Alive were widely discussed as break-out, surprise hits.

    39. See Hines and HousingWire.

    40. Outside of domesticity, whiteness can itself be theorized as a form of property, as Cheryl Harris famously argues, which “enshrines the status quo as a neutral baseline” (Harris 107), and as such a neutral, is inherently more liquid.

    41. British critic Gareth Palmer argues that lifestyle television “essentializes class differences by vilifying those who fail to make it” (Palmer 5). But Hoarders notably never punished those who failed to liquidate and redecorate. The cameras simply cut away.

    42. Backstage.com casting call, expired June 15, 2016. https://www.backstage.com/casting/gig-economy-worker-docu-series-117847/.

    Works Cited

    • Asabere, Paul. “Architecture, Historic Zoning and the Value of Homes.” Journal of Real Estate Finance and Economics 2 (1989), pp. 181–195.
    • Banet-Weiser, Sarah. “Girls and Self-Esteem.” Unpublished chapter, 2014. Bourdieu, Pierre. The Social Structures of the Economy. Translated by Chris Turner, Polity Press, 2005.
    • Chakravartty, Paula and Denise Ferreira da Silva. “Accumulation, Dispossession, and Debt: The Racial Logic of Global Capitalism—An Introduction.” American Quarterly 64.3 (Sept. 2012), pp. 361–385.
    • Cooper, Melinda, and Martijn Konings. “Contingency and Foundation: Rethinking Money, Debt, and Finance after the Crisis.” South Atlantic Quarterly 114.2 (2015), pp. 239–250.
    • Davidson, Sean. “Flynn Flies to Cineflix.” C21 Media press release. Web. De Brunhoff, Suzanne. Marx on Money. Translated by Maurice J. Goldbloom, Urzen Books, 1973.
    • Deery, June. “Reality TV as Advertainment.” Popular Communication: The International Journal of Media and Culture 2.1 (2004), pp. 1–20.
    • Dominici, Anthony. Interview with author, 6 Sept. 2012. Elliott, Stuart. “On ABC, Sears Pays to Be Star Of New Series.” The New York Times: Business Day, 3 Dec. 2003.
    • Everett, Anna. “Trading Private and Public Spaces @ HGTV and TLC: On New Genre Formations in Transformation TV.” Journal of Visual Culture, vol. 3, iss. 2, 1 Aug. 2004, 157–181. https://doi-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1177/1470412904044798
    • Fraser, Nancy. “The End of Progressive Neoliberalism.” Dissent, Dissentmagazine.org, Jan. 2, 2017. https://www.dissentmagazine.org/online_articles/progressive-neoliberalism-reactionary-populism-nancy-fraser. Accessed 26 Jan. 2018. Fusco, Coco. The Bodies That Were Not Ours, and Other Writings. Routledge, 2001.
    • Graeber, David. “Give It Away.” The Anarchist Library, 2008. https://theanarchistlibrary.org/library/david-graeber-give-it-away, accessed 26 Jan. 2018. Greif, Mark. “The Reality of Reality Television.” n+1 magazine 3 (Fall 2005), https://nplusonemag.com/issue-3/reviews/reality-reality-television/, Accessed 26 Jan. 2018.
    • Grindstaff, Laura. The Money Shot: trash, class and the making of TV talk shows. U of Chicago P, 2002.
    • Gutnik, Lilia and Tom Huang, Jill Blue Lin, Ted Schmidt. “New Trends in Product Placement.” Strategic Computing and Communications Technology. White Paper, Spring 2007.
    • Hannah-Jones, Nikole. “Living Apart: How the Government Betrayed a Landmark Civil Rights Law.” ProPublica, Kindle Edition, 2012.
    • Harvey, David. The Enigma of Capital: and the crises of capitalism. Oxford UP, 2010.
    • ———. Rebel Cities: From the Right to the City to the Urban Revolution. Verso, 2012.
    • Hines, Ree. “A&E throws out ‘Hoarders’ after six seasons.” Today.com: Entertainment, September 26, 2013. Accessed 14 Jan. 2014. HousingWire.com, “The foreclosure crisis reaches its silent end.” ABCnews.com. September 13, 2013. Accessed 14 Jan. 2014. http://abcnews.go.com/blogs/business/2013/09/foreclosure-crisis-fading-fast/ Ives, Nat. “Reinvented Better Homes Sates Idea-Hungry Readers.” Advertising Age, 29 Oct. 2007.
    • Jacobson, Kristin J. “Renovating the American Woman’s Home: American Domesticity in Extreme Makeover: Home Edition.” Legacy vol. 25, iss. 1, pp. 105–116.
    • Jones, Jamie L. “Dwell, designing for how we live.” Medialife Magazine, 11 Sept. 2001.
    • Katz, Alyssa. Our lot: How real estate came to own us. Bloomsbury Publishing USA, 2009.
    • Kiley, David. “Extreme Makeover: A Product Placement Dream.” BusinessWeek Bloomberg, 7 Apr. 2005.
    • Konings, Martijn. The Emotional Logic of Capitalism: What Progressives Have Missed, Stanford UP, 2015.
    • Leslie, Deborah and Suzanne Reimer. “Gender, modern design, and home consumption.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space, June 2003, 21.3, pp. 293–316. https://doi-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1068/d337
    • Levy, Dan. “N.Y. area leads rise in foreclosure filings.” Bloomberg.com, 25 Oct. 2012. Accessed 14 Feb. 2014. ———. “U.S. Homeowners Lost $5.9 Trillion Since 2006 Peak (Update1).” Bloomberg.com, 9 Dec. 2009. Accessed 14 Jan. 2014.
    • Marx, Tracey. “Extreme Kids Rooms, Why do parents do it?” ABCnews.com 17 May 2011. Accessed 14 Jan. 2014.
    • McCarthy, Anna. “Reality television: A neoliberal theater of suffering.” Social Text 25.4 (2007), p. 17.
    • McClanahan, Annie. “Bad Credit.” Representations,126.1 (Spring 2014), pp. 31–57. https://doi-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1525/rep.2014.126.1.31
    • McMurria, John. “Desperate Citizens and Good Samaritans Neoliberalism and Makeover Reality TV.” Television & New Media 9.4 (2008), pp. 305–332. https://doi-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1177/1527476408315115
    • Mirowski, Philip. Never let a serious crisis go to waste: How neoliberalism survived the financial meltdown. Verso Books, 2013.
    • ———, and Edward Nik-Khah. “Private intellectuals and public perplexity: The economics profession and the economic crisis.” History of Political Economy 45 (suppl 1), Dec. 2013, pp. 279–311. https://doi-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1215/00182702-2311025
    • Munro, Neil. “With landmark lawsuit, Barack Obama pushed banks to give subprime loans to Chicago’s African-Americans.” Daily Caller, 3 Sept. 2012, http://dailycaller.com/2012/09/03/with-landmark-lawsuit-barack-obama-pushed-banks-to-give-subprime-loans-to-chicagos-african-americans/#ixzz2qycNJHNc. Accessed 23 Sept. 2016.
    • Nightingale, Virginia and Tim Dwyer. “The audience politics of enhanced television formats.” International Journal of Media & Cultural Politics 2.1 (1 Jan. 2006), pp. 25–42. http://dx.doi.org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/10.1386/macp.2.1.25/1
    • Ouellette, Laurie. “Do Good TV” Flow, February 24, 2006, http://www.flowjournal.org/2006/02/do-good-tv/. Accessed 3 Feb. 2018.
    • ———, “Take Responsibility For Yourself,’ Judge Judy and the Neoliberal Subject,” in Susan Murray and Laurie Ouellette, eds. Reality TV: Remaking television culture. NYU Press, 2004.
    • ———, and James Hay. “Makeover television, governmentality and the good citizen.” Continuum: Journal of Media & Cultural Studies 22.4 (2008), pp. 471–484.
    • Palmer, Gareth. Exposing Lifestyle Television: The Big Reveal. Ashgate Publishing Company, 2008.
    • Pénet, Pierre, and Grégoire Mallard. “From Risk Models to Loan Contracts: Austerity as the Continuation of Calculation by Other Means.” Journal of Critical Globalisation Studies 7 (2014), pp. 4–47.
    • PR Newswire Europe. “Endemol Extends Global Embedded Advertising Footprint With MirriAd.” 30 Mar. 2009. Sacks, Dan. “ABC cancels ‘Extreme Makeover: Home Edition’” New York Daily News, December 16, 2011. Accessed 14 Jan. 2014.
    • Sellers, John. “‘Storage Wars’ Is Officially The Most Popular Series in A&E History.” The Wrap.com, July 21, 2011. Accessed 10 Feb. 2018.
    • Shields, David. Reality Hunger: A Manifesto. Vintage Books, 2010.
    • Skullduggery. Blog post, http://skullduggerybook.blogspot.com, accessed 28 Sept. 2012. Smoking Gun. “ABC’s ‘Extreme’ Exploitation: Makeover show loves sick kids, cancer patients, hate crime victims.” 27 Mar. 2006. http://www.thesmokinggun.com/documents/crime/abcs-extreme-exploitation
    • Steedman, Carolyn. Strange Dislocations: Childhood and the Idea of Human Interiority, Harvard UP, 1995.
    • Stein, Sadie. “The Nasty Aftermath of Extreme Home Makeover.” Jezebel, 7 Apr. 2010, http://jezebel.com/5511680/the-nasty-aftermath-of-extreme-home-makeover. Accessed Feb. 2012.
    • Wasko, Janet. A companion to television. John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
    • Williams, Kaylene, Alfred Petrosky, Edward Hernandez, and Robert Page Jr. “Product placement effectiveness: revisited and renewed.” Journal of Management and Marketing research 7 (2011): 1–24.
    • Wotapka, Dawn. “‘Extreme Makeover’ Undone by the Market.” The Wall Street Journal: Developments Blog. Accessed 22 Dec. 2011.
  • Between Empathy and Imagination: New Photographic Experiments in Memorial Aesthetics in Too Hard to Keep and The Birmingham Project

    Alexander Hirsch (bio)
    University of Alaska Fairbanks

    The artist Jason Lazarus collects and displays photographs deemed “too hard to keep.” This essay contrasts Lazarus’s exhibitions with Dawoud Bey’s Birmingham Project, which commemorates the 1963 bombing of a Baptist Church in Alabama by exhibiting photographs of present-day residents of Birmingham. What contributions do these photo projects make as responses to loss? Despite their differences, both exhibitions build miraculous connections between strangers through powerful exercises in imagination. In the end, Too Hard to Keep and the Birmingham Project represent experiments in memorial aesthetics that occupy the productive tension between empathy and critical detachment.

    Since 2010, artist Jason Lazarus has been collecting and exhibiting photographs deemed by their owners “too hard to keep” (Habe-Evans). Lazarus solicits the images from anonymous strangers who mail him candid portraits, photographs of pets, landscapes, sunsets, empty rooms, and quotidian scenes. The growing archive of images contributes to what he calls a “repository of photographs, photo-objects, and digital files [that are] too painful to live with any longer” (Habe-Evans). Though apparently unintended as public art at the time they were taken, the photos are framed as such once collected, curated, and exhibited in gallery spaces. The exhibitions summon into a public domain the private pain of individuals; by doing so, they reflect a mise-en-scène of grief that builds a felicitous connection between strangers. This is a public receptacle for excessive affect, a place where we can deposit material objects charged with the aura of a feeling that is, as Lazarus writes, “too difficult to hold on to, but too meaningful to destroy” (Lavalette). Here we have an artist who resurrects and archives lost or somehow “dead” subjects and whose namesake, Lazarus, ironically recalls a biblical figure famous for coming back from the dead.

    It’s a brilliant project. To start, the exhibitions invite spectators in the gallery to reflect upon the nature of their own most difficult memories by engaging those of the photos’ former owners. What especially distinguishes Too Hard to Keep (hereafter THTK) is the way it showcases painful traces of loss and brokenness that exist in a suspended space of can’t-live-with / can’t-live-without. By contrast to the recent “Right to be Forgotten” movement that has sought to establish a universal right to have the vestiges of one’s internet presence erased, THTK focuses on emblems of unbearability too valuable to erase.1 The THTK archive is flush with photographs that index such loss. THTK also calls attention to the impasses faced by those who inhabit an aftermath where it is not only loss that is at stake, but also the loss of loss itself. Lazarus requires that the owners of photographs “truly part” with the images they donate to his project. He accepts digital copies only on condition that other digital copies be deleted: “If you’re going to part with it – part with it. Then what you’re seeing has traction. . . . It is the remnant of the decision to relinquish the image from their archive into a public archive” (Habe-Evans). In any case, the images that make up the archive are tokens of suffering and grief that must be preserved in some way, even if they are abandoned by their former owners.2

    Here, I contrast THTK with Dawoud Bey’s Birmingham Project (hereafter Birmingham), another recent photographic exhibition (2012–2013) that experiments with mediating and responding to loss in provocative, generative ways. Birmingham commemorates the fiftieth anniversary of the 1963 bombing of the 16th Street Baptist Church in Birmingham, Alabama – a flash point for the Civil Rights Movement – and memorializes the lives of the six African-American children who died, including four girls who died in the blast, and two boys who were killed in related incidents.3 Bey photographed present-day residents of Birmingham, half of whom are the same ages as the 1963 bombing victims (eleven, thirteen, fourteen, and sixteen), and half who are the age that the victims would have been had they survived the attack (sixty-five, sixty-seven, sixty-eight, and seventy, respectively). The exhibition features the portraits side by side, as a series of diptychs juxtaposing images that picture what the victims might have looked like at the time of their deaths with what they could look like today, had their lives not been tragically lost. The result is an arresting photographic exercise that illuminates the haunting echo not only of lives lost, but of the unrealized futures erased by the bombing.

    This essay reflects on the way THTK and Birmingham converts spectators in the gallery into belated witnesses, albeit in different ways. Witnessing is often described as a mode of observation whereby a bystander beholds an event and then later bears testimony to the truth of this experience. But with Lazarus’s project, spectators cannot see what precipitated loss. The photo submissions are received anonymously and without explanation; the images, when exhibited, are displayed without reference or description.4 The viewer cannot help but imagine what makes this wide-angle landscape too hard to keep, or what renders that polaroid portrait too painful to live with. The result is that the art nearly becomes the story that viewers tell about what happened. Spectators in the gallery recognize, of course, that the story they tell cannot possibly encompass the true history behind the images, even if some pictures invite more or less accurate educated guesses. Whatever the distance between fiction and reality, spectators’ stories reflect the irrepressible desire to craft narrative for an unsettling, perplexing photographic object.

    Birmingham also makes belated witnesses out of gallery spectators, who become third person observers party to loss and harm decades after the event it occasioned. Like THTK, Birmingham presents photographs in which the truth is somehow veiled, given that the portraits exhibit images of people who are not the true subjects of the photographs. Despite this similarity, Birmingham inverts THTK. With the latter, spectators often cannot quite identify the cause of unbearable loss, and this prompts an imagining that completes the exhibition. With the former, however, spectators already know the cause of loss, which is stated in the very title of the project, even if they cannot track the effect – the lost potential that attends the unrealized future lives of the bombing victims – which they must imagine by peering at photographic surrogates. THTK and Birmingham both cultivate a memorial aesthetics that hones the presence of an absence. But where the enigmatic past is what matters for THTK, with Birmingham what matters is the unfathomable future that was, for six children, violently obliterated.

    The question is, what contributions do these photo projects make as responses to loss? At a time when protests over commemorative statues memorializing Confederate officials have reached a fever pitch, and when debates over the lasting power of Emmett Till’s photographic image raise such pressing concerns over the role of art in the course of public mourning, the stakes of our responses to the question remain high.5 The goal of THTK and Birmingham is manifestly not to bring about forgiveness, because the images do not establish a space for victims to engage with perpetrators, let alone release agents of harm from their burden of guilt. And neither project preoccupies itself with reparative justice, vengeance, punishment, or other forms of redressing past pain by focusing on what perpetrators of loss and brokenness presently owe. Finally, though THTK and Birmingham resist the urge of forgetfulness, and by their very nature reject the cathartic release associated with amor fati, they equally eschew infinite despair and melancholic fixation. THTK urges subjects of loss neither to let go nor to remain attached to their loss, even as it provides a means by which the photographs connected to loss may themselves be lost. Rather, THTK encourages such subjects to forfeit their emblem of too-muchness to a tardy tragic chorus that may not be able to fix what has been broken, but can bear witness to the trace that remains. Birmingham too elicits a chorus of late witnesses who are confronted by the undeniable exhortation to conceive the lives of the departed, even if this remains an impossible demand for spectators who cannot see the victims, or their lost futures.

    What follows is split into three sections. In the first, I review some of the archetypal images from the THTK archive, focusing in particular on the way they encourage an audience of strangers to envision the lives of others in a manner that establishes grounds for the emergence of an uncanny affinity. To look at Lazarus’s THTK images is to view something deeply personal about the lives of the photos’ former owners, and this immanent contact brings about an intimacy that takes shape around a shared imaginable that synchronizes being in meaningful ways. But this intimate contact is betrayed by the fact that viewers cannot perceive what the intimacy is all about because its determining source remains crucially hidden for spectators. In the second section, I review a number of images from the Birmingham exhibition. Bey’s photographs bring the world of the victims into the space of the spectator, thus forging a more immediate contact between the two.6 And yet, the photos feature images of models who are analogues for victims, the true images of whom remain undisclosed, thus witnesses behold a world that is ultimately beyond their ken. In the end, I argue, both photo projects represent photographic experiments that occupy the productive tension between empathic unsettlement and critical detachment. Remarkably, THTK manages to induce intimacy by preventing the mutual understanding required for conventional empathy; Birmingham engenders intimacy by obstructing our view of victims and their fugitive futures. Whatever their important differences, both art projects draw on and make use of distance, the expanse dividing and separating people, as a necessary condition of possibility for ethical engagement. As such, THTK and Birmingham cultivate a memorial aesthetics that builds miraculous connections between strangers through powerful exercises in imagination, the operative idiom for reckoning with afterness.7

    1

    “Where the painter constructs,” Susan Sontag writes in On Photography, “the photographer discloses” (135). In part, this distinction between artistic construction and disclosure relies on the assumption that where a painting visually includes the intentions of the artist, in a photograph one sees what is to be seen whatever the photographer’s intentions. Kendall Walton underscores this point when he writes that “Photographs are counterfactually dependent on the photographed scene even if the beliefs (and other intentional attitudes) of the photographer are fixed” (264). This is why, Walton argues, photographs can serve as evidence when paintings cannot.8 Following this logic, Walter Benn Michaels points out that

    I can hardly, say, accuse you of stealing my wallet and then offer as proof a little watercolor I’ve just made of you sneaking into my room. The watercolor would count more as a repetition of the accusation than as evidence of its truth, precisely because the referent — your entering my room — would be optional rather than necessary. . . . The photograph necessarily shows what was in front of the camera; the painting shows what was in front of the canvas only optionally — and the option is the painter’s. (12)

    The argument has been taken for granted in photography theory for decades. But with THTK, though the photographs serve as evidence, it is not evidence that reveals truth. In addition to documenting an event, the pictures also gesture toward its unbearable impact. Roland Barthes famously argued that a photograph is “in no way a presence . . . its reality is that of the having-been-there” (44). With THTK, by contrast, spectators bear explicit witness to their own having not been there. Indeed, from the perspective of the archive, what precipitates loss remains concealed. What counts is that the photograph is the relic of a memory that is too hard to keep.

    One of the photos from the archive (Fig. 1), in black and white, shows a crowd of a dozen or so friends posing for a group shot. They are in a park at night, or perhaps they are camping. Most are smiling, though not everyone appears to be ready to pose for the shot. In the back row, one man is sitting on another man’s shoulders, dragging on a cigarette. In the foreground a dog is climbing into a woman’s lap. Judging from the haircuts and attire, the image may have been taken in the early 1970s which, remarkably, means the former owner must have held onto the photograph for at least forty years. Everything in the photograph appears unremarkable but for the lower righthand corner, where one of the persons originally pictured has had their shape crassly cut out with a razor. The effect is disquieting. In an effort to censor a portion of the photograph, it appears the photo’s former owner has attempted to purge the image of someone, presumably the source of some wounding. But, tragically, as with all cases of censorship, the eye is drawn to what is repressed. Hardly spirited away, the entire photograph is about the erasure and, by extension, about the person who is no longer there but whose trace continues to haunt the image as the presence of an absence.

    Fig. 1. Jason Lazarus, THTK (2010-Present). Used by permission.

    Another photo (Fig. 2) pictures the imprint of a woman lying in bed. She is wrapped up, smothered in a white patterned duvet. Concealed beneath the cover, she appears ghost-like, and this metaphor underscores her spectral position as someone connected to a too-hard-to-keep memory that must be jettisoned, if also distributed and shared. The image faintly recalls Rene Magritte’s “The Lovers” (1928), a painting that famously portrays the frustrated desires of two lovers entangled, both veiled by a cloak of pale fabric. Asked once about the meaning of the painting, Magritte replied, in a surrealist mood, that “It does not mean anything, because mystery means nothing either, it is unknowable” (87). Of course, in the case of the image from THTK, even if the details concerning the source of loss remain unknowable for spectators, we understand that the photo must mean something to someone, because the former owner has surrendered it to an archive that indexes vital sources of undeadness. In this sense one could argue that Lazarus’s phrasing of “too hard to keep, but too meaningful to destroy,” might be somewhat misleading. The “but” is too quick. It might be that some of these pictures are too meaningful to destroy precisely because they are too hard to keep. One must jettison the relic of a memory if it symbolizes a source of grief that is overwhelming enough; but precisely because that grief is so overwhelming one must take care not to obliterate its artifact, for doing so may threaten a site of vivified meaning. As one critic recently put it, “A photograph is the umbilical cord connecting us to what we have loved and lost, to what is gone because we failed to save it, or to what might have been, but now will never be” (Silverman 3–4).

    Fig. 2. Jason Lazarus, THTK (2010-Present). Used by permission.

    Not all of the THTK photographs demonstrate instances of loss that are exclusively centered on people. One image (Fig. 3) frames a dark and ominous sky viewed through a car’s front window shield. A storm appears to be gathering, and leaves are blowing about a dirt road lined with trees that are swaying in the gale. In the distance, across a field, one can almost make out the silhouette of a residence. On either side of the road we see an old chain-link fence guarding a lawn, which has been faintly tire-marked by vehicles trailing an ad hoc driveway. The scene is charged with the dragging undertow of an unnerving feeling. Peering out from the vehicle’s interior underscores a sense of shelter: the car as haven from the storm. And yet this feeling of safety is belied by the disturbing knowledge that this place is somehow the enigmatic sign of a memory deemed too hard to keep.

    Fig. 3. Jason Lazarus, THTK (2010-Present). Used by permission.

    There is another photograph (Fig. 4) that speaks to the ways in which places can be vested with what Raymond Williams once called a “structure of feeling,” actively-felt meanings and changes of presence that exert palpable pressures, even if they cannot be defined or otherwise easily classified (132–133). The image is of an old hatchback, parked underground in a garage. A beam of light is streaming through a clearing above a ramp that leads outside, casting the dark concrete bunker into relief. The light carries the faint green hue of flora from outside, illuminating streaks marring the walls and contrasting the cool concrete with warm light, death with life. As with the photograph of the gathering storm, one cannot help but sense the loneliness, dread, and yearning that coalesce as the photo’s gestalt.

    Fig. 4. Jason Lazarus, THTK (2010-Present). Used by permission.

    As gallery visitors viewing THTK, spectators are cast as witnesses who cannot be sworn because they cannot offer testimony of an event that remains crucially out of view. Peering into the photographs on display means coming to terms with the fact that although the spectators know the photographs are tokens of unbearability, more often than not, they cannot understand why. Rather than focus on delivering an empirically accurate portrayal of what they observe, spectators in the gallery are instead acutely aware that their testimony will be largely invented. The emphasis lies with the fantasy of what might have been, and with the stories that spectators tell about this imaginable past. Great art, Theodor Adorno once wrote, depicts something that we do not and cannot know. In light of THTK, he might have added that, in part, what makes such art resonant is that its audience must try, and generatively fail, to come to terms with it through storytelling. As such, THTK can be understood in terms of what Charles Altieri has recently argued regarding the goal of art generally:

    Rather than describe or represent phenomena, the primary task of art is to ‘realize’ states of being by eliciting what power these states can offer for the sensibilities that engage them. So making must take priority over interpreting, and the concern for what can be willed as engaged inspiration for conditions of making replaces the concern for how willing might be justified by knowing. The primary question for art . . . becomes not whether a statement is true but whether the energies of its making can be exemplary and can specify domains where particular stances become valuable for what they bring to the world.(20)

    For Altieri, in other words, the “primary task” of art is not to explain the truth of something, or otherwise decant experience through representation. Rather, its objective is to evoke meaningful “states of being” that are tied to the energetics of its making. Following this line of thought, we might say that the primary objective of Lazarus’s curated photographs is to elicit powerful states of being. One cannot tell what happened in that place on that stormy day, or otherwise explain why the woman wrapped in a blanket represents a source of intensely felt loss. The focus is placed instead on the values these images conjure up, and what dispositions of imagination they make possible. In part, the meaningful dispositions summoned up by the images stems from the uncanny bond they facilitate between former owners and spectators in the gallery. Though a closeness forms between the two, former owners and gallery visitors never actually meet; they remain strangers for one another, and what brings the spectators to the former owners remains nonetheless distancing.

    Conventional models of intimacy tend to stress the vital role played by recognition, reciprocity, empathy, shared space, contact, or promising as vehicles by which intimacy is sacralized. In this sense, intimacy is often articulated either as a coming to know and affirm who the other authentically is, or as a form of giving and getting, where what is exchanged is equitably distributed. With THTK, however, there is not enough mutual understanding for recognition to take place. And the intimacy generated by the photographs is not facilitated by reciprocal exchange either, because former owners surrender the photographs without receiving anything directly in return from spectators. Similarly, the intimacy marshaled by THTK is not a product of promising. Where promises guarantee what will be, spectators of THTK come to embrace another grammatical mood associated with what might have happened. In this way, ironically, spectators end up promising not to promise, because they occupy a register of attention, encounter, and relation that prevents them from being able to accurately predict the past. The intimacy struck in the THTK gallery is not the outcome of empathy either, if empathy can be defined as a tenderness toward the suffering of the other when one recognizes that one has personally experienced this pain before. Empathy nurtures a shared horizon of understanding that is ultimately embedded in a personal memory.9 With THTK, however, spectators cannot develop empathy for the photograph owners, because it is unclear what their loss represents, or from where it derives. Though they may feel compassion in a generic way, it is uncertain whether viewers in the gallery can connect empathically with former owners. Part of what makes THTK so effective is that a touchstone of intimacy is established precisely by this frustrating inability to empathize.10 A bond of intimate alliance takes shape around an animating condition of sudden unsettlement. Because they are unable to describe a source of loss for victims, spectators are released from the pressure to bear testimony to it. Instead, they are placed in a position where, because they cannot know, they must imagine. In imagining, spectators foster a connection with former owners by virtue of what is meaningfully possible even if — or precisely because — it is likely not true. As such, with THTK, it is not inherent likenesses that establish a precondition for intimacy. As with other forms of relationality, this one coheres around a public object — in this case, a photograph — but that object is not like a social contract or birthright, concepts that both name what is guaranteed for members of a group. Instead, this affinity is brought about by what is ultimately uncertain, and it is exercised through an invitation to envision who the other is, and imagine what has happened to them.11

    2

    Until they yielded their pictures to THTK, the former owners likely never intended them to be displayed in public. The photographs that make up Birmingham were, however, always intended as public art. They are exquisitely polished, expertly crafted artifacts. This difference in intention changes the effect. In the THTK gallery, spectators and former owners experience an intimate (albeit asymmetrical) bond, not only because of the sympathy viewers may feel for all victims of suffering, but also because of the candid quality of the photographs. Precisely because we were never meant to see these representations of loss – they contain what Walter Benjamin once called the spark of “contingency” or accident (510) – spectators may be tempted to feel that they are somehow more “authentic.”12 The photos are raw, unfiltered, and candid, and spectators thus trust them more. The Birmingham images are different. They are carefully cultivated, focused, and professionally edited. There is intentionality behind these images, so that when spectators view the pictures they identify as an expected audience. Recognizing this fact potentially threatens trust between the photographer and the viewer, because the viewer knows the images are deliberately staged to solicit a specific response, which engenders the paranoid feeling that one is being manipulated. This distrust is elevated by the fact that, in the galleries, viewers cannot see the victims who are promised as the true subjects of the photographic memorial. Despite this distrust – or rather perhaps because of it – Birmingham appeals to a complex form of affinity. Because spectators view portraits of models who are substitutes for the true subjects of the photos, they must think analogically about the victims of the bombing. Doing so prompts viewers to imagine who the victims actually were, given that their images are conspicuously absent from the gallery. Whereas THTK establishes touchstones of intimacy by providing windows into worlds of loss that spectators were never meant to behold, Birmingham galvanizes affinity through carefully staged images of models playing victims.13

    In contrast to THTK, which focuses on animating perplexity around the question of what happened, Birmingham connects spectators in the gallery to what has been lost but assumes they will understand what transpired in the past. The victims of the 1963 Birmingham bombing – Addie Mae Collins, Denise McNair, Carole Robertson, and Cynthia Wesley, along with Virgil Ware and Johnny Robinson, who lost their lives as a result of the violence that followed the bombing – are memorialized by Bey’s sixteen photographic diptychs. Like THTK’s, Birmingham’s objective is not to bring about forgiveness or stoke abiding resentments, but Birmingham departs from THTK because the victims of loss have died, and so cannot dedicate a mysterious icon of loss to a public archive. The victims are gone, and with them their lost futures. By definition, these futures remain open to a contingent field of endless possibility – anything might have happened for these children, but this potentiality has been cut off by the bombing’s destructive, violent force. Bey’s photographs memorialize the loss brought about by the bombings, but do so indirectly, because the photos picture people who are not accurately reflect the victims. This itself might be read as violent, because those who were erased by the bombing are made absent again by images that exclude their appearance. In this case, however, Bey uses the technique of erasure to draw attention to what is so profoundly tragic about violence.

    In “Mary Parker and Caela Cowan” (2014), two 40” × 64” pigment prints mounted on dibond sit side by side. The images are rendered in stark black and white, referencing both the thematic racial undertow and a connection to the historical time frame of the 1960s. On the left sits Mary Parker, who appears to be around sixty-two years old, the age the twelve-year old victims of the Birmingham bombing would have been had they survived. She is leaning comfortably over a pew, five rows from the back of a church. Her face is in focus, and her gaze, framed by a pair of spectacles, is fixed squarely on the camera. As Bey explains, “part of the process in The Birmingham Project involved constructing the circumstances by and through which his sitters could reassert their rights to the gaze” (Platt 15). For Bey, even if they cannot reclaim total agency, part of the goal of memorialization is to empower victims such that they too can look, and look back at those who see them. The irony, of course, is that the images do not feature portraits of victims, but rather substitute models playing victims. On the right hangs a portrait of Caela Cowan, a twelve-year old surrogate for Collins or McNair, perhaps. Cowan is seated in roughly the same position, and in what appears to be the same church as Parker. Though her gaze is also trained on the camera, the expression on her face is more imposing, perhaps more accusing. Her gaze is sharper than Parker’s, which is more resigned by contrast. One notices also that where Parker is posed in three-quarter view, a casual posture, Cowan sits square to the camera, shoulders hunched, engaged. Compositionally, both Parker and Cowan encounter the viewer directly, but Cowan’s body language introduces greater tension.

    The same tension can be found in “Braxton McKinney and Lavon Thomas” (2014). The diptych features McKinney — who represents Virgil Ware, perhaps, or Johnny Robinson — on the left, and Thomas on the right. Where McKinney’s right arm is draped over the pew, Thomas’s left dips in front, giving the impression that the two are mirror reflections of one another. As with “Mary Parker and Caela Cowan,” the younger model’s facial expression conveys scorn, even as the older model’s gaze suggests something more tender. This tension is key to the mode of memorialization that Bey’s photo project presents, which aims not only to stimulate remembrance of a past event, but also to attune viewers to the particularity of the victims of that event, and to their irreplaceable value.

    A third pair of photographs, “Taylor Falls and Deborah Hackworth” (2012), displays models seated in another area of the church. A mural, or perhaps an ornate spread, adorns the backdrop. Though out of focus, the pattern of the backcloth on each side of the diptych coalesces above the shoulder of each model; swirling, climbing, reaching, almost touching at either side of the model, serving as a bridge across time, connecting the younger and the older iteration of each surrogate. Rather than leaning in over the pew, which simultaneously positions them as encroaching upon yet also barricaded against the viewer, the models in this photograph are sitting upright. Notably, the models are seated in chairs whose rigid armature recalls prison bars, though it is unclear whether the furniture’s cage symbolically protects or confines (or both).

    By substituting the actual victims with images of proxy residents of Birmingham, Bey underscores the irreducibility of the individuals who were killed, and also draws attention to the utter disposability suffered by all victims of terrorist violence. What distinguishes terrorism, some scholars have argued, is that it includes the deliberate killing of innocent people, where the substitution of one victim for another does not significantly alter the objective of violence.14 Anyone will do, so long as the victim happens to fit generically into a broad identity category targeted for attack. In this way, terrorism violates what many deontologists refer to as the immutable, intrinsic value of individuals. By photographing proxy models, Bey highlights the way the Birmingham bombing reduced its victims to mere use-value, and simultaneously affirms how deeply brutalizing this was for them. By selecting surrogate models to pose as if they were the victims of the bombing, Bey uses displacement to establish the victims’ value, inducing intimacy with them. This is ironic, of course, given that intimacy is often understood as a quintessential function of proximity. Yet with Birmingham, as with THTK, intimacy is foregrounded through sundering. In the case of Birmingham, this is achieved through distancing, and the severing expanse interpolated between who is here (the models), and who should be (the victims).

    The images we view in the Birmingham collection are gathering places for the ghosts of the past, and also the ghosts of the victims’ futures, and in this way the photos convoke haunting. They are all the more haunting by virtue of the fact that these photographs feature phantasmagorias that serve as analogies. For the photography critic Kaja Silverman, all photographs are ultimately structures of analogy: “Photography is . . . an ontological calling card: it helps us to see that each of us is a node in a vast constellation of analogies” (11). We are “each of us” connected to one another through a vast interlocking similitude composed of relationships that we cannot extricate ourselves from: “analogy runs through everything that is like a shuttle through a loom” (Silverman 11). Coming to terms with this ontological fact is both relieving, in that the burden of solitude is leavened, but also threatening, in that our autonomy, agency, and primacy are radically called into question by our mutual reliance. “Photography,” Silverman argues, “is the vehicle through which these profoundly enabling but unwelcome relationships are revealed to us, and through which we learn to think analogically. It is able to disclose the world, show us that it is structured by analogy, and help us to assume our place within it because it, too, is analogical” (11). Such analogies do not collapse one into the other, or otherwise reduce difference to sameness; rather, they point both to similarity and difference: “Similarity is the connector, what holds two things together, and difference is what prevents them from being collapsed into one” (11). Through analogical thinking, for Silverman, we enter into a more responsible relationality with one another because we recognize the undercurrent of reciprocal entanglement that frames our being-together in the world.

    Birmingham invites spectators in the gallery to conceive the world in these analogical terms. Precisely because the models are not actual victims, spectators must engage the fact that they are viably who the victims could have been, but were not. The adults in the images represent what the victims could, but would not, have looked like. And in the very moment that they realize that these images do not truthfully reflect what the victims would have looked like, spectators must ask themselves who these victims might have become. The viewer is, in this sense, hailed by the distance between virtual and actual, between could have and would have. The effect is powerful. Unlike THTK, where the question to which viewers must imagine a response is what happened?, Birmingham’s question is who might these victims have become had they survived? Where the former induces intimacy by virtue of the frustrating inability to empathize, the latter attunes the viewer to a counter-factual: what might have happened had these bombs not destroyed these particular lives?

    3

    In the opening essay of On Photography, dedicated to the theme of the ethical response elicited by photographs of suffering, Susan Sontag describes the personal experience of being twelve years old and opening a book of Bergen-Belsen and Dachau photographs: “Nothing I have seen – in photographs or in real life – ever cut me as sharply, deeply, instantaneously.” What in particular left Sontag so grieved was the feeling of moral inadequacy: “They were only photographs – of an event I had scarcely heard of and could do nothing to affect, of suffering I could hardly imagine and could do nothing to relieve” (19–20). In Regarding the Pain of Others, Sontag would later describe this as the “unappeasable past,” indicative of the suffering we come to recognize only too late that results in a disabling sense of bearing an insufficient response. In his well-known essay “The Uses of Photography,” and later in “The Photographs of Agony,” John Berger echoes this sentiment. Reviewing images of the Vietnam War that were circulating in mass media at the time, Berger argues that pictures of suffering produce the dislocating feeling of being both sympathetic to another’s pain but simultaneously lacking the agency to alleviate it. As Deborah Nelson puts it in her reading of Berger,

    What the viewer experiences, then, from the shock of the photographs (we are ‘seized’ and ‘engulfed’ by suffering) is yet another shock, the shock of her own moral failure, which overrides – even suppresses – the suffering and violence depicted in the photograph. This produces, [Berger] says, either despair or a compensatory penance, like donation to a charity, but it does not produce political will. (109)

    In Berger’s terms, witnessing can become a form of moral trauma when agency is “vacated, incomplete, or incommensurate with the viewer’s moral dilemma” (qtd. in Nelson 109). This places the viewer in a position of losing their faculty for responsiveness and its attendant agency. Embedded within such photographs is an invitation to act, even if this appeal remains an impossible demand because — by virtue of their tragic moral irrelevance — there is nothing viewers can possibly do in response.15

    Remarkably, THTK bypasses such concerns. Though viewers of THTK may experience the pains of sympathy, and may also feel unable to respond to a condition of loss because they cannot know its origin or content, the sense of moral inadequacy is proportionately eroded. One may feel traumatized by one’s own lack of agency when viewing images of war or genocide because one recognizes the genre of suffering but cannot respond. But with THTK what precisely is lost, and what suffering was caused by this loss, remains clandestine. As a result, viewers are not subject to the same unassumable responsibility because they cannot even know what it would mean to issue an adequate response.16 To be in the THTK gallery is to inhabit a world of ambiguous causes, while entering the Birmingham gallery means engaging with inscrutable effects. In Birmingham, spectators are confronted by an undeniable imperative to conceive the lives of the departed. This indeed remains an unassumable responsibility for spectators who, after all, cannot engage directly with the victims or their unrealized futures. For Bey, this is precisely the point. Knowing they are bound by an epistemic limit –that they will never know for certain what the lost lives of the victims of the bombing would have been like – spectators are solicited to imagine. Far from losing their faculty for responsiveness, spectators regain agency through the exercise of imagining the other. Though they may not be able to retrieve their lost futures, spectators can reckon with what might have been, and in so doing honor the irreplaceable value such futures held for the children who died.17

    Together, THTK and Birmingham make for unusual memorial rituals. Conventional memorials often attempt to make the parallactic shift of mourning possible by converting loss into an object. By rendering it a thing – a stone tablet, perhaps, or a commemorative statue – such memorials symbolize the desire for the past to truly become past.18 As experimental interventions in memorial aesthetics, both THTK and Birmingham resist this fundamental goal. In each case, what is lost is not foregrounded as a stabilized, inert object. We know not what has been lost, in the case of THTK, only that the effect of this loss is agonizing enough that its representative symbol – the picture – must itself become lost, and shared with a group of strangers. With Birmingham, we can only fathom what the consequences of loss entail, because we cannot know what the lives of those who died would have been. Rather than condense the loss into a thing, the loss is cast to the ethereal register of the imaginable. Imagination is the faculty that allows us to think the possibility of something beyond the epistemological distinction between true and false; it is the capacity to create forms or figures that are not always already given in the order of concepts.19 THTK and Birmingham appeal to this faculty to imagine as a source of rethinking what memorial aesthetics can do.

    What can these exhibitions do for those who reckon with loss? The prospects for redemption might be limited for those who forfeit their emblem of too-muchness to an audience that cannot, after all, erase or repair damaged life, when the traceful ruins of that life are all that remain. Similarly, reconciliation is refused by Birmingham; no decathexis or moving on is conditioned by its aesthetic. The victims are gone, and with them their stolen futures. And yet the evocative effect tendered by these photographic memorials for those who behold them is undeniable. To be in the gallery spaces is to feel interrupted from the point of view of a reflexive past horizon. The audience clamors to grasp what they cannot understand about what they see, about what could have been or might still be. With THTK, a demos of witnesses gathers around a site of loss, but this assembly of late witnesses is not embedded in a sustained fidelity to melancholic attachment, because the event remains mysterious for spectators. Rather, these witnesses are attuned to the world of possibilities opened up by imagining what others’ pain might entail.20 With Birmingham the loss, again, is not shared. Even if the source of loss is known, its impact remains fugitive, so long as these photographs enable the epiphanic flash of imagination.

    Footnotes

    1. It also recalls the current “decluttering movement,” which encourages the discarding of objects deemed to be excessive or otherwise overcrowding. If the decluttering movement embraces a Spartan minimalism characterized by divestment, THTK emphasizes what cannot be destroyed even if, or precisely because, it must be abandoned.

    2. I do not claim that all of the photographs are connected to loss in the same way, nor do I assume that losses are homogenous across the photographic archive, as shall be seen. Rather, my comments are directed toward the general effect brought to bear by the project as a whole. In this sense, I follow Roland Barthes in focusing especially on what photographs disclose and how they might impact viewers, rather than on the intent of the artist. See Camera Lucida (26–27).

    3. The girls were Denise McNair, Addie Mae Collins, Carole Robertson, and Cynthia Wesley. The boys were Virgil Wesley, 13, who was shot by a white teenager, and Johnny Robinson, who was shot by poice.

    4. Sometimes, if the former owners of the photographs indicate that they would prefer it, the images are kept in their envelopes when they are displayed, such that they are exhibited but remain concealed.

    5. On the Confederate monument protests, see Okeowo. On the controversy over Dana Schutz’s 2016 painting, “Open Casket,” which appropriates the photograph of the murdered Emmett Till, see Bergere.

    6. For more on the argument that the photograph, for the viewer, brings the world close in general, see in particular Andre Bazin; see also Gregg Horowitz’s response to Bazin (142–143).

    7. I hardly have space here to explore in detail the vast history of mourning rituals generally, or the vast literature that attends this theme. Much of my conclusion below focuses on what practices of mourning are meant to engage generally. For more critical theory concerning the politics of mourning practices, see for instance, Eng and Kazanjian; and Hirsch and McIvor. Most photography that focuses on loss tends to fall into the genre of “late photography,” “after the-fact photography,” or “aftermath photography.” Aftermath photography has its roots in Roger Fenton’s images of the Crimean War, in Alain Resnais’ 1955 film, Night and Fog; and later, in Joel Meyerowitz’s images of Ground Zero, and Luc Delahaye’s, Paul Seawright’s, Lyndell Brow’s, and Charles Green’s photographs of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. Capturing the aftermath of war, terrorism, and other forms of human suffering, these images serve as what David Campany articulates as “the trace of the trace of the event” (185–186). For more on how I distance THTK and Birmingham from Campany’s critique of afterness photography, see below.

    8. For the classic argument along these lines, see especially Scruton. This argument — that photography cannot be representational art — has sparked a historical debate that continues to this day. See, for example, Alward, Elkins, and Phillips.

    9. For more on the way I am using “empathy” here, see for instance Dominick LaCapra, who argues against empathy as “overidentification” (102–103); and Lauren Berlant (641–642), who makes reference to “empty empathy.”

    10. I borrow the phrase “touchstone of intimacy” from Stanley Cavell. For Cavell, the phrase refers to the effect some Symbolist poetry has on its readers. A touchstone of intimacy forms between “kindred spirits” when a shared sentiment is voiced, one that stokes the glow of fellow feeling, even if this sentiment is difficult to understand or represent. See Cavell (81).

    11. As with what Barthes calls the “third meaning,” the connections forged by such touchstones of intimacy are “immanent, obtuse, and erratic, in contrast to the obvious meaning of semantic message and symbolic signification.” For more on this in connection to a theory of the affects, see Stewart. For the connection to photography, see also Brown and Phu.

    12. I do not mean to exaggerate the notion that all human trust is born of authenticity, the product of accident. Clearly, one ought not always trust what appears by accident. Instead, I am arguing that part of the intimacy brought to bear by the images that make up the THTK archive derives from the fact that spectators expect that they were not meant to see what the photographs disclose. Thus, spectators suspect that what they behold in the photos is highly personal to former owners. This matters because, as I argue, the candid quality of the photographs contributes to the intimacy effect.

    13. Though, in the case of THTK, it is possible that the photos were taken with the intention of sharing a scene of loss with someone else, perhaps even a future self. Whatever the case may be, the archive aestheticizes the epistemic distance between what appears to be the case, and what actually is.

    On the question of galvanizing affinity, Elain Scarry is instructive. Scarry argues that “The human capacity to injure other people is very great precisely because our capacity to imagine other people is very small.” Thus, she calls for new modes of prompting “generous imaginings” of other persons that go beyond parochial subjectivism: “The problem with discussions of ‘the other’ is that they characteristically emphasize generous imaginings, and thus allow the fate of another person to be contingent on the generosity and wisdom of the imaginer. But solutions ought not to give one group the power to regulate the welfare of another group in this way” (106).

    14. The classic iteration of this argument can be seen in Walzer (238).

    15. This can be contrasted with what Peter Singer famously argues in his influential essay, “Famine, Affluence, and Morality,” namely that spatial distance between subjects ought not to excuse the failure to satisfy moral responsibilities between them. If I can alleviate the suffering of another I ought to, even if I do not personally know the other for whom I am accountable, and even if they may live on the other side of the planet. In point of contrast, on my argument, THTK and Birmingham draw on and make use of distance as an enabling condition for ethical responsiveness. For a related argument that develops my line of thought in a different direction, see John Paul Ricco, The Decision Between Us: Art and Ethics in the Time of Scenes.

    16. Thus, in this sense, I would argue that the THTK photographs index not only the loss of loss itself (for the former owners of photographs), but also the loss of the loss of agency (for the viewers).

    17. While acknowledging the uses of the contemporary aftermath photograph as a form of commemoration, many critics have questioned the ethics of the genre and its relation to the event it memorializes. One complaint is that such art creates too large a distance between the viewer and the atrocities it traces. See, for example, James. In failing to produce a confrontation with the brutality of the events that are the focus of aftermath photography, James argues that these images render the event “dangerously unreal, strangely theatrical, detached, inhuman” (15). Others like Campany argue that “There is a sense in which the late photograph, in all its silence, can easily flatter the ideological paralysis of those who haze at it without the social or political will to make sense of its circumstance” (192). For more on these debates, see Veronica Tello, Counter-memorial Aesthetics.

    18. For a comprehensive review of this history of memorialization see, for instance, Harrison.

    19. In “The Discovery of the Imagination,” Cornelius Castoriadis argues that imagination is “radical” in that it establishes new figures of the thinkable: “These figures would bring particulars into relation with each other but be different from the hypotheses or models of speculative theory, which seeks to form and produce knowledge of a complete object.” If Castoriadis is right, writes Linda Zerilli, “such figures are at the very heart of reflection, which is ‘the effort to break closure,’ that is, the domain of the instituted society in which we exist as subjects constituted by rules, norms, and laws” (63).

    20. Another way of putting this would be to argue that THTK evokes the subjunctive mood, and substitutes it for the indicative, in its appeal to our sense of pathos. As a grammatical mood, the subjunctive is irrealis, that is, it evokes various states of unreality such as wish, opinion, possibility, hope, future potential actions, etc. (that which might be, but which is not yet factual). The indicative, by contrast, is a realis mood, in that it stresses statements of fact. Birmingham, by contrast, displaces the indicative by the conditional (“If they had lived, then…”) in its appeal to our sense of ethos.

    Works Cited

    • Altieri, Charles. Wallace Stevens and the Demands of Modernity: Toward a Phenomenology of Value, Cornell UP, 2013.
    • Alward, Peter. “Transparent Representation: Photography and the Art of Casting.” Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism vol. 70, np. 1, 2012, pp. 9–18.
    • Armstrong, Carol. “Automatism and Agency Intertwined: A Spectrum of Photographic Intentionality.” Critical Inquiry vol. 38, no. 4, 2012, 705–726.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida. Translated by Richard Howard, Hill and Wang, reprint, 2010.
    • ———. Image – Music – Text. Translated by Stephen Heath, Hill and Wang, 1977.
    • Baxandall, Michael. Patterns of Intention: On the Historical Explanation of Pictures. Yale UP, 1985.
    • Bazin, Andre. “The Ontology of the Photographic Image.” What is Cinema?, edited by Andre Bazin, U of California P, 2004, pp. 9–16.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Little History of Photography.” Walter Benjamin, Selected Writings, Volume 2, edited by Michael W. Jennings, et al., Harvard UP, 1999, pp. 507–530.
    • Berger, John. “The Photographs of Agony.” About Looking, Pantheon, 1980, pp. 41–44.
    • ———. “The Uses of Photography.” About Looking, Pantheon, 1980, pp. 52–70.
    • Bergere, Maurice. “The Lasting Power of Emmett Till’s Image.” New York Times, April 5, 2017.
    • Berlant, Lauren. “Poor Eliza.” American Literature vol. 70, no. 3, 1998.
    • Brown, Elspeth H. and Thy Phu, editors. Feeling Photography, Duke UP, 2014.
    • Campany, David. “Safety in Numbness: Some Remarks on Problems of ‘Late Photography.’” Where is the Photograph? edited by David Green, Photoforum, 2003, pp. 123–132.
    • Castoriadis, Cornelius. World in Fragments: Writings on Politics, Society, Psychoanlysis, and the Imagination. Translated by David Ames Curtis, Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Cavell, Stanley. Must We Mean What We Say? Cambridge UP, 2002.
    • Elkins, James, editor. Photography Theory, Routledge, 2007.
    • Eng, David, and David Kazanjian, editors. Loss: The Politics of Mourning, U of California P, 2003.
    • Fried, Michael. Why Photography Matters as Art as Never Before. Yale UP, 2008.
    • Habe-Evans, Mito. “Photos that are Too Hard to Keep.” The Picture Show, National Public Radio, November 10, 2010, www.npr.org/sections/pictureshow/2010/11/09/131188172/snapshots, 18 Feb. 2018.
    • Harrison, Robert Pogue. The Dominion of the Dead. U of Chicago P, 2005.
    • Hirsch, Alexander and David McIvor, editors. The Democratic Arts of Mourning: Political Theory and Loss, Roman & Littlefield, 2018.
    • Horowitz, Gregg. Sustaining Loss: Art and Mournful Life. Stanford UP, 2001.
    • James, Sarah. “Making an Ugly World Beautiful, Morality and Aesthetics in the Aftermath.” Memory of Fire; The War of Images and Images of War, edited by Julian Stallabrass, Photoworks, 2013, pp. 12–15.
    • LaCapra, Dominick. Writing History, Writing Trauma. Johns Hopkins UP, 2001.
    • Lavalette, Shane. “Jason Lazarus: Too Hard to Keep. Shane Lavalette in Conversation with Jason Lazarus. Online at https://medium.com/@shanelavalette/jason-lazarus-too-hard-to-keep-syracuse-5852882dc27e. Magritte, Rene, and Kathleen Rooney, et al., editors. Rene Magritte: Selected Writings. U of Minnesota P, 2016.
    • Michaels, Walter Benn. The Beauty of a Social Problem. U of Chicago P, 2016.
    • Nelson, Deborah. Tough Enough: Arbus, Arendt, Didion, McCarthy, Sontag, Weil. U of Chicago P, 2017.
    • Okeowo, Alexis. “Witnessing A Rally for a Brand-New Confederate Monument.” The New Yorker, August 29, 2017.
    • Phillips, Dawn M. “Photography and Causation: Responding to Scruton’s Scepticism.” British Journal of Aesthetics vol. 49, no. 4, 2009, pp. 327–40.
    • Platt, Ron. “The Birmingham Project.” Dawoud Bey: The Birmingham Project, Birmingham Museum of Art, 2013.
    • Ricco, John Paul. The Decision Between Us: Art and ethics in the Time of Scenes. U of Chicago P, 2014.
    • Scarry, Elaine. “The Difficulty of Imagining Other People.” For Love of Country?, edited by Martha Nussbaum and Joshua Cohen, Beacon, 1996.
    • Scruton, Roger. The Aesthetic Understanding. St. Augustine’s, 1998.
    • Silverman, Kaja. The Miracle of Analogy: History of Photography. Vol. 1, Stanford UP, 2015.
    • Singer, Peter. “Famine, Affluence, and Morality.” Philosophy and Public Affairs, vol. 1, No. 3, 1972, pp. 229–243.
    • Sontag, Susan. On Photography, Picador, 2001.
    • ———. Regarding the Pain of Others, Picador, 2004.
    • Stewart, Kathleen. Ordinary Affect, Duke UP, 2007.
    • Tello, Veronica. Counter-Memorial Aesthetics: Refugee Histories and the Politics of Contemporary Art, Bloomsbury, 2016.
    • Wall, Jeff. “Conceptual, Postconceptual, Nonconceptual: Photography and the Depictive Arts.” Critical Inquiry, vol. 38, no. 4, 2012, pp. 694–704.
    • Walton, Kendall, “Transparent Pictures: On the Nature of Photographic Realism,” Critical Inquiry vol. 11, no. 2, 1984, pp. 246–277.
    • Walzer, Michael. “Terrorism: A Critique of Excuses.” Problems of International Justice, edited by Steven Luper-Foy, Westview, 1988.
    • Williams, Raymond. Marxism and Literature, Oxford UP, 1978.
    • Zerilli, Linda. Feminism and the Abyss of Freedom, U of Chicago P, 2005.
  • Notes on Contributors

    Charles Bernstein
    Charles Bernstein’s Pitch of Poetry, new essays, was published in 2016 by the University of Chicago Press. His most recent book of poems is Recalculating (Chicago, 2013). In 2010, Farrar, Straus & Giroux published All the Whiskey in Heaven: Selected Poems. Bernstein is Donald T. Regan Professor of English and Comparative Literature at the University of Pennsylvania, where he is co-director of PennSound. 

    Louise Burchill 
    Louise Burchill is Visiting Lecturer in Contemporary French Philosophy, Aesthetics, and Feminist Thought at the Faculty of the Victorian College of the Arts, University of Melbourne. Her research and publications focus on the feminine in contemporary French philosophy, the notion of space, and the intersection of philosophy with film and architecture. Of the numerous texts she has written on the work of Jacques Derrida, two notably inquire as to what cinema might provoke by way of a (re)thinking of certain key conceptual constellations within Derrida’s thought: “Derrida and the (Spectral) Scene of Cinema,” in Felicity J. Colman (ed.),Film & Philosophy: Key Thinkers, London: Acumen, 2009, 164-178; and “Derrida and Barthes: Speculative Intrigues in Cinema, Photography, and Phenomenology,” in Zeynep Direk and Leonard Lawlor (eds.), A Companion to Derrida, Chichester: Blackwell, 2015, 321-344.

    David Coughlan
    David Coughlan is Lecturer in English at the University of Limerick, Ireland, and the author of Ghost Writing in Contemporary American Fiction (Palgrave Macmillan, 2016). He has published articles on contemporary literature and critical theory in ParallaxImageTexTDerrida TodayCollege LiteratureCritiqueModern Fiction Studies, and several edited collections.

    Simon Glezos
    Simon Glezos is an Assistant Professor of political science at the University of Victoria. He has a Ph.D. in political theory and international relations from the Johns Hopkins University. He is the author of The Politics of Speed: Capitalism, the State and War in an Accelerating World, from Routledge press. He has published articles in CTheory, Contemporary Political Theory, The Journal of International Political Theory, International Politics, and Philosophy in Review. His research focuses on global political theory, applying the insights of classic and contemporary theory to questions of speed and acceleration across multiple sites within global politics.

    Timothy Holland
    Timothy Holland is an Assistant Professor of Film and Media Studies at Emory University and co-editor of Discourse: Journal for Theoretical Studies in Media and Culture. His essays have been published in Film-PhilosophyDiscourseScreen, and New Review of Film and Television Studies. His current book project explores the overlooked role of cinema in Jacques Derrida’s oeuvre as well as the timeliness of deconstruction for contemporary film and media studies.

    Phillip Lobo
    Phillip A. Lobo is a Ph.D. candidate in the Department of Comparative Literature at the University of Southern California, where he was awarded the College Doctoral Fellowship.  His dissertation addresses formal realism as a technology for the production of subjectivity in novels and games.  His work has appeared on Chiasma: A Site For Thought, in Critical Insights: Joseph Conrad, and he has numerous articles archived at Open Letters Monthly.

    Robert Meister
    Robert Meister is Professor of Political and Social Thought in the History of Consciousness Department at the University of California, Santa Cruz. He is also a visitor at the Center for Contemporary Theory at the University of Chicago. His writings include After Evil: A Politics of Human Rights (Columbia University Press, 2011); Political Identity: Thinking Through Marx I (Blackwell,1990) and “Liquidity” (in Lee and Martin, ed., Derivatives and the Wealth of Society, University of Chicago Press, 2016). 

    Sharon Willis
    Sharon Willis is Professor of Art History and Visual and Cultural Studies at the University of Rochester.  A Co-Editor of Camera Obscura, she is the author of Marguerite Duras: Writing on the Body, High Contrast: Race and Gender in Contemporary Hollywood Film, and The Poitier Effect: Melodramas of Racial Pedagogy, and numerous articles on race and gender in popular cinema. 

  • Women’s transnational cinema: displacement, projection, and identification

    Sharon Willis (bio)
    University of Rochester

    A review of White, Patricia. Women’s Cinema, World Cinema: Projecting Contemporary Feminisms. Duke UP, 2015.

    Patricia White’s ambitious project sets itself the daunting task of tracking fast-moving targets. Its anchoring terms— “women’s cinema” and “world cinema” —remain in constant flux as a result of their uneven interactions. In a real sense, White’s book rises to the implicit challenge that Stephanie Dennison and Song Hwee Lim pose in their introduction to Remapping World Cinema: Identity, Culture and Politics. “In the final analysis,” they write, “World Cinema as a theoretical concept is destined not to definition and closure but to ceaseless problematisation, always a work-in-progress, its ground beneath one’s feet forever shifting even as one attempts to pin it down” (9). As White notes in her introduction: “Cultural globalization, in turn, puts pressure on the concept, content, and address of women’s cinema . . . while remappings of world cinema in the current phase of globalization are the object of growing attention in film studies, questions of gender have yet to structure such inquiry significantly” (6). Women’s Cinema, World Cinema shapes its broad analytical survey around the category or figure of woman, however unstable. In pursuing its ambitious project, this book recalls the shaping impact of feminist film theory on film studies at large from the 1970s onward. It asks some audacious questions: is “women’s cinema still a meaningful term” (11), and if it is, can it produce a similar shaping force in the arena of world cinema studies? Foregrounding women’s production and reception with special emphasis on the emerging and shifting channels of global film circulation, this book makes a powerful intervention in the most exciting discussions in contemporary film and media studies by carefully deploying a number of methodologies and analytical frameworks—not all of which seem immediately compatible.

    Organized by what White loosely terms “case studies,” her project turns on metaphors of displacement, framing, and projection. Together, these concepts form the book’s central insight: that we must consider production and address, as well as circulation and reception, in order to understand women’s transnational cinema as a multivalent circuit of projection and identification. These powerful processes, understood in their psychoanalytic force, provide a potential framework for analyzing the elaborate cross-cultural exchanges that structure the global circulation of women’s cinema, especially across festivals. Film festivals, as White carefully demonstrates, subject transnational women’s cinema–in conditions of often dramatic juxtaposition–to shocks of reorientation and reframing as films from widely divergent cultures come into contact. And festivals have increasingly grown in importance and impact in the twenty-first century. Accounting for her book’s primary “focus on filmmakers who emerge after 2000,” White indicates that since this moment, “feminist cultural politics [has] offered a less stable frame through which to view women’s work” (7). She continues:

    Ultimately, the works of these filmmakers were selected not only for their aesthetic and cultural significance but also for the ways they reveal the institutional shapes of film culture—the politics of funding and programming, protocols of reviewing and the anointing of celebrities, and various political agendas. (7)

    These different cinematic objects, as well as the concepts of reception, production, circulation and exhibition contexts, are held together by White’s consideration of issues around authorship and identity, aesthetics and reception, national and transnational context. This is a vast terrain to map and manage. White is obliged to embrace some risks, and they largely pay off. Her choice of a case study model focuses on commonalities—or even conversations—among film texts that might at first seem entirely foreign to one another.

    However, the case study model presents some limitations as well; notably, it tends to suggest exemplarity and representativeness, about which this study remains justifiably ambivalent. It also risks the implicit suggestion that the film in question exists primarily as an illustrative example of the tendency under exploration; its portraits of women directors are somewhat uneven and seem to represent or exemplify various analytical issues. For example, Samira Makmalbaf (1980, Iran) anchors an analysis of the shifting critical status of national cinema as a category. Lucrecia Martel (1965, Argentina), whose work appears in the same chapter, seems to count more as an example of international auteurist appeal and of celebrity status, much like Jane Campion (1954, New Zealand), and Deepa Mehta (1950, India). The framing of the case studies raises and perpetuates the question: what is each “case” exemplifying? Could it also provide an example of something else? For example, could the analysis of Deepa Mehta’s Water (2005) have sustained more attention to the rise of Gandhi’s passive resistance movement for independence? Could it have devoted more attention to the film’s references to Satyatjit Ray’s Apu Trilogy? Could it have taken Mehta’s particular position as a transnational filmmaker (India/Canada) as a more powerful anchor for the book’s commitment to global circulation and exchange? In White’s own assessment of her project’s complexity: “Water could be analyzed in the chapter addressing women’s human rights, but appears in the chapter on cultural authenticity” (21).

    Another key strategy for managing this ambitious and complex analysis depends on the figure of the auteur, which “is operative across all chapters” (21). Central as it has been to the emergence of film studies as a field, the figure of the auteur has a long and sometimes vexed history, and remains haunted by traits that seem incompatible with the commitments of White’s project. It stubbornly clings to the national cinema model, and it emphatically shapes analysis around the individual, often to the exclusion of social/historical context and at the expense of acknowledging the invariably collective process of film production. As White observes:

    Surveying the status of women’s cinema in the early twenty-first century persuades me that the categories we have used—authorship, aesthetics, and address—remain vital, yet they are insufficient at this juncture. They must be supplemented by consideration and theorization of institutional questions—of production, distribution, exhibition and reception. (13)

    In retaining the figure of the auteur as an historical and cultural touchstone and as a category of identity and aesthetics, one whose valences are plural, White also launches her project into much broader circulation than traditional film studies. She considers, for example, the translation of cultural capital built within national industries into transnational cultural capital, often through the woman director’s star status, and her place in a circuit of generational mentorship—familial or otherwise (Mehta, Llhosa, Makmalbaf). In examining Llosa’s work, Madeinusa (2006) and The Milk of Sorrow (2009), White names lead actor Magaly Solier as a “coauthor, in part, of the film’s construction of a new image of indigenous femininity,” suggesting that the “‘fictional character’ could be read as her persona as well as her role,” so that “her collaboration with Llosa” becomes a “‘co-production of newly emerging cultural identities’” (190). Each chapter strives to complicate the organizing figure of the auteur while simultaneously using it to question and reframe the categories of national cinema, always maintaining the centrality of gender to its analysis. This is a complex project because, as White observes, “‘Woman’ is as frequently associated with national ideologies in film as in other forms of politics, and feminist approaches must tease apart competing representations and self-representations” (16).

    The book’s structure is further complicated by its strategies of juxtaposition. Staging collisions and encounters across cultures, it may remind us of the centrality of surrealism to the earlier twentieth century ethnographies, including Michel Leiris’s and Jean Rouch’s. Each of Women’s Cinema, World Cinema’s five chapters elaborates a kind of “transnational conversation” designed to capture the significance of commodification and consumption in dialogue with politics, auteurism, and identities. But each reframing highlights the contradictions and volatility that attend the cinematic practices under examination. As White puts it, “The case studies are marked by the return of the author: the personae of woman directors are read as closely as their films,” but her textual analyses also always focus on the “frames through which [the films] are seen. These may be biographical, political, figural, or generic” (21). Thus, the case studies are invariably complex, even messy, and messy in ways that complement the subject of this study.

    The first chapter situates Lucrecia Martel (1966, Argentina) and Samira Makhmalbah (1980, Iran) in relation to the classic European festivals—Cannes (especially), Venice, and Berlin. Their auteurship comes into view alongside that the now iconic Jane Campion. This chapter turns on the tension between the film text’s enunciation and address and the transnational currency attached to the author’s persona—linked to classical Western film traditions and to newly reconfigured national identities. Yet, as White insists, in this work “the national does not disappear into the transnational” (21).

    Chapter II, “Framing Feminisms” offers perhaps the cornerstone argument of the book, considering Deepa Mehta (1950, India/Canada) and Water alongside Marjane Satrapi’s Persepolis (2007) (1969, Iran/France) as representatives of the category “women’s cinema as art cinema.” This chapter interrogates “the potential of art cinema to serve as a transnational feminist public sphere,” while suggesting “that new critical practices are needed to cultivate” this possibility (68). It wrestles with the weight of “cultural capital” that accrues to these directors— themselves embodiments of transnationalism—and it leads us to question the tension between local specifics and transnational address.

    In “Feminist Film in the Age of the Chick Flick,” the third chapter, White explores global flows of cinema and generic exchange, arguing “that the globalization of the chick flick taps into feminist energy through the link with popular forms” (106). She continues with the characteristically bold assertion that “their themes—homosocial bond; critiques of women’s limited role in the public sphere; the radical implications of reformed kinds of intimacy—also inform the global chick flick.” She continues with this challenge: “The scholarship on world cinema has yet to address these multidirectional flows and the ways women filmmakers modify the process by which national cinemas cross into transnational fields” (107). This provocative claim opens new lines of inquiry that should command all of our attention. The chapter pairs Jeong Jae-eun (1969, Korea) and Nadine Labaki (1974, Lebanon) to argue that these directors “negotiate the constraints of the globally traveling commodity form of the festival film—signed by a auteur but inevitably positioned through regional and national frames.” White asserts that “their engagement with women’s genres allows them to challenge both auteurist singularity and the dominant reception patterns of national cinemas” (131).

    In “Network Narratives: Asian Women Directors,” White approaches the “rise in influence, both cultural and economic, of Asian cinema” (132). Exploring “a broad range of practices and topics in gender and Asian cinema, this chapter “stress[es] both the transnational nature of the phenomena (one example suggests another) and the specificity of each development (each example asks for explication)” (133). This fourth chapter maps what she calls “the centripetal and centrifugal forces” that mark these films and structure their interactions—“network narratives”: “these regional, gendered dynamics in world film culture generate what I will call network narratives” (133). The foregoing, by the way, constitutes an apt description of this book’s analytical strategies in general. Taking as its point of departure the International Women’s Film Festival in Seoul, this chapter offers a special case study: it examines the impact of Asian women’s work internationally, but particularly on queer culture and youth culture. Focusing on the work of Nia Dinata [(1976, Indonesia)] and Zero Chou (1969, Taiwan), it explores the contemporary vicissitudes of transnational circulation and influence. As White contends, “Chou enters transnational spaces with local identity and community politics trailing—if she doesn’t quite gain the status of art film auteur, she is able to travel these networks without having to transcend nationality, queerness or feminism” (168). “Shaping careers that defy standard pathways limiting women’s achievement,” she continues, “Nia Dinata and Zero Chou are feminist icons. They connect with audience through their incorporation of popular and youth-oriented idioms without relinquishing their political affiliations” (168).

    The final chapter, “Is The Whole World Watching?: Fictions of Women’s Human Rights,” explores “the implication that perhaps women’s films are worldlier than some other types of film, that they travel outside national boundaries more feely, on a particular kind of passport” (169). White considers the tension between aesthetics and ethics that structures three films about war and trauma: Silent Waters, 2003 (Sabiha Sumar, 1961, Pakistan), The Land of My Dreams, 2006 (Jasmila Zbanic, 1974, Bosnia), and Milk of Sorrow, 2009 (Claudia Llhosa, 1976 Peru). She resolves this tension in the three films through what she calls a “gaze of engagement,” which is

    crucial to fiction films about women’s rights. It makes a claim on the viewer. Not a legal claim, but a claim on attention—attention to language and location and all that film is capable of revealing of the world, but also attention to the frame itself, so prominent in these compositions. (198)

    For White, acknowledgment of the frame is also recognition of the spectator’s “difference and displacement” (198), perhaps crucial for any real ethical engagement across cultures.

    Here Women’s Cinema, World Cinema: Projecting Contemporary Feminisms asserts perhaps its most daring—and productive—position. With the “gaze of engagement,” White works to rewrite the terms and forms of address by which women’s cinema from the global South and the global North relate to each other. This argument offers a way out of the frequent impasse of projection, which has too often characterized the posture of Western feminisms towards the rest of the world. As she writes at the end of her introduction, “projection can of course imply cross-cultural insensitivities (their lives, their feminisms, must look like ‘ours’) but it is also a vision of futurity, based on knowledge, partial as it must be, that is currently available” (27). In this final chapter, the book sketches a framework for engagement that does not confine itself to the forms of projective identification through which Western feminist criticism has often elaborated its analyses. To arrive at this compelling point, Women’s Cinema, World Cinema has developed through a consistently curatorial impulse. In other words, this book is itself structured like a film festival. White’s career-long affiliation with Women Make Movies and her scholarly commitment to attending a wide range of film festivals have particularly prepared her to produce a series of powerful cross-cultural juxtapositions that offer us newly framed transnational conversations in women’s cinema. In doing so, this book makes a significant claim on our attentive gaze.

    Works Cited

    Dennison, Stephanie and Song Hwee Lim, editors. Remapping World Cinema: Identity, Culture, and Politics in Film. Wallflower Press, 2006.

  • After the après-tout

    Timothy Holland (bio)
    Emory University

    A review of Szendy, Peter. Apocalypse Cinema: 2012 and Other Ends of the World. Translated by Will Bishop, Fordham UP, 2015.

    As Samuel Weber observes in the foreword to Peter Szendy’s Apocalypse-Cinema: 2012 and Other Ends of the World, few things are more timely and fascinating than the spectacular destruction of life on earth: “[t]he apocalypse,” he points out, “is in fashion” (ix). To say nothing of the dread that has accompanied Donald Trump’s presidency, nor of the alarming proliferation of jingoistic political movements throughout the West, one finds today a glut of apocalyptic texts (films, novels, television programs) as well as a reciprocal body of criticism that addresses this “fashion” in one way or another. Szendy’s signal contribution to the latter eludes the rigid historicism, systematic classification, and/or political signposting that some readers may expect from a book with this title. Contrary to much contemporary literature on the topic, which tends to decode the genre’s utopic/dystopic narratives allegorically, Apocalypse-Cinema argues that films depicting the end of the world—particularly those of the blockbuster variety—illuminate a subterranean topography of cinema itself. Within the most recognizable generic conventions— such as atomic detonations, glacial freezes, interplanetary collisions, overwrought deadline structures, and extravagant special effects that at once suture and rend the surfaces of the world—Szendy excavates the representational limits of cinema and, as such, the thresholds of understanding an event that remains without prior model, or put differently, totally referential and fictional.

    The book begins with a confessional-autobiographical mode of address that recalls the opening of Jacques Derrida’s The Animal That Therefore I Am (2008), in which Derrida relays an encounter with his cat that unfurls into an expansive reassessment of animals and conceptions of animality. The confrontation with otherness that enraptures Szendy and catalyzes Apocalypse-Cinema is the ten seconds or so of silent black screen that takes place at (or just before) the end of Lars von Trier’s Melancholia (2011). Following the film’s terrestrial depiction of the Earth’s incineration, this uncomfortable moment of darkness serves to remark the impossibility of post-apocalyptic survival. There is no diegetic “after” at or beyond the end of Melancholia. The end of the film—the arrival of the apocalypse—leaves no potential for renewal.1 This moment at or just before the end of Melancholia generates what Szendy calls “a cinema of the afterwards…a cinema that comes after it all, after everything has disappeared” (3). A “cinema of the after-all,” which, Weber explains, plays on the French idiom après-tout (as in “ultimately” or “nevertheless,” but also “after everything” [xi]), does not simply name the portrayal of the end of all life within a given diegesis (3). Szendy views the exemplary finale of Melancholia as responding “purely and absolutely to the demand that is proper to apocalypse-cinema: that the last image be the very last image, that is the last of them all—of all past, present, or future images” (2). A proper cinematic apocalypse, a true “cinema of the after-all,” therefore, revisits both the Greek word (and New Testament usage of) apokalupsis as disclosure or revelation and the conceptualization of cinema as a medium that reanimates the world by rendering things visible. What is brought to life within Melancholia’s closing ten seconds—the film’s disclosure, one might say—is the impossibility of any future revelation or image after the annihilation of the world. The inventiveness of Apocalypse-Cinema stems from Szendy’s near obsession with this brief moment of silence and darkness, especially the way in which he interweaves it with the history of cinema and the complications attending to generic codification. For him, the film’s denouement broadcasts the generic “demand,” what he calls “the strictest law of the apocalyptic genre (if indeed there is a genre): that the end of world is the end of the movie…Or vice versa …: The end of the movie is the end of the world” (1, 2).

    The first confessional chapter of Apocalypse-Cinema establishes the method and stakes of Szendy’s provocative study, as its moves from the apocalyptic genre to the singularity of spectatorship to the general conditions of cinema. The book is guided by a conviction in an indispensable correspondence between movies, on one hand, and the so-called “real world,” on the other. Enduring Melancholia’s soundless black frames before the reassuring appearance of its credits, according to Szendy, leads to calling into question a spectator’s disavowal of her experience with the film as “only a movie, after all” (3). A “cinema of the afterwards,” such as the one produced in von Trier’s film, sticks with you; it is a cinema with an indefinite end that resists being shaken off as “just a movie”; it is thus a cinema that deconstructs, rather than reifies, the fiction/reality (or cine-world/real-world) dichotomy. Many readers of Apocalypse-Cinema will likely recognize that the deconstruction of this opposition was also something Derrida performed in his 1984 essay “No Apocalypse, Not Now: Full Speed Ahead, Seven Missiles, Seven Missives.” In that essay, Derrida contends that “real-life,” or that which apparently counters the expansive literary field (which includes cinema), cannot fully understand its own destruction and constitution through knowledge and proof alone because its end—the total apocalypse—takes or has its proper place within virtual, fictional, and/or cinematic worlds. Properly engaging the possibility of this referent—and by extension, “real-life” and “the world”—requires fictional practices such as apocalypse-cinema. Although it is left unstated in the book, Szendy appears to hold cinema as the privileged medium, and “apo” (a French abbreviation for the genre) as the privileged filmic code through which one encounters not just the end of the world as a referent without reference, but also the knotted imbrication of cinema and what goes by the name “the world.” Melancholia’s production of the remainder-less obliteration of the world through its own self-erasure transfixes Szendy; it is this dual erasure that stays with him (and presumably, us) after the movie’s end, after it all.

    If, as Szendy submits, the ending of Melancholia makes it “the only rigorously apocalyptic film in the history of cinema,” then, as the sole instantiation of “a cinema of the after-all,” it also serves as a sort of barometer to gauge how other thematically linked films respond to the “demand” placed upon them (3). This “gauging” can be read as Szendy’s modus operandi. This is not to say that Apocalypse-Cinema merely cites the shortcomings of apocalyptic films not named Melancholia. Instead, the book amplifies the particular conversations of each film under analysis with the “demand” or “strictest law” of “apo,” that the end of the movie be the end of the world. These films—Cloverfield (Matt Reeves, 2008), Twelve Monkeys (Terry Gilliam, 1995), Watchmen (Zack Snyder, 2009), and A.I. Artificial Intelligence (Steven Spielberg, 2001), to name but a few—become emblematic of the genre itself as Szendy uncovers novel conventions and tropes that re-sketch formerly codified (and ostensibly delineated) terrain. Each chapter—save the seventh and the postface—follows an analogous nominal pattern of placing the conjunction “or” between an individual film title and a pithy fragment or word that encapsulates one of Szendy’s discoveries (“The Last Man on Earth, or Film as Countdown,” “A.I., or The Freeze,” and “Cloverfield, or The Holocaust of the Date”). And yet, Apocalypse-Cinema is not a series of separable, self-contained reflections. Szendy’s analysis progresses in an additive fashion, with Melancholia always at or near the fore, and readers would benefit from reading the book with that structure in mind.

    Szendy’s lyrical style, attention to the singularity of the films he examines, and incorporation of a wide-ranging philosophical and literary archive, make providing a condensed summary of Apocalypse-Cinema difficult, if not impossible. In spite of these challenges, the common thread that binds the text together is clear: Szendy traces what might be called the raw underbelly of cinema, the mutations of the performative double erasure occurring just after the Earth and Melancholia’s “embrace or grasp until death, their lethal and cosmic kiss” (49). Apocalypse-Cinema reads as an index of cinema’s capacity to annul or penetrate the spectacular veneer of its audiovisual prowess; by grappling with events without reference in the “real-world,” the medium, Szendy suggests, harbors an inherent destructive avisuality that reveals as much it fails “to show” in the conventional sense. One of the most lucid examples of this cinematic death-drive transpires during Szendy’s discussion of Akira Mizuta Lippit’s term “cinefication,” elucidated in the latter’s 2005 book Atomic Light (Shadow Optics). Lippit develops this term through a homonymic analysis of the prefix “cine-”: cinema, as a practice that can be said to “cinefy,” conjures both movement or the movies (via the Greek kinema) and incineration, the reduction of someone or something to ash (via the Latin incinerāre). The double resonance of “cinefication” forms, Szendy says, “the knot where the themes and stakes of apocalypse-cinema are tied together,” which is to say that the cinematic production of the end of the world—even in its most commercial or generic guises—exhibits an antagonistic side of the medium that disrupts the smooth consumption of its spectacles (73). The term prefigures a sort of autoimmune cinema that Szendy harnesses in his original theory of film as a medium always already engulfed by the end.

    Subject to an admirable, if sporadically too literal, translation, Apocalypse-Cinema is a key text for those invested in film and media theory, the burgeoning field of “film-philosophy,” speculative and science fiction studies, and the overlooked intersections of deconstruction and cinema studies. The book will also be of interest to readers seeking to think through the apocalyptic compulsions and obsessions that characterize Western (Christian) culture, as well as those whose interdisciplinary training and areas of specialization—continental philosophy, musicology, comparative literature, and French studies—reflect Szendy’s own. At first glance, the consideration given to Hollywood blockbusters may appear to be at odds with the philosophical or theoretical stakes of the project. However, in the place of the rote application that frequently undermines what passes for “film-philosophy,” Szendy invites readers with his prose and regard for the texts that are fortunate enough to entice him, and with which he, in turn, entices us. This will come as no surprise to those who have read his other translated works, such as Listen: A History of Our Ears (2008) and Hits: Philosophy in the Jukebox (2012), or his more recent publications, Phantom Limbs: On Musical Bodies (2016) and All Ears: The Aesthetics of Espionage (2017).

    Footnotes

    1. For a trenchant analysis of survival in Melancholia, see Christopher Peterson, “The Magic Cave of Allegory: Lars von Trier’s Melancholia,” in Discourse, vol. 35, no. 3, 2013, pp. 400–422. Muse, muse.

  • On Influence and (Un)Originality

    David Coughlan (bio)
    University of Limerick

    A Review of Luter, Matthew. Understanding Jonathan Lethem. U of South Carolina P, 2015.

    Just the second monograph published on the work of Jonathan Lethem, following James Peacock’s 2012 volume, Matthew Luter’s Understanding Jonathan Lethem is issued as part of the University of South Carolina’s Understanding Contemporary American Literature series. It provides an engaging and accessible account of Lethem’s three most high-profile novels, Motherless Brooklyn (1999), The Fortress of Solitude (2003), and Chronic City (2009), together with an analysis of selected short stories and essays. Luter’s welcome book is an enjoyable and illuminating read, and its author has a clear appreciation and enthusiasm for Lethem’s work, as can be seen in the way he burrows out the references and allusions buried in the texts. The particular strengths of the book lie in the clarity of the structure and especially in its choice of an effective and fitting approach to Lethem’s work, focusing on the writer’s “career-long interest in questioning what literary originality means in a postmodernist age” of “collage, pop art, pastiche, remixing, or sampling” (2).

    The book’s introductory chapter, in addition to providing a short biography, situates Lethem in the context of three studies on literary influence: Harold Bloom’s The Anxiety of Influence (1973), which provides a “definition of influence that Lethem has spent an entire career rejecting” (Luter 9), given its emphasis on the anxiety of the text, cultural belatedness, and “a poet’s melancholy at his lack of priority” (Bloom qtd. in Luter 9); “The Literature of Exhaustion” (1967) by John Barth, with whom Lethem shares an appreciation for the work of Italo Calvino; and Michael Chabon’s “Fan Fictions” (2008), in which Chabon concludes that “all novels are sequels; influence is bliss” (qtd. in Luter 12). Luter suggests that Lethem “sounds most like Chabon when he discusses his vision for himself as a writer.” He illuminates Lethem’s perspective with a detailed analysis of his essay “The Ecstasy of Influence” (2007), “both a brilliant defense of creative appropriation and a call for a new, more generous understanding of copyright” (13). Luter then identifies two of the most significant influences on Lethem, sci-fi novelist Philip K. Dick and American film critic Manny Farber, before moving to discuss a number of Lethem’s earlier short stories, particularly “Vanilla Dunk” from The Wall of the Sky, the Wall of the Eye (1996), drawing attention to the ways in which Lethem recontextualizes and reuses elements from earlier texts and, therefore, providing a useful starting point for the following considerations of influence and originality in the novels.

    The second chapter is about Motherless Brooklyn, a book that Luter describes as “Lethem’s breakthrough novel and a book as much about hard-boiled detective fiction as it is a hard-boiled novel” (27). Luter argues that Lethem’s adoption and adaptation of the rules of the genre as set out in Raymond Chandler’s essays “The Simple Art of Murder” (1944) and “Twelve Notes on the Mystery Story” (1948) result in a novel that is an “excellent exercise in accepting the weight of literary history without being visibly burdened by it” and an “example of purely joyful quasi-fan fiction” (29). Initially establishing its indebtedness to its precursors and their “vibrant, hostile, punning, impossible language” through the heightened style of its own language, the novel is not so much about a detective as it is about a fan of detective fiction who then becomes a detective; Lethem’s protagonist, Lionel Essrog, understands his experiences in terms of the conventions of the noir genre even as Lethem constantly invokes that genre through references and citations in his framing of Essrog’s world (Lethem qtd. in Luter 30). Throughout this chapter, Luter pays welcome and effective attention to the patterns of language both of the hard-boiled detective novel and of Essrog’s speech, which is affected by his Tourette’s syndrome, thereby addressing the question of how the influence (of a genre or of a syndrome) expresses itself and then shapes, or is shaped by, representation. Luter concludes that “this is a novel that understands and articulates clearly its own relationship to detective fiction of the past” (47). The chapter also includes discussions of surrogate families and school, the importance of music in the novel, and the role of New York City — where, if I might add to the punning language, Luter might have linked a concept of genre-ification to gentrification — and of how these feed into the characters’ sense of identity and belonging, or lack thereof. This engagement with the question of what makes us who we are is one with the novel’s relationship to a tradition of detective writing because, as Luter argues, “figuring out one’s attitude toward a complicated personal past is akin to (and sometimes directly involves) figuring out what to do with artistic influence” (46).

    This is especially apparent in the next chapter’s reading of The Fortress of Solitude, a novel that “highlights Lethem’s career-long interests in the racial politics of popular culture as well as the joys and dangers of passionate consumption and intellectual appreciation of cultural artifacts” (48). Similar themes emerge of surrogate families, schoolyard friendships, and the “class and racial politics of gentrification” in Brooklyn in the 1970s (50). The focus of the chapter, however, like the novel’s, is on the relationship between the white Dylan Ebdus and the black Mingus Rude, who bond over the shared absence of their mothers and over comic books, graffiti tagging, music, and a magical ring. Following the two friends as they grow to adulthood allows Lethem to tackle questions of unequal opportunity, of “fetishizing blackness,” and “of cultural appropriation” (75, 54). In this context, Luter observes that “pop music is the art form most vital to Dylan’s childhood” (61). He charts the way Dylan’s “music tastes change, and the modes of racial identification attached to his listening get far more complex, personally and politically,” and explains the significance of having a record by the Specials or of wearing a leather jacket, examples of the various ways in which identity is performed, informed by life’s influences (62). The chapter ends by engaging more directly with “[i]nfluence and fandom” in a discussion of sci-fi and music communities, arguing that Dylan “has far more interest in reproducing the past than in building a new future,” so that his “attempt to come to terms with his past remains incomplete” (71, 75, 77). What this chapter lacks, however, is an extended analysis of the novel in terms of Lethem’s understanding of influence, which would have made this conclusion more meaningful. As it is, the references to Dylan’s appropriation of Mingus’s graffiti tag, to white “performances of black style,” or even to quoting, mimicking, imitating, forging, collecting, and stealing, aren’t systematically or consistently contextualized in relation to either Lethem’s theory or his practice (70). It is not, therefore, as original an analysis of the novel as it could have been.

    Chapter 4 deals briefly with the short story collection Men and Cartoons (2004), the essay collection The Disappointment Artist (2005), and the novel You Don’t Love Me Yet (2007) before turning to Chronic City, “a book about fandom gone wild to the point that it becomes debilitating” (79). Luter details again the real-world analogues in the text and, dealing with the two characters Chase Insteadman and Perkus Tooth, discusses fiction and reality, fantasy and realism, virtuality and hyperreality, politics and conspiracies, and Chronic City’s post-Giuliani and post-9/11 New York. Unlike the previous chapter, this one engages in a sustained and necessary discussion on the ecstasies and anxieties of influence, especially as manifested in the “curatorial impulse” (Lethem qtd. in Luter 93). Moreover, the framing of the novel in terms of terror threats and conspiracies presents it convincingly as a work with political intent, leading Luter to conclude that the novel “works as a powerful corrective to contemporary ideologies and practices that seek to distract people from seeing the reality before their eyes” (103). The final, short chapter surveys Lethem’s They Live (2010), his short monograph on John Carpenter’s eponymous 1988 film; Fear of Music (2012), his book on the Talking Heads’ 1979 album of the same name; his short story collection Lucky Alan and Other Stories (2015); and Dissident Gardens (2013), his most recent novel and, Luter argues, his “most sophisticated” and “most overtly political work yet” (108). It is a novel, he suggests, which highlights “the considerable difficulties, not impossibilities, that people of progressive worldviews encounter in their attempts to turn their beliefs from abstractions to realities” (111).

    This useful concluding chapter suggests that it might profitably have been matched by a chapter or section in the book covering Lethem’s earlier genre novels, which would have provided a basis on which to judge the ways in which Lethem remixes and riffs on genre in the later novels. By excluding these novels, Luter knowingly leaves himself open to the accusation that he is reinstating the lines between science fiction and literary fiction that Lethem seeks to trouble (despite “resistance from both sides”), as epitomized by his “chaperoning [Philip K.] Dick into the Library of America” (Lethem qtd. in Luter 20). Luter’s focus on three novels also raises other questions: in a work dedicated to understanding Lethem’s corpus, what does it mean if Luter effectively discounts four novels1 and a novella2 from the discussion — not to mention the bulk of the short stories, a coauthored, pseudonymous sports novel,3 and a co-authored graphic novel?4

    Some of these would have lent themselves easily to Luter’s overall argument, especially Omega the Unknown, which reworks and self-consciously paraphrases the original 1970s series by Steve Gerber and others. This represents something of a missed opportunity, and it reflects other instances in which Luter’s book doesn’t pick up on the kinds of creative repetitions that relate to Lethem’s interests in (un)originality: for example, in Motherless Brooklyn, Essrog describes his verbal tics as “echolalia . . . I was doing impressions,” but Luter doesn’t connect this to other impressionists, like Dylan or his father, or Lethem himself (qtd. in Luter 32). In fact, a weakness of Luter’s book is a certain lack of consistency in its explication of what influence means in and for Lethem or, more specifically, what the stakes are when it comes to the question of originality. For example, the final page of the introduction includes the observations that, in “Vanilla Dunk,” “Lethem argues that originality is still available to the artist who seeks it and values it,” that the three major novels are “all quite original books in their own ways,” and also that some might accuse Lethem of “merely unoriginal borrowing or pastiche” (26). But to what extent would it matter to Lethem if he were “quite original” or even “merely unoriginal” if, as Luter later asserts, he “has so dispensed with the idea of originality as valuable (or even possible) in ‘The Ecstasy of Influence’ that it seems a nonissue now” (92)? Luter’s hesitancy over how a non-traditional concept of originality might inform his readings leads to some contradictory-seeming, or at least un-nuanced, statements: for example, Dylan’s “imitation is … far removed from the sort of creative appropriation Lethem will celebrate in ‘The Ecstasy of Influence’” and yet, “to a lesser extent perhaps, Dylan and Mingus work to shape their own world in their acts of creation” (71, 78). Similar inconsistencies occur in the discussion of Perkus, “a creative appropriator and collage artist, working in a manner comparable to Lethem himself in ‘The Ecstasy of Influence’” (91), but one whose “old creative form now seems hopelessly uncreative” (92).5 A greater engagement with the debates around postmodern artistic practice would likely have enabled Luter to fine-tune his position and to build on the introduction’s discussion of influence rather than using it simply to label examples later on (91). A greater engagement with the debates around postmodernism itself — say Fredric Jameson’s “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture” (1979), given Lethem’s imagined “Manhattan Reification Society” (qtd. in Luter 100) — would have enabled Luter to make the claim that Chronic City “is reminiscent of the Marxist critiques of popular culture launched by Frankfurt School cultural critics” more convincingly, especially when he so often characterizes Lethem as a nostalgic curator of popular culture up to this point (103).

    That last example is, I think, an instance when Luter tries to force a neater conclusion than might be available, but it is also symptomatic of a tendency to defer to Lethem (Luter makes far more use of Conversations with Jonathan Lethem than he does of existing criticism on Lethem). When, in Chronic City, Chase takes a copy of Obstinate Dust by Ralph Warden Meeker, evoking Infinite Jest by David Foster Wallace, and throws it into a pit to rid himself of its “asymmetrical sink-weight” (Lethem qtd. in Luter 85), Luter rather generously asks:

    What better way for Lethem to reject thoroughly the anxiety of influence than to have his protagonist buy a copy of (something clearly quite analogous to) the book to which his own novel might be reasonably compared, only to have said protagonist then throw that book into an actual abyss. (85)

    Luter concludes his study by saying that Lethem is “[u]ninterested in viewing these influences as a weighty past,” and yet here is the influence as “sink-weight” and Luter doesn’t press the point (113). His book is understandably tasked with understanding Lethem, but it could also have more explicitly questioned Lethem and specifically what he means by ecstatic influence and how he seeks to embody it in his writing. That said, this insightful and instructive book unquestionably provides an excellent introduction to the key works, opens new avenues for exploration, and contributes much to Lethem studies.

    Footnotes

    1. Gun, with Occasional Music (1994), briefly discussed in Chapter 2; Amnesia Moon (1995); As She Climbed across the Table (1997); and Girl in Landscape (1998), briefly considered in the introduction.

    2. This Shape We’re In (2000).

    3. Believeniks! (2006), with Christopher Sorrentino.

    4. Omega the Unknown (2007–08), written with Karl Rusnak, with art by Farel Dalrymple and Paul Hornschemeier.

    5. Luter further describes how Perkus turns to “work as a curatorial impulse” (Lethem qtd. in Luter 93), but curating creates only “a solipsistic monument” (Luter 93); Perkus “discovers the use value of art” (95), but “the solipsism is still there” (96); he “is remixing another artwork he likes … but he is doing it badly” (96); and for him, “to live is to interpret” (96), but “he has walled himself off from more experiences than he will ever realize” (97). In the end, it is not entirely clear how Luter wants us to interpret Perkus’s relationship to art.

  • Of a Cinematic Construction in Progress

    Louise Burchill (bio)
    University of Melbourne

    A Review of Lippit, Akira Mizuta. Cinema without Reflection: Jacques Derrida’s Echopoiesis and Narcissism Adrift. U of Minnesota P, 2016.

    That there is no sustained reflection on cinema in Jacques Derrida’s corpus, despite its consideration of photography, painting, drawing, architecture and the subject of vision and visuality per se—as well, of course, as philosophy, literature, psychoanalysis, history, law, sexuality, and so on—can be taken as an object of speculative inquiry and pursued in two principal directions. On the one hand, the question or problem is what it is in, or of, cinema that could occasion such an occultation in Derrida’s work. Would not some characteristic of the cinematic apparatus or medium have determined an inattention more apotropaic than merely circumstantial through its resistance to the conceptual constellations comprising Derrida’s thought? And, if cinema is Derrida’s blind spot, what specifically is he incapable of countenancing, or simply doesn’t wish to see? On the other hand, should the lack of any rigorous reflection be construed not as a problem but as an indication that a Derridean “theory of film” is rather to be gleaned by refraction—that is to say, in the light cast on cinema within other trajectories of his thought—then a very different line of inquiry is opened up. Here the question is neither “what (is it) about cinema?” nor “why not cinema?” but rather “where, then, in Derrida’s oeuvre, is cinema to be found?”

    In Screen/Play (1989), the first book on Derrida and cinema, Peter Brunette and David Wills responded to the latter question with the unabashed affirmation of “everywhere”—as adduced principally by deconstructive deliberations on (or “around”) framing and supplementation: “Given that everything he writes about a medium is precisely that, about or around it—in other words concerned as much with the separation between inside and outside as anything else—what would he have to have written before we could say he had written on cinema?” (99). Everything Derrida wrote—which was, as the authors note, predominantly in reference to literary and philosophical questions in the period their book was published— would then be potentially applicable to film theory, with Brunette and Wills thus taking up the task of “translating” Derrida’s concept of writing to the medium of cinema. One review of Brunette and Wills’s book aptly notes that their application or translation of “writing” to cinema “dissipate[s] the phenomenality of film into the recesses of an allegorical (literary) theory,” incurring thereby the loss of cinematic specificity (1131). That review is all the more apposite here because its author, Akira Mizuta Lippit, has now written in his turn a book (or perhaps more accurately, a book-in-progress) on the theory of cinema “adrift” in Derrida’s corpus.

    As indicated by its title, Cinema without Reflection equally follows the line of inquiry for which Derrida’s lack of reflection on cinema is not in itself a matter of interrogation: such speculative absence being of “no concern for those who have nonetheless perceived the tremors and evocations of the cinematic in this philosopher’s writings,” as Lippit put it in his review of Screen/Play (1130). Yet no less than Lippit’s criticism of Brunette and Wills’s “construct[ing] the premises of cinema within the confines of the grammatical,” these lines presage the difference between Lippit’s critical endeavor and that of his predecessors. Rather than apply to cinema concepts elaborated in respect to other (literary or philosophical) objects of inquiry, Lippit proposes to chart the topoi in Derrida’s thought that “appear to point towards cinema” and which thereby deictically compose “a secret thesis on film”—a “scrypt” deposed by Derrida, “elsewhere” (2). Of course (and in all fairness to Brunette and Wills), the years separating the publication of their book from Lippit’s saw the omnivorous extension of deconstructive schemas to just about every field or problematic one can think of, including a multiplication of texts by Derrida on photography and other visual arts that might seem particularly propitious for a deictic delineation of a covert theory of cinema.1 Even more pertinently, from the mid-90s on, Derrida was to make a number of interventions in the field of cinema itself. For example, he appeared as both actor and subject—or, as he put it, “an Actor who plays the role of himself”—in three films, a documentary and two “docufictions,” respectively released in 1994, 1999, and 2005 (although Derrida’s cinematic debut actually dates from 1983, when he appeared in the experimental film by Ken McMullen, Ghost Dance). Several important interviews about, or touching on, cinema—often themselves filmed and all of which relate, in part at least, to the films in which Derrida plays his “autobiographical role”—also date from this period, as does a text again addressing one of his cinematic forays (“Letters on a Blind Man: Punctum caecum”). For Akira Lippit, these “on-screen” and on-the-screen interventions are absolutely crucial; they are the veritable site—a medium-specific site—of Derrida’s film theory: “If Derrida has indeed formulated such a theory,” he stipulates, “then it is performative, which is to say, it takes place in taking place— a site-specific theory of film that occurs on screen” (21).

    This site-specific performativity accrues more than one sense over the course of Lippit’s argument. First and foremost, it refers to the fact that Derrida’s theory of film is, for Lippit, enacted and delivered within the frame of film itself, such that “Derrida’s cinema,” albeit “without reflection,” is nonetheless actualized and instantiated in voice and images. One such instantiation Lippit returns to repeatedly is the scene from Ghost Dance in which Derrida first declares himself to be a ghost before setting down the “algebraic formulation”: “Cinema plus psychoanalysis equals a science of ghosts” (Derrida, Echographies 117). This is indeed one of Derrida’s most incisive declarations of cinema’s affinity with spectrality but, in addition, as Lippit emphasizes, we witness here Derrida “yield[ing] to the phantom”:

    Because he is playing himself in a film, Derrida says he lets the phantom (his voice and image) speak on his behalf. It takes over and takes his place; he yields to it, but it also becomes him and marks his return . . . The other Derrida on-screen is a phantom second person (you) that takes his place. (31–32)

    In this spectral scene, Derrida is indeed presenting his film thesis in a performative mode, yet he is equally—in a second, “theatrical,” sense of performativity—performing himself, even if this entails his “playing […] an Actor who was, as it were, playing myself” (Derrida, Tourner 74). It is the inextricable intertwinement of these two performative occurrences—Derrida’s saying and doing his theory of cinema on screen, and Derrida’s playing himself in a phantom exchange of “one Derrida for the other”—that comprises, in fact, the medium-based articulation of Derrida’s film theory as Lippit understands it. This articulation therefore determines the topoi in Derrida’s oeuvre that “point towards cinema”: namely, spectrality, autobiography, and narcissism. These three topoi or discourses—themselves intertwined and interwoven in Derrida’s site-specific interventions—structure Lippit’s exegesis of Derrida’s “secret” film theory; his text tempering in this way, one might say, the extravagance of Brunette and Wills’s claim that a theory of film exists potentially “everywhere” in Derrida’s oeuvre.

    Yet the final pages of Lippit’s text introduce a topological complication in the context of returning to the medium-based performativity of Derrida’s film theory, now endowed with a third sense. The cinematic scene that prompts, or performs, this complication is less Derrida’s instantiation of his phantom status in Ghost Dance (though this does equally haunt Lippit’s analyses here) than his reflection on the myth of Echo and Narcissus in Amy Kofman and Kirby Dick’s Derrida. Situating Ovid’s tale of metamorphosis as a “privileged narrative” throughout Derrida’s oeuvre, Lippit writes that it provides “an illustration and orchestration of Derrida’s film thesis” (35) because—in addition to its invocation of voice and image, reflection and repetition—it finds its resolution in the recognition that subjectivity is irreducibly derived from the other (such that I discover myself “in the form of another, in another’s form—image and voice—in you” [61]). Derrida’s statement on-screen that he is “acting as both Narcissus and Echo at one and the same time” is, that said, what specifically informs Lippit’s final rendition of the “medium specificity” articulated by Derrida’s film theory. As is the case predominantly throughout Lippit’s text, this thesis is less set out constatively, in a series of argued points, than (at least at first) by way of paraphrase, reiteration, and word association. If Derrida acts as both Echo and Narcissus, he is, Lippit glosses, “[i]n the middle, mediating between Echo and Narcissus, . . . their medium” (61). From this, Lippit adduces that the specificity Derrida would attribute to cinema as a medium is neither formal nor technical (pace Greenberg or Krauss), but related to “the specific place of the medium in the middle” (61). Certainly, this definition gestures towards the cinematic techniques of “eyeline” and what Lippit names “echophony,” both of which enable a spectral exchange or “channeling” of voices and images, and thereby the transition of subjectivities: another’s voice allows me to speak on my behalf; my image becoming another’s “leads me to you” (60). However, this “medium” or “in the middle” is ultimately to be understood in a performative sense: “In this scenario Derrida is himself the medium” (61). That is, Derrida is “in the middle,” mediating qua “spiritual medium” the cinematic transaction of voice and image, but this role or place of in-between also marks Derrida himself, with “medium” now to be understood as “the place where phantom subjectivity takes shape.” Lippit immediately qualifies this place as the “trace of subjectivity”—a place, he states, that Derrida designated “already, long ago,” Derrida having in this sense “always been thinking about cinema in one form or another” (62). With this assertion, however, not only does Derrida’s medium-based performativity abruptly exit the confines of the film frame, as it were, but the place of cinema in Derrida’s oeuvre—in its qualification as “the place of the trace,” “always already,” “in one form or another”—exceeds its refraction in the discourses on narcissism, spectrality and autobiography, ultimately laying a claim to … everywhere.

    II

    Once identified as the medium where spectral subjectivity takes shape—and thereby the place designated by Derrida from the very beginning for the play of the trace—cinema would, then, always-already be found everywhere in his oeuvre. That Lippit’s contention replicates, in its underlying logic, Brunette and Wills’s claim of cinema’s omnipresence in Derrida’s thought does not mean, however, that it likewise incurs the loss of cinematic specificity. Locating cinema’s singularity in its instantiation of the logic of the trace pinpoints with far more acuity than do professions of cinema’s “writtenness” the topos in Derrida’s thinking that displays the greatest “proximity to the topographies and matrices of the cinematic apparatus” (to cite once again Lippit’s Screen/Play review; 1130). It is also counter-signed by Derrida himself when he insists that everything he advances concerning spectrality—and, hence, the “essence” of cinema qua an unprecedented instantiation of spectral logic—is informed by his deconstruction of Husserl’s living present, which was to reveal, of course, a constitutive play of traces at the very heart of the latter: at once the index of a “past that had never been present” and an irreducible exteriority preventing any identity to be closed within a proper “punctiform” interiority. This “radicalization of phenomenology”2 does indeed inform everything Derrida wrote, his deconstructive logic or matrix first devised in respect of philosophy/phenomenology spawning a multitude of paleonymic strategies in relation to the multifarious and disparate objects he was to focus on. Let us retrace our steps, therefore, back from “everywhere” to “medium specificity,” and turn now to the way in which Lippit would have us understand cinema’s configuration within Derrida’s deconstructive matrix—qua the place, let us say, of the trace of subjectivity.

    In keeping with Derrida’s pronouncements on spectrality and cinema, the opening chapter of Cinema without Reflection sets off from the scene in Ghost Dance in which Derrida both proclaims and performs this cinematic spectrality, with Lippit focusing here on not only Derrida’s algebraic formulation but equally his preceding definition (or demonstration): “cinema . . . is the art of allowing phantoms to return.” Lippit immediately glosses this definition in terms that resonate with what he will later designate “phantom narcissism”: “It [cinema] is the advent of oneself as another, as a phantom second person, ‘you’” (7). This inflection of Derrida’s own analysis of cinema’s spectrality and (thereby) specificity is significant. If “cinema is spectral in its very essence” for Derrida, this follows from its “structural specificity” of reproducing the event, scene or person captured by the camera with such an effect of “proximity” that this filmic inscription appears “live” and/or “living” (Echographies 39). In keeping with the deconstructive logic instantiated by cinematic spectrality, this “restitution of the living present” nevertheless bears death and absence within itself, insofar as these are structurally inscribed in any means of reproduction, however “live” or “im-mediate” its re-presentations appear. Crucially, Lippit later explicitly disagrees with claims that situate cinema’s specificity in such effects of “liveness,” and his refutation thereby encompasses the structural specificity adduced by Derrida, even if this is in no way acknowledged. In lieu of cinema’s unprecedented capacity of “’quasi presentation’ of an ‘itself there’ of the world whose past will be, forever, radically absent,”3 Lippit once again promotes the motif of phantom narcissism: “the singularity of cinema [is] not that it projects images and sounds as if live but that it brings the image and sound together into an impossible metonymy of the subject, of myself” (43).

    Whatever Derrida’s own pronouncements on cinema’s specificity, the secret film thesis to which his work points—if one attends to its deictic constellations and to the flashes and glimpses therein of a hidden “scrypt”—would be this: cinema’s singularity is that it is an apparatus of phantom identification, a machine that “allows one to believe another’s image, another’s voice, to be one’s own, as an image and voice proper to oneself, but also as one, image and voice” (43). That this unavowed thesis, “articulated without the use of its proper name” (57), would be uncovered by the analytic method of deciphering a script “written elsewhere” recalls to us quite simply (however evident be this point) its status as a construction: Derrida’s secret film thesis is, by definition, a thesis that Lippit assembles or pieces together on the basis of the material at his disposal, the traces he surmises this thesis to have left behind. Thus his way of proceeding less by constative or argumentative exposition of the discursive topoi he singles out in Derrida’s corpus than by recourse to word, or thematic, association, and the reiteration—or echoing—of Derrida’s statements in order to inflect and open these to a new, hitherto secret, implication (in accordance with his notion of echopoiesis?). In this light, though, the question confronting the reader of Cinema without Reflection is less the purport of Lippit’s Derridean film thesis per se than whether this thesis is constructed in a manner that “holds.” Whatever one might think of the thesis, it is the viability, the consistency, or indeed—to use Freud’s criterion—the “correctness” of its construction that must be pondered. As a film theory imputed to Derrida, does it, when all is said and done, hold up?

    III

    Lippit’s construction—his crafting of the discourses of spectrality, narcissism and autobiography into Derrida’s secret thesis—may be seen to wobble, waiver, and, on the whole, founder at a number of crucial junctures. Of the two such instances to be considered here, the first and clearest consists in attributing to Derrida an argument he is in fact contesting but which Lippit nonetheless draws on in order to bolster his contention that cinema’s phantom narcissism is at once constitutive and revelatory of a subjectivity always achieved only in the second person, such that “you” would be the subject’s most proper, and secret, name. According to Lippit, Derrida endorses this conception of the subject’s secret proper name when, in the context of a discussion on psychoanalysis and the history of the names in one’s life, he states:

    the ideal pole or conclusion of analysis would be the possibility of addressing the patient using his or her most proper name, possibly the most secret. It is the moment, then, when the analyst would say to the patient ‘you’ in such a way that there would be no possible misunderstanding on the subject of this ‘you.’ (“Roundtable” 107)

    However, Derrida is not here stating a position he himself holds, but is paraphrasing the stance of his interlocutor (Patrick Mahony) in order to mark his disagreement. “Pure address” or “a secret proper name” is impossible, Derrida immediately counters (now speaking in his “proper voice”), because

    the most secret proper name has its effect of a proper name only by risking contamination and detour within a system of relations . . . I can never be sure when someone says to me . . . ‘you, you,’ that it might not be just any old ‘you.’ . . . This is inscribed in the most general structure of the mark. (“Roundtable” 107)

    One cannot conclude, as does Lippit, that “Derrida’s proper name that comes at the end of psychoanalysis” can equally be said to end in cinema (with this shared status of endpoint following from cinema’s being “also the site in which a proper name appears . . . the apparition of this second person ‘you’ where I am” [30–31]). Quite simply: because there is not for Derrida a proper name that comes at the end of psychoanalysis, any film thesis constructed on the basis of a claim or misreading to the contrary cannot be attributed to him—not even were this a thesis that, by virtue of its being secret, would purportedly be all the “more properly” Derrida’s for being without the insignia of its proper name.

    The second instance of Lippit’s “instable construction” also relates to phantom narcissism’s exchange of one singularity for another, focusing in this case on the place in Derrida’s oeuvre where the thesis that subjectivity is constituted from the outside would show itself to be deictically indexed to cinema. Lippit finds this in Derrida’s reading of Roland Barthes’s Camera Lucida (a text seeking to define the nature, or eidos, of photography), which Lippit intertwines with propositions extrapolated from Barthes’s text itself. Put as succinctly as possible: Lippit’s construction is based on the “superposition” (19) to cinema of Barthes’s concept of the punctum, a fortuitous element in a photo that provokes a sudden emotional response in the viewer, quite unlike the general interest (the “studium”) solicited by the photograph’s “subject” or “signification.” Lippit then refracts Derrida’s reading of the punctum as “the site of metonymy, of an illicit, even supernatural, exchangeability” (12) firmly in the direction of a secret film thesis. Yet the punctum as “site of metonymy” only yields its full resources for filmic narcissism—on, and for, Lippit’s argument/construction— when understood to pass “from the outside” into the spectator’s body. Only “once it enters the body” does its singularity, on the one hand, become metonymic and thereby pluralize itself, “mak[ing] possible the exchange of one singularity for another, me for you” (13). On the other hand, and at the same time, the irreducible singularity and unique referentiality Barthes attributes to the punctum are shown to be “an effect of the outside, of an external light that enters into the system of representation through a puncture on the human body” (13). Here, Lippit mobilizes Barthes’s etymologically-inspired description of the punctum’s singular and “poignant” affect as “piercing, wounding, bruising, pricking” the viewer. The punctum’s force of puncture becomes indissociably intertwined with the motif of the eyes qua “punctures in the body” in Lippit’s construction (12), as well as with the cinematic convention of the “eye-line,” to which Derrida refers in relation to Ghost Dance. When re-watching this film several years after its making, Derrida was to re-share, as it were, an eye-line with the actress Pascale Ogier, who had since died—and who was indeed reappearing therefore, as one come back from the dead, to confirm the existence of ghosts. For Lippit, this experience exemplifies “the phantom economy of an eye-line,” on which he calls to consolidate his construction of a film thesis instating subjectivity to come from the outside: as an eye-line without symmetry—no reciprocity and no reflexivity being possible in the field of vision between a ghost and the living (14)—the phantom gaze “turns,” states Lippit, “me into you” (15). Which is equally to say—via a citation from Lacan on subjectivity’s constitution by the gaze, and Barthes’ description of the photograph as literally an emanation of the referent, “entering the spectator’s interiority through the force of puncture” (17)—that “I,” the subject/spectator, is “constituted from the outside” (16).

    What makes this construction problematic is not simply (as in the instance of misquotation above) that it attributes to Derrida a stance he did not hold, and with which he would not hold; it is also the confusion and confounding of things he did say with positions foreign to his own and which he sought in fact to deconstruct. I shall attempt to demonstrate, or unravel, (some of) this confusion by way of but two remarks.

    1/ To attribute to Derrida the thesis that the punctum’s seeming irreplaceability and unicity are an effect of “an external light” entering into the system of representation “through a puncture on the human body” is to attribute to him mutatis mutandis a position that he ceaselessly subjected to deconstruction from 1967 on: namely, that of an “originary impression” that would be the source or absolute beginning of the movement of constitution within—to use Lippit’s terms—the system of representation. Derrida identifies this position with Husserlian phenomenology, and it is, as such, significant that he recasts Barthes’s claims for photography qua an emanation of a past reality—of that which has taken place only once—as an echo of Husserl’s insistence that whatever is constituted in intentionality is first of all conditional upon an originary, punctual impression that is necessarily foreign to the intentional movement itself (Copy 8–9). Here it suffices to note Derrida’s succinct refutation of Barthes’s qualification of the photograph as a luminous emanation of the referent, by which the rays of light having touched a real body before the camera lens would be transmitted to the viewer: “what Barthes calls ‘emanation’ . . . is not a ray of light” (Echographies 122).

    2/ Derrida does indeed locate a site of metonymy in the punctum. Moreover, as Lippit states, he does so “following Barthes” insofar as Barthes recognizes in the punctum a force of metonymy. Yet Derrida adduces that, drawn thereby into a general exchangeability, the punctum’s singularity “pluralizes itself” such that “the unique” is immediately, and everywhere, repeated. This development, far from following Barthes—for whom the punctum’s metonymic force entails neither substitutability nor generality of address (Camera 73)—seeks instead to unsettle, dismantle, or simply disqualify the latter’s notion of “the referent” qua the necessarily real thing having been present before the camera lens and, as such, an indubitably singular occurrence that conjoins past presence and reality. Derrida’s and Barthes’s differend in this respect—pertaining to nothing less than the very nature, or eidos, of, let us say, (cinematic) perception/representation—is hardly minimal: Barthes’s notion of the referent, like the punctum that is inseparable from it, runs directly counter to Derrida’s deconstructive tenet that “the manifest evidence of an originary presence” can only be referred to within the movement of differance—the “play of the trace”—as an “absolute past” (Grammatology 72).

    This being the case, surely one should pause before amalgamating the resources of Derrida’s and Barthes’s respective determinations of the punctum? Let me be clear: to detect in Derrida’s deconstructive reading of Barthes a discursive development that points towards film—the punctum as the site of metonymy, of substitutability, “the metonymy of the phantasy of the eye,” “metonymy of the world,” “everything everywhere”—is one thing; to conjoin and confound this deictic constellation with themes extrapolated from Barthes’s own determinations of the photographic punctum and referent—eyes as punctures through which the punctum passes, the latter’s emanation of external light irradiating the body: becoming the “metonymy of the body,” as well too, as the point of contact, or eye-line, between two bodies: me and you—is quite another. Such a confusion of contradictory theses yields a film theory that would configure cinema’s “place of phantom subjectivity” (the place of the play of the trace) as, on the one hand, dependent on an originary impression irreducible to consciousness, entering by “puncture” from the outside, thereby conjoining—on Barthes’s understanding— past presence and reality; whereas, on the other hand, it would itself be what determines any such (notion of) originary impression as an “absolute past,” with the play of the trace understood here as “the memory of something never having had the form of being present.” In short, for this inconsistent, hybrid theory to be Derridean, Derrida would have had both to deny and to recognize cinema to call into question deconstruction’s foreclosure of an alterity irreducible to the internal workings of an auto-affective apparatus.

    The claim that cinema’s singularity consists for Derrida in its instantiation of the logic of the trace—that this is where Derrida’s thinking displays the greatest proximity to the topographies and matrices of the cinematic apparatus—is a thesis, a line of speculative inquiry, well worth pursuing. In his prefatory remarks, Lippit describes Cinema without Reflection as “a draft, sketch or design” of a work perhaps to come4; a description that aligns with the University of Minnesota’s “Forerunners” series, which publishes works “written between fresh ideas and finished books.” For Lippit’s sketch to be “finished,” the film thesis attributed to Derrida would best be fleshed out, I would advance, not only by tempering its inconsistencies with a stronger general construction but, equally, by reprising the idea at its source.

    Footnotes

    1. Derrida had, however, written texts relating to both photography and painting before 1989; notably, “The Deaths of Roland Barthes,” Right of Inspection and The Truth in Painting (published in French respectively in 1981, 1985 and 1978). These three texts are, moreover, mobilized by Brunette and Wills in their argument for the relevance of the schema of “framing” to cinema.

    2. See Note 6 in Chapter 5 of Specters of Marx (189).

    3. “Cinema and Its Ghosts: An Interview with Jacques Derrida.” By Antoine de Baecque & Thierry Jousse. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. Discourse, Vol. 37, No. 1–2 (Winter/Spring 2015), p. 33.

    4. Cinema without Reflection is, it should be noted, a revised and slightly amplified version of an article published in Discourse in 2015 and comprises, as such, a small volume of but some 70 pages. Lippit’s reading of Freud’s “On Narcissism” constitutes the major addition to the original text.

    Works Cited

    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida. Reflections on Photography. Translated by Richard Howard, Hill & Wang, 1981.
    • Brunette, Peter and David Wills. Screen/Play. Derrida and Film Theory. Princeton UP, 1989.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Copy, Archive, Signature. A Conversation on Photography. Edited by Gerhard Richter, translated by Jeff Fort, Stanford UP, 2010.
    • ———. Of Grammatology. Translated by Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Johns Hopkins UP, 2016.
    • ———. “Roundtable on Translation.” The Ear of the Other: Otobiography, Transference, Translation. Edited by Christie V. McDonald, translated by Peggy Kamuf, Schocken, 1985.
    • ———, and Safaa Fathy. Tourner les mots. Au bord d’un film. Galilée/Arte, 2000.
    • ———, and Bernard Stiegler. Echographies of Television: Filmed Interviews. Translated by Jennifer Bajorek, Polity Press, 2002.
    • ——— “Cinema and Its Ghosts: An Interview with Jacques Derrida.” By Antoine de Baecque & Thierry Jousse, translated by Peggy Kamuf, Discourse, Vol. 37, No. 1–2 (Winter/Spring 2015), pp. 22–39.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Constructions in Analysis.” Standard Edition 23. Hogarth Press, 1964, pp. 257–269.
    • Lippit, Akira Mizuta. Review of Screen/Play. MLN 105 no. 5, 1990, pp. 1130–1133.
  • The Brink of Continuity (on Ashbery)

    Charles Bernstein (bio)
    University of Pennsylvania

    On September 5, 2017, a few days after John Ashbery died, Le Monde published an obituary for him by Olivier Brossard: “Pour le poète américain, l’écriture était ouverture, fuite ou fugue, le refus d’une identité ou d’un poème qui soient clos ou définis à jamais”: For this American poet, writing was an opening, flight or fugue, the refusal of an identity for a poem that is closed or defined forever.

    I appreciate that Brossard addresses the identity of the poem in this opening paragraph, something sometimes lost in America, where there is so much attention given to the identity of the poet that the identity of the poem is eclipsed.

    Not that a poem can ever be separated from the person who wrote it.

    It’s just that with a poem you start with the flight and fugue of the words, not with what the poem represents.

    The day Ashbery died, the New York Times posted an obituary by its official obituary writer, the talented Dinitia Smith (with “Maggie Astor and David Orr contributed reporting” appended at the end). The oddest thing about Smith’s obit (O-1) was a paragraph on Ashbery’s relation to his parents:

    When I was about 3 or 4 years old, [my father] said to me one day, ‘Who do you love more, me or your mother?’ and I said, ‘My mother.’”

    No doubt the bored masses of Times readers could find at least this something they could relate to. I might have said the same to my father when I was three, but I hope it doesn’t land in any obituaries.

    Smith had the historical sense to mention Barbara Guest as one of the company of poets most closely associated with Ashbery, even if she called “Frank O’Hara” John, which I am sure Ashbery and O’Hara would have found amusing:

    Mr. Ashbery was originally associated with the New York school of poetry of the 1950s and ’60s, joining Kenneth Koch, Barbara Guest, John O’Hara and others as they swam in the currents of modernism, surrealism and Abstract Expressionism then coursing through the city, drawing from and befriending artists like Jackson Pollock, Willem de Kooning and Jane Freilicher.

    When David Orr’s byline was added to Smith’s the next morning (O-2), “Frank” was back and the poets were no longer “swimming in the currents of modernism” but, less aptly, reveling. And alas! Guest was out and the New York School was just guys:

    Mr. Ashbery was originally associated with the New York school of poetry of the 1950s and ’60s, joining Kenneth Koch, James Schuyler, Frank O’Hara and others as they reveled in the currents of modernism.

    The anecdote about the poet’s mother was also excised, making way for a bit more ideological clean-up.

    David Orr is most notable for his April 2, 2006, front-page Times Book Review rave for a favorite of Ashbery’s, Elizabeth Bishop. The piece begins:

    You are living in a world created by Elizabeth Bishop. Granted, our culture owes its shape to plenty of other forces — Hollywood, Microsoft, Rachael Ray — but nothing matches the impact of a great artist, and in the second half of the 20th century, no American artist in any medium was greater than Bishop (1911–79).

    This claim is so wacky that it can only be understood as a fetish for Bishop and her patron Robert Lowell, two of the central ideological icons of Cold War Official Verse Culture. And like all such fetishes, it reduces the poetry to propaganda.

    Ashbery and his New American Poetry comrades were the proponents of an alternative to the “cooked” (a.k.a. half-baked) poetry of Official Verse Culture – sometimes called “raw,” meaning grounded in process. (Lowell makes the deceptive distinction between open-form “raw” poems and closed-form “cooked” poems in his 1960 National Book Award acceptance speech.) So Brossard’s elegant Ashberian phrase, “clos ou définis à jamais,” is quite specific and delightfully so.

    O-1 mentions a key issue of Cold War aesthetic ideology –

    But [Ashbery’s] most significant artistic relationships were with other poets, including James Schuyler, who were rebelling against the formalism of Allen Tate and Robert Lowell.

    O-2 deletes this statement and with it any sense that this poet, now beloved of all, was “rebelling” against anything. In the Orr-revised version, Ashbery’s “Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror” – long can(n)on fodder for those conservative critics who dismissed much of Ashbery’s earlier work along with that of his more radical contemporaries – is juxtaposed with Harold Bloom’s triumphalist claims for Ashbery. Yet also cut from O-2 is this tender morsel about “Self-Portrait,” which found its way into Smith’s first version:

    Though it became the signature piece in the collection that won Mr. Ashbery the Pulitzer and other prizes, Mr. Ashbery had reservations about the poem. “It’s not one of my favorite poems, despite all the attention,” he said. “I was always very unsure of the quality.”

    Ashbery’s comment is a marvel of wit and self-consciousness. Ashbery also distanced himself from the book many of us on the L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E side of the street especially liked, The Tennis Court Oath. At one point, Ashbery said it was the only poem of his we liked, which certainly wasn’t true for me, but this, again, was Ashbery’s way of deconstructing (there I’ve said it) false boundaries. He said somewhere he didn’t want his work to become a political football. There was no American poet more adept at eliding polemic and refusing mantles.

    Ashbery resisted becoming a polarizing figure because of the exquisite demands of his aesthetic. His greatness is connected to his poetics of aversion, deftness, deflection, humor, and, above all, privacy. For Ashbery privacy is a kind of politics, as is not wanting to be pinned down. This is one of many qualities in his work that is fundamental for me.

    Both versions of the Times obit included a British authority’s put down of Ashbery as “boring.” Both have a quote from a Times review that calls Ashbery “incomprehensible,” but in a possibly OK way; still, an offhand slap at poetic difficulty that traffics in anti-intellectuality and anti-aestheticism. O-2 both resists the aesthetic and claims its mantle. The shibboleth of “human experience” is meant to anoint with a humanist piety that is explicitly anti-political and nondenominational:

    But if his poetry is rarely argumentative or polemical, this does not mean it avoids the more difficult areas of human experience.

    O-2’s revisions gut the polemical force of Ashbery’s argument for poetic freedom, drift, and the imagination, uncontrolled by the forces of rationalization and accessibility:

    But while other eminent poets of his generation became widely known for social activism (Adrienne Rich and Gary Snyder, for example) or forays into fiction (James Dickey) or the details of their own harrowing lives (Sylvia Plath), Mr. Ashbery was known primarily for one thing: writing poetry.

    Orr and collaborators erase the key New American Poets of Ashbery’s generation outside the New York School – Amiri Baraka, Robert Creeley, Jackson Mac Low, Allen Ginsberg, Jack Spicer, Hannah Weiner (the list could go on) – in favor of apparently more mainstream poets, only to make the claim that they are less significant as artists than as icons, something each of these poets worked fiercely against. Ashbery no more resists becoming iconic than any of these poets; he is just iconic in his own way.

    Here is Orr & Co.’s coup de grace (a passage not in O-1):

    Charles McGrath, the editor of The New York Times Book Review from 1995 to 2004, recalled that a large portion of new poetry titles during his tenure could be (and often were) tossed into a pile labeled “Ashbery impersonations.” And Mr. Ashbery remains far and away the most imitated American poet.

    The authority of McGrath and Orr is based on their mutual pledges of allegiance to Lowell and Bishop –– not as poets, but as Cold War icons, forged in McGrath’s case by his long apprenticeship to New Yorker editor William Shawn. In a June 2003 piece, McGrath is worshipful of Lowell while condescending to Ginsberg as a “self-caricature” and dismissive of contemporary poets unable to be as serious as his “master”:

    Unlike so many contemporary poets, Lowell never wrote poetry about poetry, or worried about the insufficiency of words to stand for what they signify. Lowell may have belonged to the last generation to believe seriously in the poetic vocation.

    I suppose the swipe about poets who write about poetry is a reference to Ashbery; if not, it might as well have been. But McGrath’s remark about the “insufficiency of words to stand for what they signify” is the give-away; what Ashbery shows, as Brossard notes, is the sufficiency of words to say more than “what they signify.” To say otherwise is not just to dismiss Ashbery or the rest of us, but to dismiss the possibility of poetry and, indeed, of language.

    It is to consign us to the tawdry world of poets as icons.

    While there are many imitators of Ashbery, though no more than imitators of other poets, the McGrath quote in O-2 suggests that those who depart from the straight and narrow of convention, who follow Ashbery’s example of freedom, will be put in the discard pile. The burden of this obituary is to make Ashbery the exception, not the rule. It buries Ashbery in praising him.

    But we know from Ashbery, hero of the pataquerical: once discarded, twice derided, thrice’s the trick:

    So many of these things have been discarded, and they now tower on the brink of the continuity, hemming it in like dark crags above a valley stream. ––“The System,” Three Poems

    Works Cited

  • Survive Style 5+ and the Ethics of Creative Advertising

    Phillip Lobo (bio)
    University of Southern California

    Abstract

    This paper examines an exemplary piece of Japanese postmodern cinema, Sekiguchi Gen’s Survive Style 5+ (2004), in relation to the ethical quandaries and tensions that emerged around the practice of advertising during the so-called “creative revolution” in Japan. Drawing on the concept of the fetish in Marxist and Freudian discourse, as well as anthropological research and theories of translation, it shows how the film critiques the idea that advertising can act as a universal translator of desire in contemporary consumer capitalism through its use of jokes, style, and celebrity culture.

    This paper examines an exemplary piece of Japanese postmodern cinema, Sekiguchi Gen’s Survive Style 5+ (2004), in relation to the ethical quandaries that emerged around the practice of advertising during the so-called “creative revolution” in Japan. The debates in Japan during the 1980s and 90s are paradigmatic of the privileged place that advertising holds in the discourse of postmodernity, both as an object of critique and as a field of new signifying possibilities; in either case, advertising is seen as central to the formation of the subject of global capitalism. The popular and academic conversations in Japan during the creative revolution explicitly enlisted the language and methods of advertising to propose solutions to the problematic of global, postmodern identity, pitting the national myth of a traditional Japanese identity against the reality of Japan’s prominence as a global player in trade and media. As a participant in the larger cinematic conversation about the problem of postmodern identity, Survive Style 5+ is an ideal object of study because it benefits from the director’s experience of the advertising industry during its high-water mark in Japan. Sekiguchi’s film looks critically on the heady hopes of that time, but refuses to retreat into traditionalist nostalgia. It therefore provides a distinctive take on the still open question of the global subject. Drawing on the concept of the fetish in Marxist and Freudian discourse, as well as anthropological research and theories of translation, this essay outlines how Survive Style 5+ demonstrates a central paradox in the ethical tenets behind “creative advertising.” The film critiques the possibility that advertising can serve as a universal translator of desire in contemporary consumer capitalism, a notion that reached its apogee in Japan during the 1980s and 90s. Reflecting on the promises of the economic bubble of that era, but fully cognizant of their disappointment in “post-bubble” Japan, Survive Style 5+ addresses issues of identity that continue to reverberate through the Japanese cultural imaginary. By examining how the film addresses these issues in relation to the complexities and contradictions of contemporary consumerism, it lends broader insights into the role of advertising in the formation of those identities, in the Japanese as well as the wider global context.

    I’ve got to write about Sekiguchi Gen’s Survive Style 5+ if only so it might stop haunting me. A hyperkinetic, hyper-saturated piece of postmodern cinematic excess, it has lodged itself in my memory, where it bounces around the interior of my skull, resisting my best efforts to pin it down. I feel myself in the position of the Asano Tadanobu’s wife-killing character, Aman, trying endlessly to put this film to rest, alternately battering, dismembering, or immolating it with various critical weapons only to have it reassemble itself, not unmarked by my scholarly sallies, but rather stronger and more resilient for its scars. Part of my confusion is a product of the film’s own heedless self-celebration; its high postmodern style and its concussively bright pomo-rococo visual design can blind a watcher whose vision isn’t properly polarized. Its form, too, is paradigmatically postmodern, composed of a series interwoven stories that collide and react with one another in a fragmented cascade that makes it difficult to write about, because discussing any single scene implicates many related scenes. But for me, the real sticking point has been and remains the indeterminate foreignness of the film: indeterminate because it isn’t clear where it is simply strange to me because of my paucity of linguistic and cultural context, and where it is actually or – rather – meant to be strange. My perplexity need not be any deeper than the gulf of language, a lack of shared referents and a question of all-important comic timing. How, then, to distinguish what is lost in translation from what is added in translation? What does the film tell us about the task of translation itself and its means of mediation?

    This difficulty is most clearly demonstrated in the film by the recurring imaginings of Yoko, a commercial executive played by Koizumi Kyôko.1 She first appears lying in bed after an astoundingly brief round of intercourse with Aoyama, an odious but successful stage hypnotist played by Abe Hiroshi. Two plastic toys on the bedside table analogize their brief coupling: a pink bunny falls onto its back, spent, while the stick-legged faun it was bumping against continues to shiver, unsatisfied. However inadequate an encounter, it proves inspirational to Yoko, whose creative process manifests as a rapid blinking of her eyes and a dawning smile while a funky leitmotif plays in the background, ending in a compensatorily orgasmic “Oh yeah!” She dresses, gets up, grabs her dictaphone – a complexly embellished object marked with a crowned eye, another ongoing motif – and promptly records an advertisement idea: “A commercial about a man who’s quick in bed. He comes in three seconds.” This idea then plays out on a screen, depicting several men navigating an obstacle course of standard physical challenges, save for the final hurdle: sexual congress with a young woman. The underdog in the earlier challenges, lagging badly behind, is able to orgasm with such speed that he makes up for his lost time and crosses the finish line while his opponents are still thrusting away. Then the tagline: “Mind Blowingly Quick – For Fast Internet Access, Get SPEED!” (“Survive” 00:07:07-09:00). As with all humor, there is only so much accounting for taste and preference. Still, I thought this segment was funny, and Yoko certainly agrees – her snicker sputters in the exact cadence of self-amusement. Repeated viewings before friends and colleagues reinforce, however anecdotally, the sense that this first commercial is meant to be funny, and that its humor (more or less) manages to translate across the gap of cultural uncertainty. What could be more universal than the experience of unsatisfying sex?

    But as the film progresses and Yoko experiences more moments of inspiration, her “thought up commercials” require more active translation — for example, a segment in which two muppet-ish felt creatures in business suits pour water into holes on the crowns of their heads. It took some research for me to discover these characters are supposed to be kappa, folkloric water sprites. As with all jokes that require research, it failed to strike me as funny. But it also became impossible for me to discern just how funny the commercial might be to someone who did possess the necessary context. Worse still, I didn’t know if it was meant to be funny, how good of a joke it is, and how funny it should be.2 Is Yoko supposed to be making a bad joke? Is the scene funny because the commercial itself is not funny, and that’s the joke?

    Sekiguchi Gen’s own background is in advertising – Survive Style 5+is his only feature-length production – and so Yoko is the nearest thing to a self-insert in the film. This context is critical for understanding his contribution to the wider field of Japanese film that addresses the questions and problematics around the formation of individual identities in tension with traditional modes and foreign influences, which arose in the wake of the increasingly global economy and Japan’s turn-of-the-century recession (Iles 1, 23). Sekiguchi participates in a larger conversation taking place in post-war, post-bubble Japanese culture, not least in the field of cinema. The diffuseness of Survive Style 5+’s narrative is predated by at least as two decades in the work of Itami Jūzō, with his “textbook … postmodern filmmaking” (Iles 23) and its visual vibrancy and genre-defying experimentalism is indebted to the work of even earlier filmmakers such as Suzuki Seijun and Nobuhiko Obayashi.3 Yet these same traits and tendencies can just as easily be attributed to Sekiguchi’s time in the advertising industry, which had embraced postmodern methods with self-conscious enthusiasm (Ivy, “Critical” 33). In fact, the entire film is preoccupied with ethical issues that become clear only when viewed through the tensions at play during Japan’s advertising heyday, in the so-called “creative revolution” of the 80s and 90s. Advertising, one of the most prevalent and universal forms of discourse within late-stage capitalist society, is tasked with a wide variety of translational duties that represent genuine ethical stakes within a culture of corporate consumerism. Rather than view the indeterminacy that troubled me as a matter of obfuscation and ignorance, then, it profits us more to treat indeterminacy itself as central to the film: a problematization of a pro-consumer ethic championed by Japan’s “creative” advertising professionals, whereby the dual operation of advertising – making a product both universal in appeal and singular in its recognition – is in constant and irresolvable tension.

    In his book Ethnography at Work, anthropologist Brian Moeran outlines a drama that has shaped advertising practice and philosophy. Advertising agencies are effectively split into two branches: accounts and creative. The former court and keep paying accounts – the clients from whom the ad agency receives its commission – while the latter produce the copy, images, and campaigns. Traditionally, account workers had more job security and pay, the rationale being that “those who solicit, obtain and maintain accounts are an agency’s lifeline and therefore in some ways superior to those who do not bring in money” (Moeran 82). Creative workers, on the other hand, are tasked with spending client money, a distinction that – however restrained their budget4 – denigrated them by the functional standards of more conservative business practice (82). For watchers of Matt Weiner’s Mad Men, this may sound familiar, and with good reason. The US advertising industry of the 60s – the topic and setting of Weiner’s television program – saw the rise of these allegedly undervalued workers in what has been dubbed the “creative revolution.”5 The industry key change headed up by Sterling & Cooper in the fictional program was led in real life by Madison Avenue agency Doyle Dane Berbach.6 Both production and product changed as a result, leading to the rejection of traditional managerial practice in favor of individual initiative, and a re-prioritization of account management best exemplified by the era’s legendary creative directors walking out on clients who failed to grant them their due creative freedom, or to recognize their genius (Moeran 83). More fundamental, however, was the change in the perceived ethical obligations of advertising agencies, as well as the role of advertising in defining the symbolic function of commodities. During the era of account supremacy, the wishes of the paying clients were paramount, but the rise of creative saw a new commitment to consumers, even an avowed championing of them. As Moeran outlines:

    As advertising came to be seen as an ‘art’, and as creative people came to be regarded as ‘rebels’ against corporate order and general non-conformists, it was homo ludens (the consumer) rather than homo faber (the producer) who became the hero(ine) of the age. Thus were the Puritan values hitherto upheld by manufacturing clients challenged and temporally defeated by a carnivalesque approach to consumption. (85)

    In essence, the advertisers come to represent the interests of the people: not a people of workers – labor disappears when the term “producer” is assigned to the owners – but of consumers. In this model of capitalist liberation, the advertisers speak to and for the people against corporatism, forcing the stuffy, square company owners to give the people what they desire, to answer their wants without judgment. The promise of such a utopia is in keeping with the individualism that consumerism holds sacred, the assurance that every person can find, out the vast variety of products at their disposal, the one commodity that can answer their desires.

    This promise parallels the second change brought about by the rise of creative advertising, a shift that addressed “perhaps the most basic problem in advertising: how to make products that are very similar to one another seem ‘unique’” (Moeran 83). Advertising’s solution to this problem is to produce “visual and linguistic images that [are] themselves ‘unique’” through the practice of branding, a crucial operation in the consumer economy (83). Branding is no less than an attempt to grant proper name status — what Derrida calls “the reference of a pure signifier to a single being” (105) — upon the advertised commodity, to give it an untranslatable quality that renders it distinct and therefore memorable. And, indeed, the most successful branding projects do approach that grandeur, with brand-names like Band-Aid and Kleenex becoming not merely synonyms for their class of product, but the first term of reference.7 As Domzal and Kernan note, “[g]lobal advertising succeeds when it is perceived in semiotically-equivalent ways by multicultural consumer segments,” thus producing “culturally-transcendent meanings of the advertised product or service” (1). That is, a properly advertised product requires no translation or adaptation. It will speak for itself (or rather, the advertising will speak for it) in a manner that overcomes cultural distinctions, a re-imagining of a pre-Babel “pure language” that is, as Walter Benjamin posits, the impossible yet necessary underlying premise that makes the task of translation thinkable (257).

    This cultural overcoming is the presumed outcome of globalized media producing a single “global culture”, and the attendant “traditional products, with their localized cultural meanings, by universal products, which have global meanings” (Domzal and Kernan 8). This belief, dubbed “convergence theory,” predicts that variations in culture and politics will eventually “become at most surface markers for different societies in a globalized melting pot, more like regionalized accents than different languages” (Kline 102). Advertising’s place in this coming “homogenization” is privileged as “the ultimate means by which the developing world is integrated into the social framework of the developed West” (Kline 102). To wit, it depends on the victory of cultural imperialism, in which advertising serves both as the herald of a monolithic consumer culture and as its new lingua franca.

    The belief that advertising might somehow achieve this lofty goal may strike us as both quixotic and myopic, and not without good reason; this purportedly universal address targets a very specific group of consumers. In reality, the demographic segment that these supposedly “transcendent” advertisements address is a small subset of affluent, media-literate consumers (albeit figured as exemplary of the ascendant postmodern subject, the inevitable outcome of consumer evolution in a global marketplace). But this address, by definition global – and therefore both collective and “transcendent” – must also express the consumer’s individual sense of self, and answer their most personal desires. Indeed, this desire for a personal address is attributed specifically to the “global”, “postmodern” consumer, who wishes to be distinguished by their purchasing behavior and may even use products and commodities as a means of securing a coherent identity distinct from demographic expectations.8 Hence the postmodern consumer-subject’s rejection of “traditional bundlings of products in favor of eclectic … assortments which permit the creation of packaged styles to project individualism” (Domzal and Kernan 8). This paradox mirrors the challenge of bestowing unique identities on effectively identical products, and contributes to the peculiar role of advertising within contemporary capitalism: conferring fetish status upon consumer-commodities.

    Advertising’s fetish function can be understood both through a postmodern Marxist (by way of Baudrillard) concept of commodity fetishism, as well as the psychoanalytic definition of the fetish.9 Both cast commodities as possessed of seemingly-mystical properties that simultaneously indicate and occlude some deeper reality, symptomatic of the contradictions at the heart of the project of globalization. First, as commodities come to be viewed as objects for consumption rather than objects of production, they are invested with “sign-value,” the result of a “transeconomic act” in which consumption converts exchange-value into a signification of wealth (Baudrillard 112–113), so that the commodity represents “both a negation and affirmation” of use-value and exchange-value (Miklitsch 72). That is, the transformation of the commodity into an object of consumption brings to the fore its appearance as “the ‘ideal’ object of production: its ‘image’ (Bild), its ‘want’ (Bedürfnis), its ‘impulse’ (Trieb [also translated as ‘desire’ or ‘drive’]), and its ‘purpose’ (Zweck)” in a manner that aestheticizes the act of consumption itself (Miklitsch 85). The commodity therefore functions foremost not as an object-of-use or exchange, but as a locus of desire for both the postmodern consumer-subject and the engine of production itself, thus falling “simultaneously inside and outside the circuit of capital,” both motive-cause for production and luxurious signifier “beyond the surplus-value imperatives of the capitalist” (Miklitsch 83). This is particularly true of luxury commodities (Baudrillard’s example is the art auction), but can be extended to any commodity that possesses a symbolic excess, granting it that ‘special something’ that makes it worth of consumer attention. Advertising imbues the commodity with its sign value, bestowing the surplus value of meaning within consumer life. Further, the purportedly personal quality of advertising’s address, its targeting of the consumer’s unique selfhood and desire (qualities conflated in the postmodern subject), occludes the fact that the desire (and thus the selfhood of the desirer) is produced by the advertisement in the first place, and that—while both commodity and the desire it provokes and fulfills are meant to seem distinctive and unique—they are anything but, just as the target of the advertisement’s address is not a specific individual but a broadly-defined global demographic. For the production of desire is the other primary task of advertising, and goes hand in hand with its role of bestowing meaning upon the commodity – “why” is always also “why you want.”10 Advertising is tasked with presenting these desires as at once universal (understood by everyone regardless of cultural context) and particular (meeting individual needs and the need for individuality) while effacing the contradiction between the two, casting the enchantment that renders the consumer-commodity a fetish from the first.

    Advertising’s duties are thus quadrupled, forcing it to take on two types of fetishization, each of which also necessarily involves the double task of both effacing and indicating absence. It should come as no surprise, then, that – within postmodernity’s pervasive atmosphere of irony – the joke has become a critical part of advertising. As evidenced by contemporary campaigns – the constantly compounding silliness of GEICO ads, the entertainment arms race of Super Bowl spots – the joke makes the tightrope walk of advertising possible, allowing it to indicate absence without speaking of it outright, flattering the media literacy of the viewer/consumer, inviting them to indulge in the provocation of the advertisement without feeling duped. To “get” a joke is to be on the inside of some understanding, to be part of an elect, the receiver of the wink and the nudge. This feeling is indispensable to bestowing that necessary sense of individuality and exception. However, as indicated earlier, jokes are also one of the most difficult of cultural artifacts to translate, further complicating advertising’s aspirations to the role of the universal language of consumer desire.

    Survive Style 5+ takes up the question of advertising’s role in the formation of the consumer-commodity fetish and its relationship to jokes by way of its various interwoven narratives, which must be viewed in the context of Japan’s own advertising industry. The film not only serves as to document the aftermath of the high days of Japan’s own “creative revolution”, in which Sekiguchi Gen participated, but also puts to the test just how “culturally-transcendent” advertisements can be, particularly when undertaking the daunting task of translating humor. Moreover, it provides an alternative to the presumed dominance of American media, and of “American” aesthetics as “global” aesthetics. Indeed, it dramatizes the encounter between these “global” interests and representations of Japanese life and identity, which is produced and produces itself as possessed of a “uniqueness constituted as the particularized obverse of the West” (Ivy, Discourses 2), “an irreducible essence that [is] unchanging and unaffected by history” (Miyoshi and Harootunian xvi). This attributes to Japan a distinct relationship to postmodern globalism and diffuseness, although the tension arises at least as early as Japanese nationalism itself, starting with the forced end of the Tokugawa bakufu’s policy of isolation and the Meiji and Taishō efforts at modernization (Iles 39). However, the problem “acquired added urgency” due to the vicissitudes of consumer culture typified by the “economic strengths of the latter half of the 20th century, and then the economic hardships of the late 1980s and 1990s” (Iles 30). While not unique to the Japanese context, the self-consciousness of the commitment to “Japaneseness,” exemplified by the genre of Nihonjinron,11 makes the Japanese encounter with “the consumer age” an apt case study of how relational identity “must contend with questions of authenticity, of the brand, of fashion” that arise when self-identity is bound up with “such banal consumer-objects as pre-wrapped gifts from department stores” (Iles 40). Japanese advertising of the 1980s and 90s, and the films that arise around and out of it, provides a testing ground for advertising’s translational powers. This is not least because of the explicit connection established within Japanese cultural discourse between advertising and postmodern communication, in which copywriters and marketing corporations themselves took an active part alongside scholars and public intellectuals (Ivy, “Critical” 33). Released in 2004, a decade after the high-water mark of that discussion, Survive Style 5+ presents its own poignant critique of the hopes pinned on advertising during Sekiguchi’s time in the industry, and points towards a new mode of postmodern survival.

    The drama played out on Madison Avenue in the 1960s was restaged in Tokyo’s creative revolution during the 80s, roughly concurrent with the predominance of Japanese products – particularly electronics and automobiles – on the global market, and all the attendant American anxieties about Japan’s economic ascendency (Gordon 292). For all the neo-Orientalist fears of the super-efficient, ultra-conformist zaibatsu, however, Moeran’s account affirms that internal conflict is hardly foreign to Japanese companies, nor can Japanese corporate culture be viewed as entirely foreign. By 1996, when Moeran was staking out his ad agency (Asatsu), he claims that despite social and historical specificities, “the end results of creativity in Japanese and Western advertising industries do not appear to differ that much” (88). While this parallel is productive, we should not overlook the cultural and historical distinctions that mark Japan in the 1980s when this “revolution” was underway. Whatever the cachet enjoyed by American executives during the heady days of Madison Avenue, it never approached the degree of cross-pollination between theorists of postmodernity and the advertisers driving the industry in Japan, or the widespread popularity of such self-reflective texts as Now Is the Meta-Mass Age (Ima, chōtaishū no jidai), published by the trendy marketing company Parco Corporation (Ivy, “Critical” 33). At the time, the conversation about advertising’s central role in postmodern communication was explicit and widely voiced, with an emphasis on how it might be used to change communication in the postmodern milieu. In the rosiest and most radical assessments, this discussion held up the copyrighter (kopi raitaa) as a “cultural hero” who embodied “the creative, playful, and somehow subversive artist” as opposed to the “rigidified corporate and bureaucratic spheres in Japan” (Ivy, “Critical” 38).

    This tension in Japanese corporate culture is reflected in a scene in the film, where Yoko presents a completed ad – as opposed to one that is merely “thought up” – for “NonNon Aspirin” to a conference table of drab corporate suits. Prepared to show her work, with which she is “most happy” (“Survive” 00:29:30–39), Yoko’s presentation is interrupted before it begins by a phone call for the president of the client company, played by Sonny Chiba (billed as Shinichi Chiba).12 It’s his wife, making the first of a series of comically trivial calls that might shame him, if all the shame weren’t reserved for Yoko. The meeting turns into a creative director’s nightmare: her presentation is continually interrupted by the insulting calls, while the clients are yelling things like “this isn’t even close to what we asked for” (“Survive” 00:32:24–30). “The customers won’t understand the functionality of our product,” one particularly strident man barks. Yoko gives as good as she gets, of course. She rebuts the demand for functionalism, saying that consumers will “get lost in the technobabble,” a claim reinforced by the president’s inability to pronounce the active ingredients of his own product (“Survive” 00:34:01-31). In creative ethics, then, ads translate between unintelligible corporate functionalism – unpronounceable signifiers that describe content but not concept – and the consumer’s world of personal choice and significance, to help them “decide what a product means to him/her” (Moeran 80). The ad serves as symbolic supplement, evoking desire rather than merely relaying information, affirming the identity of the consumer rather than simply representing what the product “does.” Advertising must engage the consumer or lose their interest, leaving them unsatisfied. “Commercials must be entertaining. Otherwise no one will watch,” Yoko proclaims. “Simple one-sided corporate masturbation is…” (“Survive” 00:34:32–40). She trails off here, in favor of letting the president give a shocked echo: “Masturbation?”

    Fig. 1 NonNon Aspirin’s president (Shinichi Chiba) echoes Yoko.

    But for all her piss and vinegar – and Yoko comports herself with ball-busting imperiousness through most of the film – NonNon Aspirin is still footing the bill. During the taxi ride back from the meeting, she confirms that her idea has, indeed, been rejected. But they can’t fire her; she quits, hopping out of the taxi midway, only popping her head back in to harangue her meek associate one last time. Her mistake is classic; Moeran states that the advertising industry has a “‘multiple audience’ property” (84), meaning that its products must address both the client and the consumer, and Yoko has failed to account for the account – that is, for the clients themselves. Of course, this is only a sign of her fierce ethical commitment, for while account-centered practices emphasize the happiness of the corporate clients, the ethics of the “creative” place the emphasis on the consumer – specifically, on the presumed agency of the consumer – demanding that “copywriters and art directors construct their advertising messages in such a way that ideally everything is left up to the consumer” (Moeran 82–83). This rhetoric of choice is, of course, profoundly disingenuous when ascribed to a medium whose raison d’être is persuasion. It’s more accurate to say that, in keeping with advertising’s flattery of the consumer’s literacy and individuality, ads are meant to convey the impression of choice even while affirming that the smart consumer will choose only the product being advertised.

    Considering the construction of the film, which makes Yoko a much easier subject of sympathy than the faceless Non-Non Aspirin executives, it may be easy to read it as a simple celebration of creative advertising ethics. This kind of optimism was voiced by Japan’s postmodern intellectuals of the 1980s, who saw in advertising a parallel to their own role of intellectual translator: one who “mediates between the university and the masses” in the same way “the copywriter who mediates between the capitalist and the consumer” (Ivy, “Critical” 33). However, Yoko is not depicted as an unambiguous hero, nor even so clearly as a pro-consumer rebel. Certainly she styles herself as a champion of consumer entertainment, and considers herself an opponent of stern “Confucian” managerial style, favoring “playfulness and the carnivalesque” (Moeran 88). In practice, however, the specificity of her inspiration and the ferocity of her creative independence – hinging on the “joke factor” of the commercials – reveals less a contribution to consumer utopia and more a masturbatory tendency of her own. It is no coincidence that Yoko’s first inspirational moment follows the inadequate sexual encounter with Aoyama. The rapid flutter of her eyelids and the aforementioned “Oh yeah!” sound effect suggest that she’s “finishing herself off,” getting what her partner couldn’t give her while simultaneously revenging herself upon him in fantasy. This same eyelid flutter and sound effect mark every inspirational moment throughout the film, each signaling yet another “thought up commercial,” and each leading in turn to Yoko’s highly distinctive laugh, a wheezing snicker. Notably, this is the only laughter her commercials elicit, at least within the space of the film.13 The viewer may or may not find her jokes funny as suits their preference and capacity, but the onanistic aspect of Yoko’s inspirational process implicates her in the very practice she criticizes in her client. The ethics of creative advertising is her own fetish, covering up the disconnect between her practices and ambitions, the noble purpose she ascribes to her task as translator and the realities of the market in which she works.

    Fig. 2 Yoko (Koizumi Kyôko) pleasures herself in bed and in the boardroom.

    If corporate producers focus too much on the functionality of their product so that what they say becomes untranslatable, Yoko is excessively dedicated to the opposing principle: style. The role of a creative advertiser is to produce distinctness out of the undifferentiable, to bestow proper name status upon a product, but they must also make the product’s appeal as universal as possible. This combination of universal appeal and singular distinction has tended, historically, towards an excess of stylistic flourish that suffuses the film just as it suffused Japan’s advertising industry during the opulent latter days of its creative revolution (Lippit). This concept of style, already foregrounded in theories of the postmodern, was central to contemporary theories of advertising’s role in Japanese postmodernity: to convey a sense of “joyful knowledge” in which “sign and commodity fuse in an almost perfect representation of the larger symbolic economy” (Ivy, “Critical” 36). Style is a state of freedom for a signifier, a celebrated term within postmodernity, and one necessarily addressed in a film titled Survive Style 5+. On the face of it, Sekiguchi Gen’s film seems celebratory of or at least nostalgic for the heights of creative stylishness he must have experienced during his time in the industry, when commercials were regarded as “highly valued aesthetic artifacts” with the power to subvert their very consumerist messages through “a serial succession of images where the ad no longer advertises anything” (Ivy, “Critical” 37). However, the film retains its ambivalence throughout, not stopping with Yoko’s own frustrations. What emerges is a complex consideration of style – posited as the end result of creative advertising ethics, as the answer to the problem of personalizing the universal, of addressing the consumer properly – and its role in modern commodity fetishism.

    Celebrity cameos and endorsements are tried and true methods for advertising agencies. There is, of course, the benefit of associating the glamor of fame with the product being sold. More importantly, as international signifiers themselves, celebrities assist in the ‘proper naming’ that is so central to the creative effort. When I speak of “Bruce Lee,” the assumption is that I am referring to the Bruce Lee, rather than a Bruce Lee; international fame has made the name singular as well as universally recognizable, requiring no translation, as good a model for the culturally transcendent signification to which advertising aspires as can readily be found. Celebrities are particularly prominent in Japanese advertising.14 Kline views this tendency as a function of Japanese advertising’s distinctive method of “internalization,” whereby foreign influences are domesticated even as Japan rises to the fore in the global marketplace (101). He shows how advertising, as an exemplary indicator of the ascendant global consumer culture, elucidates the myth of Japanese cultural exceptionalism, a conception of Japanese national character that necessarily resists the claims of “convergence theory.”15 What Kline calls “internalization” is synonymous with Marilyn Ivy’s definition of “internationalization” (kokusaika), in which seemingly disparate, oppositional terms are united under the same function: “the domestication of the foreign” (Discourses 3). How, then, are American advertising practices be adapted, repurposed, and translated into the allegedly unique Japanese context, and how is it that a culture that prides itself on the domestication of outside influences can itself have become a primary competitor in the struggle for global media hegemony? Kline identifies two strategies in Japanese advertising, roughly analogous to the distinction (purely verbal and contextual) between gohan and raisu,16 whereby commodities are presented in two registers: either traditionally Japanese, in keeping with family values and an inviolable national character, or foreign, and thus “exotic and sensual” (112, 114). There is, however, an “intermediate world” where the categories of modern and traditional overlap, a register “not peopled by traditional types who represent longstanding characteristics of Japanese civilization, or foreign characters that resonate with the promise and sophistication of the ‘other’ modern world” (115). This liminal space, the space of translation between cultural categories otherwise constructed as distinct, “is populated primarily by well-known Japanese stars from the world of arts, sports, and entertainment” (115). How is this space of translation characterized? As a world of “entertainment” and “play” within the “world of goods” (112). This third realm, and the most obviously postmodern and ‘global’ in its conception, “reflects syncretic rather than coexistent grammars … assimilat[ing] alien meanings into the home context through the mechanism of style,” which Kline deems “of crucial importance” (116, emphasis added).

    Style, then, is the means by which cultural syncretism is achieved, even – or perhaps especially – in a culture that defines itself by its uniqueness. Extrapolated further, this observation informs the role of style and stylization in convincing the consumer of their own distinctness; “style” is frequently applied to the very quality of individuation that commodities claim to enable, as in “personal style” and “lifestyle,” terms loaded with connotations of choice and self-expression. Celebrities are avatars of style and stylishness; they are the stand-out example of sign-value’s preeminence. “Star-power” is a commodity with no materiality beyond its medium, its meaning, or its function as a universal signifier of significance itself. Moreover, because stars are instantly recognizable as themselves, they prove that style is the chief means by which the postmodern subject attains an individual identity; thus the Warholian promise of universal (if fleeting) celebrity becomes a general promise of distinct, individual identity in an era of alleged cultural homogeneity. Survival Style 5+’s own cast is appropriately star-studded. I’ve already named Sonny Chiba, Asano Tadanobu, Abe Hiroshi and Koizumi Kyôko, but there are also appearances by Reika Hashimoto as Tadanobu’s supernatural wife, and Vinnie Jones as a hit man who cuts a swath of misery through the narrative,17 whom Yoko has flown in from Europe to eliminate Aoyama.18 The overdetermination that comes from bringing together a cast with such diverse associations is in keeping with fragmented postmodern stylishness – there’s a Baz Luhrmann vibe to it.

    If you are tempted to ask what purpose this casting choice serves, you are not alone. Throughout the film, Vinnie Jones’s character asks “what is your function in life?” (01:51:40–45). His Japanese translator and near-constant companion, the plaid-suited coordinator for the Katagiri Killer Service, translates the question as “anatawa yakuwari nandesca19, a slightly awkward but accurate phrase. Yakuwari serves to translate “function,” but its connotations include “role” or “part” – a la a theatrical cast – as well as “contribution.” The same question, when begged of the celebrity casting, is answered in a scene in which Aman, Tadanobu’s character, hires the hit man to kill his wife, a task he’s as yet been unable to complete (though not for lack of trying). When this question is posed earlier in the film to an airline attendant, then to Aoyama, the results are grim; the airline attendant is verbally abused by both men because she cannot answer, while Aoyama ends up dead on his own stage because his answers are, by turns, a lie, and an admission of his uselessness (his fame and success do not draw water with Jones’s character). The brutal demand of functionality, as embodied by the starkly foreign character Jones plays, is a kind of evil avatar of global capitalism in its classically modernist conception; the violence of his performative foreignness recalls the way that Matsumoto Toshio’s Dogura magura (1988) codes its violence of the “global” against the “traditional” through fashion, with the characters in Western costume preying on those in traditional garb (Iles 46). Never permitting himself to be questioned or disturbed, Jones’s character instead demands that each character he encounters account for their usefulness. If he finds the reply lacking, as in the case of Aoyama, he renders judgment – “My friend, you’re not necessary” (“Survive” 00:41:51–42:23) – and destroys the object of the inquiry. In either case he is a force of reification, transforming persons into (dead) objects, his insistence on functionality not unlike that of the corporate suits, but backed up with ruthless violence.20 When the question is posed to Aman, however, he replies “I have none.” This answer – when translated into English – prompts the hitherto belligerent foreigner to smile, nodding. “Cool,” he says. (“Survive” 00:53:04–12)

    Fig. 3 Aman (Asano Tadanobu) answers the foreign hitman’s (Vinnie Jones) dangerous question.

    Cool. Meaning what? First and most obvious, that all these famous faces and big names are here for the sole sake of being cool. But, more importantly, that coolness itself – a concept closely allied with stylishness – is based in absence. Pure style, without the drab practicality of functional content, is cool. Moreover (and tautologically), cool can have no other use.

    What does this have to do with fetishism? The fetish is formed in response to the trauma of castration, of witnessing an absence where a presence had been previous imagined, prompting the synthesis of a replacement. Fetishes are compensations, transitional objects that attain their “magical” properties in reaction to absence, but depend on that very absence to operate. Seen this way, we can read the fetish quality of the commodity as a compensation for the lack of those master narratives and alleged culturally specific moorings that bestow a sense of identity in “traditional,” “local” contexts; sign-value as fetish is a distinctly postmodern necessity. Which brings us back to the film’s claim about coolness. The specific formulation of Aman’s reply – expressed in the English subtitles as “I have none” – is, in Japanese, “you butsu nani mo”. According to the Kokugo Jiten, “you butsu’ means, abstractly, the quality of visibility and presence; in less poetic usage, however, it simply means penis. Aman, still bloody from his last battle with his wife, is owning up to his castration. And castration, as it turns out, is cool – or, rather, it makes coolness necessary. The loss of meaning, of the presumed guarantee of presence provided by the phallus/logos, leaves a wound where substantive identity was once imagined to exist. Under the terms of postmodernity, style is the compensation for cultural castration writ large. As Jean-Luc Nancy puts it, the fetish

    is presence accumulated in its sign, presence collected into a sign, brought back to it. Therefore, it also makes the sign valuable as presence, signifying itself, present without signifying anything else. A presence that produces a sign and a sign that produces presence, a double artifice in whose lacework the imminently strange is incrusted … a pure sign, a pure present, the familiar uncanny of the power of nothingness (7).

    Aman’s status as castrated is attested to by more than just his confession. His plotline, which bookends the film, resembles nothing so much as a haunted house plot: the classic uncanny scenario that Freud links to the fear of castration.21 From the first frame, Aman’s narrative engages with horror movie tropes – a dark wood, a secret grave, a confessed killing – as he buries his murdered wife, an action he will repeat over and over during the course of the film, until the sequence attains a quality of mechanical repetition. Each time he returns to his home, an art nouveau palace of saturated color and visual opulence, only to reencounter his wife, a force of silent malevolence who, true to her ghostly status, has a formidable suite of supernatural powers while within the bounds of home, but is incapable of leaving the grounds. Aman’s is a proper haunted house, albeit one that substitutes tinsel for cobwebs and luminous color for shades of darkness. It is a geography of symbolist tropes that evoke the uncanny: autonomous dolls and severed limbs, phone calls from within the house and from within dreams, independently moving images, and of course the ghost of Aman’s own wife. It contains an entire room decorated with images of eyes – images that Aman replicates on his long coat, a cloak of substitute phalli – wherein Aman re-slays his wife with the help of a pointed minute-hand pried from a clock (also in the shape of an eye). Over and over he is pummeled and “unmanned” by his wife, and though he kills her again and again, she returns every time, frequently endowed with some new strength derived from whatever method he previously used to dispose of her body: detachable limbs, fiery breath. Every time she reappears in a more and more outlandish outfit, beginning with a brightly colored but relatively simple dress and hair-do, before ascending into the impracticalities of high fashion, becoming-image.22

    Fig. 4 The escalating style of Aman’s revenant wife (Reika Hashimoto)

    His wife’s first act of retributive aggression, however, is not any sort of direct violence. Upon their first tense reunion, she serves Aman an unbelievably sumptuous meal – a massive roast beef, a tower of flapjacks, a basket of bread, a dozen eggs merged on a single plate, just to name a few – an impossible culinary task that he consumes, with the help of a montage, under his wife’s ceaseless and watchful gaze. What might well serve as a commercial for a luxury all-you-can-eat breakfast – its visual composition bespeaks the director’s experience in the hyper-stylized heyday of Japanese advertising – takes on an aspect of menace, culminating in a cup of post-meal coffee, to which the wife adds an excessive portion of sugar, working the spoon with a sinister mechanical regularity. As Aman takes his first sip, his wife mounts the dish-laden table and delivers a kick that sends him flying, instigating the violent struggle that characterizes their interactions throughout most of the film.

    Fig. 5 A menacing breakfast.

    The scene dramatizes a collision between Kline’s two registers of Japanese advertising, a staging that occurs in a number of scenes throughout the film. On the one hand, we have traditional scenes of domesticity, as per the first register: Japanese home life, with wives serving food and drink to their husbands and dutiful children giving thanks to the head of the household. On the other, we have the invasion of Vinnie Jones, an avatar of foreign influence, whose import is explicitly linked (by way of Yoko’s request) to interaction with foreign commercial direction; brutal and reifying, he nevertheless offers a surrogate power for his translator, who, in acting as his voice, can partake in his unstoppable violence (preserving the resulting trail of dead bodies as stylish photographs that advertise his firm’s effectiveness). Between the two we have the realm of hypermediated images, initially suffused with a nightmare quality, in which traditional domestic relationships are fundamentally disrupted, marked by violence, the loss of family stability and – in a couple fleeting references – instances of rape and incest.

    We may be tempted to read a reactionary impulse into the film’s depiction of this convergence, and not without precedent; complaints about the corrosive effect of postmodernity on the coherence of cultural narratives are a dime a dozen. Japanese cinema of the 80s and 90s frequently addresses the issue of gender and family, both bulwarks of “traditional” social identity; Itami Jūzō’s Osōshiki (1984)23, Miike Takashi’s Bijita Q (2001) and Kawase Naomi’s Sharasojyu (2003) all tackle these questions (Iles 79). What little analysis has been performed on Survive Style 5+ correctly notes the relative powerlessness of its male characters, a reflection, the study claims, of anxieties around changing gender roles in Japan (Nah, Lee and Yu 817). Aman is pummeled by his wife, his own murderous rejoinders barely slowing her down; Kobayashi, a besuited father with troubled finances, is rendered ridiculous when a hypnotism-gone-wrong convinces him he is a bird;24 Sonny Chiba’s “president” character is sufficiently hen-pecked that he repeatedly interrupts a company meeting to take his wife’s calls about menial tasks as how to replace a light bulb. The only prominent male characters with access to power – the hit man and the hypnotist – are pointedly loathsome, and appear allied with the forces of global commerce and mystification. First there is Aoyama, whose tiger-themed trappings – a theme-song celebrating his power and beauty, an elaborate codpiece, a golden throne – conceal a profound inadequacy (as evidenced by his sexual failure); when matched up against the hit man, he is easily overcome, left bleeding to death on his own stage. The hit man, on the other hand, is a dangerous intruder whose interference and insistence on functionality – however it may have been solicited by Yoko and Aman – leads to tragedy, trapping Kobayashi in his hypnotized state, annulling Aman’s reconciliation with his wife, and wounding Jay, a good-hearted burglar, in a fit of homophobic rage.

    Yet these violent encounters result in novel outcomes and resolutions which, if not unmarked by ambivalence, are ultimately celebrated by the film. Kobayashi’s transformation allows him to achieve flight (with the help of his open-minded son, who delivers a monologue on the necessity of change), a pointed metaphor for liberation, which in turn saves Aman from self-destruction, the former catching the latter in mid-air as he hurls himself from the window of the Katagiri Killer Service’s office. The assault on Jay finally brings the mounting erotic tension between the burglar and one of his partners in crime to fruition, prompting Jay to avow a queer sexual identity and embark upon a new relationship with his friend. The film, therefore, does not propose a retreat into nostalgia; it does not reconstruct the “traditional” scene of Japanese home-life, nor does it bow to the global pressures embodied in the British hit man. Instead, it creates a new set of relationships that accommodates the changes ushered in by the era of the sign. It proposes to make peace with fetishization, accepting that traditional identity is a lost cause (if it ever existed in the first place) and embracing new conceptions of self-made possible in this realm of images, however frightening and new. For the fetish is at its most potent within the postmodern milieu, with its “its purely constructed meaningfulness” at once admitting to its artifice and its “double fictionality,” while at the same time “dissimulat[ing] that imposture,” continuing to function despite having, itself, no functional content (Bernheimer 4). This is explicated best in a scene in a grade school, where Kobayashi’s young son sits in class, his teacher delivering judgements on images the children have drawn of their fathers. For the most part these images are essentially identical, each deemed “normal” by the equivocating teacher, with an air of vague disapproval. The only images that break the mold are of Kobayashi himself, who is depicted soaring through the air with other birds; the teacher approves, misreading the image of Kobayashi as a “superhero” depiction (while simultaneously presaging his comic-book intervention at the end of the film). The other image, less well-received, is of another student’s father, dressed in women’s clothing, a misunderstanding stemming from the student’s mother saying that his father “likes women.” (“Survive” 01:04:42-06:12) While the teacher may not note the equivalence, the film earmarks it; both deviant dads have listed into the register of the image as images, one in the parlance of comics and movies, the other in the performativity of drag.

    The reference to transvestism is fleeting but telling, particularly in relation to the function of the fetish. As Marjorie Garber argues in her article Fetish Envy, “the fetish is . . . a metaphor, a figure for the undecidability of castration . . . of nostalgia for an originary ‘wholeness’ . . . Thus the fetish, like the transvestite . . . is a sign at once of lack and its covering over” (49). Yet when one forsakes nostalgia and rejects the myth of wholeness, instead avowing castration and the fetish it necessitates, it is possible to claim an “empowered transvestism” and thus “to seem rather than merely to have or to be” (Garber 56). As the essence of style, seeming is what counts in the era of the sign – not a naive approach or a mistaking of style for substance, but a willful avowal of the fetish, an empowered seeming. Garber refers to a performance by Madonna as a paragon of 80s style-as-substance, playing with religious iconography and the notion of her ‘materiality’, rendering unique and proper a name which was already unique and proper, but in a wholly different register. But this principle extends to the characters of Survive Style 5+, particularly Yoko, who staunchly refuses to use the verb-endings of feminine performance. Taking license to “get off” in front of the mystified (and all-male) corporate executives, her performative masturbation – an act comically pantomimed on-stage by Aoyama – reads as an empowering gesture. She is capable of pleasuring herself in ways Aoyama can only pretend, not because she “actually” possesses a phallus (unlike Aoyama, she doesn’t make grand proclamations about her power), but because she performs it, adopts it as a style, recognizing the necessary surplus of seeming. Style is power and pleasure in the milieu of postmodernity, as Yoko the creative advertising executive knows better than anyone in the film.

    But is advertising as a practice – endowing commodities with sign-value, and answering the demand for new identities better able to withstand the vicissitudes of postmodernity – capable of this signifying task on a universal scale? Can the fetish be mass-produced in a satisfactory way? The function of the fetish is, after all, highly personal, a critical supplement to the identity of the postmodern consumer. Can this role be entrusted to advertising, with its universal and ultimately functionalist (global, economic, capitalist) demands? Produced and released in the aftermath of the high hopes and low times of Bubble Era and its ultimate bursting, Sekiguchi’s film is positioned to give an incisive view on the promises and disappointments of postmodern advertising. These questions bring us back to the question of jokes, tied inextricably to the ethics of creative advertising in Survive Style 5+ by way of Yoko. She summons the foreign hit man (analog of foreign interests), is literally in bed with the hypnotist (a professional mystifier), and serves as the closest thing to a directorial stand-in, her job being the same as Sekiguchi’s own. She is the one who gives voice to the aspirations of creative advertising to entertain and communicate with the consumer, and she furthers those ends chiefly by way of her commercials’ “joke factor,” whether or not those jokes are funny or translatable. Jokes have a function similar to that of the fetish, particularly when viewed through Freud’s work on the subject. They indicate something repressed without outright revealing it, while also generating a surplus of pleasure. They are concerned with the “formation of substitutes” and the “representation of something that cannot be expressed directly” (Freud, Jokes 28). They are also indicative of the personal, establishing the position of the self; they are subjective communications that forge connections between the speaker and listener (which is why Yoko claims she uses them), which generally function best when they are culturally specific, spoken by and to the culture to which they pertain. The goal of global advertising, then, is to tell jokes that produce a common cultural field, to produce an all-inclusive “inside,” to generate a discourse that everyone will “get” on a personal level – a goal as strange as that of bestowing celebrity status on all people. Yet Yoko is the only one who laughs at her own (masturbatory) jokes, making them far more like the fetish-proper, an individual quirk that compensates for the disrespect and disregard she faces in her professional and personal life. As Freud notes, “no one can be content with having made a joke for himself alone” (Ibid. 175). Do Yoko’s jokes qualify as jokes, then? Do they qualify as ads? Can the fetish be universalized?

    The culturally-distinct kappa commercial mentioned above is inspired in a taxi, when Yoko – her frustration mounting throughout the film – browbeats the driver into a fit of literal hat-in-hand apology that reveals his comically bald head. However, when she tries to record the “funny” idea inspired by the encounter, she notices that her dictaphone is missing; she left it at a diner she visited earlier, where it is discovered by a pair of young female students, jaded youngsters who embody – along with Jay’s merry band of burglars and Kobayashi’s son – a rising postmodern generation. The students listen to a recorded litany of commercial ideas that play over Yoko’s panic as she exits her cab mid-trip and begins to run through the streets of Tokyo. Yoko’s urgency and upset are motivated by more than her desire to recover all her amazing ideas and hard work. Quite the contrary, the sound of the recording grows oppressive, and the content of the commercial brainstorming reveals the specific character of her ideas; a mix of the sexual and scatological, a series of foul smells and borderline dirty jokes, many without definite advertising application. They resemble nothing so much as vignette fantasies: “A crab and a shrimp having sex. A new taste is born. A snack food commercial.” – “Nose hair grows from lies.” – “An alien who eats from his butt and poops from his mouth. Farts hit his nose.” – “Deodorant commercial. A man with a canine sense of smell. He faints at the smell of his feet.” – “A guy as big as a horse with a condom to match.” – “A shampoo commercial. A man whose sexual pleasure zone is his scalp. Every time he washes his hair, he faints in agony.”25 – “When a girl’s period gets close, she jumps sideways.” – “A pain relief medicine commercial. A guy’s head hurts so much, it explodes. His brains fly BOOM, BANG!” (“Survive” 01:13:10–51; 01:17:30–45; 01:18:47-19:00; 01:24:01–09). Until finally the litany ends, and she stops running. Catches her breath. Intones: “I’m so stupid.” Turns and begins to walk back in the direction from which she came (“Survive” 01:28:03–58).

    Fig. 6 Yoko rushes to reclaim her tape recorder full of ideas.

    This sequence runs parallel to other movements towards closure in the narrative. We see Yoko again only in the final sequence, in which every major member of the cast makes a brief appearance. When seen alongside Aman’s reconciliation with his wife, and the burglars’ queer love connection, this proximity implies resolution or at least realization. By sheer weight of examples, we can see that Yoko’s jokes are not just untranslatable to non-Japanese audiences, but rather untranslatable generally: they are not funny, they are fetishistic; not popular, but personal.

    The ethics of creative advertising reach their deadlock here. While they endeavor to provide some means by which consumers can understand and experience their purchases as significant and so supplement their identities, creative advertising’s aspiration to universal address drives it into the crosshairs of postmodern critics like Baudrillard. Moeran cites Baudrillard when he presents the opinion (not his own) that “advertising appropriates people’s ‘real’ experiences”, devaluing them first by being “made reproducible in all other consumers,” and second because “the fluidity of commodity culture turns today’s ‘authenticity’ into tomorrow’s ‘falseness.’” “Ultimately,” these critics claim, “advertising signs indicate the absence of both human relationships and real objects” (Moeran 112). This (by now more or less standard) critique matches the claim to fetishization. Yet the mass-marketing of the fetish eliminates its particular character, eradicating the distinctiveness that creative advertising purports to create in the first place. Moeran holds out hope: his time spent in the advertising offices of Asatsu leads him to believe that some possibility of authenticity still exists in the social, human conditions of advertising production. Survive Style 5+ abandons the notion of the universal field of global advertising discourse, instead achieving the goal of individual distinctness, a proper naming that would sufficiently supplement the absence present in the life of the consumer. It does not bemoan this absence, but considers postmodern style as precisely the means of surviving, of synthesizing a new mode of being in the face of the failure both of traditional conceptions and foreign demands. It celebrates change and holds up the fetish, avowed fully and without reservation, free from functionalism. But that fetish must be personal, its style distinctive, and advertising is found inadequate to the task, precisely insofar as its address is purportedly universal.

    This, then, is the final failing of creative advertising ethics. The wish for both the universal and particular, the principle of granting a product a “proper name,” reaches an impasse in the function of the fetish. Try as the creative advertiser might to translate the value of an otherwise undifferentiated product into the specificity of the individual consumer’s desire, Survive Style 5+ posits that any such attempt will lead either to ads that are radically personal and untranslatable – as with Yoko’s jokes – or radically personal experiences that are transformed into objects of style – like the framed photos in the Katagiri Killer Service offices.

    Fig. 7 Photography and fire at Katagiri Killer Service.

    There is something commercial-like about the deadly dance between Aman and his wife in its consistent repetition, but it depicts a personal connection, a form of strange communication which resolves towards mutual recognition. The violence of their interchange, all of it stylized, develops into a dialogue, a reconciliation that finds them working together to mark the coat with eyes, to construct a cloak of fetishes, a profligacy of gazes, a surfeit of signification. They could go on like this forever, and given the chance they might wish to. Once Vinnie Jones’ hit man finally dispatches Aman’s wife once and for all, all that remains of her is the grave from which she won’t wake and the photograph that the plaid-suited translator coordinator has hanging on his office wall. Aman arrives and wordlessly sets the photo alight, rejecting the reified sign of the service he requested, establishing the terms of his own finality, the last act before his (aborted) suicide attempt. The message is clear: burn the photo, reject the universal, and accept no fetish but your own.

    Footnotes

    1. Former pop icon turned actress, Koizumi is a true engineered star. Her biggest selling-point is her ‘cuteness,’ the success of which lead to lucrative deals in advertising campaigns. This context is significant for the arguments to come. (Lippit 2011; Moeran 137–8)

    2. I may not, for example, find Anne Fletcher’s The Proposal (2009) funny so much as horrifying, but I do at least understand why Oscar Nunez’s strip show set piece makes other theater-goers titter. The joke’s mechanism is visible, and the investment in its funniness – the filmmaker’s faith in the gunpowder of the gag – are made evident through signs like duration, repetition and reference.

    3. Nobuhiko’s Hausu (1977), a haunted house narrative that employs animation and collage as well as live-action, is particularly resonant with the haunted house sections of Sekiguchi’s film, which contain their own multi-media elements.

    4. And one can imagine the expectations of the efficiency of ‘creative’ workers in their expenditure.

    5. This use of “revolution” can’t but sound ironic when the revolutionaries are Madison Avenue high rollers, but from a marketing perspective it’s very canny. Who could object to something called the “creative revolution,” much less during the heady 60s?

    6. Doyle Dane Berbach was responsible for the now iconic (at least in the advertising world) Volkswagen Beetle “Think Small” ads.

    7. I include another excerpt from Moeran to underline the importance of untranslatable self-identity to advertising; this section is descriptive of his own advice to the advertising company he was working with, who were then pursuing a client – Frontier Electronics – and brainstorming tag lines that would

    differentiate one company from another, in the way that Sony had been able to with its The One and Only. Frontier needed to be incomparable. It had to adopt a tag line that was distinctive and timeless, not subject to fashion. By going for something like It’s (All) in the Name, The Name says it (All) or Like the Name Says, Frontier would be able to re-enforce its image and turn back on itself in a never-ending cycle. Frontier produced cutting edge products at the ‘frontier’ – a descriptive noun that was also the company’s name, and so on ad infinitum. In short, Frontier = Frontier (13).

    Moeran’s italics make added emphasis redundant; the tag lines do, in fact, say it all.

    8. The oft-cited challenge of marketing hipness is that it must convince a large enough segment of the market that their own individuality, their own uniqueness (and thus the uniqueness of their desire), can be expressed through the purchase and use of a given product, which product is, perforce, mass-produced and mass-marketed.

    9. The connection between to two having been elaborated by numerous critics besides myself.

    10. The marketing of Listerine is the most commonly-cited example of this widely recognized phenomenon; first produce the cure, then invent the sickness.

    11. Translatable as “Discussions on Being Japanese” (Ivy, Discourses xv).

    12. The swinging reveal shot on this venerated martial arts film star plays up the cameo, begging recognition, a celebrity face ploy straight out of the kind of advertising that Lost In Translation (2003) pokes fun at. That he ends up being a henpecked corporate conservative rather than, say, Hattori Hanzo, is in keeping with the irony underwriting the whole piece.

    13. Though let’s be fair – all of these commercials, besides the Non-Non Aspirin presentation, occur safely in the privacy of her own mind.

    14. As Stephen Kline asserts in his comparative analysis of American and Japanese advertising content and practices, “Japanese advertising uses models, artists, television personalities (including singers, actors), and comedians most in its advertising” as compared to its American equivalent (111).

    15. That Japanese culture’s presumed resistance to global homogenization goes hand in hand with an equally pervasive myth about the homogeneity of Japanese cultural identity imbues the belief in cultural exceptionalism with its own fetish quality.

    16. Both are words for rice: gohan is the Japanese word generally written in kanji; raisu is a katakana transliteration of the English word. Thus rice signifies (and is signified) differently depending on its context.

    17. Vinnie Jones retains the thuggishness that made his acting career in Lock, Stock and Two Smoking Barrels, though without the redemptive fatherhood and with an extra helping of viciousness.

    18. Her reasons are derived from her experience working with foreign directors, whom she deems more “sophisticated” and who perform at a “higher level.” Yoko clearly does not cleave to a sense of Japanese cultural superiority; she is perennially frustrated by the limitations she faces, and her clients’ lack of vision.

    19. All translations are courtesy of Kathryn Page-Lippsmeyer, for whose assistance I am intensely grateful.

    20. A violence that is not without an erotic element: Aoyama states that it “feels good” as he dies, and Aman’s wife, in her final moments, smiles cryptically and silently bids her husband “bye-bye” before collapsing, her back a pincushion of tiny penetrations.

    21. The ghost story genre is also linked to earlier instances of the identity problem in Japanese culture, as evidenced by “a tremendous resurgence in the popularity of the ghost story and other literary works of horror . . . as a way of conceptualizing the trauma of social change on an individual level” during the Meiji and Taishō periods (Iles 39).

    22. This culminates in her final death, inflicted by Vinnie Jones’s hitman and preserved by way of photograph.

    23. Osōshiki prominently features a commercial set replica of a pre-modern inn (ryokan), staging the strange relationship between the traditional and the contemporary. (Iles 43)

    24. This scenario briefly places him in the care of farcical research psychologists, a recurring trope that appears as early as Kinugasa Teinosuke’s Kurutta ippeiji (1926), which locates the cure to contemporary identity fragmentation in “traditional” culture, signified by the Noh masks that are placed on patients to soothe them (Iles 20).

    25. Herbal Essences commercials of the late 90s, anyone?

    Works Cited

    • Baudrillard, Jean. For a Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign. Telos Press Ltd., 1981.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “The Task of the Translator.” Selected Writings, vol. 1. Edited by Marcus Bullock and Michael W. Jennings, Harvard UP, 1996.
    • Bernheimer, Charles. “’Castration’ as Fetish.” Paragraph, vol. 14 no. 1, 1991, pp. 1–9.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “De Tours of Babel.” Acts of Religion. Edited and introduced by Gil Anidjar, Routledge, 2002, pp. 104–134.
    • Domzal, Teresa J., and Jerome B. Kernan. “Mirror, Mirror: Some Postmodern Reflections on Global Advertising.” Journal of Advertising, vol. 22 no. 4, 1993, pp. 1–20.
    • Freud, Sigmund. Jokes and Their Relation to the Unconscious. Translated by James Strachey, W.W. Norton & Company, 1960.
    • ———. The Uncanny. Translated by David McClintock, Penguin Books, 2003.
    • Garber, Marjorie. “Fetish Envy.” October, vol. 54, Autumn 1990, pp. 45–56.
    • Gordon, Andrew. A Modern History of Japan. Oxford UP, 2009.
    • Iles, Timothy. The Crisis of Identity in Contemporary Japanese Film: Personal, Cultural, National. Brill, 2008.
    • Ivy, Marilyn. “Critical Texts, Mass Artifacts: The Consumption of Knowledge in Postmodern Japan.” Postmodernism and Japan. Edited by Masao Miyoshi and H. D. Harootunian, Duke UP, 1989, pp. 21–46.
    • ———. Discourses of the Vanishing: Modernity, Phantasm, Japan. U of Chicago P, 1995.
    • Kline, Stephen. “The Theatre of Consumption: On Comparing and Japanese Advertising.” Canadian Journal of Political and Social Theory, vol. 7 no. 3, Fall 1988, pp. 101–120.
    • Miklitsch, Robert. From Hegel to Madonna: Towards a General Economy of “Commodity Fetishism.” State U of New York P, 1998.
    • Miyoshi, Masao and Harootunian, H. D., editors. Postmodernism and Japan. Duke UP, 1989.
    • Moeran, Brian. Ethnography at Work. Berg, 2007.
    • Nah, Somi, Timothy Yoonsuk Lee, and Jinhwan Yu. “Research on Hypermediated Images in Asian Films.” International Journal of Social, Behavioral, Educational, Economic, Business and Industrial Engineering, vol. 5 no. 5, 2011, pp. 815–822.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc, and Thomas C. Platt. “The Two Secrets of the Fetish.” Diacritics, vol. 31 no. 2, Summer 2001, pp. 2–8.
    • Lippit, Akira Mizuma. Visual Culture. University of Southern California, Spring 2011. Seminar.
    • Survive Style 5+. Directed by Gen Sekiguchi. Written by Taku Tada. Performances by Tadanobu Asano, Reika Hashimoto, Kyôko Koizumi, Hiroshi Abe. Tohokushinsha Film, 2004.
  • Reinventing Marx for an Age of Finance

    Robert Meister (bio)
    University of California, Santa Cruz

    Abstract

    This essay accounts for the production of specifically financial products such as hedges, focusing on how and why their liquidity adds value through a critical re-reading of Marx’s account of relative surplus value in the production of commodities. It then considers the political implications of its restatement of Marx’s view of capitalism, arguing that a political price should be exacted for rolling over the option of historical justice in the sense of sudden disaccumulation by issuing a government-backed liquidity guarantee (or “put”). Although economists have calculated the price of a systemic liquidity put as a liability of government–which becomes very high at moments like 2008–they do not take into account forms of political action that increase uncertainty about whether government will provide the guarantee, and in what form, if any, it will demand to be repaid. The essay seeks to pose this last, ultimately political, question about the financialization of capitalism.

    This essay is a response to the perceived inaccessibility of capitalism as an object of organized political action now that it has passed out of its specifically industrialized phase as a development of national economies, and into an era of globalized finance. In some ways, despair about the possibility of a transformative anti-capitalist politics is nothing new, going back to the representations in nineteenth century fiction of the dispersion of capitalist power from the factory floor to all spheres of life. But today, the dissemination of ubiquitous information technologies, coupled with the notion that “There Is No Alternative” (TINA) to harnessing them to the engines of finance, has led to a decoupling of the critique of capitalism as such from political strategies directed at the nation state—and to a consequent disillusionment with politics.

    My assumption is that there is no possibility of going back to a pre-financialized world of capitalism, whenever that might have been, so that we can, then, more effectively oppose it. Rather, I argue that capitalist accumulation has always required the creation of liquidity alongside the production of value, and that a political path forward can be found via a radical understanding of the world of contemporary finance. If my analysis is correct, then the theories and practices that brought us to the near-collapse of capital markets in 2008 are pregnant with other, transformative possibilities that are only now becoming apparent.

    I

    “Finance” is the name that capitalism now gives itself when understood and lived from the point of view of the investor for whom the easy convertibility of any asset into money—its liquidity—is logically distinct from any other utility that asset may have. What many critics (especially Marxists) profess to find most objectionable in the transition from industrial to financial capitalism is the lack of other utility in many financial products, especially derivatives, that are manufactured for the sole purpose of being liquid, and that are now large-scale repositories of accumulated wealth.

    Most of these critics are oddly nostalgic for the familiar problems of industrial capitalism, especially in the Fordist era, when financial products were far less prevalent, and crises were typically driven by the ever-present tendency of expanded production to exceed consumer demand. Rather than criticizing the financialized version of capitalism for leaving the familiar problems of overproduction and underconsumption behind, I approach the question of finance, and the manufacture of specifically financial products, by attempting to restate Marx in terms that allow for the extension of his analysis to our present era. Through this transposition of Marx into twenty-first-century language, I propose a new way of seeing him, and through him, a new way of seeing the historical continuity of capitalism throughout its changes.

    But why should we, who are living in a world dominated by finance, go back to Marx? The reason, put bluntly, is that for Marx, the whole point of extracting surplus value from commodity production is to transform that surplus value into what we now call an asset. An asset is a vehicle through which surplus value is preserved and accumulated. If surplus value could not be preserved and accumulated in the form of assets (capital), it would not be produced. That, finally, is why Marx named his book Capital rather than, for example, The Commodity, even though the latter is, most directly, the principal object of his analysis.

    Capitalist production is—both in its abstract form and historical origin—an activity that can be, and always could have been, financed by producers who had no initial ownership of the means of production and no initial control over their labor force. A capitalist “farmer” could, in principle and practice, have rented the land from a feudal lord and borrowed the money to buy seed. He could have, and sometimes did, pay for the seed only if the crop itself was able to function as security for that debt. The future crop was thus potential collateral even before it was a commodity. And so, two financial products, the debt and the security, were created alongside the consumer product for which there was a ready market. If in fact the capitalist ended up owning the means of production (the seed and the land), this was only because these came to function as vehicles for holding and accumulating the surplus created in earlier rounds of production. At this point the means of production would have also become financial assets that could themselves be pledged as collateral for future debt and thus material for creating new financial products that existed alongside the commodities they were used to produce.

    The fact that financial products are not merely instruments of circulation (that are sometimes fetishized), but also vehicles for accumulating real wealth is the problem Marx addressed when he tried to explain how capitalism could have arisen at specific historical moments. Any serious rehabilitation of his theory needs to be initially concerned with the role that an asset market (for capital) has always had in the ongoing reproduction of a commodity market (for goods and services).

    Today we need to be concerned with the way that financialized capitalism is a system in which accumulated wealth depends upon the liquidity of markets in financial assets that can grow independently of the output of useful goods and services so often idealized (in contrast) as the “real economy.” Despite this idealization, however, the possibility that asset markets can grow or contract independently of output is a conceptual truth about capitalism, resulting from the need for production to be financed in a way that makes it possible to accumulate the surplus. And whether there is a fundamental tendency in capitalism that asset markets tend grow faster than output is an historical question about the stages of capitalist development and its possible limits.

    Throughout the Twentieth Century both Keynesians and Marxists were concerned with what it means for asset markets to grow faster than the industrialized economies that supposedly “underlie” them. Is this differential growth something real that can be harvested to fund public goods? Or must it be regarded as a fiction that distorts the real relationship between the accumulation of surplus value and rising output—a mere excrescence of “late” capitalism that will simply vanish before it can ever be expropriated?

    Before proceeding to address these questions, we should note that Marx’s own sparse writing on financial instruments consigns them mostly to the sphere of circulation as distinct from accumulated surplus value in the form of (mostly physical) means of production that are only effective in preserving past wealth to the extent that there is a future demand for the increased output they enable.1 Marx’s materialism thus seems to commit him to some kind of conservation principle applying to value (by analogy with energy or matter), such that real growth in accumulated wealth (its value rather than its price) cannot be greater than the profits produced by total employment (wages) multiplied by the rate of exploitation as discounted by the rate of reinvestment. This means any duplication of the value of physical capital in the form of a financial instrument, such as a debt secured by such assets, would count as purely “fictitious” wealth from his strictly materialist standpoint.2

    My argument in this essay is that Marx’s valid insight into double-counting, as a potential problem, has led to an overly broad conception of “fictitious capital” that conflates two forms of economic contingency that ought to be distinguished. There is, of course, such a thing as fictitious wealth, created by purely speculative bubbles that have the logic of what Keynes called “beauty contests” and that René Girard calls “mimetic desire.” In asset valuation, we often see the suppression of the self-correcting (negative feedback) loops of market equilibrium in which, for example, rising asset prices lead to lower demand; instead, there can emerge a self-reinforcing (positive feedback) loop in which higher prices leads to greater demand until the bubble “bursts,” at which point asset values typically fall far below their initial levels and financial “speculators” are held to blame for both the run-up and the loss.3

    Without denying the occurrence of bubbles, I wish to distinguish such forms of artificial wealth from capital accumulation that takes the form of financial instruments that retain their liquidity—ready convertibility into money—without necessarily being money. The existence of assets that command a premium because they are represent liquid claims is artificial in the sense of being a “figment” of social convention and would lose this property if they were not believed to have it (Berle 60). But this is equally true of money itself, and it is essential to the existence of a market mode of producing commodities that there also be stores of value that are more highly pledgeable than ordinary consumer goods and that can be sold and resold to raise funds. Assets that have this property are valuable whatever else one might want. They are like “mimetic” (purely social) goods in being relatively immune to an elasticity of demand, and are contingent in a further, political, sense that states have an interest in supporting the values of liquid assets as safe (highly-pledgeable) collateral in order maintain credit in the economy—a function that takes on a heightened significance under today’s financialized capitalism.

    The argument that follows thus seeks to reintegrate finance into Marx’s account of the social materiality of capital by stressing the role of collateralization as a process that has always existed alongside commodification as a way of meeting the discipline of payments that market-based economies impose. This will allow us to understand the effect of capital on capitalism, and specifically how the relative independence of asset-market growth operates on the underlying inequalities that allow it to occur.

    II

    The practical question that I seek to address through Marx has been forcefully posed to a wide public by Thomas Piketty’s blockbuster book, Capital in the Twenty-First Century. His main question is, “What is the effect of wealth accumulation on income distribution?” and his contribution to the answer is both conceptual and empirical.

    Conceptually, Piketty’s approach measures capital accumulation by the number of years of GDP it would take to equal the valuation of a country’s capital market. His approach presupposes that there can be inequality in both wealth, which reflects the market value of financial assets, and the current income that results from the ownership of financial assets. Overall inequality increases, he says, as these assets both appreciate in value and throw off increasing revenue based on constant or increasing rates of total return on that higher valuation. Piketty’s question is one that Marx’s production-based analysis of capital growth purports to deflect—whether there is or (can be) a tendency for the rate of growth in the inequality of wealth to differ from (and generally exceed) the rate of growth in the inequality of income as economies (crudely measured by GDP) expand.

    Piketty’s way of framing this question makes it plausible that as the ratio of accumulated wealth to national income grows, so too will the likely share of national output each year that goes to the wealthy. He insists, however, that this is only a tendency. It can be offset by circumstances such as war and depression and by government policies that prescriptively lower the rate of return on capital as the ratio of wealth to output rises. Such deliberate policies—including redistributive income taxes, capital levies, and monetary controls—are possible because, as a purely conceptual matter, the rate of return on capital can be defined independently of the valuation of financial asset markets and could, thus, fall as asset values rise.

    But could the rate of return on capital fall fast enough to offset the effect of a rising ratio of financial markets to goods and services (GDP) in making income distributions more unequal? Piketty—who eschews talk of socio-economic revolution—seems to treat this hypothetical outcome as a criterion for a fair-enough distribution of revenue between classes in an era in which the growth of capital markets far exceeds the growth of output. The valid point here is that one could use Piketty’s empirical analysis to target the share of national income going to holders of capital and not allow it to rise while still allowing the relative rates of growth in asset markets and their underlying economies to follow whatever presumably natural course the mode of production requires. So, yes, the actual revenue growth derivable from capital accumulation could be constrained by a policy that indexes it to some other statistic such as GDP growth.

    Although Piketty does not say so, a predictable effect of such a policy, especially if workable, would be to lower the value of accumulated assets, which would disaccumulate capital until the rate of return on principal rises once again. Surely this is not an oversight on Piketty’s part. It may in fact be the intended result of his recommendation of a curb on the share of national income going to capital. What he does not say is that an expected decline in asset valuation would certainly be resisted by capitalists acting through their intermediaries in both government and the financial sector. In Piketty’s policy approach, we thus have a recipe for class struggle or, if not, an analytical description of what it looks like for class struggle to be forestalled by artificially restricting the nominal growth rate of capital markets to growth in real output plus inflation.

    III

    Oddly, Piketty’s book, though titled Capital in the Twenty-First Century, deals with almost every aspect of the rising inequalities due to rapidly expanding capital markets except for their grounding in finance (or capital itself) as it has changed in the twenty-first century and the years immediately preceding. In this respect, Piketty follows the tradition of both classical and neoclassical political economy by treating the discipline of payments (the need for funds), which defines market relations, as a veil that hides what is really going on in the exchange of equivalent values. A mainstream economist will typically “pierce the veil of money” by assuming that payments in money are always already being made and that access to money and/or credit (which postpones the need for money) is not part of what is being bought and sold in the real economy.4

    This working assumption is, of course, not true of capitalism in the twenty-first century. Today funding is obtained by finding arbitrage opportunities in the changing spreads between spreads. But these include, not only the spreads among different kinds of financial products, but also those created by among all kinds of borders—including spatial, political, socio-economic, and cultural ones—that can now be negotiated by those in economically precarious positions to obtain the work, credit, state aid, remittances, and so forth necessary to fund everyday life.5

    Neither, however, was the assumption true in Marx’s time. Like Hume, Smith, and Ricardo, Marx tried to pierce the veil of money by assuming his wage-earner to be both debt-free and uncreditworthy when he enters the labor market. This makes him entirely subject to the discipline of payments, which means that he must fund his means of subsistence entirely out of his wage, none of which goes for the purchase of any financial products, including those providing him with temporary access to funds. Marx here pierces the veil of money by defining wage labor as a social relation in which money is spent as soon as it is gotten on commodities that do not function as value preserving assets (investment goods) for either the purchaser or the seller. He says this despite the obvious fact that, when he wrote, there would not have been enough currency in circulation to pay workers cash in advance, and the custom was to pay in arrears using other forms of exchange.

    More importantly, Marx’s hypothetical assumption of the need to make immediate payment of one’s entire income for the food and clothing necessary to survive obscures the more general question he raises about labor under capitalism: How does capitalism fund working class consumption in a way that most reliably accelerates the accumulation of capital? It is, after all, capital accumulation that drives the system, and there are many historical circumstances in which such accumulation may be best advanced by indebting wage earners rather than making them pay for everything all at once. Today, many employed persons and the entire surplus population need the availability of funds outside the wage in order to live. They do not depend on sale of their labor power as their sole means of subsistence and are thus better described as participating in unwaged sectors of an economy in which there are not enough jobs for everyone than as “unemployed.”

    My takeaway lesson here is that for Marx consumption must be funded (financed), and that one way to do this is by the direct provision of jobs that pay money wages sufficient to purchase the means of subsistence and eventually to create an effective demand for mass-produced consumer durables. This is what happened in the case of twentieth-century Fordism. It is also clear, however, that according to Marx’s “Absolute General Law of Capitalist Accumulation” (Capital I, ch. 25), a large surplus population is an eventual consequence of greater capital accumulation. For these underutilized workers, and for many who are more fully employed, wages are only a part (and often a minor part) of a package of funding that now includes the return on various financial products purchased to insure their household against ill health, old age, and so forth.6 Even though some of these events may seem to be near certainties, they can be hedged against, and thus financed, to the extent that their timing and ultimate cost is contingent on unknown future events.

    It follows that the Marxism we now need (let’s call it a Capital for the Twenty-First Century) is one that connects the production of commodities (total social output) with the production and accumulation of asset values (total social wealth), as Marx tried to do with what he regarded as only partial success.7 The point of restating Marx by focusing on the question that drives Piketty is to better understand, as Piketty does not, the way the logic of capital itself drives capitalist development.

    For Marx that logic is based on the distinction between assets that preserve their value in use (and thus remain liquid), and consumer goods and services whose value is extinguished in use (so that they become illiquid, or valueless, as investments). His core argument is that the production of goods and services by means of wage labor creates a parallel demand on the part of investors for vehicles of surplus preservation that would themselves have had to be produced using the same wealth-creating processes. This understanding of Marx allows us to ask the following question for our moment of finance: What new types of financial asset could there be under capitalism, and how could the changing ratio of asset markets to the market in goods services drive its historical development by producing new social conflicts?

    Marx sees early on in Capital I that this new type of financial asset used for purposes of accumulation must distinguish itself in important ways from money, which remains the first and foremost financial product. He thus notes that the “General Formula for Capital” cannot be simply M-M1 (assuming that M1>M), where money begets more money (Capital I, chs. 4–5). There must be an investment of money in an asset other than money to create real, rather than nominal, wealth (M-C-M1). Marx is most famous for noticing, along with Smith and Ricardo, that new value can be produced by purchasing labor power by means of a wage that will then function to increase effective demand for the products created. He is less famous for his equally original argument about the way this increased value is preserved—namely, by buying new producer goods, which function not only as the means to increase output but also as assets that in many circumstances hedge against the danger of merely holding on to (i.e., hoarding) the money one received from the last cycle of production.

    Unlike his precursors, Marx thus saw the purchase of producer goods—his “constant capital” (including what Smith and Ricardo called “stock”)—as a partial solution to the problem of how to preserve and accumulate wealth without hoarding currency or speculating in land. The idea of constant capital as a relatively liquid asset that holds its value (in the sense of being exchangeable for money up to and including its conversion into an end product) is essential to Marx’s explanation of how capitalist production gets funded and why the resulting surplus can be reinvested in new production. And the essence of capitalism as a mode of production is precisely that production has to get funded: otherwise, how could the capitalist pay the worker a wage that will be spent on consumer goods that (unlike producer goods) do not hold their value in use?

    For Marx, it follows that in capitalism, funding production becomes an alternative to holding currency (or land) as a means of preserving and accumulating wealth. For an investor, this means that the purchase of financial assets (a version of M-C-M1) needs to be compared to buying money (M-M1) as a strategy for hedging the value of the assets one already possesses in a world in which the preservation of wealth is no longer assured by social convention or political force. To restate Marx in the register of finance, we must thus recognize that there are really two substitutions for (C) in his General Formula for Capital (M-C-M1)—capital invested in wages and capital invested in producer goods, which are seen partly as a means of production and partly as a more or less liquid collateral that can be used to generate cash.

    The concept of collateralization allows us to state more precisely how production gets funded. This, I believe, is the missing link between Marx’s developed account of the commodity form and his much less developed account of the asset form and, more generally, of finance. What we have in a fuller version of his account is a flow of funds and a flow of collateral providing liquidity for the circulation of commodities and the creation of value. To extend the parallel, the liquidity of accumulated wealth is a byproduct of finance in much the way that the valuation of socially necessary labor-time (GDP) is a byproduct of production. The relation between liquidity and value is mediated by market prices, eliminating the need to “transform” price into value.8 This means that asset prices can grow without affecting inflation because they are denominated in currency, the value of which is pegged to the purchasing power of the wage (consumer goods) rather than to purely financial products that have no use value other than to provide liquidity (Foley, ch. 2).

    In a previous paper, “Liquidity,” I argued that Marx comes closest to meshing the gears between commodity production and asset production in his account of “relative surplus value” in Capital I. By this point in Capital, he has already introduced the concept of “absolute surplus value” to describe the expansion of labor-force participation (and also a lengthening of the working day) that lies at the heart of the “labor theory of value” put forward by Smith and Ricardo. In their labor theory of value, all value is produced by the employment of wage labor. This means that there is no inherent bias in favor of production technologies that economize on labor-time rather than capital, provided that the potential labor force is fully employed and the economy is at a steady state.9 After full employment has been reached, capitalism would exhibit no inherent dynamic leading to industrialization and the consequent mechanization of tasks once performed by manual workers. It is “relative surplus value” that explains this later development, and thus avoids the conclusion of classical political economy that capitalism results in a steady state of full employment, which is the outcome that nineteenth-century socialists like John Stuart Mill hoped to influence.10

    “Relative surplus value” is not based on increasing total social labor time but, rather, on the most basic maxim of finance: the “law of one price.” This so-called law says that two identical units of any given commodity should be sold at the same price regardless of their cost of production. Beginning in chapter 12 of Capital I, Marx implicitly (and perhaps unknowingly) applies this maxim of finance to those forms of production that convert raw materials into finished commodities. His implicitly financial claim is that this form of production allows the producer an arbitrage opportunity on his investment in producer goods if he can put out more units of product in the same labor time.

    Why does such an opportunity exist? Because he (presumably) would not have to lower his selling price on units embodying identical inputs of material until the competition caught up in reducing labor costs. Creating this arbitrage opportunity in the turnover of raw materials (which are one component of Marx’s “constant capital”) is just another way of describing an increase in the productivity of labor through investment in machinery (another component of his constant capital).

    The important point here is how far Marx’s intuitive application of finance to production takes him from the labor theory of value in Smith and Ricardo. In his account of “relative surplus value,” unlike in his account of “absolute surplus value,” more value is not created by employing more labor. It comes, rather, from being able to resell the same amount of raw material in the form of finished product at a lower per unit cost. Does the origin of this surplus in a financial idea make it “fictitious” in Marx’s sense? The accumulation of wealth from “relative surplus value” is no less real/material for Marx, even though it comes from arbitrage on constant capital, than the accumulation of wealth from “absolute surplus value,” which comes from increasing the number of jobs as population grows. It is, moreover, relative surplus value that, according to Marx, explains the world-transformative mission of industrial capitalism and makes it unlike other systems that have organized themselves around a division of labor including the system of highly skilled and specialized hand manufacture described by Adam Smith.

    The foregoing account of relative surplus value presents an obstacle to readings of Marx that relegate finance to the sphere of what he calls “circulation,” where real value is misrepresented in the form of market prices that converge with values only in the aggregate form of GDP.11 Anyone who thinks that real wealth under capitalism consists only of use values created by the employment of labor would now have to dismiss all of Marx’s arguments based on relative surplus value. Most particularly, Marx’s argument about the effect of relative surplus value on the ratio of raw materials to labor costs (“the organic composition of capital”) would have to be seen as purely speculative inasmuch as it hinges on the ability to “realize” (i.e., market) the end product, which in turn depends on liquidity in both the consumer and financial sectors.

    I believe, on the contrary, that Marx’s account of “relative surplus value” leads to real accumulation and is as close as he comes in all three volumes of Capital to explaining the effect of asset markets, and ultimately of finance, on capitalism as a distinctive mode of commodity production. It is, for example, the logic of financialization, as reflected in relative surplus value, that leads to what Marx will eventually call “the general law of capitalist accumulation” (Capital 1 ch. 25).12 This law describes the creation of ever-increasing constant capital (productive capacity) alongside a growing surplus (i.e., unemployed) population that is not in aggregate employable because of capitalism’s bias in favor of labor-saving technology. Marx’s genius, beyond that of Smith and Ricardo, was to see that producer goods (constant capital) do double duty in relative surplus value both as produced means of production and as vehicles of accumulation (or what we would now call financial assets.)13 This is the gear connecting the asset and commodity markets that drives capitalism (for a time) to perform its historical role of creating both an abundance of things and an abundance of wealth. It does this by allowing investors to become wealthier through their ability to harvest the spreads created by the effect of technological and other change on the time it takes to generate returns on the investment in the raw materials necessary to produce commodities on an expanded scale.

    A striking parallel in modern finance is that the expanded manufacture of debt/credit instruments does double duty in our account of asset production, similar to the way the expanded manufacture of producer goods (constant capital) does in Marx’s account of commodity production. Here debts are like raw materials producing other financial assets that may involve splitting off and repackaging various aspects of risk (such as interest rate risk, default risk, principal risk, currency risk, etc.). Debts themselves also serve directly as vehicles of capital accumulation to the extent that they already constitute future revenue streams that have a present value. Today, an ever-larger proportion of the consumption basket is being used to purchase consumer financial products—often to fund necessities of life like health insurance and housing loans—that create financial instruments that can be used to manufacture new financial assets that can be purchased by institutions and wealthy individuals as vehicles of wealth accumulation.

    I have been claiming that there are two distinct arguments at play in Marx’s critique of the General Formula for Capital (M-C-M1). With respect to “absolute surplus value,” Marx’s argument is that the commodification of labor power allows for a surplus to be created by the employment of workers who are paid a wage that creates a market for the commodities they produce. In the case of “relative surplus value,” however, the argument is different. Here it is the financialization of producer goods that allows the capitalist to vastly increase output through investment in plant and materials alone, while simultaneously reducing his employment of wage labor and implicitly depending on non-wage sources of purchasing power to fund aggregate consumer demand.

    IV

    Whether my discovery of a concept of liquidity inside Marx’s concept of value is a critique or an elaboration of what he actually said is for the reader to decide. It is clear, however, that even when Marx takes his argument beyond the market to the factory floor, the market itself—that is, its liquidity—is already being constructed in the form of new financial products that also happen to be produced means of production. This is why the second volume of Capital concludes with an extended discussion of the need to balance the two “departments” of production—producer goods and consumer products—and then insists that such a “balance” could not constitute what economists would now call equilibrium. Rather, it is merely a point that is passed through on the way between boom and bust and boom, again. For Marx, the lack of any stable equilibrium is inherent in the “logic” of accumulation through overproduction described in Volumes I and III.14

    Is Volume II merely incorrect as a description of the way that the system of production appears within the realm of circulation—perhaps self-consciously so on the part of Marx? Or is it an anticipation of the logic of finance before it was possible to manufacture vehicles of accumulation that had liquidity and were not means of production? The basic fact is, as I argue in “Liquidity,” that what Marx narrowly called “the realization problem” is precisely what mainstream economists (just as broadly, but no less crudely) describe as the existence of “a market” for one’s goods and services. In both cases, what is at stake is quite simply the ability to monetize one’s price and thus raise funds. Marx rightly describes this as a problem, and not an equilibrium, but he did not see that what it means to problematize “a market” is to question its liquidity—to ask whether it exists at all. The potential inability to raise funds—literally, to get (or “realize”) money—is of course inherent in all financial assets other than money itself, the inner secret of which is that it does not have to be spent. So, the “realization” (or liquidity) problem that Marx identifies as causing disaccumulation-by-crisis is attributed by him to a hoarding of money—what Keynes called a heightened “preference” for liquidity—in times of economic turbulence.

    Like all liquidity problems, Marx’s realization problem results in a reduction of asset valuation. It differs from other financial devaluations only insofar as the assets themselves are also produced means of production, and not merely produced vehicles of accumulation. To the extent that they have use values other than to be liquid they are not pure financial products, whose use value consists entirely of having a price. Here it is unsold commodities and a resulting glut of raw materials that get written down in value as collateral, making it harder for the next round of production to get financed in a world in which (as Volume II unexpectedly demonstrates) there is no inherent equilibrium between the markets in producer goods and consumer goods. The key point here, however, is that Marx’s realization problem is ultimately a liquidity problem. The collapse of the market price for one’s end-product results in a shortage of funds and the reduced ability to sell off one’s unused raw materials and underutilized machinery to raise funds.

    What Marx could not have known, as I show in an earlier essay (“Liquidity”), is that his realization problem could be hedged by the manufacture of puts and calls that preserve the value of one’s investment in raw materials during the time it takes to convert them into finished product. Neither could he have known that it is possible, by manufacturing options, to lock in the otherwise fluctuating price of the finished product.15 Marx could not have known any of this because until the Black-Scholes-Merton (BSM) formula of 1973, there was no technology for manufacturing puts and calls in whatever quantity was necessary to meet the demand for these financial instruments without exposing the manufacturer to the speculative risk of owning puts and calls. Stated most simply, BSM defines the price of a manufactured put or call as the cost of hedging it (making it risk free), only after which can the trading of these financial instruments have the use value of pricing risk in the marketplace.

    The existence of a market in puts and calls—the continuing ability to price and monetize them—creates enough liquidity in the underlying market for producer goods to avoid the specific causes Marx gives for the “realization problem.” Value is preserved and accumulated in the form of financial assets by playing on the spread between the asset’s market value if it remains liquid and the asset’s liquidation value if it does not. A fully liquid asset is as good as cash and is thus an alternative to hoarding cash as a store of value because there is no risk of not being able to sell it immediately at its market value. To finance (fund) any asset that is less than fully liquid, one would have to pay a “liquidity premium” either by purchasing a hedge or by posting collateral that is more liquid than the asset itself. Here, the “liquidation value” of the asset would be the cash one could get by selling the pledged collateral, and the “risk premium” would reflect the extent to which the initial value of the collateral exceeds the value of the financial asset that it is used to secure. Based on modern financial theory, there is now an established sense in which an investor in any secured asset is in effect selling a put (or guarantee) to buy back the loan for the market value of the pledged collateral, even if it falls below the value borrowed against it. So, the secured creditor is implicitly collecting a premium (the price of the sold put) that is implicitly purchased (as a hedge against default) by the borrower, and which reflects the spread between the liquidity of the actually-pledged collateral and that of risk-free government bonds (Draghi, Giavazzi, and Merton, 14–25).

    Stated most simply, my argument is that Marx’s realization problem, which expresses the effect of the general “tendency” of capital accumulation to create “crises” of disaccumulation, identifies the space now occupied by portfolio theory in modern finance. In other words, the financial side of the M-C-M1 formula for the self-expansion of capital would now describe C as a portfolio consisting of both debt and equity, and both puts and calls. These are the purely financial products (other than money itself) that are thrown off by the process that Marx describes as capitalism. Their relation can be expressed statically in the basic financial formula that describes the parity of debt and equity in terms related to the parity of puts and calls:

    Stock + Put= =Call + Debt

    As I say in my essay “Liquidity,” “This formula is a simple identity. Intuitively, it says that, if you own a stock plus a put giving you downside protection, you can replicate an investment return equivalent to owning a call giving you upside participation on the stock plus the present value of a loan that has a principal value equivalent to the current stock price.”

    Market liquidity is a result of the ability to manufacture all of these elements, and the pricing of each depends upon the existence of a market in all of the others. Liquidity is thus what financial markets create alongside what Marx called the “value” of goods and services (GDP) that derives from the capacity of what we now call the “real economy” to employ workers who can purchase them.16 Value, for Marx, is in this respect the spectral effect of a fully-employed labor force on the price stability of wage goods—how much labor they command. This is what determines the value of money itself as a vehicle of financial accumulation.17

    The shadowy presence of liquidity alongside value implicitly pervades even Marx’s account of social reproduction through spending the wage. Wage goods, by definition, lack liquidity insofar as there are no economically valuable options embedded in them. This is why Marx’s abstract wage laborer is not investing when he spends on consumer goods and why he must constantly return to the labor market in order to fund his consumption. Every commodity, except for wage goods, has liquidity and can thus serve as a vehicle for preserving and accumulating capital.

    Now that financial products such as health insurance, pension plans, and student loans have become part of a household’s cost of living, the worker’s purchase of them can still be understood in Marxian terms. Rather than see them as investments in human capital, it is better to understand them as a tax paid to the financial sector instead of the state for the maintenance of basic human needs. The worker is here being sold the opportunity to hedge against a specific band of downside risk through an essentially financial product that now enters into the true cost of living without, however, appearing in the inflation index produced by national governments.

    In this re-stated form of Marxism, the pricing of a hedged portfolio would be the counterpart on the financial side of production to the pricing of the commodity on the production side. The ability to hedge is what preserves accumulated wealth by preventing it from fluctuating outside a specific band for a designated period of time. (This is true even as a matter of definition.) Yet the hedge itself, which is essentially a marketable contract, has no use value except to have (and to lock in) exchange value.

    Learning to manufacture and price hedges, first for the asset markets and now as consumer products, has been as important to the development of financial capitalism in the late twentieth century as learning to manufacture commodities by means of industrialized wage labor was in the late nineteenth. This ability of financial institutions to shed (or limit or shift) downside risk is what made asset values more resilient in relation to political risks of disaccumulation beginning in the 1980s. Although Piketty himself does not acknowledge this, it is what allowed the Piketty-effect of rising asset values relative to output to take off.18

    Was this growth in asset prices simply the result of an excess supply of fiat money following the demise of Bretton Woods and, ultimately, the gold standard that even Marx believed imposed a price discipline?19 Speculative bubbles brought on by currency gluts do occur. And there is such a thing as consumer-price inflation. But insofar as the domestic value of currency is ultimately tied to the purchasing power of wages at full employment (a premise shared by Marx and Keynes), there remains a valid distinction between price stability in wage goods and the rising value of investment products as vehicles of real capital accumulation.

    The central point here is that, even if the profit on employing labor for the purpose of producing finished goods declines,20 the overall return on capital can increase through the growing market for financial products. Nowadays these are being sold as an ever-larger portion of the consumption basket.21 And some non-financial products, such as food and clothing, are being marketed as though the consumer were really purchasing a financial option on a better life.22 All this has brought about what, following the Grundrisse, some Italian Marxists call a “real subsumption” of the labor process into the logic of finance.23 This development can be understood as encompassing and superseding the logic of commodification that so preoccupied Marxist cultural studies in the late twentieth century.24

    Piketty’s observation of the tremendous growth in the value of asset markets vis-à-vis the market in goods and services (GDP) after the 1970s corresponds to the development of the ability of the financial sector to manufacture marketable vehicles of capital preservation and growth directly, without investing in expanded production. Although this specific form of capital preservation was not directly anticipated by Marx, it would be consistent with his predicted correlation between rising accumulated wealth and a rising population partially outside the labor force, provided that this accumulated wealth takes the form of assets that allow this “surplus” population to live off credit or government expenditures rather than wages. (How else could they live?)

    The implicit force of Marx’s critique of the “mystery of surplus value” (M-C-M1) is that there must be financial liquidity to fund the creation of value even in the abstract sense described by rigorous theorists of his “value form” (Postone, chs. 4–5, 7). Their account of historically specific market modes of production presupposes that there are markets the impose the discipline of payments for money on people whose access to the means of subsistence thus depends on earning a wage. For the wage-labor relation to occur, sufficient liquidity in financial markets to generate the currency needed to fund production in this form. But financial liquidity is not merely a positive externality thrown off by primary commodity markets themselves. It, rather, comes at a price. In one sense, this price is political—the repression of forces, such as debtor revolts, that would make credit instruments less liquid. Such events would create a cascade of demands that debts be paid off—converted into money—in situations where there would not be enough money in circulation for everyone to do so.

    In another sense, the price of liquidity is set by capital markets that manufacture liquidity by allowing someone to receive a premium for assuming the risk of not being able to monetize an illiquid investment—of not being able to turn it back into money right away, or maybe ever.25 This risk of illiquidity is what the financial market hedges by assigning a price to a vehicle that has liquidity now, and is thus defined as being just as good as money after the price has been paid. In normal circumstances, the function of creating liquidity is privatized through the role of “market-makers” (Treynor 27–28, cf. Ayache).

    V

    Guaranteeing against that risk, and thus supporting the value of asset markets in general, is something only states with the exclusive power to issue currency can do. They do it by swapping their bonds for otherwise illiquid assets at par and then redeeming (or buying back) those bonds by printing new money. The effect is to inject liquidity into the financial markets, and thus satisfy the demand for funds. Clearly, the state’s willingness to do this in order to preserve the value of accumulated wealth—and avoid massive disaccumulation—can come at the expense of justice.27 By this I mean at the most obvious level that, instead of borrowing in order to spend more on social programs that mitigate rising inequality, the state spends less so that it can borrow more cheaply in order to shore up capital markets by providing relatively safe collateral as a substitute for the privately issued financial instruments that have become illiquid. I am here referring most directly to the government austerity programs necessary to shore up the value of accumulated wealth by swapping bad private debt for good public debt at one hundred cents on the dollar.

    But in saying that wealth preservation comes at the expense of justice, I also allude to a point beyond the scope of this paper—namely, that most (though probably not all) wealth gaps are the cumulative effects of past injustice and that leaving accumulated wealth intact will very likely allow the effects of past injustice to keep on compounding. To the extent that justice itself might consist of disgorgement of such unjust enrichment, then, maintaining the liquidity of accumulated assets as they stand is at best a postponement of justice for which no real price has been paid by the ongoing beneficiaries of past injustice. The price of using the government’s borrowing power to support financial market liquidity is therefore ultimately political in the sense that the demand for justice must be repressed in order to accomplish it.

    If we treat a “Marxist” revolution, or any forced imposition of historical justice aimed at appropriating and sharing the value of accumulated wealth as the analytical opposite of bailing out capital markets, it would almost certainly reduce (if not end) the liquidity of financial instruments based on debt, and thus reduce their value as assets and as collateral pledged to fund other assets. A major ideological tool of political repression is thus the claim that exercising the option of a Marxist revolution would bring about a major illiquidity event (also known as a threatened counterrevolution) that would reduce asset valuation to zero before any redistribution could even begin to take place. We (on the side of justice) are thus led to believe that accumulated wealth is not a collective product of past—and ongoing—injustice, but rather a chimera (or “fiction”) that would vanish if and when we try to seize it for purposes of reparation. This is not a good response to the opportunities raised by the threat of capital disaccumulation due to illiquidity because it fails to price the “justice” premium that could and should be collected for not exercising the option of imposing an illiquidity event on capital by means of force (such as the financial equivalent of a general strike in labor markets).

    The most serious political question, I have come to believe, is not who gets the credit or blame for destroying the fruits of past injustice, but rather who gets paid the price or can be made to pay the price of rolling over the option of justice and preserving the value of accumulated wealth. But before taking up this question in Part VII, let me take up some of the more obvious objections to my reading of Marx in the register of financialized, rather than industrial, capitalism, and develop the idea that even in a period of low political turbulence there is always a price to be extracted for letting accumulated wealth continue to grow.

    VI

    As an advance on Piketty, I propose that the object of justice is not merely the marginal redistribution of revenue flows from current income, but also the harvesting for public purposes of the asset (i.e., capital) market valuation that he expresses as a multiple of GDP. The asset market represents accumulated wealth, whose present value depends on preserving its liquidity. Although some wealth may have been acquired and accumulated justly, and some as a matter of chance, I regard the total volume of it as a reasonable proxy for the continued benefits to society from past injustice. I believe the wealth of asset markets should be viewed as a potential fund for remedying the extent to which those ongoing benefits have compounded, and thus widened, inequalities even after the original injustice itself has either ceased to exist or ceased to be defended by its present beneficiaries. By parallel reasoning, the welfare state might be considered the price extracted (up to one third of GNP) for rolling over the option to have a general strike that would have substantially reduced economic output.

    My underlying premise, first introduced in After Evil, is that the effects of past injustice worsen to the extent that the benefits arising from them continue to compound and that the gaps/inequalities attributable to them continue to deepen. In A Theory of Justice, John Rawls regards social wealth as though it were a product of collective agreement on the basic principles of justice. In After Evil, I view the widening of cumulative inequalities due to past injustice as a collective social product that results from rolling over the option of demanding an earlier disgorgement of those gains. This is true, I argue, even when (perhaps especially when) the injustice has been put in the past and the differential advantages to beneficiaries have been allowed to continue without being seen to perpetuate past evils. In a sense, these benefits are a collective product of allowing the gains from past injustice to continue to compound.28

    I am here suggesting that justice itself should be viewed as an “option” (a contingent claim) on the cumulative value of past injustice, and that the socio-economic spreads attributable to it could now be seen as a resource from which greater justice (a reduction of the gaps) could be funded. If this suggestion is plausible, then the magnitude of the notional value on which that funding claim is made would be very much larger than GDP—which is national income measured as revenue flows. At the very least (and considering the US alone), it would include the Total Credit Market Debt29 that can be pledged as collateral for creating the financial assets, including derivatives, in which most wealth is held. This amount is c.>3.5x GDP (Duncan), a figure that does not include the asset valuation of real property and equities, which can also be pledged as collateral. The notional value of asset values at risk due to an illiquidity event rises dramatically if we consider the level of cross-collateralization that exists in global financial markets (Singh and Aitken) as well as the systemic interdependencies among global financial institutions (Merton, “New Approach”).

    The central question, however, is not how high the notional value of financial asset markets is, but how to value the U.S. government guarantee (often called a “liquidity put”) that supported asset values in cross-collateralized markets that were conceded to be “bubbly” (Farhi and Tirole).

    Fortunately for my approach, top economists from the IMF and NBER, led by at least three Nobel Prize winners (Merton, Tirole and Holmström) have recently argued that the guarantees, both implicit and explicit, that the U.S. government provided to financial markets should be reflected as a liability on its books at its value during the financial crisis, and also on the books of financial institutions as an asset that took the form of a direct subsidy. Their initial approach was to apply “contingent claims analysis” (options pricing theory) to macroeconomic guarantees, such as government deposit insurance (Merton and Bodie) and other “off-balance sheet” risks of private-sector institutions that are implicitly and explicitly transferred to the balance sheet of governments during financial “shocks” (Draghi, Giavazzi, and Merton). The result of this approach—combining options-pricing theory with macroeconomic analysis—is now called “Macrofinancial Risk Analysis” (Gray, Merton and Bodie; Gray and Malone) and provides the policy analysis supporting government provision of “outside liquidity” to the private financial sector so that assets are not sold off at “fire-sale” prices, leading to what these economists regard as an inefficient utilization of resources (Holmström and Tirole). Based on their analysis, the price of the liquidity put that was actually provided to the financial sector in 2007–2009 should have been assessed in the range of $7-13T of dollars (higher or lower depending on what implicit guarantees are included). This is, according to their argument, a price that the financial sector could/should have paid to government without reducing asset values, and that, arguably, might have benefited those “consumers/taxpayers” negatively impacted by the financial crisis.

    What, then, is the difference between their pricing of the liquidity put in 2008 and my argument that justice is, and was, an option? The first—most obvious—difference is that they, as policy experts, are advocating the government guarantees of the financial sector, even as a free gift, rather than calling attention to the compounding of injustice that might make it more politically difficult to follow their recommendations next time. For this reason, they tend to avoid adding up the component prices of the liabilities they believe should be fully reflected on the government’s books. A second difference is that I want to make it politically more difficult to provide the put without actually selling it at its full price.

    So, I am proposing in the spirit of Marxism that we posit simple political equation between the price of the liquidity put that supports asset values and prevents their disaccumulation (the “fire-sale”) and the premium that could be charged for rolling over the option of justice seen as an event of disaccumulation (the “fire-sale”). This stresses the fact that financial asset valuations are politically contingent: there is nothing “natural” about them, but neither are they artificial. They are, rather, a reflection of the cumulative social effects of past injustice which should always be at stake in any version of democracy that does not merely manufacture acquiescence to the status quo.

    Why is this in the spirit of Marx? According to my restatement above, the fundamental fact that production under capitalism must be financed (or it’s not capitalism) means that the investor is always buying a financial asset that is meant to maintain or increase its value except when he is spending money to consume or to employ workers who will spend their wages to consume. In finance-centered capitalism the investor (chooser) rather than the producer (maker) is the focal point. Here, capital itself is never not invested. The question is always what to fund.

    In Capital III Marx discovered the independent and destabilizing role of capital markets in the mode of production described in Capital I—both enabling and disrupting the system of circulation described in Capital II. He was limited, however, to describing a transitional mode of producing commodities (the transition from manufacture to heavy industry) as a capitalism that shared key characteristics of investment-based manufacture or farming (Meister “Liquidity,” 152–63). Marx did not, however, get as far as to see capitalism as also a distinctive technology for producing prices based, essentially, on the ability to price the generic form of an investment, i.e., the hedge or option form, as the primary example of a pure financial asset. In foregrounding the option, alongside the commodity, as the kernel of capitalist epistemology, I here suggest that what many call “the financial revolution” beginning in the 1970s may not have been such a fundamental break in the nature of capitalism after all. My argument has been that in capitalist forms of value liquidity has always been coequal with utility, and that a focus on the drivers of accumulation (asset market growth) is no less important than a focus on the drivers of production (GDP growth). Indeed, the role of the state in preventing rapid disaccumulation of even “bubbly” capital markets by creating macrofinancial options makes the continuation of capitalism as such appear to be more contingent, and thus politically vulnerable, than it was when Marx captured the forces driving the industrialization of manufacture and broke of his manuscript at just the point of reconnecting this with classes and the state (Capital III).

    Looking at accumulated wealth from the point of view of the investor, not of the state, we thus have an asset “market” that produces as a byproduct goods, services, and the funding with which to buy them in the quest for ever greater liquidity. A purely financial product—of which money itself is only the most liquid example—is something that is produced in order to be priced (made liquid) as an investment through which value is preserved by giving its buyers and sellers the ability to hedge out price fluctuations, currency fluctuations, counter-party default risks, etc. What can’t be hedged out is “liquidity risk” itself, the failure of dealers to make a market in funding the liquidity of all financial collateral (especially that which is debt-based). It is liquidity risk, and the resulting need to back all private debt with public debt, that provides the foundation for treating justice as an option that can be socially valued and put back on the table of democratic politics.

    A crisis in liquidity threatens to bring about a disaccumulation of all wealth, much of which was created by allowing the cumulative benefits of past injustice to persist into the present and even increase. And so, alongside the goods and services market we now have the market in financial asses that makes rolling over the option of justice more or less valuable as economic and political turbulence create opportunities to trigger a liquidity crisis. The exercise value of the option of justice (let’s call it “Marxist revolution”) could take the form of either socialist abundance, in which the accumulated wealth of society is preserved in its entirety, independently of its present possessors, or of socialist austerity in which the accumulated wealth of society turns out to be entirely dependent on present ownership arrangements, leaving no one better-off, but the wealthy considerably poorer unless they buy back the option at a very high price. But in order for capitalism to coexist with some form of democracy, the option of justice can never expire. This means that it could be continuously repriced as what Robert Shiller calls “perpetual futures”30 in much the way that Merton, Tirole and Holmström et al. advocate continuous repricing of the government-issued “liquidity puts” to support financial asset values.

    The important point is, thus, that revolutionary justice as an option that can’t yet be exercised is clearly not worth zero to those whose claims might threaten market liquidity if not repressed.31 To say that the liquidity of asset markets should not come without a political price is to say that there is an open question about what price should be paid, and who should receive it, in order to preserve liquidity. The positive side is that cumulative wealth in these markets has grown by not settling the claim of justice yet. There should be resources in the form of flows of funds and collateral that could be used to reduce rather than increase the ongoing gaps that past injustice has caused.

    The question of justice today, when asked in Marx’s spirit, is how to harvest the benefits arising from past injustice, instead of making all that bad history a complete waste. What makes democracy matter, when it does, is precisely that it preserves justice as an option, which also suggests that removing justice as an option would be a strategy for making democracy no longer matter. In the democratic politics of financialized capitalism, it is thus important to treat historical justice as an inherently contingent claim, whole value remains in play whether or not it is—or can be—exercised by force. As a political matter, we can thus learn to speak of justice as a kind of option on historically accumulated wealth, and not as a fixed pattern or set of end-states.32 And we can regard this option as something that can be rolled over by extracting a premium for the continuing liquidity of accumulated wealth.

    My analytical use of the concept of communist revolution as an exercise of the option to make cumulative wealth illiquid creates a framework for understanding the rare occasions in which political settlements occur instead of revolution. This happens when political and economic volatilities are high enough for one or the other side to give up, rather than roll over, its political options. In a wider range of circumstances, however, we can still learn to speak of justice as a kind of optionality on historically accumulated wealth, and not as a fixed pattern or set of end-states. To begin to see and live justice using the concepts that emerge from reconceiving Marx’s analysis and critique of historical capitalism in the register of contemporary finance expresses the contingency of the realization of historical justice far more completely and creatively than prevailing concepts of “transitional justice” ever will.

    Footnotes

    1. See Capital Vol. III, especially chapters 25 and 29–33.

    2. For a critical view of analogies between economics and physics, see Mirowski.

    3. Orléan (chs. 2, 7) argues that the desire for “liquidity” is inherently “mimetic (in a Girardian sense): thus “[l]iquidity is a creation of the desire for liquidity, just as prestige is a creation of the desire for prestige” (114). His argument focuses on the “polarizing” rather than “equilibrating” dynamic of the pursuit of liquidity in financial markets. It is what everyone is conventionally presumed to want—and to want unanimously, so its existence is in effect a precondition for investing in anything at a stable price. According to Orléan, price itself is ““a wholly original creation of the financial community in the search for liquidity” (234), the logic of which “rests on conventional belief . . . and disappears when this belief is cast in doubt” (234).

    In my view, Orléan’s correct observation that liquidity is conventional in the sense that everyone will want to sell whatever seems to lack it into a falling market makes it “social” rather than “fictitious.” It is no more or less material than the existence of the market itself, which rests on liquidity. So, my focus on liquidity in the argument above is meant to be a focus on the political vulnerability of finance at the point where it relies entirely upon convention.

    4. For a survey, see Patinkin and Steiger. The term goes back at least as far as David Hume’s 1752 essays on money and is taken up in Joseph Schumpeter’s History of Economic Analysis. See, also, Boianovsky for uses of the term in Böhm-Bawerk and Fisher.

    5. See Mezzadra and Neilson, Border and “Borderscapes.”

    6. See Beggs et al.; Bryan and Rafferty.

    7. See, especially, the end of Capital I, chapter 25 and Appendix; Capital II, part 3; and Capital III, part 3.

    8. A now-massive literature on the “transformation problem” begins with Marx, Capital, vol. 3, ch. 9.

    9. See Meister, “Marx.”

    10. See The Principles, especially chapters 6–7.

    11. See, e.g., Foley.

    12. This “absolute general law” appears for the first time in Capital I and is missing, for example, in the Grundrisse, where the concept of “relative surplus value” is mentioned.

    13. In relation to financial theory, Marx’s great innovation was to extend of the logic of economic “rents” from Ricardo’s treatment of land as a vehicle of wealth accumulation to the investment in producer goods, especially raw materials, which fall under his rubric of “constant capital.” This logic today extends into the manufacture of purely financial products, such as credit-backed derivatives, and on to non-financial commodities (consumer goods and services) that mimic financial products, such as cell-phone contracts and “price-fare locks” on airline tickets.

    14. I am grateful to Moishe Postone for clarifying this point and look forward to the publication of his lectures on Volume II.

    15. An investment, for example, in steel as a raw material can be protected against lower demand for manufactured goods containing steel by buying the option to put back the steel one overbought at the price one initially paid for it. The price of this put would then rise as the price of steel falls, preserving the value of the steel as collateral for the funds the capitalist needed to buy it. It is, moreover, possible to profit from a higher demand for steel by selling puts or buying calls without investing in the underlying asset, steel, at all.

    16. It is true, of course, that both the bursting of a speculative bubble and what Marx calls the “disaccumulation” of surplus value are typically results of an illiquidity event. From this one might conclude that relative surplus value is no more “real” than financial speculation (in this case on the continuing growth of consumer demand). The correct point, however, is that maintaining liquidity is a requirement of all accumulated capital, whether “speculative” or “real” in Marx’s sense, and that vulnerability to a liquidity crisis is not sufficient to distinguish real disaccumulation in the sphere of production from the bursting of a speculative bubble that can also occur and is a distinctive phenomenon. My interpretive claim, above, is that Marx left this illiquidity undertheorized when he called it simply “the realization problem” (which could be said to comprise the entirety of the market system that non-Marxist economists study).

    17. It is worth pausing for a moment to ask why the stability of currency is of interest in Marx. The reason is that money is not merely a medium of exchange establishing an equivalence (through price) of otherwise disparate products. It is also, in his terms, a “store of value.” Thus, the transformation of value into its “money form” (emphasis added) does not mean merely the exchange of a commodity for a price. It also means that value can be held—that is, preserved and accumulated—in the form of money rather than in the form of any commodity of equivalent price. The very fact that money gives its holder the option of not investing it, but rather hoarding, makes it a potential store of value such that the source of funds for investment can be described by the Federal Reserve as “dishoarding” (Copeland 254). Now, of course, “the money form of value” (characterized by hoarding and dishoarding) precedes the existence of other financial assets, such as producer goods. That is why Marx and other political economists needed to pierce the veil of money to define the historical specificity of capitalism. But even in capitalism, as Marx says, it is the flight into money (the refusal to spend) that creates the “realization problem.” This formulation represents a throwback to the time when currency was the only truly liquid financial asset.

    18. My view of accumulated wealth as largely consisting of financial products, beginning with hedges, cuts across the distinction between “real” and “fictitious” forms of capital accumulation introduced by Marx himself, and carried forward even by David Harvey, whose Limits of Capital (1982) leaves room for a more nuanced treatment of finance that he does not undertake in subsequent writings (e.g., The Enigmas of Capital [2011]). In the market for liquid assets we have a “value form” that is no less “real” than the money form of value is in Marx, or than the accumulation of relative surplus value or even the surplus value created by faster turnover of materials as described in Capital II in a way that makes no connection to embodied labor-power. In all these ways Marx was less orthodox on the question of “fictitious capital” than many of his present-day acolytes.

    19. See, e.g., Duncan chs. 1–3.

    20. See, e.g., Brenner.

    21. See, e.g., Bryan, et al.

    22. It is also the case that, today, even manufacturing companies are being bought and sold as financial products (to be valued based on their revenue streams). For an accessible narrative of this development, see Fox.

    23. See, e.g., Negri, especially “Lesson Seven”; Tomba and Bellofiore. The source of this discussion is Marx’s “Fragment on Machines.”

    24. The seminal work of Martin broke with this tendency. See, e.g., The Financialization and An Empire.

    25. The investment could be raw materials to be used in production, or a house, or a long-term bond, or, perhaps, a financial option to buy or sell any of the above at a predetermined price. For useful discussions of the various uses of “liquidity” to describe financial innovation see Ricks and Nesvaitolova, “’Liquidity’” See also Nesvaitolova, “The Crisis.”

    26. For a succinct statement of the mid-century (Keynesian) view of money-creation, cf. Lerner., esp., pp. 38–41.

    27. For an explicit recognition of this, see Angelatos, et. al. States and banks are the paradigm case of public/private partnership. Both can “create” money by either spending or lending it into existence; either can incur debt (liabilities) that are expected to remain liquid rather than being repaid. The difference is that states can repay or refinance their debts by either issuing or withdrawing (taxing) money of their own creation, whereas banks are obliged to use state money for this purpose. In this sense banks are both backed and regulated by the state’s monopoly power to issue and tax currency.

    28. I thus regard the value of any widening disparities that result from past injustice as a social product in much the way that John Rawls regarded differential social benefits as a product of a social agreement on principles of justice. For me, the premium that can be extracted for rolling over the cumulative gains of past injustice (while reducing differential benefits) departs from my baseline scenario of revolutionary disaccumulation in much the way that Rawls’s “difference principle” (allowing a limited range of income inequalities, but only if the worst-off would be no better off without them) departs from his baseline conception of justice that otherwise have been more radically egalitarian. Cf. Rawls, ch. 2; Cohen (2008); cf. Cohen (2000).

    29. Total Credit Market Debt had been, until a few years ago, a statistic reported quarterly by the US Federal Reserve Bank (Statistical Report) Z.1, The Financial Accounts of the United States: Flow of Funds, Balance Sheets, and Integrated Macroeconomic Accounts. I base the analysis above on the 2011 Q2 Report Table L.1, following Duncan, chs. 2–3.

    Adding all sectors together, total credit market debt averaged around 150 percent of GDP between 1946 and 1970. That ratio moved up gradually to 170 percent by the end of the 1970s, but then accelerated sharply during the 1980s, ending that decade at 230 percent. The rate of debt expansion slowed during most of the 1990s, but surged again from 1998. By 2007, total credit market debt to GDP had hit 360 percent. (Duncan 77)

    The current version Z.1 can be found at https://www.federalreserve.gov/releases/z1/Current/z1.pdf. It discontinues Table L.1 which is, nevertheless maintained by the St. Louis Fed at https://fred-stlouisfed-org.ezproxy.library.uvic.ca/series/TCMDO. Here the ratio hovers around 350 per cent. In 2016 TCMD is $63.5T and GDP is $18.6T, yielding a ratio 340 percent. Although I am indebted to Duncan for calling my attention to the TCMD/GDP ratio, my analysis and conclusions differ significantly from his argument, which attributes global instability to the fall of the gold standard and the rise of fiat currency. He, thus, wants to reintroduce a bright line between currency creation and credit, whereas I focus here on the liquidity of credit as such. My own view of the matter is closer to Orléan, who could explain these anomalies by regarding liquidity as, essentially a “mimetic” concept in Girard’s sense, “[L]iquidity is a creation of the desire for liquidity, just as prestige is a creation of the desire for prestige (114)” and sees money (and moneyness) itself as growing out of “a unanimous desire for liquidity” (138).

    30. It might be based, for example, on the spread between an inequality index and a growth index (Shiller, “Measuring Asset Values.” See, also, Macro-Markets, ch. 4 and New Financial Order, ch. 9).

    31. Rolling over their out-of-the-money option may be worth something, for example, to indigenous peoples who are, or could be, in a position to threaten the liquidity of real estate markets by pressing specific claims, whether in the courts or through direct action.

    32. See Nozick, ch. 7.

    Works Cited

    • Angeletos, George-Marios, Fabrice Collard, and Harris Dellas. “Public Debt as Private Liquidity: Optimal Policy.” NBER Working Paper 22794, 2016. Ayache, Elie. “I am a Creator!” Wilmott Magazine, June 2008, pp. 36–46.
    • Beggs, Mike, et al. “Shoplifters of the World Unite! Law and Culture in Financialized Times.” Cultural Studies, vol. 28, nos. 5–6, March 2014, pp. 976–996.
    • Boianovsky, Mauro. “Böhm-Bawerk, Irving Fisher and the Term ‘Veil of Money’: A Note.” History of Political Economy, vol. 25, no. 4, 1993, pp. 725–738.
    • Brenner, Robert. The Economics of Global Turbulence: The Advanced Capitalist Economies from Long Boom to Long Downturn, 1945–2005. Verso, 2006.
    • Bryan, Dick, and Mike Rafferty. “Political Economy and Housing in the Twenty-First Century – From Mobile Homes to Liquid Housing?” Housing, Theory and Society, vol. 31, no. 4, 2014, pp. 404–412.
    • Bryan, Dick, et al. “Financialization and Marx: Giving Labor and Capital a Financial Makeover.” Review of Radical Political Economics, vol. 41, no. 4, Fall 2009, pp. 458–472.
    • Cohen, Gerald A. If You’re an Egalitarian How Come You’re So Rich? Harvard UP, 2000.
    • ———. Rescuing Justice and Equality. Harvard UP, 2008.
    • Copeland, Morris A. “Social Accounting for Moneyflows.” Accounting Review, vol. 24, no. 3, July 1949, 254–264.
    • Draghi, Mario, Francesco Giavazzi, and Robert C. Merton. “Transparency, Risk Management and International Financial Fragility.” NBER Working Papers 9806, 2003. Duncan, Richard. The Next Depression: The Breakdown of the Paper Money Economy. Wiley, 2012.
    • Farhi, Emmanuel and Jean Tirole. “Bubbly Liquidity.” The Review of Economic Studies, vol. 79, iss. 2, 1 April 2012, pp. 678–706.
    • Foley, Duncan. Understanding Capital: Marx’s Economic Theory. Harvard UP, 1986.
    • Fox, Justin. The Myth of the Rational Market. Harper Collins, 2009.
    • Gray, Dale, Robert C. Merton, and Zvi Bodie. “New Framework for Measuring and Managing Macrofinancial Risk and Financial Stability.” Banco Central de Chile, 2009.
    • ——— and Samuel Malone. Macrofinancial Risk Analysis. Wiley, 2008.
    • Harvey, David. The Enigmas of Capital. Oxford UP, 2011.
    • ———. Limits to Capital. U of Chicago P, 1982.
    • Holmström, Bengt and Jean Tirole. Inside and Outside Liquidity. MIT P, 2011.
    • Lerner, Abba. “Functional Finance and the Federal Debt.” Social Research, vol. 10, 1943, pp. 38–51.
    • Martin, Randy. An Empire of Indifference: American War and the Financial Logic of Risk Management. Duke UP, 2007.
    • ———. The Financialization of Daily Life. Temple UP, 2002.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy Vol. 1, translated by Ben Fowkes, Vintage, 1981.
    • ———. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy Vol. II, translated by David Fernbach, Vintage, 1981.
    • ———. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy Vol. III, translated by David Fernbach, Vintage, 1981.
    • ———. “Fragment on Machines.” Grundrisse, translated by Martin Nicolaus, Penguin, 1973, pp. 690–712.
    • Mehrling, Perry. “Modern Money: Fiat or Credit?” Journal of Post-Keynesian Economics, vol. 22, no. 3, 2000, pp. 397–406.
    • ———. “What is Monetary Economics About?” Economics of Money and Banking. Coursera course. Class notes, Mimeo, 2 January 2000. Meister, Robert. After Evil. Columbia UP, 2011.
    • ———. “Liquidity.” Derivatives and the Wealth of Society, edited by Benjamin Lee and Randy Martin, U of Chicago P, 2016, pp. 143–173.
    • ———. “Marx on Finance.” Contexts, 20 May 2013, pp. 70–72.
    • ———. “Is Justice an Option? Politics After Evil.” Manuscript. Merton, Robert C., Monica Billio, Mila Getmansky, Dale Gray, Andrew W. Lo, and Loriana Pelizzon. “On a New Approach for Analyzing and Managing Macrofinancial Risks.” Financial Analysts Journal, vol. 69, no. 2, April 2013, pp. 22–33.
    • Mezzadra, Sandro, and Brett Neilson. Border as Method: Or, The Multiplication of Labor. Duke UP, 2013.
    • ———. “Borderscapes of Differential Inclusion: Subjectivity and Struggles on the Threshold of Justice’s Excess.” The Borders of Justice, edited by Étienne Balibar et al., Temple UP, 2012, pp. 181–203.
    • Mill, John Stuart. The Principles of Political Economy with Some of Their Applications to Social Philosophy (Books III–V and Appendices), edited by John M. Robson, U of Toronto P, 1965.
    • Mirowski, Philip. More Heat Than Light: Economics as Social Physics, Physics as Nature’s Economics. Cambridge UP, 1989.
    • Negri, Antonio. Marx Beyond Marx: Lessons on the Grundrisse. Pluto, 1991.
    • Nesvetailova, Anastasia. “The Crisis of Invented Money: Liquidity Illusion and the Global Credit Meltdown.” Theoretical Inquiries in Law, vol. 11, no. 1, 2010, pp. 125–147.
    • ———. “‘Liquidity’ in Light of the Shadow Banking System: Lessons from the Crisis.” Economic Policy and the Financial Crisis, edited by Mamica and Tridico, Routledge, 2014, pp. 132–47.
    • Nozick, Robert. Anarchy, State and Utopia. Basic Books, 1974.
    • Orléan, André. The Empire of Value: A New Foundation for Economics, translated by M. B. DeBevoise, MIT P, 2014.
    • Patinkin, Don, and Otto Steiger. “In Search of the ‘Veil of Money’ and the ‘Neutrality of Money’: A Note on the Origin of Terms.” The Scandinavian Journal of Economics, vol. 91, no. 1, 1989, pp. 131–146.
    • Piketty, Thomas. Capital in the Twenty-First Century, translated by Arthur Goldhammer, Harvard UP, 2014.
    • Postone, Moishe. Time, Labor, and Social Domination: A Reinterpretation of Marx’s Critical Theory. Cambridge UP, 1993.
    • ———. Lectures on Capital, Vol. II. University of Chicago, Spring 2015.
    • Rawls, John. A Theory of Justice. Harvard UP, 1971.
    • Ricks, Morgan. The Money Problem: Rethinking Financial Regulation. U of Chicago P, 2016.
    • Shiller, Robert J. Macro Markets: Creating Institutions for Managing Society’s Largest Economic Risks. Oxford UP, 1993.
    • ———. “Measuring Asset Values for Cash Settlement in Derivative Markets: Hedonic Repeated Measures Indices and Perpetual Futures.” NBER Working Paper 131, December 1993. ———. The New Financial Order: Risk in the 21st Century. Princeton UP, 2003.
    • Singh, Manmohan and James Aitkin. “The (Sizable) Role of Rehypothecation in the Shadow Banking System.” IMF Working Paper 10/172, International Monetary Fund, July 2010. Tomba, Massimiliano, and Riccardo Bellofiore. “The ‘Fragment on Machines’ and the Grundrisse: The Workerist Reading in Question.” Beyond Marx, edited by Marcel van der Linden and Karl Heinz Roth, Brill, 2013, pp. 345–367.
    • Treynor, Jack. “The Economics of the Dealer Function.” Financial Analysts Journal, vol. 43, no. 6, 1987, pp. 27–34.
    • US Federal Reserve Bank (Statistical Report) Z.1, The Financial Accounts of the United States: Flow of Funds, Balance Sheets, and Integrated Macroeconomic Accounts, June 9, 2011.
  • No one has yet learned how fast a body can go: Speed and Technology after Spinoza

    Simon Glezos (bio)
    University of Victoria

    Abstract

    As new technologies accelerate the pace of the world, the human body is exposed to hitherto unexperienced velocities. Will the body acquire new powers and opportunities in consequence, or will we find it torn apart by this new speed? This article considers three possible types of encounter—destructive, diminishing, and augmenting—between speed, technology, and the body. It then turns to the work of Spinoza to explain the interrelation between them and to provide a political and ethical guide to promoting positive encounters.

    This article considers the relation between theories of speed, theories of the body, and the work of Baruch Spinoza. While the topic of speed has not been absent from the history of political, social, and cultural thought,1 there has been renewed theoretical investigation of it in the last two decades.2 This investigation of speed has gone beyond the discussion of macro sites such as warfare and globalizing capitalism, turning instead to the micro terrain of the body and applying the results of the extensive work done in the realm of corporeal theory over the last few decades.3 Curiously, this discussion has not by and large considered Spinoza.4 This seems like a missed opportunity, as the work of Spinoza is an ideal hinge between theories of the body and theories of speed. Spinoza’s Ethics explicitly conceives of the body in terms of “relation[s] of motion-and-rest” (73, Part II, Proposition 13, Lemma 3, Proof), making speed and the body inherently related. My goal in this paper is not primarily to contribute to the rich vein of recent theoretical work on Spinoza,5 although I hope that putting Spinoza in conversation with work on speed and the body will help to bring out important aspects of all three. Rather, my belief is that the philosophy of Spinoza can play an important role in helping us to better understand the relationship between our accelerating world and the human body, and to develop an ethical framework to help us navigate this relationship.

    I begin by articulating three different types of “encounters” (to use Spinoza’s vocabulary) between the human body and an accelerating world. The first is exemplified by the experience of jet lag; the second by the technological apparatus of the flight suit; and the third by the Acheulean axe, one of the earliest human tools. Each highlights a different possible outcome of the encounter between speed and the body, and crystallizes a set of assumptions and understandings about how they relate. Each also expresses a different vision of life in an accelerating world: in the first, speed is destructive to the human body; in the second, speed is a prosthetic for – and possibly parasitic on – the human body; and in the third, speed is constitutive of the human body. These three examples are not, of course, exhaustive of all possible encounters between speed and the body. Following Spinoza, I will argue that there is no way of knowing all the ways in which such encounters can take place. However, it is useful to focus on these three because they address influential accounts of speed, technology, and the body. I show how the assumptions, implications, and ontologies involved in each cut across multiple philosophical traditions, and show up in widely divergent social contexts. I draw from diverse sources (including literature, philosophy, history and anthropology) and time periods (from the contemporary to the pre-historic). My goal is not to argue that these accounts are novel or unique, but rather that they are consistently recurring perspectives, as likely to be articulated in high philosophy as in common sense. What is more, as we will see, these different accounts of the relationship between speed and the body can give rise to important political effects and affects.

    Having laid out these visions of what speed does to bodies, I go on to show that the work of Spinoza can provide an overarching theory for all three. I turn to his monistic ontology, showing that differences are never metaphysically “substantial” but the result of interacting patterns of “motion-and-rest.” I then introduce his concept of conatus, arguing that each of the three encounters affects the conatus of the human body differently. The result is a rubric that allows us to understand encounters between the body and speed; it asks not whether they are natural but rather what their ethical effects might be. Spinoza, I argue, offers us an important set of tools for understanding the status of the body in an accelerating world.6

    Three Encounters Between Speed and the Body

    First Encounter: Jet Lag

    Five hours’ New York jet lag and Cayce Pollard wakes in Camden Town to the dire and ever-circling wolves of disrupted circadian rhythm.

    It is that flat and spectral non-hour, awash in limbic tides, brainstem stirring fitfully, flashing inappropriate reptilian demands for sex, food, sedation, all of the above…

    She knows, now, absolutely, hearing the white noise of London, that Damien’s theory of jet lag is correct: that her mortal soul is leagues behind her, being reeled in on some ghostly umbilical down the vanished wake of the plane that brought her here, hundreds of thousands of feet above the Atlantic. Souls can’t move that quickly, and are left behind, and must be awaited, upon arrival, like lost luggage. (1)

    William Gibson has a knack for identifying the ways in which life has changed in the digital age. In the passage above – from his novel Pattern Recognition – Gibson points out the extent to which jet lag marks a fundamental shift in the human condition. However minor an irritation, jet lag speaks to a much greater rift in the world. To say that souls can’t move as quickly as bodies is to argue for a fundamental disjuncture between the natural pace of the body and the velocities at which technologies now allow us to travel. Jet lag results when the human body is exposed to something for which evolution could not have prepared it: a situation in which the body’s internal clock doesn’t sync up with external light cues. Gibson presents us with the image of a reptilian brainstem desperately trying to make sense of a world that seems to outstrip the body’s ability to adapt. Gibson’s description carries with it an account of the relationship between the body and speed that is neither new nor uncommon. In its simplest form, it says two things: 1) that the body has a natural speed, an essential velocity, rhythm, or pace layered into its “soul,” enacted by its nervous system, and encoded in its DNA; and 2) that as the world has accelerated, a disjuncture has formed between the natural pace of the body and the world in which it lives. This disjuncture produces a kind of friction where the body rubs up against the speed of the world and is worn down. Cayce Pollard lies in her bed, trying to immobilize her body for at least a little while, allowing its natural rhythms to reassert themselves and waiting for her “soul” to catch up with her body.

    We should not view this story as unique to our modern, hyper-accelerated world, for it tends to emerge regularly in times of social or technological change. For example, a similar account of bodily anxiety over acceleration developed in the 19th century. John Tomlinson’s The Culture of Speed charts the rise of this anxiety, driven by advances in railroad and telegraphy:

    there was, from at least the 1880s, a string of extravagantly alarmist prognoses of the effects of the pace of modern life on the human nervous system. In one of the earliest and most influential, American Nervousness: Its Causes and Consequences (1881), George M. Beard introduced the concept of ‘neurasthenia’ into psychotherapeutic discourse: “Beard argued that the telegraph, railroads, and steam power have enabled businessmen to make ‘a hundred times’ more transactions in a given period than had been possible in the eighteenth century; they intensified competition and tempo, causing an increase in the incidence of a host of problems including neurasthenia, nervousness, dyspepsia, early tooth decay and even premature baldness.” (Kern 125, qtd. in Tomlinson 36)

    Here we see jet lag avant la lettre: an image of bodies crumbling, decaying, and dying from the pressures of high velocity society. Though not always articulated in such extreme ways, wherever we hear of the unnatural or inhuman acceleration of the world, this perspective lurks in the background.7

    Second Encounter: The G-Suit

    Even as our anxiety about the pace of the world increases, technological acceleration continues relentlessly onward and humans travel at ever-faster velocities. As our bodies are buffeted by the accelerating pace of technology, we turn to technology in order to protect them. Take the example of the G-Suit. The gravitational force (or g-force) created by jet travel at supersonic speeds puts so much pressure on the human body that blood pools in the lower extremities, causing pilots to black out. The G-suit was developed in response to this risk. A G-suit contains a set of bladders around the legs and abdomen that inflate during high g-force acceleration, compressing the body and maintaining blood pressure. It therefore allows pilots to experience higher g-forces for longer stretches without passing out. The G-suit thus augments the human body, allowing it to withstand the rigors of supersonic travel; it acts as an intermittent exoskeleton, periodically becoming rigid to protect its soft human interior from the effects of the disjuncture between the “natural” pace of the body and the “artificial” pace of technology. In fact, the G-suit is only the most visible aspect of a much wider technological assemblage augmenting the human body in flight. Maintaining flight at supersonic speeds requires constant adjustments at a pace faster than human reflexes allow. Fighter jets are full of computers and sensors that produce these micro-adjustments without human intervention, augmenting the “natural” speed of the human body and allowing it to engage with technological acceleration. In this encounter, rather than the simple opposition between the velocity of the body and that of the world (as experienced in jet lag), the same technological velocity can be grafted onto the body, with the G-suit serving as a kind of prosthetic accelerator.

    How, more precisely, is the relationship between speed and the body being imagined here? To conceive of technology as prosthesis is to reject the claim that technological velocity can only destroy the body and its velocity. Nevertheless, this conception shares with the first story the idea that a disjuncture exists between natural and technological speeds. The body must be shielded and augmented, wrapped in a carapace of technology before it can be subjected to the violent pace of the future. The internal pace of the body and the external pace of the world are still opposed, though they can be harmonized through technical artifice. By maintaining the distinction between natural and technological velocities, between the pace of the “inside” and the “outside,” both accounts oppose that which is essentially human to that which is essentially technological. Thus, implicitly, the more human you are, the less technological you are. And conversely, the faster you are, the less human you are.

    This position is emphatically expressed in the work of Jean-Jacques Rousseau. Rousseau begins his investigation into politics by positing a state of nature; where others found human life in this state incomplete and inadequate, Rousseau sees it as happy, robust, and complete. Every increase in civilization only takes the human further from perfection and self-sufficiency, and every technological advancement distances us from our essence. As Bernard Stiegler puts it in his account of Rousseau, “[t]he man of nature, without prostheses, is robust, as robust as a man can be – and it is civilization that will weaken him” (115). In Rousseau’s own words:

    Accustomed from childhood to inclement weather and the rigors of the seasons, acclimated to fatigue, and forced, naked and without arms, to defend their lives and their prey against other ferocious beasts, or to escape them by taking flight, men develop a robust and nearly unalterable temperament . . . thus acquiring all the vigor that the human race is capable of having. (40)

    In this account, the second skin of technology that we wear – the exoskeleton, the G-suit – only muffles and weakens the vitality of the body. By accelerating the human body technologically, we rob it of its natural liveliness, and the dichotomy between the natural and the technological persists. Both jet lag and G-suit present a strongly humanist reading of the encounter between speed and the body, but with a crucial difference: in the second account, the inside of the body is no longer destroyed by the velocity of the outside, but is instead hollowed out by it. The fear is that this hollowing out of the body will lead to the full prostheticization of the human, where the body becomes an extension of technologies, rather than the other way around.

    Paul Virilio, writing two hundred years after Rousseau, shares this prosthetic image of accelerative technologies. For Virilio, the speed of modern life requires a fundamental letting go of our power, a surrender to automatic systems of moving, seeing, and thinking. If we consider not just the G-suit but the entire technological assemblage that enables supersonic flight, we see how much of this apparent augmentation of the body is actually a handing over of power to the automatic systems that plan flight paths and make course corrections without our input. This surrender becomes more complete as technologies reduce even the need for physical movement, instead allowing us to project our “influence” through virtual and telematic prostheses. The speed of human action in late modernity thus paradoxically immobilizes the body. As Virilio says,

    the interactive being transfers his natural capacities for movement and displacement to probes and scanners which instantaneously inform him about a remote reality, to the detriment of his own faculties of apprehension of the real, after the example of the para- or quadriplegic who can guide by remote control – teleguide – his environment . . . Having been first mobile, then motorized, man will thus become motile, deliberately limiting his body’s area of influence to a few gestures, a few impulses, like channel-surfing. (Open Sky 16–17)8

    Here, the supposedly accelerated, autonomous, and “interactive” being (the late modern counterpart of Rousseau’s “civilized man”) is really the barely motile actor whose range of motion and freedom of thought has been vastly curtailed. The real action and decision happen in the prosthesis, not in the body. This essentially pessimistic conception of technological acceleration again has its roots in a conceptual separation of the natural from the artificial, of a healthy human speed from a pathological technological speed. As Virilio says, “[t]here is a struggle . . . between metabolic speed, the speed of the living, and technological speed, the speed of death which already exists in cars, telephones, the media, missiles” (Pure War 136). Virilio offers an extreme version of this account of the relationship between the body and speed, but the image reappears in a host of different narratives. Wherever commentators worry about dehumanizing technologies, wherever we feel that the accelerating pace of life leaves us merely an automaton or a cog in the machine, we see a variation on this image.9 We become servants of this new velocity and no longer know whether we wear the G-suit or whether it wears us.10

    Third Encounter: The Acheulean Axe

    The Acheulean axe is the oldest human tool found. Archeological investigation shows evidence of its existence as far back as 1.5 million years ago, from the time of early hominids such as Homo Erectus up to modern Homo Sapiens. The human and the axe are therefore coeval in their emergence. Though we can only speculate on the ways in which this tool was used, one theory posits that the Acheulean axe was a throwing weapon. Adrian Mackenzie lays out the immense complexities involved in the seemingly simple act of throwing:

    A throw depends on timing. For the hand-axe, the window of control ranges between one and several tens of milliseconds depending on the length of its trajectory. That is, assuming that the hand-axe is thrown, it must be released at the right moment +/− 10 ms (milliseconds) from the hand during the throw if the device is to hit a small target five metres away (Calvin, 1993). The problem here is that the neurones twitch. They can’t modulate movement with any great accuracy. The timing jitter for spine-motor neurones is approximately 11 ms (Calvin, 1993, 246). On average they vary that much in their activation time. Neural feedback from arm to spinal cord and back at its fastest still requires approximately 110 ms. A problem of control develops because the window of control is less than the average variation in activation time, let alone the time of neural feedback. (61)

    The result is that “[t]echnical performance, if it is to have efficacy, must be much faster than certain raw facts of our own physiology seem to permit” (61). And yet axes are thrown. As Mackenzie recounts, the seemingly insurmountable gap between inside and outside velocities is bridged through practice. By practicing, internal processes are harmonized with external ones, not speeding up internal response times so much as training and distributing the process to sync it up with external paces. Thus, as Mackenzie describes, the difficulty

    involved in throwing or hitting is overcome because action is mapped out in a network of cortical zones associated with hand movements. Action is repeated both synchronically and diachronically: first, there are multiple circuits of control in parallel which together average out the activation times, thereby improving accuracy; second, the control paths are trained and adjusted by earlier repetitions; third, and most important, the sequence of neuronal firing is ‘buffered’ or stored up in advance and then released at one go. (82)

    This disjuncture between internal and external velocities isn’t resolved solely through a technological prosthesis (the axe); such an account would leave itself open to the creeping prostheticization of the body by technology. Instead, this account posits not an emptying out of the inside, but the creation of a new relationship between outside and inside. Velocities that couldn’t be achieved by the human body in the thick of things can be “‘buffered’ or stored up in advance.” Rather than the inside of the body being emptied out, the outside is invited in. As the body brings speed into itself, it changes its internal rhythms.

    This third encounter challenges the fears and anxieties of Rousseau and Virilio, for whom technology marks the decline of the human, initiating and accelerating its fall from completeness and self-sufficiency. By contrast, even in this early moment of axe-use, we see that speed and technology can be imagined to be coeval with the emergence of the human. Indeed, axe-use might have contributed to that emergence. Some paleo-anthropologists conjecture that the corticalization (the expansion of the neocortex in the brain) that marks the emergence of what we think of as Homo Sapien was spurred by just this kind of expanded tool use. In other words, the first human moment might indeed have been a moment of opening up the body to speed. Rather than opposing a slow internal velocity to a fast external one – a jet-lagged body to techno-acceleration – here speed lies in the heart of the human. The process of “humanization” was therefore also the movement of acceleration – of making stone axes (and neurons) accelerate. The Rousseauian ideal of the self-sufficient human body – perverted, enslaved, and eventually nullified by technology – misses the central role that technology played in shaping and developing that body. Gibson’s image of a slow-moving soul in a fast-moving world also misses the way in which velocity can be generative of the human. In this third encounter, we see how a human body hurled out into the world develops new rhythms and velocities. Inside and outside learn to adjust to and modulate one another. The human was born in speed, outside and in.

    Taken in its simplest articulation – that there is an inherent interpenetration of the human and the technological – this perspective emerges in several contemporary theoretical approaches, from Marshall McLuhan’s theory of extension (1964) to Deleuze and Guattari’s assemblage theory (1987) to Bernard Stiegler’s technogenesis (1998) and Donna Haraway’s discussion of the cyborg (1997). This story of a mutually-constitutive relation is itself accelerated in the work of Ray Kurzweil and other transhumanist thinkers, for whom the first moment of modifying and accelerating the human body from within becomes the starting point of a long teleological arc of bodily enhancement. Kurzweil’s techno-utopian analysis depicts a future in which a coming technological “Singularity” will allow humans to “transcend biology” (2005). For Kurzweil, this process of accelerating the human body to interact more effectively with the surrounding world is a natural, and inevitable, process. As he puts it (mimicking Mackenzie’s account of the neurology of throwing an axe),

    [a]lthough impressive in many respects, the brain suffers from severe limitations . . . our thinking is extremely slow: the basic neural transactions are several million times slower than contemporary electronic circuits. That makes our physiological bandwidth for processing new information extremely limited compared to the exponential growth of the overall human knowledge base. (8–9)

    According to Kurzweil, it is only a matter of time until this physiological lag is solved not through practice, but by the direct introduction of the technological into the biological. In the future:

    Billions of nanobots in the capillaries of the brain will . . . vastly extend human intelligence. Once non-biological intelligence gets a foothold in the human brain (this has already started with computerized neural implants), the machine intelligence in our brains will grow exponentially (as it has been doing all along), at least doubling in power each year. (28)

    While Kurzweil too envisions an increasing reliance on technology by the human body, he rejects Virilio’s pessimism and sees this as an inherently empowering process: “The Singularity will allow us to transcend [the] limitations of our biological bodies and brains. We will gain power over our fates” (9). For Kurzweil, the increasing introduction of accelerative technology into the body is simply the continuation of the profoundly natural and human process that started hundreds of thousands of years ago with the throwing of an axe (9).11

    Acceleration

    I have presented three different images of the relationship between speed, technology, and the body. The first conceives of the body as opposed to and harmed by speed, the second focuses on the useful but dangerous application of accelerative prostheses to the body, and the third presents the relationship between speed and the body as mutually constitutive. These accounts overlap, suggesting the need for a mode of cultural analysis that can think through their differences and explain why an encounter is destructive, exteriorizing, or interiorizing. Such an analysis would seek to discern the most productive modes of interaction for any given encounter between bodies and speeds. Here the work of Spinoza is helpful, because the relationship between speed and the body is at the heart of his philosophy. Bodies are defined not by their material substance but by particular patterns of motion-and-rest, of quickness and slowness. Moreover, these patterns of motion-and-rest can interact in diverse ways, as different bodies encounter one another. Spinoza conceives of encounters that can increase the power of the body, and encounters that can diminish them. He seeks to learn which patterns of motion-and-rest can be harmonized, and which are best avoided as destructive of vitality. In what follows, I investigate how Spinoza’s philosophy can help us to understand bodily encounters with speed, and how we can begin to think these encounters in a productive, and ethical, manner.

    Speed, the Body, and Spinoza

    Motion-and-rest

    I begin with Spinoza’s idea that all bodies can be distinguished by relations of motion-and-rest: “All bodies are either in motion or at rest . . . Each single body can move at varying speeds (Ethics, 72, Part II; Prop. 13, Axioms 1 and 2) . . . Bodies are distinguished from one another in respect of motion and rest, quickness and slowness, and not in respect of substance” (Ethics, 72 Part II, Prop. 13, Lemma 1). This follows from Spinoza’s argument in Ethics Part 1 that “in Nature there exists only one substance, absolutely infinite” (36, Prop. 10, Scholium). Differences between bodies result not from differences of substance but from differences in the vectors, velocities, and positions that organize the singular substance modally expressed as matter. Spinoza’s monism, though not unproblematic, disrupts many of the oppositions central to philosophical thought in the West (between thought and matter, the natural and the artificial, the human and the inhuman, etc.). Instead of these substantial differences, he introduces a continuum of difference based on patterns of motion-and-rest. While Spinoza does certainly speak of the “essence” of a body, this essence does not play the role of defining a class, form, or substance. Rather, essence is always a singular thing, describing the particular relations of motion-and-rest that inhere in a particular body (109, Part III, Prop. 7, Proof). Thus, as Hasana Sharp puts it, for Spinoza, “[s]trictly speaking, there is no human essence; there are only singular essences of similar beings that are called ‘human’” (86).12 Contrary to the first two conceptions of speed presented above, Spinoza’s philosophy does not posit an essential distinction between stable, self-sufficient human bodies and the uncertain spaces of flow and flux that oppose these bodies or sap their energy. Instead, all bodies are marked by a certain motion (and a certain rest), a certain quickness (and a certain slowness). This is not to say that relations of motion-and-rest can’t be opposed to one another or destroy the other’s energy. But Spinoza leaves us with a more complex and open image of the body.

    Simple and Composite Bodies

    Through this lens of “motion-and-rest,” Spinoza develops a complex analytical toolkit for understanding the composition of bodies and describing their relationships to one another and to different speeds.

    All the ways in which a body is affected by another body follow from the nature of the affected body together with the nature of the body affecting it, so that one and the same body may move in various ways in accordance with the various natures of the bodies causing its motion; and, on the other hand, different bodies may be caused to move in different ways by one and the same body. (73, Part II, Prop. 13, Lemma 3, Axiom 1)

    In addition to explaining how to differentiate between bodies, Spinoza’s theory also shows how those bodies can interact. Here again, the outcome of encounters between bodies is determined not by substance, but by how their different patterns of motion-and-rest relate. These relations can, for example, link up to form what Spinoza terms a “composite” body:

    When a number of bodies of the same or different magnitude form close contact with one another through the pressure of other bodies upon them, or if they are moving at the same or different rates of speed so as to preserve an unvarying relation of movement among themselves, these bodies are said to be united with one another and all together to form one body or individual thing, which is distinguished from other things through this union of bodies. (74, Part II, Prop. 13, Lemma 3, Axiom 2 Definition)

    For Spinoza, composite bodies are characterized by a distinctive movement-style, which is the particular choreography of the simple bodies it contains. To understand Spinoza’s conception of composite bodies, two points are crucial. First, the idea of “unvarying relations of movement” does not mean that composite bodies are unchanging. Indeed, Spinoza immediately notes the ways in which these composite bodies can change while still “preserving their nature”:

    If the parts of an individual thing become greater or smaller, but so proportionately that they all preserve the same mutual relation of motion-and-rest as before, the individual thing will likewise retain its own nature as before without any change in its form. . . .

    Furthermore, the individual thing so composed retains its own nature . . . provided that each constituent part retains its own motion and continues to communicate this motion to the other parts. (75, Part II, Prop. 13, Lemma 5 and Lemma 7)

    Says Spinoza, “[w]e thus see how a composite individual can be affected in many ways and yet preserve its nature” (75, Part II, Prop. 13, Scholium). This gives us a way to begin thinking about relations of speed without automatically thinking about oppositions between essential velocities (as in Gibson’s story, between the speeds of the “soul” and “technology”). Interactions can speed up or slow down a body, speed up or slow down its parts, and change their direction, without thereby decomposing that body. Second, the distinction between composite bodies and simple bodies is not as straightforward as it may appear, because all composite bodies are themselves the simple bodies from which other, larger composites are formed. As Spinoza says, “[i]f several individual things concur in one act in such a way as to be all together the simultaneous cause of one effect, I consider them all, in that respect, as one individual” (63, Part II, Definition 7). In this respect, for Spinoza, “individual” bodies are always multiple. This holds true for the human body itself, which – though it might be treated as an individual, and might have an essence – is always already a layered and multiple thing. As Moira Gatens puts it,

    The human body is understood by Spinoza to be a relatively complex individual, made up of a number of other bodies. Its identity can never be viewed as a final or finished product . . . since it is a body that is in constant interchange with its environment. The human body is radically open to its surroundings and can be composed, recomposed and decomposed by other bodies. Its openness is a condition of … its life, that is, its continuance in nature as the same individual. (110)13

    All of this follows naturally from Spinoza’s monism. Because all being is one, there are ultimately no ontological differences between bodies, and thus the universe can be conceived as a nested set of composite bodies (atoms make molecules, molecules make cells, etc.). An infinite chain stretches from the most infinitesimally singular body up to the most fully composite body, which is the totality of being that Spinoza terms deus sive natura, God or Nature (75–76, Part II, Prop. 13, Scholium). However, this unity of being is only present when we perceive the world sub quadam specie aeternitatis (92, Part II, Prop. 44, Corollary 2): from the perspective of deus sive natura. When viewed from the perspective of individual bodies, we see a world replete with opposition, conflict, and destruction. Interactions between bodies can therefore lead not only to the formation of composites, but also to the decomposition of one of the bodies through the destruction or diminution of its relations of motion-and-rest. Indeed, decomposition is inherent in the idea of composite bodies, because simple bodies must at times be absorbed into a larger aggregate, while previously existing composites must be decomposed and stripped for parts, as it were. Interactions between bodies, then, are frequently struggles between different relations of motion-and-rest. As Deleuze puts it in his reading of Spinoza,

    The bodies that meet are either mutually indifferent, or one, through its relation, decomposes the relation in the other, and so destroys the other body. This is the case with a toxin or poison, which destroys a man by decomposing his blood. And this is the case with nutrition, but in a converse sense: a man forces the parts of the body by which he nourishes himself to enter into a new relation that conforms with his own, but which involves the destruction of the relation in which that body existed previously. (Expressionism 211)

    The factor that drives these encounters and “judges” their outcomes is the Conatus Essendi (in Latin, the drive to exist).14 All bodies are possessed of a fundamental conatus, Spinoza claims:

    Each thing, in so far as it is in itself, endeavors to persist in its own being.

    The conatus with which each thing endeavors to persist in its own being is nothing but the actual essence of the thing.

    Therefore, the power of any thing, or the conatus with which it acts or endeavors to act, alone or in conjunction with other things, that is . . . the power or conatus by which it endeavors to persist in its own being, is nothing but the given . . . essence of the thing. (109, Part III, Prop. 6; Prop. 7; Prop. 7 Proof)

    Thus, in any contest between two bodies, each will struggle to persist in its own being, and the winner of any encounter is the body whose ability to persist – whose conatus – increases as a result. From Deleuze’s examples, poison persists in decomposing the patterns of relation in the blood, and the body persists over the patterns of relation in the food (and its own organs).

    Bodies and speed

    This onto-vision of different bodies attempting to maintain their particular patterns of motion-and-rest by subordinating others can help to frame the three encounters with which I began. In the case of jet lag, an encounter between the human body and a particular set of relations of motion-and-rest in the world (airplanes, time zones, light cues) overpowers and decomposes the internal relations of the bodies “of” the composite called the human body, and – like a toxin – diminishes that composite’s power of action. In the case of the G-suit, a technological body increases the human body’s power of action (it can now travel faster than the speed of sound), but does so in a way that potentially endangers that particular body’s power of action; the human body becomes a component of a larger technological assemblage, and finds its capacity to enact its conatus heavily restricted or even disabled. Finally, the Acheulean axe not only increases the body’s power of action, but introduces fundamental changes that increase that body’s power more broadly through reflex training and corticalization.

    This last point introduces what appears to be a contradiction in Spinoza’s thinking. He describes bodies as gripped by the drive (conatus) to maintain their relations of motion-and-rest, and yet any encounter with another will produce some change in ourselves. This tension is lessened by the fact that one’s parts may change in any number of ways without signalling the functional destruction of the body, so long as its relations of motion-and-rest are able to adjust and retain their shape. Thus, in the case of food mentioned above, individual organs are changed (nourished, healed), but their overall relation remains the same. The problem is somewhat greater when it comes to corticalization. It would be something of a stretch to argue that a human before and after corticalization “retained the same pattern of motion-and-rest”; we’d probably say that the human only emerges with corticalization. And yet, from Spinoza’s perspective, would it have been a proper expression of conatus for homo erectus to avoid corticalization in order to maintain its essence? By this account, all evolution – any change of whatever type, biological or technological – would be against nature, because it would go against our drive to “persist in [our own] being” (an idea that hews rather closely to Rousseau’s narrative).

    But this interpretation would be a misunderstanding of conatus. Although conatus is the drive by which “[e]ach thing . . . endeavors to persist in its own being” (109, Part III, Prop. 7), it does not endeavour to persist solely as it is at any given moment. A being that only ever sought to exist as it was in the present wouldn’t last very long. For instance, the baby antelope that didn’t learn to walk or grow to be an adult wouldn’t last against predators. Conatus is not merely the drive to persist, but the drive to persist as long and as much as possible. Spinoza describes this conception of conatus as a body’s drive to increase the number of ways in which it can affect, and be affected by, other bodies:

    That which so disposes the human body that it can be affected in more ways, or which renders it capable of affecting external bodies in more ways, is advantageous to man, and proportionately more advantageous as the body is thereby rendered more capable of being affected in more ways and of affecting other bodies in more ways. On the other hand, that which renders the body less capable in these respects is harmful. (177, Part IV, Prop. 38)

    Thus, for example, prior to the acquisition a G-suit, the body was severely limited in its ability to affect external bodies in ways that required high-g acceleration. In such contexts, the body literally could not “persist in its being” and would pass out. The G-suit thus increases the body’s conatus by introducing a wider array of encounters while still “persisting in its being.” In so doing, it changes the nature of that being, and the human body transforms from a thing that can’t sustain high-g acceleration to a thing that can.15

    The acquisition of new powers to affect and be affected necessarily changes the relations of motion-and-rest within a composite body. Spinoza acknowledges that the changes in a human body while growing from a child into an adult are so great that it’s safe to say the body is a different “thing” in the end (177, Part IV, Prop. 38, Scholium). However, it doesn’t follow that growing is against conatus (or nature); what matters is what a thing can do. One could say that the nature of the body of a baby is to self-alter through encounters, and to increase its ability to be affected. This idea of the body places movement – slowness and speed – at the center. As Deleuze puts it in his commentary on Spinoza,

    the kinetic proposition tells us that a body is defined by relations of motion and rest, of slowness and speed between particles. That is, it is not defined by a form or by functions. Global form, specific form, and organic functions depend on relations of speed and slowness. . . . The important thing is to understand life, each living individuality, not as a form, or as a development of form, but as a complex relation between differential velocities, between deceleration and acceleration of particles. (Spinoza 123)

    Even if it changes a composite body’s relations of motion-and-rest, increasing the ways in which a body can affect and be affected still expresses its conatus, because existence for Spinoza is a process of affecting and being affected. The body that can affect and be affected by more encounters is one that exists more. Moreover, not only are bodies inherently composite or multiple; so too is conatus. It is not enough to speak of “the” conatus of the body without acknowledging a conatus of the organ within the body, and the cell within the organ, and the mitochondria within the cell. For the body – for any body – to survive, its conatus must cooperate with the conati of other bodies at different scales, and, most importantly, at different velocities.16 As in Mackenzie’s discussion of the Acheulean axe, the human composes different velocities at many levels, incorporating the conati of different bodies to increase “a” body’s conatus.

    This vision of bodies as always already inherently multiple helps to challenge a vision of the human body as an essential or hermetically-sealed unit, set in opposition to the non-human world. Instead, the human body is a composite, always intertwined with and determined by non-human bodies. As Bruno Latour puts it, “Humans, for millions of years, have extended their social relations to other actants with which, with whom, they have swapped many properties, and with which, with whom, they form collectives” (Pandora 198). This extension of social relations to non-human actants doesn’t hold only for biological lifeforms (such as, for example, the foreign bacteria that makes up much of the human microbiome, and upon which our health and survival depends), but also for the technological artifacts and processes that extend and determine the capacities of human bodies. Again, as Latour says, “There is no sense in which humans may be said to exist as humans without entering into commerce with what authorizes and enables them to exist (that is, to act)” (Pandora 192). This approach therefore begins to erode the basic framework with which my paper started, one based on a supposed opposition between the human and the technological. Instead, Spinoza’s horizontal ontology guides us towards the vision, familiar in McLuhan and Stiegler, among others, in which the human is always already technological.

    Speed, Politics, and Ethics

    What we are left with is a profoundly multiple, layered, open, and creative vision of the body that rejects the idea of a universal, transhistorical human essence – or an essential human pace – posited in the first two accounts of speed above. This shift in perspective goes beyond simply changing our descriptions of the relationship between speed and the body. It also has important political and ethical implications, because different accounts of speed and the body can produce different assemblages of affects and effects. Invested as they are in an essentialist vision of human nature and pace, the encounters with jet lag and the G-suit can give rise to a variety of fears and anxieties in the face of growing technological transformation and social acceleration, and these can crystallize into reactionary political affects.17 Against these affects, Spinoza leads us to consider not what a human body is, but what it can do (Montag xvii–xviii). Deleuze describes this as the shift to an ethological perspective. Ethology, a mode of analysis in zoology, bases its investigation on behaviours-in-response-to-habitats rather than on natural qualities:

    Such studies as this, which define bodies, animals, or humans by the affects they are capable of, founded what is today called ethology. The approach is no less valid for us, for human beings, than for animals, because no one knows ahead of time the affects one is capable of; it is a long affair of experimentation, requiring a lasting prudence, a Spinozian wisdom. . . . (Spinoza 125)

    In contrast to the extremes of the first two images of speed, ethology pushes us to accept a more open, pluralistic vision of human life, refusing to allow our fears or frustrations with an accelerating world to calcify into a violent or reactionary politics and culture.18

    At the same time, Deleuze also cautions prudence. The experimentalism of the ethological approach does not require the uncritical acceptance of all technological acceleration. As noted, the third account of speed discussed above carries with it the danger that its particular worldview can manifest in a reckless embrace of technological innovation, a libertarian technoutopianism, or even fascistic desires for a transcendence over human frailty. A Spinozian framework can moderate these excesses, attuning us to the ways in which the human is always bound up in broader assemblages of composite bodies that necessarily limit both our knowledge of – and our ability to intervene unilaterally in – the chain of causal connections that envelop us (Macherey 156–157). A mode of analysis that asks broadly what a particular formation lets us do – that is, how it allows us to affect and be affected – can also lead bodies away from particular technologies or accelerations. For instance, the acquisition of an automobile increases a body’s ability to affect and be affected by radically increasing its velocities of travel. But if the emissions that automobile produces contribute to global warming, then it might very well decrease our conatus through the destruction of our ecosystem. Michael Mack argues that we must understand Spinoza’s conception of conatus “not in terms of teleology but in terms of sustainability on both an individual and a social scale” (“Toward” 102–103). In order for one’s conatus to increase, the ability to affect and be affected must be sustainable (Braidotti 148). I can run faster by taking steroids, but if they ravage my health in other ways, am I able to sustain existence at these higher speeds?

    Mack’s attention to “sustainability on both an individual and a social scale” means that conatus links the fate of individual bodies to the fate of bodies politic. For Spinoza, the thing that most increases our power is the cultivation of the broadest possible community of alliances; the principle of conatus leads him to argue that “[i]t is of the first importance to men to establish close relationships and to bind themselves together with such ties as may more effectively unite them into one body, and, as an absolute rule, to act in such a way as serves to strengthen friendship” (198, Part IV, Appendix 12). A community will always be stronger than an individual, and thus an individual able to draw on the strength and capabilities of a community is capable of being “affected in more ways [and] . . . capable of affecting external bodies in more ways.”19 A strong community of friends plays a central role in the expression of conatus, so when it comes to decisions about how a community wishes to engage with speed and technology, the question of sustainability applies not just to people’s own bodies, but to the bodies of others as well. Such questions are therefore a proper subject for Spinoza’s multitude, the self-governing body politic of his political works. In this regard, we might reject the individualism of techno-libertarianism and explicitly politicize questions of speed and technology, subjecting them to democratic deliberation rather than leaving them up to the wisdom of corporate capitalism or the military-industrial state.20 What is more, given the necessarily multiple and layered nature of conatus, and given the interdependence of individual human bodies (and bodies politic) with a vast assemblage of non-human bodies, adopting such as an approach implies a concern for the conati of those non-human bodies. Thus, we might start thinking in terms of a multitude that cuts across the human/non-human divide, sharpening our concern for the well-being of non-human others and seeking ways to represent their interests in our political deliberations.

    This approach to the multitude enters usefully into conversation with several contemporary theories of technology – for example, Bruno Latour’s account of a Parliament of Things. We have already seen that Latour has a comparable approach, arguing that human beings are always already bound up in collectives with non-human actants in a world of proliferating hybrids. Latour argues that refusing to acknowledge these hybrids is one of the central problems with dominant accounts of science and technology in the modern world (We Have 112). As he says, “So long as the human is constructed through contrast with the [nonhuman] object … neither the human nor the nonhuman can be understood” (We Have 136). Rejecting an essentialist account of the human and recognizing the deep symbiosis between the human and the nonhuman (both ecological and ontological) opens the way for a political and ethical discussion that includes non-human actants as members of human collectives, whose interests and well-being need to be considered. Thus, Latour argues, “it is time, perhaps to speak of democracy again, but of a democracy extended to things themselves” (We Have 142). Latour’s Parliament of Things might itself benefit from the inclusion of both Spinoza’s metaphysics and his ethical theory, while Spinoza’s work would benefit immensely from Latour’s contemporary scientific knowledge and perspective. As Latour says, “the more nonhumans share existence with humans, the more humane a collective is” (Pandora 18). Sharp has a similar insight in her Spinoza and the Politics of Renaturalization, arguing that a Spinozian orientation to politics leads us to understand that “our agency, perseverance, and pleasure depend upon affirming and nourishing the nonhuman in and outside of ourselves. The relations that matter to our intellectual and our corporeal well-being are far from exclusively human” (10).21

    Conclusion

    A mode of analysis (and political practice) inspired by Spinoza offers an alternative to a techno-utopian (or dystopian) position that argues for a transcendent (and frequently individualized) escape from the body through speed. This alternative inherits a wariness of speed shared by Gibson, Rousseau, and Virilio, as it seeks to understand the impact of accelerating velocities on bodies individual and political, human and non-human. This mode encourages us to subject these issues to the deliberation of the multitude, as it would with any other policy or phenomenon that potentially affects the conatus of others. And yet it urges this prudential relationship to technology without recourse to a conception of human essence or to the natural speeds and rhythms of the body. Spinoza is more interested in the possibilities of new formations, in the struggle for more and greater affects. Scholars return to Spinoza’s injunction that “nobody as yet has learned from experience what the body can and cannot do” (106, Part III, Prop. 2, Scholium) because it proposes a space of experimentation and openness.

    That is why Spinoza calls out to us in the way he does: you do not know beforehand what good or bad you are capable of; you do not know beforehand what a body or a mind can do, in a given encounter, a given arrangement a given combination. Ethology is first of all the study of relations of speed and slowness, of the capacities for affecting and being affected that characterize each thing. (Deleuze, Spinoza 125)

    Spinoza encourages political, social, and cultural theory to be less concerned with the essence of the human than with what people can do, how they can live, and what they can do for each other.22 This framework gives people a way to engage productively and ethically with technologies of speed without losing sight of the destructive effects (and affects) that can result. It avoids the uncritical nature of techno-utopian accounts of the body and technology without lapsing into humanist accounts. It leaves us aware that we do not yet know how fast a body can go.

    Notes

    My thanks to Smita Rahman, Jairus Grove, Daniel Levine, Jane Bennett, Bill Connolly, Morton Schoolman, and several anonymous reviewers for their comments on this article.

    1. A not at all exhaustive account would include Machiavelli on fortuna (1998), Locke on prerogative power (1988), Kant on cosmopolitanism (1998), Henry Adams on acceleration (1931), and Marx on capitalist dynamism (2000), as well as twentieth-century discussions such as Heidegger’s (1971), Derrida’s (1984), Deleuze and Guattari’s (1987), Baudrillard’s (1994), Simmel’s (1997), and Schmitt’s (2007).

    2. A partial list includes Wolin (1997), Der Derian (2001), Rosa (2013), Scheuerman (2004), Agamben (2005), Tomlinson (2007), Duffy (2009), Glezos (2012), Mackay and Avanessian (2014), Noys (2014), Sharma (2014), and Wajcman (2016).

    3. See Connolly (2002), Mackenzie (2002), Massumi (2002), Grosz (2005), and Bell (2010).

    4. It should be noted that, while Connolly’s Neuropolitics includes discussions of all three, his discussion of Spinoza is separate from his account of speed. The same is true of Deleuze, who deals extensively with speed in A Thousand Plateaus, but does not explicitly integrate this with his work elsewhere on Spinoza. For a discussion of Deleuze’s account of speed, see Glezos (2012).

    5. See Braidotti (2006), Gatens (1996), Vardoulakis (2011), Montag (1999), Williams (2007), Sharp (2011), and Skeaff (2013).

    6. This article will therefore focus on the first of Spinoza’s attributes – extension – and leave aside his discussion of the attribute of thought. Doing so means leaving out crucial elements of Spinoza’s account of the body, including affect, memory and imagination. Several texts work through this dimension of Spinoza’s thought, including Gatens (1996), Braidotti (2006), and Sharp (2011).

    7. This particular vision of speed and the body can give rise to social and political efforts to slow down the pace of life in an accelerating world. In its more innocuous forms, these manifest through movements based around “slow-food” and “slow-living” (but see Sharma, chapter 4). However, several theorists have also noted that these efforts can give rise to reactionary political affects and movements. As Connolly argues, “reactive drives to retard the pace of life” have a tendency to manifest “in locating vulnerable constituencies to hold politically accountable for the fast pace of life” (142). See also Glezos (2014) for a discussion about the ways resentment over speed can translate into anti-immigration and xenophobic political movements.

    8. It is worth noting the stark ableism of Virilio’s perspective in his valorization of a natural, normal, able body, and his reciprocal denigration of the apparently pathological disabled body. This necessarily suppresses the wide variety of different bodies and abilities, a point raised by Mitchell and Snyder in their introduction to The Body and Physical Difference (1997).

    9. A review of just the titles of contemporary books on technology provides a wealth of examples of this sort of discourse, from Simon Head’s Mindless: Why Smarter Machines are Making Dumber Humans (2014), to Jaron Lanier’s bestselling You Are Not a Gadget (2011).

    10. And as in the previous encounter, these humanist anxieties about an accelerating world can crystallize into conservative and reactionary political movements. In addition to the ableism of Virilio’s position, we can also look to Donna Haraway’s discussion of ways in which humanist anxieties over technology can resonate with anxieties about race, difference, boundaries, purity, and normalcy (61–62).

    11. Furthermore, while Kurzweil does reflect up to a point about technology, such a worldview has frequently translated into an uncritical embrace of technological innovation, in which any “enhancement” or acceleration of the body is viewed as part of humanity’s technological destiny. This techno-utopian worldview, and the dream of human transcendence, is by no means tied to our contemporary digital age. For example, the Futurist Manifesto of 1907 embraces the “beauty of speed” and aims “to sing the man at the wheel” (Marinetti). The Futurists’ fascist sympathies have been connected with the fantasies of transcending the human body through technology in Nazi ideology (see Nussbaum 346–347). My point is not that the post-humanist outlook is somehow necessarily fascistic, but rather to note that this view of the relation between speed and the body, when taken to its most extreme articulation, can have dangerous political and ethical implications (just as the other two encounters do).

    12. Or, as Stuart Hampshire puts it, for Spinoza “such phrases as ‘the essential nature of man’ and ‘the purpose of human existence’ are phrases that survive in popular philosophy and language only as the ghosts of Aristotelianism, and can have no place in a scientific language” (115).

    13. See also Macherey 177.

    14. Note that “judgement” should not be understood as a moral or transcendent category. Rather, conatus “judges” in the same way that evolution does, through the resolution of immanent, ateleological struggle of bodies to persist.

    15. Jane Bennett provides an excellent account of the creative character of conatus, saying it “is not a process of mere repetition of the same, for it entails continual invention: because each mode suffers the actions on it by other modes, actions that disrupt the relation of movement and rest characterizing each mode, every mode, if it is to persist, must seek new encounters to creatively compensate for the alterations or affections it suffers” (22). Sharp makes a similar point when she states that “Nature, for Spinoza, names the necessity of ongoing mutation” (8).

    16. For a discussion of the multiplicity of the body in Spinoza, see Sharp (38) and Macherey (156–177). For a discussion of the multiple velocities of the body, see Connolly (chapter1).

    17. Once again, we can look to Connolly’s description of how, in the American context, “Resentment against the acceleration of pace becomes projected upon religious and nationalist drives to identify a series of vulnerable constituencies as paradigmatic enemies of territorial culture, traditional morality, unified politics, and Christian nationalism” (147).

    18. Such an approach would also help to immunize our thought against the ableism of Virilio’s approach, or the obsession with purity that concerns Haraway. Expanding this account of affect is the crucial next step in developing a Spinozian politics of speed, which I seek to pursue in future writing. In the meantime, for engagements on speed and affect, see Connolly (2002), Massumi (2002), Glezos (2014), and Sharma (2014).

    19. We should not assume that the formation of such friendships and communities is easy or inevitable. Books III and IV of the Ethics are devoted to identifying obstacles that make forming communities difficult, and the Politico-Theological Treatise and the Political Treatise both point to ways in which the set of issues raised in The Ethics can lead not to community and friendship, but to conflict and the “war of all against all.” This, indeed, is one of the central projects of The Ethics – to provide a moral argument for community, to note affective and social obstacles to the formation of community, and to suggest both tactics and strategies for overcoming these obstacles. Here I merely wish to point out the way in which Spinoza’s philosophy points toward such ethical and political practices.

    20. For examples of attempts at such a politicization of speed, see Der Derian (2001), Wolin (1997), Rosa (2013), Scheuerman (2004), and Glezos (2012).

    21. See also Williams 354.

    22. Mack comes to a similar conclusion in How Literature Changes the Way We Think: “Spinoza implicitly conceives of the human as an open-ended and not to be fully defined entity. From this perspective he is a post-humanist” (37). See also Skeaff (154) and Macherey (52–3, 75).

    Works Cited

    • Adam, Henry. The Education of Henry Adams. Modern Library, 1931.
    • Agamben, Giorgio. State of Exception. Translated by K Attel, Chicago UP, 2005.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. Simulacra and Simulation. Translated by SF Glaser, U of Michigan P, 1994.
    • Bell, Shannon. Fast Feminism. Autonomedia, 2010.
    • Bennett, Jane. Vibrant Matter. Duke UP, 2010.
    • Braidotti, Rosi. Transpositions. Polity, 2006.
    • Connolly, William. E. Neuropolitics. U of Minnesota P, 2002.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Expressionism in Philosophy: Spinoza. Translated by M. Joughin, Zone Books, 1990.
    • ———. Spinoza: Practical Philosophy. Translated by R. Hurley, City Lights Books, 1988.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Guattari, Felix. A Thousand Plateaus. Translated by Brian Massumi, U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Der Derian, James. Virtuous War. Westview Press, 2001.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “No Apocalypse, Not Now.” Diacritics, vol. 14, no. 2, Summer 1984, pp. 20–31.
    • Duffy, Enda. The Speed Handbook: Pleasure, Velocity, Modernism. Duke UP, 2009.
    • Gatens, Moira. Imaginary Bodies. Routledge, 1996.
    • Gibson, William. Pattern Recognition. Berkley, 2003.
    • Glezos, Simon. “Brown’s Paradox: Speed, Ressentiment, and Global Politics.” Journal of International Political Theory, vol. 10, no. 2, June 2014, pp. 148–168.
    • ———. The Politics of Speed. Routledge, 2012.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Time Travels: Feminism, Nature, Power. Duke UP, 2005.
    • Hampshire, Stuart. Spinoza and Spinozism. Oxford UP, 2005.
    • Haraway, Donna. Modest_Witness@Second_millennium.FemaleMan_Meets_OncoMouse. Routledge, 1997.
    • Head, Simon. Mindless: Why Smarter Machines are Marking Dumber Humans. Basic Books, 2014.
    • Heidegger, Martin. Poetry, Language, Thought. Translated by Alfred Hofstadter, Harper Perennial, 1971.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Perpetual Peace and Other Essays. Translated by T Humphrey, Hackett, 1983.
    • Kurzweil, Ray. The Singularity is Near: When Humans Transcend Biology. Penguin Books, 2005.
    • Lanier, Jaron. You Are Not a Gadget. Vintage P, 2011.
    • Latour, Bruno. Pandora’s Hope: Essays on the Reality of Science Studies. Harvard UP, 1999.
    • ———. We Have Never Been Modern. Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Locke, John. Two Treatises of Government. Cambridge UP, 1988.
    • Macherey, Pierre. Hegel or Spinoza. Translated by Susan M. Ruddick, U of Minnesota P, 2011.
    • Machiavelli, Niccolo. The Prince. Translated by Harvey C. Mansfield, U of Chicago P, 1998.
    • Mack, Michael. How Literature Changes the Way We Think. Continuum, 2012.
    • ———. “Toward an Inclusive Universalism: Spinoza’s Ethics of Sustainability.” Spinoza Now, edited by Dimitris Vardoulakis, U of Minnesota P, 2011.
    • Mackay, Robin. and Avanessian, Armen, editors. #Accelerate: The Accelerationist Reader. Urbanomic, 2014.
    • Mackenzie, Adam. Transductions: Bodies and Machines at Speed. Continuum, 2002.
    • Marinetti, F.T. The Futurist Manifesto. 1909. Accessed from: http://391.org/manifestos/1909-the-futurist-manifesto-f-t-marinetti.html Accessed on: October 29, 2017 Marx, Karl. Selected Writings. Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation. Duke UP, 2002.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. 1964. MIT P, 1994.
    • Mitchell, David and Snyder, Sharon. The Body and Physical Difference. U of Michigan P, 1997.
    • Montag, Warren. Bodies, Masses, Power: Spinoza and his Contemporaries. Verso, 1999.
    • Negri, Antonio. The Savage Anomaly. Translated by Michael Hardt, U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Noys, Benjamin. Malign Velocities: Accelerationism and Capitalism. Zero Books, 2014.
    • Nussbaum, Martha. Upheavals of Thought. Cambridge UP, 2001.
    • Rosa, Hartmut. Social Acceleration. Translated by Jonathan Trejo-Mathys, Columbia UP, 2013.
    • Rousseau, Jean-Jacques. “Discourse on the Origin of Inequality.” The Basic Political Writings. Translated by DA Cress. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1987, pp. 25–82.
    • Scheuerman, William E. Liberal Democracy and the Social Acceleration of Time. Johns Hopkins UP, 2004.
    • Schmitt, Carl. The Concept of the Political. Translated by George Schwab, U of Chicago P, 2007.
    • Sharma, Sarah. In the Meantime: Temporality and Cultural Politics. Duke UP, 2014.
    • Sharp, Hasana. Spinoza and the Politics of Renaturalization. U of Chicago P, 2011.
    • Simmel, George. “The Metropolis and Mental Life.” Simmel On Culture. David Frisby and Mike Featherstone, editors, Sage Publications, 1997, pp. 174–186.
    • Skeaff, Christopher. “‘Citizen jurisprudence’ and the people’s power in Spinoza.” Contemporary Political Theory, vol. 12, no. 3, August 2013, 146–165.
    • Spinoza, Baruch. The Ethics and Selected Letters. Translated by Samuel Shirley, Hackett, 1982.
    • Stiegler, Barnard. Technics and Time, 1. Translated by R Beardsworth and G Collins, Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Tomlinson, John. The Culture of Speed. Sage Publications, 2007.
    • Virilio, Paul. Open Sky. Translated by Julie Rose, Verso, 2008.
    • ———. Pure War. Translated by Mark Polizzotti, Semiotext(e), 1983.
    • Wajcman, Judy. Pressed for Time: The Acceleration of Life in Digital Capitalism. U of Chicago P, 2016.
    • Williams, Caroline. “Thinking the Political in the Wake of Spinoza.” Contemporary Political Theory, vol. 6, no. 3, August 2007, pp. 349–369.
    • Wolin, Sheldon. “What Time is It?” Theory and Event, vol. 1, no. 1, 1997, pp. 1–10.
  • Notes on Contributors

    Gila Ashtor
    Gila Ashtor received her PhD from Tufts University (2016). Her research areas include queer and affect theory, psychoanalysis, trauma and gender studies and twentieth-century American literature. She is currently at work on a book-length project on the metapsychological foundations of contemporary critical theory. She is a candidate in psychoanalytic training at the Institute for Psychoanalytic Training and Research in New York City.

    Amanda Armstrong
    Amanda Armstrong is an Assistant Professor of History at the University of Michigan and a member of the Michigan Society of Fellows. She is currently working on a book project entitled, Between the Union and the Police: Railway Labor, Race and Masculinity in the Second British Empire, 1848–1928.

    Melinda Cooper
    Melinda Cooper is Associate Professor in the School of Social and Political Sciences, University of Sydney, Australia. She is the author of Life as Surplus (University of Washington Press 2008) and Family Values: Between Neoliberalism and the New Social Conservatism (Zone Books 2017).

    Diletta De Cristofaro
    Diletta De Cristofaro is Lecturer in English at De Montfort University Leicester. Her main research interests include contemporary North American and British fiction, utopias and dystopias, narrative theory, philosophies of time, literary and critical theory, and the Anthropocene in literature. She has published on Jim Crace, the Anthropocene, and Cormac McCarthy, and is editing a special issue on the Literature of the Anthropocene for C21 Literature: Journal of 21st Century Writings.

    Adam Haaga
    Adam Haaga is a PhD candidate in the Philosophy Department at Memorial University of Newfoundland, where he is working on a dissertation on the middle Schelling’s relation to Plato’s dialogical works, focusing on Schelling’s turn to mythic or poetized thinking as a methodological means to address the philosophic limits of conceptual thinking.

    Stefan Mattessich
    Stefan Mattessich teaches English at Santa Monica College. In 2002, he published a monograph on Thomas Pynchon, Lines of Flight, which was a finalist for the MLA First Book Award. His articles on contemporary literature and culture have appeared in Angelaki, Theory & Event, differences, and New Literary History as well as Postmodern Culture, among other places.

    Graham J. Matthews
    Graham J. Matthews is Assistant Professor of English at Nanyang Technological University, Singapore. He is the author of Will Self and Contemporary British Society (2015), Ethics and Desire in the Wake of Postmodernism (2012), co-editor of Violence and the Limits of Representation (2013), and has contributed to various journals including Modern Fiction Studies, Textual Practice, and Modern Language Review.

    Emily Sibley
    Emily Sibley is a Ph.D. Candidate in the Department of Comparative Literature at New York University. She is currently completing her dissertation, “Uncivil Tongues: Genealogies of Adab in Modern Arabic Literature,” which examines how satire, protest, and incivility are central to an expanded view of literary practices in modern Arabic literature. Her research interests include print cultures of the Middle East and North Africa and theories of world literature. She received the Mellon Dissertation Fellowship in the Humanities for 2017–2018.

  • Worlding World Literature

    Emily Sibley (bio)
    New York University

    A review of Cheah, Pheng. What is a World? On Postcolonial Literature as World Literature. Duke University Press, 2016.

    The basic premises of Pheng Cheah’s book are encapsulated in its title: first, that any consideration of world literature requires a return to theorizing “world” beyond its spatial dimensions, and second, that postcolonial literature bears a unique relationship to world literature in its ability to challenge hegemonic understandings of what that world is. As a field, World Literature is often criticized for being apolitical—for performing a disingenuous depoliticization rooted in the logic of equivalency, where one text from the Global South is easily substituted for another, and for turning a blind eye to the structures of power that postcolonial theory brings to critical attention. Where inequalities are acknowledged, it is often done with a center-periphery model of a world system in mind, applying an evolutionary logic that has at its core a notion of Eurocentric teleological progress. Cheah is certainly no stranger to these debates, and his contribution critically considers the positionality of world literature vis-à-vis histories of imperialism, global capital, and modes of cosmopolitan belonging.

    Cheah’s stated aim is to rethink “world” as a temporal category, and, in the process, to reorient critical thought toward the relationship of literature to the world—a question wholly different from the ways in which literature circulates within that world. He rightly notes that the focus on circulation takes the world as a pre-defined entity, which is precisely what What is a World? questions. Only by first examining the category of “world” can we consider its relationship to literature. Cheah’s position rests on the injunction to think beyond spatial cartographies, instead turning to time as the crucial category by which to define the world. “Before the world can appear as an object, it must first be,” he writes, arguing that philosophical paradigms based on temporality provide important bases for resistance to the globalizing thrust of capitalism (2). He devotes the first two parts of the three-part book to examining the category of “world” in this temporal sense, providing rigorous readings of European philosophies of world. Part Three explores how several postcolonial novels elucidate the openings and closings of worlds beyond the time of global capital.

    Cheah thus positions his work as a corrective to the dominant spatial turn in world literature theory. His first chapter critiques the way cartographical models reproduce the capitalist system of thought and valuation. He takes aim, for instance, at Pascale Casanova’s much-debated theory that literature acquires value through recognition by the metropole. In Casanova’s spatial model, circulation is what matters; literature remains reactive in its relation to the world rather than possessing any force of its own. For Cheah, by contrast, literature’s normative force lies in its power to create ethical response and engagement with the world. Ultimately, this is what he aims to theorize: an “ethicopolitically committed world literature” in contrast to one that is market-driven (34).

    How can we constitute an ethical ground for literary representation in a secular, postmodern era? The pursuit of an answer to this question takes Cheah through a number of philosophers grouped into three main categories: the spiritualists (Goethe, Hegel), the materialists (Marx, Lefebvre), and the phenomenologists/deconstructionists (Heidegger, Arendt, Derrida). The return to Goethe is inescapable, given his foundational status as the author of the term Weltliteratur. Cheah’s reading highlights three aspects of Goethe’s thought: the connection to cosmopolitanism as universalist intellectual practice; the “sacralization of world literature”; and the conception of world as “an ongoing dynamic process of becoming” (40–41, 42). Hegel brings histories of violence and domination to bear upon the concept of world as spiritual process, where “historical violence is absolved by a theodicy of spirit’s teleological progress towards the actualization of freedom in the world” (55). For Cheah, the conceptualization of world as a “dynamic spiritual whole” and as an objective (rather than idealist) structure constituted by violence are valuable contributions to a theory of “world,” which he decouples from a Eurocentric teleology that legitimizes violence (57). While Marx, Hegel’s materialist inverter, stands as the progenitor of cartographies of capital, Cheah retrieves from his writing a concept of world as “rational-purposive human relationality” that emphasizes a “vital motility in embodied place” and mobilizes people towards self-determination (65, 73). In Marx, the world is defined in terms of social relations. Capital shapes the human subject as that subject becomes part of the production cycle; it creates a “cultivated cosmopolitan human being” as part of its eradication of national barriers (71). For Cheah, the temporal dimension of Marxist theory is found in the circulation of capital. Capital seeks to eradicate time: both time and space must be reduced, even obliterated, for potential value to become actual value. As capital accelerates, it becomes its own barrier, one that will lead to the eventual Aufhebung of the capitalist world. The process of self-actualization set in motion by capital transforms alienated social relations, as the emergent universal proletarian subject reappropriates the production process, and with it time itself.

    Cheah’s argument for a philosophy of world rooted in temporality draws heavily on Heidegger, who, like Marx, rejects the idea of world as a spatial container, instead focusing on relationality in concepts such as care, being-thrown, and being-with. For Heidegger, world “worlds”: the active property of “world” inscribes it with a temporal component that makes it a “‘force’ of opening or entry” (96). In contrast to other philosophies that regard the material world as something to be transcended, Heidegger posits a radical finitude that makes “temporality…the movement of transcendence itself” (110). His disavowal of teleological time makes the world necessarily contingent and fragile, a condition of possibility for our openness to nature and the objects around us. Cheah finds that for Heidegger, spatial models obscure the relationality that grants meaningfulness and “deprive us of our proper worldliness” (103). Acts of unworlding stem from the failure “to recognize the structural openness to the outside that is proper to our being” (120). Heidegger criticizes the processes of anthropocentrism and objectification that take over in the age of globalization, seeing it as the flattening of the world to a single plane of representation. The erasure of authentic relations is a loss of world and an abdication of responsibility and care towards others. Such loss is a condition of modernity that exceeds postcolonial realities, though Cheah suggests that the postcolonial text registers this condition most acutely due to global capitalism’s capacity to destroy or fundamentally change the cultures of the Global South.

    Derrida elaborates Heideggerian philosophy “by suggesting that time is not proper to human Dasein but comes from the absolutely or nonhuman other” (161). For Derrida, alterity constitutes and maintains the experience of presence, which Cheah reads as both a temporal and an ontological category. Alterity, despite its inability to be appropriated or defined, calls forth an ethical response that elicits the transformation of the world; according to Derrida, writes Cheah, “the normative force of worldly ethical and political action originates in a response to absolute alterity” (170). Alterity opens us up to possible futures, including the future of reason itself; without an openness to alterity that demands decisions, ethics, and action, reason stagnates and dies. Derrida calls this structural openness to the unknown future the “gift of time” found in the openness to alterity (171). In his turn to Heidegger’s philosophy and its Derridean expansion, Cheah shows that conceptualizing the world according to temporality—and in particular, according to the world’s radical finitude and its yet to come (l’à-venir, for Derrida)—is necessary in order to fully access relations to other beings, human and nonhuman, which in turn gives rise to obligation, ethical action, and normative force.

    The pursuit of a normative theory of world literature drives Cheah’s work, which relies on the relation of the concepts of teleological time and of worlding to ethics and to the creation of a better world. He argues that in spite of their differences, these concepts illuminate the world as a “dynamic process with a normative practical dimension” that contributes to the rethinking of world literature as that which opens up a particular kind of world (192). According to Cheah,

    “Normativity” refers to what ought to be. We conventionally understand norms and their related cognates, values, as ideals that practical reason prescriptively projects onto reality to transform it in the image of human ends or as principles immanent to collective human existence that will unfold and actualize themselves. The force of a norm comes from its universal validity. (6)

    With this focus on normativity, Cheah assumes an unapologetically universalist stance. Goethe’s model of a universalizing world literature suddenly seems not so very far off—but neither is the question of who sets the norm and recognizes it as such. Universalist humanism has been beleaguered by this problem due to its complicity with colonialism and, more recently, the politics of global development and human rights. To his credit, Cheah tackles the tensions between universalist ethics of the norm and local modes of being-in-the-world through his readings of postcolonial literature, including works by Michelle Cliff, Amitav Ghosh, Nuruddin Farah, Ninotchka Rosca, and Timothy Mo. Ghosh’s The Hungry Tide and Farah’s Gifts are particularly good examples of the ways in which a globally conceived and administered humanist ethos can conflict with local needs. Ghosh’s novel describes in detail how the international project of creating a wildlife preserve for tigers in the Sundarbans, the mangrove forests of West Bengal, was carried out by the Indian government with exceptional violence against local villagers. It shows how modernization, seen in the forest preserve laws and commercial prawn industry, makes subaltern lives in the Sundarbans increasingly precarious. Farah’s novel shows that international food aid during the Somali famine of the 1990s represented Somali subjects as victims deprived of choice in receiving charitable gifts, whereas local modes of communal support and giving were fashioned on mutual obligation and upheld human dignity. In Cheah’s description, “the ethics of international philanthropy, the novel suggests, is continuous with the capitalist world-system’s exploitative logic of commodity exchange” (279). He suggests that such revelations of violence demand not only an affective response from the reader, but also actions that recognize and preserve other cultures and their modes of being-in-the-world.

    Cheah uses the term “normative” to make an ethical appeal. But is normativity the right term? This is not a semantic argument, but rather a question of what and who constitutes the norm. Behind this call for literature to bear normative force is an implicit requirement for those in positions of authority to adjudicate and act as a corrective to the market’s measurements of value. Cheah’s own remarks point to this requirement and the moral force it presumes, particularly in his introductory comments explaining his choice of novels. He alleges that complaints from a graduate seminar reveal a Eurocentric bias that divorces aesthetics and theory from politics, where postcolonial texts are primarily read for political and anthropological information (15–16). Against charges that the novels are uninteresting or simply not very good, he offers this defense: “These comments are disturbing because we read authors who are widely celebrated. V.S. Naipaul is a Nobel laureate, and Farah is rumored to be a perennial Nobel contender. Ghosh, Cliff, and Mo are regarded as strong examples of world literature” (15). The only explicit measure of valuation Cheah mentions is circulation in international prize circles, but Cheah fails to extend the same scrutiny to these bodies as he does to other international bodies operating according to a similar ethos, such as charitable or environmental organizations. In his reading of Ghosh’s The Hungry Tide, he offers two examples of “a universalistic humanist cosmopolitanism” for critique: the first a translator representing a bourgeois multilingualism that thrives on multinational traffic; the second an international researcher whose funding comes from the North (261). It remains unclear how prize bodies differ from the cosmopolitanism Cheah critiques, yet the Nobel committee appears to determine normative value. Moreover, it is striking that all of Cheah’s selected novels were published in English. Aside from a few brief discussions of translation —“vulgar,” in Heidegger’s conception of world (104); “ambivalent,” for Ghosh (274); language as indicative of “hybrid creativity” and “cosmopolitanism from below” in Mo (328) —Cheah remains curiously silent on questions of language despite its imbrication in imperialism. Aamir Mufti’s recently published Forget English! Orientalisms and World Literatures warns against this blind spot, tracing the invisible imperialism of English as the normative language of world literature. Cheah’s work remains ensconced within two canonical frames—European philosophy and English-language postcolonial texts—which raises questions about how the concept of normativity functions throughout What is a World?

    Recently, several Western scholars have turned to philosophical and literary traditions outside of Europe in order to put the categories of “world” and “literature” under pressure. In Against World Literature: On the Politics of Untranslatability, Emily Apter argues that the way “world” translates in various languages demonstrates these languages’ different conceptual underpinnings. In In the Shadow of World Literature: Sites of Reading in Colonial Egypt, Michael Allan demonstrates that in some Arab circles, “literature” figures both as the textual object and as the process of becoming canonical linked to modernization. These works, geared toward a categorical rethinking of “the world” outside the Western canon, become crucial if world literature is to respond to the challenges of its Eurocentric and Orientalizing provenance, which, as Mufti uncompromisingly argues, “continue to structure the practices of world literature” (19). Theory must travel, including theories of world. This methodological challenge plays out in the course of What is a World. The only philosophical decentering occurs in the opening chapter of Part Three, “Postcolonial Openings,” where Cheah takes up theories of heterotemporality devised by Dipesh Chakrabarty in Provincializing Europe and Néstor García Canclini in Hybrid Cultures: Strategies for Entering and Leaving Modernity. While Cheah’s portrayal of the normative force of world literature undoubtedly stakes a claim to the importance of the humanities, as academics we must remember our own complicity in circles of power that influence our choices of what we judge worthy of inclusion and how we structure our critical engagements.

    It remains unclear why Cheah holds on to the term cosmopolitanism when numerous moments in his book serve to critique the concept, both in theory and in reading how it plays out in the worlds of the postcolonial novel. The introduction demonstrates his determination to rescue a cosmopolitan ethics grounded in humanist idealism: “Cosmopolitanism is about viewing oneself as part of a world, a circle of political belonging that transcends the limited ties of kinship and country to embrace the whole of deterritorialized humanity” (3). Cosmopolitanism remains unsituated, however, as its “optic is not one of perceptual experience” but of imagined belonging (3). In turning to postcolonial novels, that imagining reveals itself as a disconnected idealism that reads as profoundly ambivalent, if not negative. “There is nothing inherently liberating about mobility,” Cheah observes in his chapter on Cliff, discussing her presentation of Jamaican emigration from the colony to the metropole (218). This “cosmopolitanism” is not one of ethical idealism, but one of diaspora, migration, and other patterns of transnational communication and economics. Cheah’s discussion of Ghosh reveals the “transfiguration of cosmopolitan middle-class consciousness by subaltern stories,” and Mo’s novels present a “worldliness from below” (259, 325). Worldliness is irreducible to cosmopolitanism, as Cheah suggests in his reading of Heidegger, because it recognizes and activates the already present relationality of beings in connection (104). Cheah returns again and again to the concept of worldliness in his postcolonial readings, and thus it seems more fitting to abandon the term cosmopolitanism altogether in favor of worldliness, especially given his presentation of that term as more theoretically sound. Worldliness helps to solve the problem that cosmopolitanism becomes bound up in law, as Cheah elucidates in a discussion of the concept’s origins: “Cosmopolitanism worlds the world in the image of humanity and posits the world as a universal fraternal community of human beings. It is identical with humanization.… Cosmopolitan concepts and institutions are thus part of a project of human self-making” (176). These institutions, authorized with the force of law, create a form of normativity at odds with the normativity that Cheah outlines in his turn to the postcolonial: a form of obligation that is other to the laws of global human institutions.

    Nonetheless, the redefinition of world literature in What is a World? is a valuable, timely contribution to the field. As Cheah asserts, his work “leads to a radical rethinking of world literature as literature that is an active power in the making of worlds, that is, both a site of processes of worlding and an agent that participates and intervenes in these processes” (2). He ultimately derives four criteria for world literature: 1) it must take the existing world created by globalization as its theme and “cognitively map” how a society is situated within the larger system; 2) it must reconsider nationalism and cosmopolitanism as intertwined instead of in opposition; 3) it must imagine the world as one of dynamic processes, stripped of any form of teleology; and 4) it must carry a principle of transformation and “performatively enact a world,” indicating the possibility of “a ‘perhaps’ or ‘otherwise’ that sets temporalization in motion” (211–12). Cheah’s desire to retain the concept of cosmopolitanism, as seen in his second point, seems rooted in his insistence on the possibility of universal ethics. World literature as redefined discloses and imparts this ethics, and that ethical appeal is of the utmost importance. The questions raised by the framework of normativity—who and what constitute the norm—must be endlessly reexamined, but this does not make ethics impossible—or, rather, it takes the form of Derridean impossibility, the possible impossible, which continues to imagine the world differently and acts as an imperative to bring that world into being through encounters such as those made possible by world literature.

    Works Cited

    • Allan, Michael. In the Shadow of World Literature: Sites of Reading in Colonial Egypt. Princeton UP, 2016.
    • Apter, Emily. Against World Literature: On The Politics of Untranslatability. Verso, 2013.
    • Mufti, Aamir. Forget English! Orientalisms and World Literatures. Harvard UP, 2016.
  • The Cynical Generation

    Graham J. Matthews (bio)
    Nanyang Technological University

    A review of Mandel, Naomi. Disappear Here: Violence After Generation X. Columbus: Ohio State UP, 2015.

    The idea that the people who make up a generation share certain characteristics dates back to the mid-nineteenth century French lexicographer and philosopher, Émile Littré, whose authoritative Dictionnaire de la langue française (1863–72) defined a generation as all people coexisting in society at any given time. Descended from the Latin word generāre meaning “to beget,” the word had primarily been used to signify the relationship between fathers and sons. However, the concept’s utility emerged later through the process of dividing contemporaries into different age groups; this inaugurated the notion of social generations and led to claims about shifts in aesthetic taste. Robert Wohl wrote: “The division of society into age-groups occurred because the mass of active and productive adults changed totally and regularly every thirty years. With this change in personnel came a change in sensibility” (19–20). The social generation model studies the intangible development of human sentiments and beliefs. Consequently, the term “generation” has come to demarcate the decline of an old culture and the rise of a new one that remains in place for approximately twenty-five years, occurring with a rhythm whose logic is unknown. Nevertheless, when one generation and its dominant cultural norms are replaced with another, it is typically presumed to be for historically specific reasons. For instance, the Lost Generation, named by Gertrude Stein and popularized by Ernest Hemingway’s epigraph to The Sun Also Rises (1926), defines a generation of people born 1880–1900 who lived through the First World War. Traditional literary fiction appeared ill-equipped to capture the trauma of mechanized violence on an industrial scale as its audience irrevocably changed; the implication is that the link between a generation and culture is not accidental and that each generation is defined in relation to a seismic event. The G.I. Generation (meaning either “General Issue” or “Government Issue”) was born during the years 1901–1924 and fought during the Second World War. The Silent Generation (1925–1942) grew up during the Second World War, and many fought in the Korean War and the Vietnam War. Meanwhile, the Baby Boomers were born in the wake of the Second World War and were defined by a substantial increase in the birth rate due to returning soldiers. Generation X was the first generation to be defined not by world wars or other seismic historical events but by the bonds that arise between individuals through exposure to social and cultural change. Karl Mannheim’s 1927 essay, “The Problems of Generations” argues that the rhythm in the sequence of generations is far more apparent in the literary realm than in institutions: “the aesthetic sphere is perhaps the most appropriate to reflect overall changes of mental climate” (279). With its specific aesthetic and moral preferences, Generation X is a generation defined more than any other by an assemblage of media-focused historical and political events, television shows, films, and music that function as common frames of reference.

    Naomi Mandel’s Disappear Here: Violence after Generation X develops further the themes of suffering, identity, and ethics explored in her earlier book, Against the Unspeakable: Complicity, the Holocaust, and Slavery in America (2007), to demonstrate the ways in which Generation X’s particular attitude towards violence has been formed by developments in home media, personal computing, and reality TV. Typically characterized as anomie, boredom, and supine defeatism, Generation Xers’ fixation on negation, ambivalence and multiplicity is presented by Mandel as a revitalization of the hermeneutics of suspicion that is simultaneously antagonistic towards yet disseminated by popular culture. Rather than amoral and disaffected, Xers’ ethical center is integral to their complex and counter-intuitive attitude towards violence and its representation. Unlike previous generations, Xers’ experience is defined by paralysis, menace, and complicity, surrounded by the blurring of the image and the physical world through the saturation of home media, CNN, reality TV and video games, coupled with a heightened cynicism towards authority, media, nationalism, and utopian ideals. Mandel’s scintillating analysis traverses the works of seminal Generation X authors including Bret Easton Ellis, Douglas Coupland, Don DeLillo, and Chuck Palahniuk. Although these writers exhibit a broad range of styles, they are united by the concerns of their generation and linked by changes in politics, culture, and technology in the 1980s and 1990s. Mandel adopts a range of approaches, delivering a historical overview, an author study (on Ellis), a reading of post-9/11 novels, a theoretical critique of violence, and a sustained analysis of one text (Fight Club) that has become a generational touchstone. Each approach offers a partial view on a complex and variegated array of thinkers, writers, and artists, brought together through the central claim that Generation X “refuses traditional fidelities and alliances and points the way to a future, after X” (6). As Mandel traces the vanishing mediators that comprise Generation X across our globalized, media-driven, and connected world, X emerges as an attitude or outlook rather than simply a demographic; one that, superficially at least, is linked to a commitment to creative and critical impulses in society, economics, and ethics.

    Fight Club, in both its novel and film incarnations an emblematic text for Generation X, depicts men from a variety of classes and ethnic backgrounds as disaffected, disillusioned, and drawn to the experience of violence. By joining the titular fight club they find community and a sense of affirmation otherwise lost to them within the corporatized, global system of capitalist exchange. In the twist ending, it is revealed that the unnamed everyman narrator and the seductive leader of the fight club, Tyler Durden, are dissociated personalities within the same body, thereby blurring the boundary between representation and reality. For Generation Xers, Mandel notes, “the line between fiction and fact is permeable, fungible; the relationship of violence to action is characterized by complexity, giving pause to ethics; ‘reality’ is produced for television and marketed for consumption, and fiction … assumes an important role in the creation, construction, and preservation of ‘real violence’” (211–12). Whereas Millennial writers have sometimes struggled to articulate the real effects of the virtual and invisible systemic violence produced by the 2008 financial crisis, Generation X writers have long traced the shifting grounds of representation, the distinction between perception and materiality, and the dissolution of reality. Whereas Sam Goodman and I previously argued in Violence and the Limits of Representation (2013) that violence often signals the limitations of representational strategies since it is either too abstract or too concrete, Mandel suggests that violence is subject to representation and hence to misrepresentation, distortion, and denial. We claimed that these distortions are all we can represent of violence —the ripples rather than the impact itself —but Mandel convincingly demonstrates the ways in which representation can operate at a higher level while also delivering a subtle conceptualization of violence’s effects on the distinction between representation and reality: “violence is real, though its reality is hard to find, and is ultimately indistinguishable from fictions” (216). Generation X thinks it needs to determine what is true (while remaining mindful of the contingency of truth) and to act with social and ethical responsibility. Unfortunately, that impulse is not immediately apparent in most Xers’ work, and the ironic delivery favored by these writers, artists, and film-makers lends itself to accusations that cynicism is itself a problematic ideological position; their philosophy is predicated on laying bare the fictive qualities of political statements, emphasizes the limitations of rigid codes of ethics, and threatens to evacuate collective discourse of affect.

    Chapter one entitled “Why X Now?” historicizes the literature and culture of a generation defined by the representation of violence without opposition, critique, or remedy. Generation X’s defining sense of detachment, atomism, and disaffection was initially articulated in Bret Easton Ellis’s Less Than Zero (1985) and Douglas Coupland’s Generation X (1991), both of which display profound ambivalence towards violence and present characters who ostentatiously distrust commitment and responsibility, valuing instead interruption, fragmentation, and cynicism. These attitudes are reflected by the novels’ form. Nevertheless, Mandel discovers value in the Generation X refrains of “whatever” and “nevermind.” Rather than reading them as the apathetic cries of disaffected youth, Mandel sees in these phrases an important renegotiation and articulation of the complex relationship between violence and the real. Instead of seeing violence and images of violence as things to be avoided, Xers were the first generation to determine their proximity to real violence and its mediated image. Vilified by conservative media outlets, who tended to link the music of Metallica and Marilyn Manson, the novels of Anne Rice and Stephen King, and video games such as Doom (1993) and Grand Theft Auto (1997) to criminality and violence, Mandel’s analysis shows that Generation X’s attitude constitutes a refusal to draw simplistic causal links between the representation of violence and violence in reality. As a consequence, Generation X’s “whatever” and “nevermind” redirect critical attention away from immediate displays of subjective violence towards more thoughtful contemplation of pervasive systemic violence.

    In “Nevermind: An X Critique of Violence,” Mandel tackles the paradox of violence —that it is simultaneously self-evident and invisible —and the ways in which it is used to stake a claim on the real. In a world in which many of the old certainties are clouded by irony and cynicism, the idea that there is truth to be found in suffering and that trauma conveys authentic experience has gained critical currency. Mandel explains that violence always appears as a problem or issue of urgent concern and therefore brings with it political value and ethical weight at the level of representation. With the caveat that the nature of reality is tenuous, Mandel focuses her attention on the “reality associated with violence” (42). Generation X is said to offer privileged insight into violence precisely because of its ambivalence towards the relationship between representation and its object within a world saturated by film, media, and popular culture. Rather than reading violence as a trauma to which literature responds, Disappear Here shows that Generation X writers conceptualized violence as a means by which reality is constructed. In place of a direct correlation between things and words, with a dark reality waiting to be discovered beneath appearances, the referent is constructed in the wake of the representation. With the wide availability of filmmaking equipment, Generation Xers came to possess a keen awareness of the ways in which media content can be edited, re-visioned, and revealed, thereby demonstrating new potentialities for the dissemination of both truth and lies, revelation and maleficence. The generation’s knowing attitude and cynical reason are exemplified by Coupland’s novel, which is interspersed with asides that mimic and subvert advertising discourse.

    In developing a conceptual framework that situates Generation X’s attitude towards violence and representation, Mandel draws on Alain Badiou’s theory of the event. For Badiou, people must commit themselves to an event, a disruptive excess that erupts from within the current structure and that makes possible new truth-procedures. In Disappear Here, Mandel notes that Generation Xers’ preference for indeterminacy and ambivalence risks leading to the diminishment of facts. However, Badiou’s conception of fidelity, truth, and the event offers a fresh way of understanding the ethics of Generation X writers. Mandel identifies three key points from Badiou’s ontology: fidelity is a way of thinking that emerges from an event, not the subject; fidelity can be identified only in what it produces; fidelity assembles truths rather than reflecting them. Because an event compels the subject to create in previously untrammeled directions, Generation X’s seeming abdication of agency could then be interpreted as a willingness to be faithful to an event when it emerges. In Badiou’s materialist and logical conception of the world, relativity is not an excuse for indeterminacy of meaning, but is both coherent and deducible. Whereas Generation X is frequently characterized as having no cause to fight for, this conception suggests that there is a logic to “whatever” and “nevermind.”

    In the chapter on Bret Easton Ellis, Mandel analyzes the major novels, focusing on his depiction of aimless youth and the hazards of unlimited freedom. Mandel identifies in Ellis’s oeuvre a recurrence of negation and an aesthetics of subtraction; characters and events are defined by what is removed or absent in order to foreground Generation X’s sense of loss, anomie, and blankness. Ellis’s fiction treads the fine line between complicity and critique common to many postmodern texts, and his novels, ranging from American Psycho (1991) to Imperial Bedrooms (2010), have attracted criticism for their graphic descriptions of violence. But perhaps the most chilling aspect of these texts is the characters’ cynicism and apathy in the face of such acts. Unable to distinguish between representations and reality, these characters languish in a twilit realm of surfaces and cynicism, unable to commit to their feelings or to each other. Mandel argues that Ellis’s novels “trace the disappearance of the sign of the real and document a subtraction of reality from representation” and consequently convey the exhaustion of this generation (212).

    Turning to fiction written in the wake of the September 11 attacks by Generation X authors, Mandel identifies a recurrent fascination with the mediated quality of reality. Through intricate readings of Don DeLillo’s Falling Man (2007), Frédéric Beigbeder’s Windows on the World (2005), Claire Messud’s The Emperor’s Children (2006), and Jess Walter’s The Zero (2006), Mandel explores how events that appeared as if they had emerged from a disaster movie catalyzed reflection on “the relation of reality to image and the preeminence of spectacle in the discursive construction of truth” (116–17). Despite proclamations that the shock of 9/11 would initiate a turn away from cynicism and invigorate the slacker generation with a more concrete identity and sense of purpose, Mandel convincingly shows that Generation X writers remained committed to negotiable definitions, contingent truths, and fluid identities. This section is followed by analysis of Jay McInerney’s The Good Life (2006) and Ken Kalfus’s A Disorder Peculiar to the Country (2006). Although these authors were born in the 1950s, they feature Generation X protagonists and reflect on the ways in which 9/11 troubled the boundary between representation and reality. Whilst not denying the material reality of the September 11 attacks, all of these writers were stimulated to question the kind of truth claims that surrounded the event. Rather than shoring up certainties and erasing ambivalence, Mandel demonstrates that 9/11 reinforced epistemic uncertainty within Generation X novels and foregrounded the mediated nature of violence and reality.

    Mandel treats Jonathan Safran Foer’s 9/11 novel, Extremely Loud and Incredibly Close (2005), in a separate chapter alongside his earlier Everything is Illuminated (2002) in order to question the ethics of fictionalizing historical traumas. Mandel sees in the controversial ending, which takes the form of a flip-book of a figure falling from the World Trade Center in reverse, the predilections of a Generation X readership accustomed to the edited, rewound, and manipulated image filtered through Photoshop and the television screen. The images have stimulated a great deal of disagreement regarding their veracity, sentimentality, aesthetics, and ethical import, but for Mandel they attest to the fundamental fragility of reality. Critical responses to the flip-book tend to fall into one of two categories: either an insistence that the images are fictional, thereby maintaining the division between fiction and reality, or a demand that the novel engage explicitly with the causes and consequences of 9/11. Mandel evades this false binary by drawing on the Generation X refrain of “nevermind” to set aside value judgements concerning the novel’s adherence to truth or political utility. Instead, her analysis presents Foer’s oeuvre as a persistent engagement with real, historical violence that is fictional in nature. In the conclusion to this chapter, Mandel highlights the tendency to strive for accuracy in the face of violence but cautions that this approach denies our ability to engage constructively with the mechanisms that produce and sustain the violence of reality and the reality of violence. Her claim is that if violence problematizes our conception of reality, then fiction, which fully embraces its status as untrue, helps us to conceive of the world as a shifting set of fidelities and contingencies. In the light of Mandel’s cogent analysis, Generation X novels safeguard the ability to conceptualize truth in tandem with its fabrication.

    Having witnessed first-hand real violence and its very real effects on minds, bodies, buildings, and national identities, Mandel delivers a complex reading of violence as simultaneously affirmed and disavowed, displayed and erased. Disappear Here constitutes a skillful negotiation of the value of X as a time, a style, an experience, and a signature, all united by the sense of multiplicity, erasure, and contingency. Whilst inscribing X as the place of simultaneously crossing out and marking the spot, this book provides thoughtful groundwork for further engagement with a generation’s credo of affectlessness, apathy, and cynicism.

    Works Cited

    • Mannheim, Karl. “The Problems of Generations.” Essays on the Sociology of Knowledge. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1952.
    • Wohl, Robert. The Generation of 1914. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1979.
  • Marc Fichou’s Habitus Video Feedback Art in a Philosophical Context

    Stefan Mattessich (bio)
    Santa Monica College

    French-born artist Marc Fichou has exhibited an intriguing body of work in a string of shows around L.A.: “Contenant Contenu” at the Robert Berman gallery (January–February 2013), “Ouroboros” at the Young Projects gallery (January–April 2014), “Outside-In” at the Chimento Contemporary (June–July 2016), and, most recently, “Uncertainty,” a group show at the Pasadena Arts Center (October 2016–February 2017). Much of Fichou’s work involves video feedback and looped, interactive projections that recall the inter-disciplinary experiments of Fluxus artist Dick Higgins, the video installations of Num June Paik, and other works by Steina and Woody Vasulkas, Peter Weibel, and Peter Campus. While all of these artists focus on the mediation and displacement of the object, the artist, and the viewer alike, the stakes remain a subjectivity that persists through its various attenuations.

    Fichou is a very self-effacing artist. We see this in his installation “Plastron,” with a video monitor that shows, by reverse projection, the artist in close-up as he applies plaster of Paris mixed with black paint to his face. He gradually covers his whole head, including the eyes. Mounted just opposite the projection is the impassive, mineral-like cast that will be (or is already) the result of this process. On an interposed double mirror, its reflection combines with the video image, creating an almost holographic superposition of the face and its mask that confounds relations between before and after, inside and outside, subject and object. The artist fashions his own likeness, but he subtracts himself in it, too. He presents his own disappearance. The installation, containing its production in time, is also penetrated by negativity, volatilized by absence.

    Fig. 1. Plastron. 2010.

    We sense Fichou touching here on a history of art going as far back as Greek sculpture, which strove to find in the human body the coincidence of material substance and soul that made the person essentially what he or she was. This perfect self-identity came about through the development of qualities, faculties, and talents that lay dormant in the person, as natural potentials made actual and explicit, known to the mind. We still take our cues from this Greek tradition—it still informs the ways we think about identity. Few of us, however, have much practical experience with the self-possession it celebrates. Rather, becoming ourselves implies inner conflict and alienation from a nature that is never quite recovered in consciousness. Autonomy depends on technical supports or prostheses (from writing to digital screens) that decenter the “soul” —if they don’t relegate the notion to some metaphysical past.

    Fichou’s interest in subjective dispossession nonetheless engages that past; his work, to be sufficiently felt, asks this engagement of us. French philosopher Catherine Malabou provides a useful framework for this history. Her reading of modern subjectivity turns on the figure of kenosis as a self-emptying of the will that occurs when the subject becomes aware of its own limits in a contingent universe. This Copernican shock has typically been narrated as a withdrawal of metaphysical guarantees but in two senses. God abandons the world (and we feel abandoned by him), but God also abandons himself in it. His kenosis (or death) entails not only a fall into time and mortality (in the person of Christ) but the converse spiritualization of a fallen condition. God in his essence “becoming accident,” as Malabou puts it, affords a template for the modern subject’s encounter with finitude, grasped as a struggle to achieve self-understanding through a “divine” alienation—to achieve what Hegel, on whom Malabou relies for her account, calls “absolute knowledge” (71).

    This distinctly Protestant internalization of negativity entails a sublimation of social freedom into moral conscience; as such, it affords the formula, as critics from Marx onwards have pointed out, for an abstract universality that sustains, in resigned acceptance, the irrational social conditions of a bourgeois capitalist order.1 We see Fichou interrogating this sublimation in another of his installations, “Primer.” It involves two rooms. In one, a chair fashioned of gypsum cement faces a large steel representation of the Chartres labyrinth on a wall. Behind the chair is a steel crucifix, and at the center of the cross a small spy camera has been installed. In the other room, a low-slung, stainless steel chair of modern design faces a square black-and-white television, on which we see what the spy camera records: the backs of visitors’ heads as they sit facing the labyrinth. The austere and organic feel of the first room, with its religious symbols, invites a contemplation that, in the second, becomes an object we view this time as spectators. On one level, what we experience is the anachronism of contemplation, if not also its diminishment into spectacle. The camera in the crucifix, however, suggests, on another level, a surveillance that evokes both an internalized agency (like a superego or a Big Other) and a derivation of spectacle from the Christian symbol itself (or from the Christian tradition tout court).2

    For Malabou, “absolute knowledge,” notwithstanding its theological overtones, continues to offer the resource of a transcendental limit for a self-critical consciousness. It does this in that Copernican shock driving the subject defensively into itself, into a pure subjective freedom or “inner being” that is also ineffable and opaque, like a point without dimension. So reduced, the subject finds itself absorbed in an order of objective necessity and governed by inertia and habit; this experience, however, also forces it to reflect upon its own status as an object and to acknowledge its own nothingness. In the process, it contacts something else in itself (the one reflecting) that disturbs a naturalized fear and passivity, thus precipitating a shift from habit-forming to habit-changing practices. In Malabou’s view, this moment of Hegelian sublation signifies less the accomplishment of a substantial being (in its abstract universality) than a specific transformation of human habitus. The subject becomes more itself not by ceasing to be the object it reflects or is in the object world—rather, the object is sustained in that reflection, and the object world persists as a condition through the gain in self-consciousness. The subject of this discourse, for Malabou, discloses a “structure of presence-absence” that puts the “soul” neither within nor outside it: “Moving between the inside and the outside between ‘interior’ and ‘exterior,’ the soul establishes its ‘rational liberation’” (70).

    Fichou suggests something of Malabou’s structure, in “Plastron” by including the disappearance of the artist in the artifact, the face in the mask, and in “Primer” by shifting consciousness into its habitus, extended to include a whole tele-technological apparatus and form of life. Fichou thus stages a kind of sublation, which involves, to cite Malabou once more, “the relation the subject forms with itself through the mediation of its other” (119).3 The locus of this self-relation is, again, that mobile point between inside and outside, blurring as much as drawing their separation and signaling a reflexivity Malabou characterizes as “plastic” in two senses of the word: it forms or informs itself, and it receives form from without. It is both creative and receptive to change, active and passive at once.

    Fichou’s art turns insistently on the habits of just such a “plastic” consciousness. In “Origami Cube” (one of a series showcased in the exhibition “Contenant Contenu”), he fashions an object from paper, photographs it, and then unfolds it again for the eventual print.

    Fig. 2. Origami Cube. 2012.

    The cube we see, literally its own support, suggests that it exists inside itself. At the same time, the image of this inside is outside what it depicts, producing cognitive disorientation in us as viewers. Especially if we imagine the cube as empty, and this emptiness as what the image shows us, then its emptiness raises the question not just of what we are looking at but also what we are doing when we look.

    In other work, Fichou pushes this “plastic” consciousness even farther towards its own effacement. The “being” it implies is closer to what Hegel might have called a “System” operating the self-determination of its substance outside the will. Malabou sees in such a displaced habitus, not the totalizing drive for which Hegel’s “dialectical machine” has long been reproached, but that drive’s inherent negativity, which, turning back upon itself, or turning itself inside out, opens up in identity (or for a self-identical subject) a “space-between” opposites where differences (and limits) can be held in “reciprocal tension,” neither externalized nor elided (165).

    Fichou engages this “space-between” with his video feedback machine, drily called “The Artist.”

    Fig. 3. The Artist. 2013. Installation view at Young Projects. 2015.

    Consisting of a camera that faces a monitor, it records the empty screen (and whatever light it emits, along with any incident light), then sends this (non)image back to be projected and recorded again, and so on in a loop. The overlay of successive (non)images generates luminous abstract patterns that can be varied with slight adjustments in the camera’s focal point and angle of view. No one exactly produces these patterns—no human hand is involved (at least directly), no representation either. Without a referent in the world, they don’t copy anything, though they derive only from the process of their own reduplication. Nor do they stand as original artifacts, though they are unpredictable and unrepeatable. They suggest purely virtual self-organizing events without depth, substance, or “filiation”—which is why Fichou calls them “Orphan Images.”

    Unlike with “Plastron” and “Primer,” there is little existential anxiety in this work. If the feedback system resembles a coffin, its glass panels suggest also a greenhouse, and the alienated impersonality that remains no less a subtext of its operation, combining death and life, points more to the possibilities of a displaced habitus. We feel its “space-between” in the “Orphan Images” when they are projected as separate installations, their status as objects offset by a shimmer that just hints at static. We feel it again in work Fichou calls “Spirals.”

    Fig. 4. Spirals. 2015.

    These pieces are made by focusing the camera on a canvas covered with random strokes and drips of paint. With the help of an external projector the same feedback process is initiated. The strokes and drips start to scintillate. By canting the lens, Fichou has them trail across the canvas, leaving their own lustrous traces—“footprints of potentiality,” as he put it in an accompanying text. He then takes pictures of the canvas to print. The results are curiously mixed: abstract paintings without texture, photographs but not of something, (an)organic and (im)material objects that resist easy categorization.

    We might think of the diagram in Figure 5 (below) as another version by Fichou of “The Artist.” Consciousness is also a feedback process. It converts a perceived object into a memory that, in turn, invests a subsequent perception of the object, again in a repeated loop.

    Fig. 5. Untitled. 2013.

    With a nod to the psychology of Henri Bergson, future and past moments are compressed in a “present” of instantaneous “duration” that generates in the mind (or the mind as) another “orphan image” (indicated by the purple mandala-like pattern). If a machine still operates here—despite the artist’s presence in the green “4D emotional space,” he still has a “mechanical captor” for an eye—it is because consciousness for Fichou is constituted by the time of its passing, appearing insofar as it disappears. It is, as he writes along the right edge of his diagram, a “retrospective illusion.”

    This image hangs on what Fichou calls his “Walls.” Serving as surfaces on which various objects (his own and others) are juxtaposed, they provide a space for working out philosophical preoccupations with time, habit, nature, and artifice.

    Fig. 6. Walls, installation view. 2015.

    On them, we see staged a mode of thinking that favors context over content, arrangement over elements. One consequence is that the object loses the privilege it would have if displayed in a gallery or museum. But a “Wall,” displayed as an object in its own right, also makes this demotion the point; and the “Walls,” taken together, become meaningful in a network of associations that includes the gallery or museum where they are shown. Fichou thus draws the spectator into his mode of thinking, which unsettles the relations between objects, their valuation, and their institutional location.

    Fig. 7. ‘9’. 2013.

    This art is structural in character. It involves the world not just as its frame or support but even quite literally as its material. Another case in point for Fichou is his painted drywall cube, an object made from what contains it. The paradox suggests a “space-between” inside and outside that conjures again a displaced habitus, this time in the specific sense given the term by sociologist Pierre Bourdieu. He writes, “The body is in the social world, but the social world is in the body…. The very structures of the world are present in the structures (or, to put it better, the cognitive schemes) that agents implement in order to understand it” (152). In this light, we might see the installation as a portrait—of the self-effacing artist but, also, of ourselves as viewers, standing in a space that contains us as it conditions how and what we see. Shrewdly, Fichou makes this conditioning the true object on display.

    The aim is, finally, ethical. Fichou works right where interventions are most needed in post-industrial societies like our own, which functionalize affective and aesthetic dimensions, turning us into consumers. He draws us away from passive contemplation into an active, investigative relation to aesthetic experience as also a worldly activity. This shift happens in the self’s relation to itself as mediated through its objects, its “artificial organs,” above all its audiovisual or digital extensions of the sensible, affect, self-consciousness.4 If such an “originary prostheticity” still entails displacement, loss, even alienation, for Fichou it also offers new creative possibilities, bound up with the individuation of our technical singularity.

    Footnotes

    1. For Jacques Derrida, this abstract universality or hidden positivity points to a “mystical foundation of authority” that allies belief with knowledge, with science, with a “technoscientific or tele-technological performance” (57).

    2. A video of “Primer” can be seen on YouTube.

    3. Malabou’s claim for what is essentially a deconstructive dynamic in Hegel’s thought is, of course, arguable. On this, see Derrida’s introduction to her book, where he concedes the usefulness of rereading Hegel, and German Idealism more broadly, in tension with its later critics. For another argument for this “return” (with a Lacanian twist), see Slavoj Zizek, 18–44; see also, Jean-Luc Nancy’s subtle rereading.

    4. I follow here, and below, the thought of philosopher Bernard Stiegler, clearly a kindred spirit for Fichou. See his Symbolic Misery, 10 passim.

    Works Cited

    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Pascalian Meditations. Trans. Richard Nice. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Faith and Knowledge.” Acts of Religion. Ed. Gil Anidjar. Trans. Samuel Weber. New York: Routledge, 2002. 42–101.
    • Malabou, Catherine. The Future of Hegel. Trans. Lisabeth During. New York: Routledge, 2005.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. Hegel: The Restlessness of the Negative. Trans. Jason Smith and Stephen Miller. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2002.
    • Stiegler, Bernard. Symbolic Misery. Trans. Barnaby Norman. London: Polity, 2014.
    • Žižek, Slavoj. Tarrying with the Negative. Durham: Duke UP, 1993.
  • Figures of Refusal

    Adam Haaga (bio)
    Memorial University of Newfoundland

    A review of Goh, Irving. The Reject: Community, Politics, and Religion after the Subject. New York: Fordham UP, 2014.

    Motivated in large part by Jean-Luc Nancy’s question, “who comes after the subject?,” Irving Goh’s book delivers a reply, provocatively arguing in favor of the reject, a figure resistant to the historically and politically contentious concept of the subject. Working among thinkers like Derrida, Deleuze, and Cixous, Goh systematically illuminates the suppressed figure of the reject from within current theories of the subject, attempting to drive “contemporary French thought beyond its existing horizons or limits” (23). To be clear, Goh’s proposed figure of the reject is not another concept among others vying to replace the subject, as if it were a substitutable concept. Goh instead prefers the phrase “figure of thought.” However Goh’s analysis balances and trembles between, on the one hand, the call for a decisive break with the subject as concept and, on the other, remaining dependent on it as material for rejection and auto-deconstuction from within the concept itself. Occasionally slipping into a conceptual frame that he intends to evade, Goh defines the reject as “a concept that really knows no boundaries” (180). The reject is Goh’s gesture toward what Nancy claims is “that to which one can no longer allot the grammar of the subject nor, therefore … allot the word ‘subject,’” (Nancy 6), a claim that he will articulate along the axes of discourse enumerated in the title.

    Curiously, though, Goh sees no need to address the subject head on. “I will not tarry with the subject here. Neither will I tarry with texts that continue to problematize the subject” (5). In the same collection of essays in which Nancy’s leading question occurs, Michel Henry rightly names Descartes and Kant the two most influential thinkers in the history of modern thought to have “given rigorous meaning to the concept of subject,” such that “any critique leveled against the subject that does not proceed by the light of the foundational analyses of the Meditations and the Critique of Pure Reason would be meaningless” (158). Goh’s decision to forgo the injunction is worthy of concern. We ought to be suspicious of this abstention, for the most we are offered as regards the contestable nature of the subject centers around a nod in the direction of the generic “Eurocentric subject,” as if this is adequately descriptive of the problem, citing feminist and postcolonial literature as having thoroughly rendered the subject “problematic.” The usual critiques raised against the subject are quickly tallied: assertions of certainty and/or presence, capacity to rationalize, affirmations of power, tendencies of appropriation, etc. Despite the veracity of such claims, in an absence of any detailed critique against the subject, Goh makes the cavalier leap ahead to an articulation of the reject as that figure capable of going “beyond” the subject (3).

    But even the degree to which Goh accomplishes this move “beyond” the subject, abandoning it completely, remains to be seen. One can certainly make a claim for the necessary reinscription of the subject within the figure of the reject amid the very attempt to overcome and evacuate the subject from its sovereign conceptuality. One could go further and radicalize the conceptuality of the subject by demonstrating the fundamental structures of auto-deconstruction already at work, exteriorizing the subject onto its auto-rejective other. In fact, my reluctance dovetails with my suspicion that what Goh names the reject only reiterates in form and content what Derrida articulated as the law of auto-deconstruction. It is incumbent upon Goh to either specify their affinity or delineate the manner in which the reject is at variance with auto-deconstruction, potentially improving upon it—neither of which is made explicit on my reading. For Goh will rely on an “animal vision” to deconstruct State politics, all the while insisting that the animal-reject eventually be incorporated and participate in the political discourse. Between the questions of gaze and response, on the part of the animal (reject) figure, Goh’s analysis echoes the gap already de-centering the subject in a hetero-affective play of violence, and the result is conspicuously auto-deconstructive.

    Throughout the book, the figure of the reject takes many forms, but is reducible to three: the passive, the active, and the auto-reject. Everyone is said to have experienced rejection (passive), to have rejected others (active), or to have turned a force around on oneself (auto-reject), as when one revises one’s thinking or takes a new course of action, rejecting older methods, strategies, and beliefs. The crucial turn of Goh’s analysis hinges on this third figure, the auto-reject, for it is not only said to sustain a critical distance to establish an ethics without the conceptual scaffolding of the subject, but also to prevent any return to the subject and the threat of absorption into the same.

    In a chapter on friendship and love (community), Goh raises Bataille as a thinker who comes close to thinking the reject. In Inner Experience Bataille critiques the Hegelian dialectic, renouncing absolute knowledge or the appropriation and determination of everything, “including the thought of community” (Goh 26). Communication and ecstasy, for Bataille, are the undoing and dissolution of the subject; in them “there is no longer subject-object, but a ‘yawning gap’ between the one and the other and, in the gap, the subject, the object are dissolved; there is passage, communication, but not from one to the other; the one and the other have lost their separate existence” (Bataille 59). Against the world of work, utility, and a will to eternity and lasting duration, sacrifice for Bataille serves as precisely that attempt to abandon and destroy these subjected ties in what he calls “unproductive expenditure,” characterizing a fusion, or loss of self in the experience of immanent continuity. The notion of an abstract negativity that is inoperative and unemployed in Hegel now situates and informs the role of death in sacrifice as unproductive expenditure for Bataille. But immanence, which sacrifice aims to restore, is a-phenomenal (non-experiential)—sacrifice cannot accomplish immanence, nor can it even hope to accomplish immanence for that would turn into a productive work, and thus a comedy affair.

    Ultimately, Bataille’s dissolution of the subject is not enough for Goh’s figure of the reject, for Nancy will expose the tendency in Bataille to view the death of the other as simultaneously both a negation and expenditure without reserve as well as resisting that immanence at the risk of putting death to work toward the creation of community. To paraphrase, Bataille was beleaguered by his own excess, for a kernel of working productivity haunted even his thinking of sacrifice. At the moment when Bataille thinks an abstract (unemployed) negativity has resisted the Hegelian system, Nancy asks whether Bataille does not in turn employ this very negativity in sacrifice as the communal project.

    Goh adopts Nancy’s position—“thought of community does not depend on such apocalyptic messianism as a necessary condition”—for as he argues, there is always already community before “the teleologic quests for communitarian fusion, communion, closed finality or identity” (27). The figure of the reject will therefore obtain argumentative force in Nancy’s désoeuvrement or unworking, a disruptive suspension of all subjective work or project aiming at the identifiable, definable, or representable community. On Goh’s terms the subject fails as a philosophical construct to help us reject these values and subject-positions, and thus offers the reject as a strong figure to advance political justice.

    One line of critique that Goh will take concerns network-centric friendship and capitalist tele-technologies. Goh is intent upon unworking the impulse to conceive of friendship and community as inclusive, that is to say, social appropriation via creating links and building networks, by revealing the reject as integral to the very notion of community—i.e. that community has always consisted of those who have no part in (e.g. Rancière’s sans part) or wish to stand apart from (reject) that community. As Derrida writes, every friend at some point desires an “untimely being-alone” (Politics 55). By existing in contradiction to, yet concurrent with and within a capitalist logic of community, the figure of the reject refuses to operate in conjunction with that logic, threatening to disrupt and displace any common notion of friendship.

    Goh will remind us, following Derrida’s Politics of Friendship, of the other who is yet to come, the one who arrives from the future. However, he is equally quick to add that “there is always also the other who does not want to arrive.” He continues, “As rejects in or before friendship, each and every one of us will have the right to refuse to respond, or even the right to walk away, silently, without explanation, and there will be neither rapprochement nor reproach” (46). It is in this sense that we may begin to think beyond an ethics of recognition, turning on its head a certain moralistic compulsion to “view” the other (and in turn, be viewed).

    The question of visibility returns to the fore in Goh’s reading of Cixous’s “messianic texts.” Within these texts, Goh argues, we primarily secure for ourselves the opportunity to critique, reject, and thus “discredit the concept of sovereignty” (197) from the viewpoint of certain figures that escape or sidestep the surveillance of the political spectrum. But in terms of where we are to locate such a figure, Goh has recourse to the animal that curiously inhabits religion without occupying it: “the thought of animals is at the heart of the question of religion;” “without animals, religion or religious experience will not have seen itself through” (134, 136). Following Cixous, Goh argues for a reading of religious texts from a point of view that occurs within religion but without falling under its circumspective concern (to use Heidegger’s language). The political upshot to this animal vision is that it has the “potentiality to leave all forms of politics predicated on fraternity and alliance or friendship … suspended, undecided, or undecidable” (196). The intention is laudable; however, Goh leaves himself open to critique precisely in his moment of privileging: when he puts the animal mode of vision at a political advantage over the state apparatus. Certainly the animal inhabits a space that “escape[s] the gaze and capture of politics” (203). Or more keenly, it is the animal’s own vision of the human, “this bottomless gaze offer[ed] to my sight,” as Derrida puts it, that escapes the political gaze (Animal 12). And Goh is right to augment this “escape” by insisting that any “becoming-animal must be vigilant to auto-reject any such desire … for an outside” (204). He names this place of escape an “adjacent space” (205). But are we not obligated to interrogate this shift in viewing power between State surveillance and animal vision? Essentially, what we obtain with Goh’s “becoming-animal” is a seeing-without-being-seen that cannot help but reinstitute a desire for political “self-consciousness.” Although never transpiring into a havingbecome-animal, becoming-animal for Goh remains watchful and is on the look-out for watchfulness itself —“the State’s surveillance apparatuses” —while escaping the gaze of that watchful entity, slipping toward a space of uncertainty, a blind spot (blind to the state-order surveillance) (212).

    Thus, one may detect in Goh’s rejection of sovereign surveillance a strand of thought that secretly hijacks back into its sphere of influence the control of visibility—the privilege and power that accompanies the capacity to see while remaining invisible. What Goh manages to omit is that, much like the “written text that keeps watch over [Derrida’s] discourse” —unable to make out, without certain “oral specifications,” the letters “e” or “a” (I am of course speaking of différe(a)nce) —the auto-rejective potential of the animal’s gaze too harbors its own undecidability as it auto-deconstructively tends toward the invisible (Margins 4). For how does one “keep watch”? Is the “watchful” a threatening excess of power, dominant and oppressive, or is it a protective “looking after”? This very “undecidable” is incontestably not a trivial matter, and it calls for a certain keeping watch of our own part.

    Three issues become imminently worrisome to me. First, in shifting the emphasis of vision from the state (anthropocentric, rational, politics of appropriation) to the animal (marginal, rejected, deterritorialized), Goh has merely reiterated a possibility that already lies at the heart of state politics—that power (and specifically vision) is auto-deconstructive. Goh’s notion of the auto-reject is conspicuously analogous with Derrida’s notion of auto-deconstruction, without however holding fast to the necessity of the undecidable. For Derrida will speak of a certain “economy of violence”—i.e., any discourse approaching justice can only do so by “acknowledging and practicing the violence within it” (Writing 117). There is no position in this “economy of violence” from which a watchful entity can be determined as benevolent or oppressive. As Derrida writes: “If light is the element of violence, one must combat light with a certain other light .… This vigilance is a violence chosen as the least violence by a philosophy which takes history, that is, finitude, seriously” (Writing 117). The distinction between State surveillance and the vigilance of the becoming-animal (or the auto-rejective potential of the animal reject) thus echoes what Derrida names a “preethical violence,” an irreducible alterity constituting an indeterminate act of violence from which no side of history can legitimate (Writing 128). Goh comes nearest to conceding this necessary undecidable in an analysis of the Occupy movement, wherein he speaks of the “countersovereign force of the voyou” or the rogue figure (187). However, vacillating between the two reject figures of the animal and the voyou—the one that escapes the political gaze, expelled to the margins, and the other which is entirely visible having “appropriated” public territory—Goh will inadvertently carry out in his analysis the necessary double bind inherent in Derrida’s economy of violence without however making this move explicit.

    Secondly, when Goh inclines toward “a future where animals are no longer excluded or rejected from the domain of religious” or political discourse, one wonders how Goh himself conceives the animal reject as a figure of thought precisely when they are “no longer … rejected” (138, my emphasis). In the chapter on friendship and love, Goh routinely stresses the right of the friend to “refuse” friendship, to “walk away, silently, without explanation” (46). In a surprising turn of argument though, Goh also expresses the hope that reject figures will eventually come to be embraced as heterogeneous members of political discourse. A limit is thus constructed around the question of response, a question that is marked by the distinction who can (or cannot) respond and who refuses to respond (but is otherwise capable). In other words, can the animal, in being unable to respond (as per the tradition since Aristotle—e.g., “animal rights” has always been a matter of concern for “human legislation”), actively reject anthropocentric ideologies? Clearly not—and yet, the question of animal response is suspended and preserved in a structure of undecidability. It is thus left to the passive- and auto-rejective potential sheltered within the animal’s purported lack of response to upend and destabilize political injustice.

    And this brings me to my third issue, connecting my first two points to Nancy’s question that lies at the heart of Goh’s project (“Who comes after the subject?”). In reading Derrida’s The Animal That Therefore I Am do we not cross an intersection of gaze and response, precisely where it becomes a matter for Derrida of how to follow the animal, of being after the animal, as if in a chase, tracing its tracks, “following the traces of this wholly other they call ‘animal’” (Animal 14 )? “To follow and to be after will not only be the question,” but the question of that very question, “that which begins wondering what to respond means” (10). But Derrida does not exclude the possibility that the autobiographical animal (in this instance, Derrida himself) is both follower and followed, at once after the animal other and after himself as animal. And how would the animal respond if Derrida ever caught up with the animal? Because there is nothing active in the inability to respond, which is attributed to some animals, the question is redirected to “the passion of the animal,” to the passivity with which some animals endure their silence, unable to speak in their own name, subjected to an anthropological decision to speak on their behalf. The animal gaze arrives as if from the outside, interrupting the dominant practice (since Aristotle even) that sets the human apart from the animal, throwing the question of response back on the one who supposedly has the capacity for logos. For the inability to respond does not mark a privative attribute accorded to the animal, but rather deprives the human of any animal response. In actively denying the animal the capacity to speak, the human is condemned to suffer the animal gaze, an interrogative vision composed in the silence of a non-response, imposing a necessary suspension in the order of difference, requiring the one to be after the other.

    Is it possible then to recast Goh’s project in light of the terms set forth in The Animal That Therefore I am? I am suggesting that the question “who comes after the subject?” be reframed not in terms of who or what could possibly replace the subject. On the contrary, Goh’s argument makes a lot more sense if we understand that the human-subject is after the animal-reject—and after itself as animal-reject—and discovers itself when, in pursuit of that figure which refuses the subject any determinate response, the mode of auto-deconstruction reveals that a figure of the reject internally fractures the subject, always and already displacing and destabilizing its sovereign moment. When the subject actively rejects the animal, denying it language to the point that the animal passively refuses intelligible response, it falls on the auto-rejective potential of the becoming-animal—which is situated strangely and “all-too-humanly” in a “zone of proximity” to the animal itself—to effect a critique of state politics, and Goh struggles interminably to articulate this limit.

    But to his credit, I am wont to think that this struggle was precisely Goh’s success. In the heart of his discussion of friendship, Goh communicates a sentiment to which I am entirely amenable. Courageously attempting to think the unpopular—failure—Goh writes,

    [O]ne must dare to think that love does not fully succeed in the crossing toward friendship. One must dare to think that love will fail friendship, precisely in that crossing. With love, there is the chance that there will be no deliverance to a future friendship. (53)

    It is the mark of a rigorous thinker to always keep in mind the limit. Minding limits, thinking through the limit, giving oneself to think despite one’s limitation; these are ways in which we radicalize politics and contemporary thought. And I deeply appreciate Goh’s courage to think beyond the limits of the subject. But limits are tricky to negotiate. Despite Goh’s adamant insistence on the non-conceptualizability of the reject, one could easily flout his precaution in a hurried reading and be tempted to worry that the reject in fact falls into the bin of useful concepts for political theory and philosophic discourse—yet another term that we can employ and dispense with in accordance with the demands of our philosophic schemata. But upon further reflection, it seems more the case that the reject “figures” as a name, effect, or phenomenon of experience composed in deconstruction’s unapologetic aftermath; that, in fact, the reject does not do any added work to replace, or come (discursively) after the subject, but offers new language for the hetero-affectivity already at play within the subject. As I read it, the reject stands as a recasting and new branding of the marquee we have hitherto known as auto-deconstruction. It is fruitless to seek reprieve from the authority of the subject in another concept. But the reject will deliver positive justice if it awakens the subject to its disseminative labor and the experience of having already been thrown—“jected”—into this world: the subject re-jected.

    Works Cited

    • Bataille, Georges. Inner Experience. Trans. Leslie Anne Boldt. New York: SUNY P, 1988.
    • Cadava, Eduardo, Peter Connor, and Jean-Luc Nancy, eds. Who Comes After the Subject? New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • Derrida, Jacques. The Animal That Therefore I Am. Trans. David Wills. New York: Fordham UP, 2008.
    • ———. Margins of Philosophy. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1982.
    • ———. The Politics of Friendship. Trans. George Collins. New York: Verso, 2005.
    • ———. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978.
    • Henry, Michel. “The Critique of the Subject.” Who Comes After the Subject? 157–166.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. “Introduction.” Who Comes After the Subject? 1–8.
  • Low Theory for the End of Pre-History

    Diletta De Cristofaro (bio)
    University of Birmingham

    A review of Wark, McKenzie. Molecular Red: Theory for the Anthropocene. London: Verso, 2016. Print.

    McKenzie Wark’s Molecular Red is a provocative call for new critical theory – or “new-old” (Wark xii), given its roots in marginalized strands of the Marxist tradition – for the age of the Anthropocene. The “Anthropocene” is a “term widely used since its coining by Paul Crutzen and Eugene Stoermer in 2000 to denote the present time interval, in which many geologically significant conditions and processes are profoundly altered by human activities” (“What Is the ‘Anthropocene’?”). Although the term has not yet been formalized as an official geological epoch, the Anthropocene Working Group —tasked with developing a proposal for such formalization to be considered by the International Commission on Stratigraphy —deems the concept as “geologically real. The phenomenon is of sufficient scale to be considered as part of the International Chronostratigraphic Chart, more commonly known as the Geological Time Scale” (“Media Note”). Although Wark is wary of the term “Anthropocene,” his book is informed by the realization that the planet has entered a new period of geological time and, thus, that we need new conceptualizations of the relationship between humans and nature. We are now at a conjuncture that Wark defines as the “end of pre-history,” when mankind comes to understand that “the God who still hid in the worldview of an ecology that was self-correcting, self-balancing and self-healing —is dead” (xii).

    Drawing on Marx’s notion of the metabolic rift, that is, the rift between production and nature, Wark identifies the Anthropocene as “a series of metabolic rifts, where one molecule after another is extracted by labor and technique to make things for humans, but the waste products don’t return so that the cycle can renew itself” (xiv). A key and global metabolic rift in the age of the Anthropocene is what Wark, referring ironically to various liberation movements of the past three centuries, calls the “Carbon Liberation Front”: “carbon bound within the earth becomes scarce, and liberated carbon pushes the climate into the red zone” (xv). Wark thus calls for a “low theory,” attentive to the “molecular” order – a notion Wark borrows from Felix Guattari (xvi). In the era of techno-science, in which “life itself has been disaggregated and brought under forms of molecular control,” a molecular theory implies the emphasis on subtle and hidden processes, the flows and becomings of everyday life and, in particular, of labor (151). Wark’s objective in Molecular Red is to suggest ways to reorganize knowledge, in order to construct a “labor perspective on the historical tasks of our time” —addressing the disastrous effects of the Carbon Liberation Front (xx).

    At a conjuncture in which apocalyptic pronouncements over climate change are in the news daily, accompanied by equally troubling political and corporate refusals to acknowledge the reality of the dangers, it is no surprise that interest in the Anthropocene is on the rise within the academy and beyond. Broadly speaking, academic explorations of the Anthropocene outside of the scientific realm can be divided into three categories. One, books that consider cultural responses to the Anthropocene, such as Adam Trexler’s Anthropocene Fictions: The Novel in a Time of Climate Change and Sam Solnick’s Poetry and the Anthropocene: Ecology, Biology and Technology in Contemporary British and Irish Poetry. Two, studies that problematize the concept of nature, such as Jamie Lorimer’s Wildlife in the Anthropocene: Conservation after Nature and Timothy Morton’s studies, from Ecology without Nature to Hyperobjects: Philosophy and Ecology after the End of the World. Three, books that interrogate the notion of the Anthropocene itself, together with its political, ethical, and philosophical implications, such as Clive Hamilton, Christophe Bonneuil, and François Gemenne’s The Anthropocene and the Global Environmental Crisis: Rethinking Modernity in a New Epoch and Frank Biermann’s Earth System Governance: World Politics in the Anthropocene. Wark’s intervention in the field compellingly combines these three strands by considering science fiction (both Soviet and American); the nexus between nature and the human, especially through human labor; and, most importantly, philosophical perspectives that can be helpful in laying the foundations of a low theory for the Anthropocene.

    To suggest ways to reorganize knowledge for the new epoch, Molecular Red’s first part, titled “Labor and Nature,” turns to Alexander Bogdanov and Andrey Platonov, both largely ignored Marxist thinkers. To Wark, Bogdanov’s views are useful in our current predicament for three reasons. Firstly, Wark goes back to Bogdanov because his science fiction – Red Star (1908) and The Engineer Menni (1913) – anticipates the Carbon Liberation Front and climate change. Secondly, combining Marx and the theories of the philosopher-scientist Ernst Mach, Bogdanov elaborates his own “worldview,” empirio-monism, which “frees our species-being from external a priori forms” by articulating a definition of nature that is attuned to the labor point of view (28). Nature, to Bogdanov, is simply “that which labor encounters;” the “physical world as we know it cannot be thought as preceding our labors upon it” (4, 26). This deeply resonates with the Anthropocene era, which is, in Wark’s terms, the end of pre-history, when humans realize the imbrication between their labor and nature. Thirdly, Bogdanov’s “tektology, a new way of organizing knowledge,” and his proletkult, “a new practice of culture,” are “key steps toward the practice of a molecular red knowledge of the kind we need today” (13). Tektology is a “metaphoric machine,” as it works through substitution, that is, the application of processes and understandings used in certain fields to other fields (49). Tektology is a low theory of the kind Wark calls for in the Anthropocene because it is not about creating theoretical systems of the molar, abstract order: “There’s no prior unity or ultimate synthesis” (44) to which tektology tends. Rather, tektology is about collaborating collectively to organize knowledge that is always materially and historically grounded in labor’s experiences – what Wark, recalling Michel Foucault’s discourses of power/knowledge, terms “practices of laboring/knowing” (13). This collective collaboration across disciplines is what is required to address Anthropogenic emergencies. Hardly by chance, Wark mentions climate science, “an evolution from discrete fields and technologies to a global climate knowledge infrastructure” (26), as an example of tektology.

    Platonov emerges out of Proletkult, that “collaborative production of art, culture, even science, by and for the proletariat itself” (38). To Wark, the importance of Platonov’s work for our times is twofold. Firstly, Platonov’s anti-novellas refine the labor point of view as the point of view of comrades. “Living things are each other’s comrades” because they share life and struggle in the face of a nature which is “recalcitrant, enervating, unpredictable…. It has no necessary tendency to stability or order, no bias towards homeostasis. Its history is a history of metabolic rifts,” thus resonating with nature in the Anthropocene (106–107, 82). Secondly, “Platonov’s détournement of the socialist realism of the 1930s” can serve as guide to challenge the capitalist realism that dominates the twenty-first century, namely, the idea that there is no alternative to the current system (66). In particular, in “Factory of Literature” (1926), Platonov identifies writing from the labor point of view as a form of collective labor – “a distributed network of specialized text-filtering centers with central nodes for the final synthesis of literary works” – that anticipates a variety of forms of late-twentieth-century and twenty-first-century cultural production, including the Internet (Wark 167).

    “Science and Utopia,” Molecular Red’s second part, builds on the key elements of the first part – the labor point of view on nature, empirio-monism, tektology and proletkult – by imaginatively and persuasively pairing Bogdanov and Platonov with more recent thinkers who work at the intersection of culture and science. In particular, Wark is interested in those who have been critical of capitalist realism’s “California Ideology,” a “feral cross between cyber-culture and counter-culture, where the disruptive power of ‘tech’ is supposed to power the freeing of any and every resource for commodification” (118). First, Wark turns to Donna Haraway, or rather, “Cyborg Haraway,” Wark’s tektological assemblage of Haraway’s work together with the work of her sources (Paul Feyerabend), her colleagues (Karen Barad), and her students (Paul Edwards).

    Via Feyerabend, Wark reiterates the importance of empirio-monism as a practice of low, rather than high, theory, a “comradely effort at collaboration through experimental substitution between particular efforts” which rejects ultimate authority for any discipline and theory (130). Through her theorization of the cyborg, Haraway’s work not only queers labor and re-orients it through her feminist standpoint, but also serves to emphasize how, in the age of techno-science, the labor point of view cannot but include nonhuman actors. Haraway, writes Wark, “begins what can only be a collaborative project for a new international – one not just of labouring men, but of all the stuttering cyborgs stuck in reified relations not of their making” (149). Barad’s notion of the apparatus adds another piece to the puzzle of the labor, or rather cyborg, point of view in the twenty-first century by drawing attention to the forces of production of knowledge. An apparatus is “techne, a media” that produces knowledge by constructing a “cut,” a distinction, between object and subject, nature and labor (159). Edwards applies the notion of apparatus to the knowledge infrastructure required in the tektology that is climate science: “The study of climate called into being a whole infrastructure of discrete apparatuses, of distinctive cuts,” gesturing towards “what a comradely, cooperative science could be” (167). “Cyborg Haraway” ultimately allows Wark to challenge a typical “romantic left” response to the Anthropocene, which consists in a “rejection of techno-modernity on a claim to something prior to or outside of it: on being, on nature, on poetry, on the body, on the human, or on communism as event or leap” (180). This regression to nature is not only a fantasy – “We are cyborgs, making a cyborg planet with cyborg weather . . . . It’s a de-natured nature without ecology” – but rejecting techno-science ultimately entails rejecting the means of knowing and understanding climate change (180).

    Molecular Red finally turns to Kim Stanley Robinson’s science fiction as an example of proletkult in the age of techno-science. Wark’s fascinating discussion of Robinson’s Mars Trilogy (1993–96) reads the texts as theoretical works that address the era of the Carbon Liberation Front by rejecting both capitalist realism and capitalist romance, namely, the belief that the market will take care of everything as it is a self-balancing and self-correcting natural order. Wark is particularly interested in the trilogy’s utopian response to the Anthropocene, a response embodied in the emergence of a praxis of collective labor out of ideological clashes, as well as in an understanding of revolution as “the accumulation of minor, even molecular, elements of a new way of life and their negotiation with each other” (196). In other words, the utopian dimension of Robinson’s Mars Trilogy is a matter of tektology, a “meta-utopia . . . . made of many utopias . . . but not a synthesis of them. It stages the conflicts; it respects their incommensurability” (211). By “dispens[ing] with the invisible hand, and with homeostatic ecology as a basic metaphor,” Robinson’s texts also gesture towards the need for new metaphors, new language (209). It is to this issue that Molecular Red’s conclusion turns.

    Reflecting on the etymology of Anthropocene (anthropos, man, and kainos, “that which is not just a new unit of time but a new quality or form”), Wark writes that he is tempted to reject the term: “I want a name for what the kainos ought to be, not what it is. And in any case, it’s too anthropocentric” (221, 222). But he then considers how Anthropocene is a “brilliant hack,” which “introduces the labor point of view – in the broadest possible sense – into geology” (223). Thus, with a tektological gesture, Wark concludes that “Perhaps the challenge is then to find analogous but different ways to hack other specialized domains of knowledge, to orient them to the situation and the tasks at hand. Let’s invent new metaphors!” (223).

    By considering an imaginative selection of thinkers and by creating a productive dialogue between them, Wark’s Molecular Red is a fascinating exercise in tektological assemblage in itself. There are two connected aspects, both related to praxis, that I would have liked Wark to discuss further. Firstly, the idea of meta-utopia, which is a promising critical tool to negotiate and combine different visions of the future, is barely sketched in Molecular Red. It would have been interesting to produce a tektological encounter between Robinson’s meta-utopian writings and theorizations of the notion of utopia, especially those, like Tom Moylan’s concept of critical utopia or Ruth Levitas’s conceptualization of utopia as method rather than dream, that are wary of normative utopian visions. Secondly, while Wark acknowledges that “Organizing praxis calls for a theory of history, a language of goals and objectives, even if only a provisional one. Praxis needs a conceptual space which relates knowable pasts to possible futures” (200), Molecular Red lacks a distinct theory of history. The Anthropocene is, of course, a temporal notion and deep time is usually central to discussions of the new era. Wark alludes to the temporal aspects of the Anthropocene by identifying it as the “end of pre-history,” but what comes after this end is not clear. One can only assume that, after the end of pre-history, history proper begins but the implications of this shift are never fleshed out. This reluctance could be related to Wark’s call for a low theory and his rejection of normative and prescriptive visions: Molecular Red outlines a “low theory approach, moving between scientific knowledges, not a high theory flying high as a drone above to adjudicate, legislate, or police them” (121). Thus, as he puts it, the theory of history needed by praxis “won’t be a teleology. History has no plan. There is no horizon to orient toward, no line from present to future” (200). However, the idea of an “end of prehistory” does outline a teleology, and Molecular Red would have benefited from a clearer negotiation of this tension, as well as from the exploration of the relationship between a “provisional” theory of history, which the book does not provide, and the meta-utopian openness to a variety of possible futures.

    Nevertheless, with his rejection of theoretical practices that “adjudicate, legislate, or police,” it is hardly surprising that Wark refuses to be more specific and prescriptive in articulating the concrete implications of his molecular red theory, especially the ways in which this could be applied to address Anthropogenic emergencies. To Wark, it is the task of collective labor to experiment, through comradely negotiation, with the praxis of low theory. Molecular Red thus concludes with a call, addressed to a “Cyborg International” that embodies the labor point of view in the twenty-first century, for these comradely experimentations: “We all know this civilization can’t last. Let’s make another” (225).

    Works Cited

    • “Media Note: Anthropocene Working Group (AWG).” University of Leicester. Web. 11 Feb. 2017. Levitas, Ruth. Utopia as Method: The Imaginary Reconstitution of Society. Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2013.
    • Moylan, Tom. Demand the Impossible: Science Fiction and the Utopian Imagination. New York: Methuen, 1986.
    • Wark, McKenzie. Molecular Red: Theory for the Anthropocene. London: Verso, 2016. Print.
    • What Is the ‘Anthropocene’? – Current Definition and Status.” Subcommission on Quaternary Stratigraphy. Web. 11 Feb. 2017.
  • Secular Stagnation: Fear of a Non-Reproductive Future

    Melinda Cooper (bio)
    University of Sydney

    Abstract

    In the wake of the global financial crisis, a number of high profile economists have sought to revive Alvin Hansen’s Depression-era theory of “secular stagnation” to account for the stagnant tendencies in the American economy, citing Japan as a cautionary tale of combined demographic and economic decline. Following Hansen, it is argued that the long-term stagnation of the world economy can be attributed to a failure of the reproductive will, made manifest in declining birth rates and ageing populations. Although the causal connections between population and price trends are controversial even among mainstream demographers and economists, such arguments date back to the origins of political economy and appear to magically resurface with each major episode of crisis. If the crisis is inflationary, it tends to be ascribed to overpopulation; if it is deflationary, we find a corresponding concern with slowing birth rates. This article seeks to understand the durability of the demographic theory of crisis by examining the punitive and restorative work it performs in periods of capitalist restructuring.

    For many years, Japan has served as a cautionary tale to other debt-fueled economies around the world. The debt-deflationary spiral that engulfed the Japanese economy in the 1990s was for a long time seen as exceptional, attributed to some deep fault-line in its historical development or some intrinsic weirdness of the Japanese national character. Following the wave of competitive and envious commentary that flourished in the American business press of the 1980s, the case of Japan’s protracted downturn after 1990 was variously analysed with schadenfreude or bemused curiosity, and understood as the consequence of uniquely Japanese perversions. The Japanese state had been too paternalistic all along. Its people had been infantilized by lifelong job security and indulgent government spending. Once feared as mindlessly over-productive, Japanese workers were now dismissed as obsessively deferential, over-regimented, and robotic.

    In both the Japanese and American literature, commentary on Japan’s so-called Lost Decade very quickly became inseparable from a reflection on the peculiar demographic trends affecting the country. Relative to the post-war years of accelerated demographic growth, the Japanese population is rapidly aging and declining, combining some of the lowest birth rates in the world with unusually long life expectancy. Japanese women today are less likely to marry than in the recent past and are having fewer children. The secondary literature on the Japanese economic situation has very rapidly conflated these two phenomena of economic stagnation and slowing population growth. Perhaps stagnation was exacerbated or even caused by falling birth rates? Perhaps this signalled a deeper malaise in the reproductive life of the nation, a literal failure to reproduce the future? Or a mortgaging of the future via the burden of unsustainable public debt? Michael Zielenziger’s Shutting Out the Sun: How Japan Created its Own Lost Generation, an early and influential example of this genre, reflects that “the most ominous aspect of Japan’s stagnation” is the pervasive crisis of confidence that has affected its people. This distress, he confidently asserts, “is reflected in Japan’s plummeting birthrate,” which is in turn made manifest in various diversions from reproductive sexuality, ranging from womb-striking women to infantilized adolescent men who never leave home and shun the active role in sex (9). The conundrum of economic stagnation has generated a seemingly inexhaustible literature on the failures of reproductive sex in contemporary Japan,1 and inversely, a triumphant literature on America’s comparative success in maintaining both vigorous birth rates and a dynamic economy.

    But while this narrative has not diminished in recent years, the certainty that it is somehow unique to Japan has retreated. The protracted stagnation that has beset the American economy in the wake of the global financial crisis – despite several rounds of Quantitative Easing and near-zero interest rates – has compelled even mainstream American economists to ask the unthinkable. Is America becoming the next Japan? Is it conceivable that America might be following Japan, not only down the pathway toward economic stagnation but also toward some deeper demographic malaise that could see population growth falter in the years ahead? Although certainly not dramatic when compared to either Japan or Western Europe, recent figures suggest that the population growth rate in America has slowed down somewhat. Reflecting on this trend, the New York Times journalist Ross Douthat ventures that America has perhaps “lost its demographic edge” (“More Babies”). Beyond economic drivers, perhaps the deeper structural cause behind America’s protracted downturn and anemic growth rates can be found in a “broader cultural shift away from a child-centric understanding of romance and marriage” (“More Babies”). And as if to underscore that orientalist theories of non-Western perversion have always been linked, mirror-like, to fears of Western decadence, he goes on to accuse America of exporting this particular form of reproductive failure to the rest of world: “The retreat from child rearing is, at some level, a symptom of late-modern exhaustion – a decadence that first arose in the West but now haunts rich societies around the globe. It’s a spirit that privileges the present over the future, chooses stagnation over innovation, prefers what already exists over what might be” (“More Babies”). In short, the cause of America’s economic stagnation is ultimately to be found in a failure of reproductive sex.

    In the wake of the global financial crisis, this largely journalistic literature on population decline has achieved a certain academic respectability thanks to the revival of demographic theories of crisis popular in the 1930s. In a 2013 speech delivered at the International Monetary Fund (IMF), former Treasury Secretary Lawrence Summers suggested that America’s protracted economic slump could be explained by Alvin Hansen’s long forgotten theory of “secular stagnation,” which attributed America’s Depression-era woes to a dramatic drop in the birth rate (Summers, “Economic Forum”).2 Writing in the late 1930s, at a moment when America was plunging back into an unexpected recession, Hansen sought to theorize why the American economy continued to post such disappointing growth rates some ten years after the Wall Street crash, despite government efforts at pump-priming and interest rate reductions. What Americans were witnessing, he argued, was much more than a temporary fluctuation in the business cycle. Deprived of the external drivers that had fueled economic growth throughout the long nineteenth century – high birth rates, territorial expansion, and new inventions – the American economy had entered a period of “secular stagnation” that rendered it impervious to the usual tools of monetary stimulus. “Overwhelmingly significant” in this regard was “the profound change … in the rate of population growth” that was recorded in the 1930s (Hansen 1). The “drastic shift from rapid expansion to cessation of population growth” had irreversibly dampened consumption and was therefore a “basic cause” of America’s secular stagnation (Hansen 2). Hansen’s suggested solution to this state of affairs – like that of Lawrence Summers today – was ongoing fiscal stimulus beyond mere pump priming.3 Unless the government could be persuaded to permanently stimulate private investment through the use of sustained public spending programs, America was destined for a future of stunted growth. “This is the essence of secular stagnation – sick recoveries which die in their infancy and depressions which feed on themselves and leave a hard and seemingly immovable core of unemployment” (Hansen 4).

    Lawrence Summers’s secular stagnation thesis has enjoyed extraordinary success among orthodox macroeconomists who have otherwise been at a loss to explain America’s enduring economic woes. Mainstream economists who until recently were convinced that only (wage and price) inflation could be a problem and that monetary policy was sufficient for controlling it are now encroaching on the territory of heterodox post-Keynesian and Marxist scholars in their efforts to understand the magnitude of the current crisis.4 Summers’s secular stagnation paper has generated an enormous secondary literature (including a high-profile online debate with Ben Bernanke), variously seeking to confirm, qualify, or offer alternatives to Summers’s analysis of the causal relations at work. Most of this literature duly corroborates the importance of population in explaining America’s poor growth prospects5 . Summers himself does not dwell on the demographic issue – he appears to favor an ongoing program of fiscal stimulus (which may well boost population growth) to overt pronatalism. Yet his work has clearly relegitimized the crudest kind of bioeconomic thinking. Writing for the respectable Institute for New Economic Thinking, Coen Teulings and Jason Lu blame the contraceptive pill for precipitating long-term trends toward low-interest rates and secular stagnation. On the political right, the American Enterprise Institute’s in-house demographer, Nicholas Eberstadt, laments what he sees as a “global flight from the family,” pointing to its devastating economic effects in stagnant Japan, while the business media routinely identifies slowing birth rates as the prime cause of secular stagnation (Eberstadt). “Inflation rises with younger people entering the workforce, then wanes after they become most productive in their forties,” writes the popular economic forecaster Harry Dent; “deflation can set in when more people retire than enter the workforce …. Younger people drive innovation cycles, older ones don’t (there are more adult diaper sales in Japan today than sales of baby diapers!)” (Dent 1). This is the reason we may never recover, headlines Time Magazine, in a lengthy feature on the subject (Davidson).

    The equation between inflation and rising birthrates, on the one hand, and between deflation and aging populations, on the other, is contested even among mainstream demographers and economists.6 Indeed, the credibility of the argument from population is not infrequently called into question by the very theorists who espouse it (thus, aside from the issue of demographic decline, Lawrence Summers offers a plausible account of the role of rising wage and wealth inequality in generating the fault-lines of the current crisis). Yet the equation persists, and appears to magically reappear with every major episode of inflation or deflation, suggesting the need for some deeper political and affective explanation of its staying power. This article seeks to understand the durability of the demographic theory of crisis by examining the work it performs in periods of capitalist restructuring. The theory, I suggest, operates as much through elision and displacement as positive argument, actively working to override the distributional dimension of crisis in favor of a classless narrative of generational conflict or loss. A process of debt deflation that was generated and entrenched by rising wage and wealth inequalities is transposed into the unified arithmetic of national demographic decline and denounced as a crisis of reproduction, common to all classes, but personified in various figures of un(re)productive surplus, from sterile women to pampered pensioners. If people aren’t consuming enough, this has nothing to do with the maldistribution of wealth and income, but can be blamed on the fact that they aren’t having enough children. If profitable businesses are failing to engage in new capital investment, this has nothing to do with their rising share of the national income and its disabling effects on consumption; it is simply that businesses have no incentive to invest in a diminishing working-age population and a depopulated consumer market.

    It is important to stress that secular stagnation theory comes from the political left and not the right, if by “left” we simply mean favorable to expansionary fiscal policy and labor immigration. Unlike the more nativist expressions of underpopulation thinking that can be found on the right, the exponents of secular stagnation theory call for an increase in state deficit spending and a relaxation of migration controls as necessary stimuli to renewed growth.7 Yet their anti-austerity politics goes hand in hand with a rigorously familial, reproductive vision of the economic future. Beyond mere austerity, the notion that secular stagnation is ultimately caused by dwindling birthrates serves to deflect critique from the fact of inequality and prescribes reproductive nationalism as the natural solution to the insecurities of economic life.

    Secular Stagnation: The Challenge to Macroeconomics

    Almost a decade after the onset of the Great Recession, conventional macroeconomics is struggling to explain the unusually weak state of the American economy. The response to the crisis included some of the most aggressive monetary policies ever undertaken by the Federal Reserve and impressive although short-lived efforts at fiscal stimulus on the part of the Treasury. Central banks around the world were shocked into action by the failure of Lehman Brothers in the autumn of 2008. Fearing a collapse of the entire financial system, Congress responded to this event by establishing the Troubled Asset Relief Program, or TARP, which allowed the Treasury to purchase or insure over $400 billion in “troubled assets” on the balance sheets of financial institutions, while the Federal Reserve slashed interest rates to near-zero, where they have remained ever since. But constrained in what it could now do using the conventional instrument of short-term interest-rate manipulation, the Fed almost immediately embarked on a more unconventional set of operations designed to stabilize the balance sheets of banks and financial institutions, with the ultimate aim of restimulating lending. Between 2009 and 2012, it undertook three rounds of Quantitative Easing, involving mass purchases of long-term assets such as mortgage-backed securities and Treasury Bonds. These and other unconventional monetary policies transferred securities from banks and financial institutions to the Federal Reserve, expanding its balance sheet from around $850 billion to a monumental $4.4 trillion in the space of a few years. In the meantime, despite stiff opposition from Republicans and some Democrats, the Obama administration managed to enact at least some of its proposed fiscal stimulus measures, including an increase in unemployment benefits and tax cuts to low and middle income households.

    Yet despite initial signs of recovery, the current state of the American economy is disconcerting. GDP growth has averaged around 2% since the end of the Great Recession, lower than the post-war average of 3% and well below the vigorous rebound rates expected after most recessions. Unemployment remains higher than it was prior to the financial crisis, and much of the registered improvement can be accounted for by workers who have given up seeking employment altogether. The Fed’s aggressive monetary policy appears to have had a paradoxical effect on investment behavior: while corporate profits are at a post-World War II high, businesses are refusing to embark on the sort of new capital investment that might increase job opportunities or bolster wage growth. Instead they are parking their savings in low-risk assets such as Treasury Bonds or engaging in short-term profit-boosting activities such as share buybacks. In defiance of the conventional macroeconomic wisdom, companies are hesitating to invest despite near zero interest rates and vigorous profits. America in fact appears to have entered a strange world of inverted macroeconomic logic very similar to that experienced by Japan over the last few decades, where profitable corporations have for some time refused to take on new debt or engage in new capital investment despite the availability of virtually free credit.

    Revising Irving Fisher’s debt-deflation theory of the Great Depression, Richard Koo proposes the more comprehensive concept of “balance sheet recession” to explain the apparent anomaly of the post-crisis American and Japanese economies. Such recessions, he argues, typically occur in the aftermath of asset-price booms sustained by enormous levels of private indebtedness (The Escape 10–13). When the value of these assets plummets, households and corporations are left underwater, saddled with outsized debts on evaporated collateral. In such a situation, borrowers will do everything in their power to deleverage or pay off debt, even if they continue to rake in enormous profits. Thus a corporation that looks healthy in terms of cash flow may be suffering from hidden balance sheet liabilities that render it insolvent. When this is the case, even zero-interest rates will be insufficient to persuade a household or business to take on new debt or embark on new investment, since all income flow is channeled toward the task of paying down debt. Balance sheet recessions are relatively impervious to traditional macroeconomic policies such as monetary accommodation and short-term fiscal stimulus. Quantitative easing, which is designed to boost money creation on the part of banks and thus expand credit, will instead produce a build-up of reserves on banks’ balance sheets, since no one can be persuaded to borrow. Short-term fiscal stimulus will simply be used to pay down debt. Although rational on an individual level, the cumulative effect of multiple borrowers opting to deleverage produces a self-reinforcing “fallacy of composition,” which extinguishes all sources of demand (15). The theory of balance-sheet recession, Koo argues, can also account for the Great Depression: much like the subprime crisis of 2007, the Wall Street Crash of 1929 occurred in the aftermath of an enormous buildup of private credit and inflated asset prices; when these asset prices collapsed, corporations went into protective mode, opting to deleverage en masse rather than risk new debt-financed investment (17). In each instance—America during the Great Depression, America and Europe today, Japan after 1990—balance sheet recession prompted a radical deleveraging of the corporate sector and a faltering of new capital investment, leading to the phenomenon known as “secular stagnation.”

    Like Irving Fisher before him, Koo has little to say about the role of wages in the debt deflationary process. Yet even among mainstream economists, there is a growing recognition that falling wage shares in national income before and after the crisis were critical in creating the phenomenon of enduring stagnation, both today and in the Great Depression (Rajan). Thus the historian James Livingston demonstrates that, contrary to the conventional wisdom – inherited from Milton Friedman and Anna Schwartz, and recently endorsed by Ben Bernanke (“Remarks”) – that the Great Depression was triggered by the Fed and its failure to lower real interest rates, wage stagnation was in fact primarily responsible for the prolonged debt deflation of the 1930s. Livingston traces this trend back to the 1920s, when corporations dramatically enlarged their share of profits and national income with respect to labor. The stagnation of wage growth, he notes, occurred at precisely the moment when consumer spending was beginning to serve as the new fulcrum of economic growth, a necessary demand counterpart to industrial mass production (37–38). Flush with rising profits but short on outlets for new capital investment, businesses instead channeled their surplus revenue into financial assets such as stocks and securities, while household consumption was for a short time sustained in the face of falling wages by the extension of consumer credit. But with the collapse of the real estate and consumer credit markets in 1926, followed by the stock market crash of 1929, all sources of demand were blocked and the feedback loop between unemployed surplus profits and stagnant wages became self-reinforcing (39). Businesses that were now saddled with exorbitant levels of debt on devalued assets did everything in their power to deleverage, ultimately laying off workers or compelling them to accept lower wages. And as unemployment skyrocketed and consumer demand fell still further, businesses now had even less incentive to engage in the kinds of capital investment that might create job opportunities and stimulate consumption.

    Thus, Livingston concludes, the Great Depression was more than a simple credit contraction that could be triggered and remedied by monetary intervention, as argued by Friedman and Schwartz. The fault-lines of the crisis were to be found in long-term trends toward upward income redistribution, that is, the “fundamental shift of income shares away from wages and consumption to corporate profits” that left businesses with insufficient investment opportunities and workers too poorly paid to sustain demand (Livingston 37). If these fractures could be temporarily papered over by inflating asset prices and democratized consumer credit, the solution was always a precarious one given the underlying weakness of wages and the growing importance of consumption to the emerging economy of mass production.

    Many economists, including those in critical conversation with Lawrence Summers, discern a similar dynamic at work in the recent American crisis. Thus Atif Mian and Amir Sufi, although broadly in agreement with Summers’s diagnosis of secular stagnation, take him to task for not sufficiently appreciating the role of wage and wealth inequalities in generating and prolonging the crisis. “In our view,” they write, “what is missing from the secular stagnation story is the crucial role of the highly unequal wealth [and wage] distribution” (“Secular Stagnation”). It is this factor, in their view, not a demographic decline in the working age population, which accounts for both the onset of the global financial crisis and its enduring impact on economic growth. If America was able to sustain consumer demand for so long in the face of stagnant wages, it could do so only by generalizing credit access to the most high-risk households, those with precarious, irregular, and low wages. An entire global market in securitized credit and credit derivatives was thus built out of the income flows of the most insecure workers, and was rendered permanently vulnerable to the smallest shifts in interest rate. When this structure came crashing down in 2007, the ensuing epidemic of deleveraging on the part of households and corporations meant that the American economy was never able to resuscitate sufficient demand to attain pre-crisis rates of growth. If low-income borrowers were made responsible for sustaining consumer demand at the height of the credit boom, the same workers, now intent on deleveraging, are having a disproportionately negative effect on demand in the wake of the crisis. “During the Great Recession, for the same decline in housing wealth, low-income households cut back on spending much more. The spending response of low-income households is twice as large as that for rich households” (Mian and Sufi, “Why”).

    A similar role can be ascribed to wage deflation in the Japanese economy. As early as the Maekawa Commission Report of 1986, Japanese policy makers recognized that wages would need to rise substantially if Japan were to overcome its vulnerability to foreign export markets (Katz 89). But for various political and institutional reasons, this solution has never been pursued with enough conviction to represent a sustainable alternative. Instead, Japan turned to debt-fueled corporate investment during the 1980s before resuming its reliance on export-oriented production after the crash of 1990, all the while eluding the option of stimulating domestic consumption led by wage growth. As in the United States, real wages have been declining as a share of national income since 1973, with the significant difference that in Japan this trend has not been offset by expanding access to consumer credit (Batra). The number of non-regular workers, moreover, have been swelling since the 1980s, with many women and younger workers confined to low-paid, irregular employment with few benefits (Kingston 77–92). These already existing trends were intensified when the government further deregulated the labor market in the wake of the financial crash of 1990. All of this has conspired to limit the possibilities of domestic consumption at the very moment when it is most urgently needed as an engine of growth.

    In the mid-1980s, Japan succumbed to pressure from the United States to restructure its economy around domestic demand rather than exports. The Plaza and Louvre accords of 1985 compelled Japan to deregulate its credit markets and devalue the yen in an effort to lower its current account surplus. The effects were counterintuitive: although exports fell only slightly as a result of the accords, the liberalization of financial markets and relaxation of rules governing corporate access to credit encouraged Japanese corporations to engage in highly leveraged investments in commercial real estate and stocks. The resulting boom in asset prices sustained corporate profits and economic growth for an entire decade but further entrenched the weakness of household consumption, as profits claimed an ever-greater share of national income. “High nominal wages [shrank] in the face of ever higher prices. As a result, real wages have slumped as a share of national income in the past couple of decades. In price-adjusted terms, the capital share of national income is too high and the labor share too low” (Katz 95). When the Bank of Japan finally resolved to raise interest rates in 1990, bringing the asset-inflationary spiral to a sudden end, Japanese corporations found themselves saddled with enormous debts on devalued assets, while financial institutions were left with a mass of non-performing loans. Thus began the process of debt-deflation – or in Richard Koo’s words, balance sheet recession – that has now become a familiar experience of economies around the world. Businesses that were technically insolvent but still raking in respectable profits now refused to borrow or engage in new capital investment. Declining investment exacerbated existing wage stagnation, which in turn further marginalized any hope that consumption might prove a durable pathway to renewed demand. This weakness became catastrophic after the American subprime crisis of 2007, which greatly diminished Japan’s access to a booming export market.

    Thus wage stagnation represents a major fault-line in the Japanese economy, the absent stimulus without which there can be no hope of renewed economic growth. As noted by Katz, it is not that Japanese workers are “saving too much” – a truism, repeated by Bernanke (“Global Saving Glut”), that imputes a special kind of psychological perversion to Asian workers in particular – but that they are earning too little to compensate for faltering demand in other sectors of the economy. Savings rates amongst Japanese households have in fact declined by 50% since the 1970s: thus the “real culprit [is] skewed income distribution between corporations and households,” not miserly consumers (Katz 82).

    Despite repeated acknowledgement of the wage factor by Japanese policy markers (including, most recently, Prime Minister Shinzo Abe), a powerful political rhetoric continues to interpret the Japanese crisis as the inevitable consequence of declining birth rates and aging populations. Thus, the well-respected economist Kosuke Motani (1) has described the Japanese predicament as a “non-monetary deflation” whose ultimate causes are to be found in the decline of the working-age population – a diagnosis that is endorsed by the former Governor of the Bank of Japan, Masaaki Shirakawa. In his alternative account of the same events, Koo remarks that the causal relation is improbable: the aging described by Motani was already well under way before the crash of 1990, and in any case, cannot explain the enormous buildup in private credit that precipitated it (The Escape 170–171). But despite such empirical failings, the demographic thesis has proven remarkably resilient and has only become more plausible with the massive levels of public debt accumulated by the government in its efforts to bail out failing banks and carry out fiscal stimulus. This debt, it is often assumed, has been incurred through rising spending on the dependent aged, a burden that is being rapidly amassed at the expense of future, unborn generations. Again, the argument has been amply deconstructed.8 And yet it has been plausible enough to persuade successive Japanese prime ministers to increase pension contributions and diminish benefits, a cost-cutting maneuver that is destined to further erode household spending power and thus greatly exacerbate the wage stagnation that is ultimately responsible for Japan’s continuing malaise. In this and other instances, the problem of secular stagnation is transmuted into a demographic register that defines one generation or one part of the population as an un(re)productive surplus and a burden for all others. In what follows, I explore some of the many fantasy-forms that this surplus population can take, both within and outside Japan.

    Unreproductive Surplus and the Japanese Stagnation

    Zeilenziger’s Shutting Out the Sun is by far the most influential exemplar of a new genre of Japan-focused cultural psychology that emerged after the crisis of 1990. Much of the force of Zeilenziger’s analysis stems from the fact that he simply reverses the valence of a previous generation of widely accepted truisms on Japanese economic life, discerning manic-depressive zeal where commentators once saw unstoppable momentum, and stultifying conformity where others once saw an enviably organized form of flexibility. Japan no longer represents the nation that others strive to emulate, but a distorted mirror image of American vitality: “the decline of a great power like Japan is relevant – or cautionary – to citizens of other great nations who, like Americans, wonder whether their society too, might someday lose its vital gift for reinvention or renewal” (Zeilenziger 10). This gift for reinvention finds self-evident expression in America’s economic and demographic growth, just as Japan’s post-crisis stagnation is reflected in its low birth rates and aging population. “Demographics define destiny,” Zeilenziger observes, before explaining that, thanks to its “rapidly shrinking population,” Japan will soon enter “a ‘zerogrowth’ era when average annual growth is not likely to exceed 0.3 percent” (162).

    Extrapolating from the demographic data, Zeilenziger suggests that if post-crisis stagnation has lasted so long, it is because Japan overprotects the old at the expense of the young and burdens the future with the weight of inherited public debt. In Zeilenziger’s narrative, the young represent the entrepreneurial spirit of Schumpeterian innovation while the old are equated with the paternalist weight of economic protectionism, the corporate bias toward seniority and the accumulated burden of state deficit spending. The paradoxical effect of this deference toward the old is the permanent infantilization of the young, who struggle to emerge out of the shadow of their parents to reach full reproductive adulthood. Here, Zeilenziger evokes the stock figure of the hikikomori, adolescent males who retreat to their rooms and refuse the responsibilities of the male breadwinner role. The alleged economic protectionism of the Japanese state finds its intimate counterpart in the stifling paternalism of the Japanese family, which emasculates the son by maintaining him in a state of permanent pre-adulthood:

    For just as a hikikomori shuts himself off in his room rather than mediate a society he finds intolerable … Japan chose to ignore the obvious signs that its corporations invested and exported too much, that its webs of closed, protective relationships would never be as dynamic as open ones, and that national investment schemes that relied on government experts to envision the future would never consistently outperform those who summoned the wisdom of independent innovations [and] diverse risk-takers. (Zeilenziger 96)

    In the same way that an overly activist central bank chose to “emasculate” the stock and bond markets by bailing out corporations and banks in the wake of the crisis, Japanese parents are somehow responsible for castrating their sons and preventing their emergence into reproductive adulthood (Zeilenziger 100). Inversely, Zeilenziger evokes the female counterpart to the hikikomori, the “womb-striking woman” who lives with her parents well into childbearing age and refuses to bring forth a new generation of Japanese worker/consumers. “Shrinking maternity wards and abandoned kindergarten classrooms across the nation testify to the pitiless impact of the baby boycott” (Zeilenziger 162).

    Zeilenziger’s work lies squarely within a popular tradition of prurient commentary on the peculiarities of Japanese economic and cultural life. But even the critical academic literature presents the relationship between declining birth rates and economic stagnation as a matter of fact. Thus, Anne Allison, in her Precarious Japan, bluntly asserts that the country’s demographics are “complicit in its troubled social condition” and points to the sheer mass of aging, nonproductive bodies and aborted infancies as material proof of this predicament (34). “Amassing population at the upper, rather than lower, end of the age demographic chart,” she asserts, “puts obvious strain on the economy in terms of both productive output (a shrinking workforce and decrease in those contributing taxes) and social reproductivity (a rise in those needing care in comparison to those who can, or are willing to give it). . . . There are fewer workers today to support the elderly: a decrease in what is called the ‘dependency ratio’” (Allison 35–36). The idea that public finance is fatally threatened by a skewed “dependency ratio” in favor of the elderly has been amply critiqued – it ignores the fact that rising numbers of young people present an equally large dependency burden; assumes that all working age citizens are actually employed; and elides the fact that pension funds are invested, not simply amassed9 – yet it is presented here as a self-evident recipe for declining growth and productivity, rendered unanswerable by the surfeit of aging over newborn flesh. Sliding between the metaphorical and the causal, Allison presumes that demographic shortfall and economic deficit are functionally equivalent:

    Tending to the health and health care of the nation increasingly means shifting focus from a red-cheeked new-born to aging flesh. The implications in terms of outlay (of national resources) and output (of productive yield) are tremendous. If the child signifies potential – a forthcoming of growth, productivity and futurity – the elderly signifies deficit, the progressive decline of vitality whose fullness is past. Not only does the temporality of life differ here, so does its economics: what one requires and extracts in order to live and what one produces or yields in the course of living itself …. National coffers are getting eaten up by the costs of keeping so many elderly alive, a slow (economic) death brought on, at least in part, by the country’s slowly dying elderly, and so many of them. (36–37)

    The implicit reference here is to Lee Edelman’s No Future and although her tone is melancholic rather than transgressive, Allison is more faithful to Edelman than at first appears inasmuch as she presents the reproduction of the national future as a structural condition of economic hope (Edelman, for his part, is indebted to Lacan’s linguistic structuralism and as such sees heterosexual reproduction as an inescapable referent of desire, one that can be transgressed but never abolished). “Even with one of the lowest infant mortality rates,” Allison writes, “human life in the biological sense has a harder time actually coming into existence than surviving into old age in the country. Human life is dying slowly, and just as slowly, getting (re)born – a reality that confounds reproductive futurism” (35). Although Allison sometimes qualifies the overwhelming momentum of her argument from demographics with the acknowledgement that things might be imagined otherwise, her default mode of address is a kind of discours indirect libre that tends to confirm and endorse the truth of reproductive nationalism rather than question it.

    This genre of angst-ridden reflection on Japanese demographics is by no means a simple projection from the outside. Indeed, both Zeilenziger and Allison are in close conversation with a burgeoning literature on population crisis produced from within Japan, and widely disseminated in the popular media.10 One scholar who has done more than any other to popularize the demographic theory of economic crisis in Japan is the sociologist Masahiro Yamada, of Tokyo Gakugei University. Yamada, who famously characterized Japan’s post-crisis stagnation as a “low-birth-rate recession” (“Why”), identifies the figure of the so-called “parasite single” as the primary cause and symptom of this state of affairs (The Era; “Parasite”). The term “parasite single” refers to young, single, often highly educated women who earn a wage but choose to live at home with their parents, and who engage in sexual relations but refuse to marry or have children.11 These figures encapsulate both aspects of the Japanese crisis as Yamada understands it: the failure of consumer demand to catapult the economy out of its lingering post-crisis stagnation; and the failure of young women to sustain the reproduction of the Japanese nation. In his more sympathetic moments, Yamada understands this failure in structural terms, as a symptom of a modernization process that was both hyper-accelerated and hopelessly retarded (“Parasite” 10–11). As women have entered the workforce in growing numbers, Japanese gender relations and welfare institutions have not evolved fast enough to relieve women of some of the burdens of caring for young children; yet they can no longer expect young men to earn a wage sufficient to maintain them as housewives at home. Young women are well aware that marriage and childbirth signal the end of their chances at earning a living wage and their relegation, post childrearing, to low-paid, precarious work at the margins of the Japanese workforce. It is perhaps understandable then, Yamada notes, that many young women choose to delay or avoid marriage and childbearing altogether (“Parasite” 10–11).

    Yamada nevertheless sees these women as ultimately responsible for Japan’s state of enduring stagnation. After all, these women often earn a good wage, but refuse to spend it on productive forms of consumption that might support Japanese GDP growth. Instead of establishing a new household and purchasing Japanese consumer goods, they engage in the most frivolous forms of unproductive consumption. Citing a 1998 survey conducted by the Nikkei Research Institute, Yamada remarks that even with low salaries, parasite singles are able to spend lavishly on foreign luxury goods because their parents are supporting them: “You might have seen young Japanese women travelers all over the world, staying in luxury hotels and buying expensive designer-label bags, accessories, clothing and other items” (“Parasite” 12). By continually diverting their wages away from the national consumer market, these women contribute to the weakness of domestic consumption and thus serve to prolong the Japanese crisis: “Since parasite singles do not spend money for basic needs such as housing, appliances and furniture, they hinder the nation’s recovery from recession” (“Parasite” 16). But beyond their predilection for nonproductive consumption, single women also stand accused of indulging in non-reproductive sex thanks to the proliferation of “love hotels” that allow unmarried couples to meet outside the family home. It is not that young women do not consume, then, it is that their forms of consumption (of commodities and sex) work to undermine the (re)production of national economic life, constantly diverting the fruits of productive labor into various types of “surplus” or non(re)productive enjoyment.

    Here Yamada performs a conceptual maneuver that is emblematic of the conservative critique of capitalism: one particular social demographic is singled out as a rentier class of unproductive aristocrats, living parasitically off the productive energies of the nation and undermining its vital force, and thus blamed for the recurrent crisis tendencies of capital itself. In this instance, young women are made to personify a form of capital identified as un(re)productive, sterile and cosmopolitan – thus “financial” – and opposed to a form of capital presumed to be productive because it is oriented toward national economic and demographic growth. “In a way,” Yamada explains,

    parasite singles represent an affluent class that can live like Japan’s ancient aristocrats. In many countries in the West, being young and single usually means living a life of austerity if not poverty. In Japan, however, as long as young people can parasitize their parents, they have a kind of affluence, even if they earn very little or even if they don’t work. (“Parasite” 12)

    In this way, the forms of unemployed surplus (labor or capital) that are recurrently generated by capitalism’s crisis tendencies are personified in some figure of social surplus, who can then be exorcized or disciplined into a more (re)productive way of life. Once this logic has been established, the elimination or reform of this surplus persona presents itself as the obvious solution to economic crisis.

    Unreproductive Surplus and the Demographic Theory of Crisis

    Demographic theories of economic crisis have a long intellectual pedigree dating back to the beginnings of political economy and can take both underpopulationist and overpopulationist forms. Thomas Malthus, writing at the very origins of the discipline, notoriously argued that bioeconomic laws governing food production and human fertility would inevitably lead to periodic crises of overpopulation, hence excessive consumption, plummeting wages and misery among the poor. Malthus’s early work on the principles of population proposed an essentially exogenous theory of economic crisis, where the natural rate of reproduction was seen as posing an extrinsic limit to the rate of economic growth. Population tended to grow at a geometrical rate; food production could increase only in arithmetical fashion. If left unchecked, the disjuncture between the two would recurrently generate a surplus of underemployed workers incapable of reproducing their own means of subsistence (Malthus, An Essay).

    We owe the term “Malthusianism” to this very early phase of Malthus’s work. Yet as recognized by his great admirer, John Maynard Keynes, Malthus’s original thesis on overpopulation gave way in his later work to a theory of underconsumption, which seemed to suggest exactly the opposite conclusions on the question of population (Keynes, “Some Economic Consequences” 522). In the years following the Napoleonic wars, Malthus was confronted with a set of economic circumstances very different to those that prevailed at the turn of the century: contrary to his own predictions, grain prices declined dramatically in this period, leading to an accumulation of unused grain stocks that could find no profitable outlet in the consumer market. In what appeared as the ultimate contradiction in terms, overproduction and unemployed capital existed side by side with unemployed labor and faltering demand. Malthus accordingly shifted his attention from the question of overconsumption (and underproduction) to that of underconsumption (and overproduction [Principles]). Implicit here was the idea that underpopulation had replaced overpopulation as the most urgent issue confronting the English economy. Despite the popular currency of the term “Malthusianism,” it is this later work that has left the most enduring mark on the discipline of economics in the form of the underconsumption theory of crisis.

    The same tension can be found in the work of Keynes. Having devoted considerable energy to reviving the reputation of the early “Malthusian” Malthus at the end of World War I (The Economic Consequences and “Is Britain”), Keynes abruptly reversed his position in the 1930s to warn that the most pressing problem facing Britain and the United States was in fact plummeting birth rates, which could well lead to a protracted crisis of underconsumption.12 Keynes first raised this possibility in passing in The General Theory of 1936 (220–221), then dwelt on it extensively in a paper published one year later in The Eugenics Review (“Some Economic Consequences”). Had Keynes abandoned the “Malthusianism” of his early work? No, he insisted, it was simply the case that the historical conquest of the population problem (signified in England by the recent legalization of birth control advice to married couples [Hoye 186]) meant that new, previously undreamt of problems had now emerged to confront the modern nation-state. In spite of all its dangers, an

    increasing population has a very important influence on the demand for capital. Not only does the demand for capital – apart from technical changes and improved standard of life – increase more or less in proportion to population. But, business expectations being based much more on present than on prospective demand, an era of increasing population tends to promote optimism, since demand will in general tend to exceed, rather than fall short of, what was hoped for. … But in an era of declining population the opposite is true. Demand tends to be below what was expected, and a state of over-supply is less easily corrected. Thus a pessimistic atmosphere may ensue …. The first result to prosperity of a change-over from an increasing to a declining population may be very disastrous. (Keynes, “Some Economic Consequences” 519)

    Having thus established a causal relationship between economic and demographic expectations. Keynes went on to express his own pessimism about the situation of the world economy in the 1930s, where anemic demand appeared to combine with plummeting birth rates to augur a new era of perpetually disappointing growth prospects.

    These reflections would soon be transformed into a fully operative thesis of secular stagnation by Keynes’s disciples on both sides of the Atlantic. In Britain, John R. Hicks seized upon Keynes’s remarks in The General Theory to deduce an elaborate demographic theory of falling demand: “With increasing population, investment can go roaring ahead, even if invention is rather stupid; increasing population is therefore actually favorable to employment. It is actually easier to employ an expanding population than a contracting one, whatever arithmetic would suggest.” But when population is falling, “investment will proceed only with great difficulty, and employment will be low, in spite of the fact that population may have already declined in the past” (Hicks, “Mr Keynes’s Theory” 16). Hicks, who was among the most influential popularizers of Keynes’s work, placed even greater emphasis on the population factor than Keynes did, noting that the “population point is enough in itself to establish the high significance of Mr. Keynes’s theory of long-period unemployment” (16). In his monumental Value and Capital, he noted in passing that the “whole industrial revolution of the last centuries” had perhaps been “nothing else but a vast secular boom, largely induced by the parallel rise in population” (302).

    Alvin Hansen too thought that the debt deflation of the 1930s signaled a phase change in long-term growth trends – hence the term “secular” as opposed to “cyclical” stagnation.

    The economic order of the western world is undergoing in this generation a structural change no less basic and profound in character than that transformation of economic life and institutions which we are wont to designate loosely by the term “Industrial Revolution.” We are passing, so to speak, over a divide which separates the great era of growth and expansion of the nineteenth century from an era which no man, unwilling to embark on pure conjecture, can as yet characterize with clarity or precision. (Hansen 1)

    This secular transition from high to low economic growth could ultimately be ascribed to the cessation of those external forces that had provided such spectacular and abundant investment returns throughout the nineteenth century – chief among them rapid population growth.

    These Keynes-inspired secular stagnation theories took root in a context of declining birth rates and general pessimism about the future of demographic growth. The work of Keynes, Hicks, and Hansen was of a piece with the apocalyptic tone of professional demographers such as Enid Charles, who in her contemporaneous work on The Menace of Underpopulation, evoked the “spectacle of a society that has lost the power to reproduce itself” (qtd. in Peterson 238).

    It was not until the 1970s, as advanced economies found themselves confronted with the combined problems of inflation and unemployment – or so-called stagflation – that the old Malthusian theories of overpopulation made a comeback. In a context where public spending on welfare was rising alongside inflating wage and consumer prices, commentators of the period routinely interpreted stagflation as a crisis of overconsumption or excessive demand, which was in turn linked with the phenomenon of rising birth rates. American neoconservatives such as Daniel Bell theorized inflation as the inevitable effect of excessive distributional demands pressing on the limited fiscal powers of the state and distorting the price of money. Monetarists such as Milton and Rose Friedman reversed the causal relationship and instead saw inflation as the direct expression of an excessive increase in the money supply, prompted by overspending on the part of the state. But both neoconservatives and neoliberals were convinced that state spending on welfare programs to unmarried, mostly African American mothers seemed to be subsidizing the over-reproduction of a future surplus population of welfare dependent children (Cooper, Family Values 25–66). Overconsumption signified excessive, unprofitable reproduction that would inevitably lower the profit margins of business. In this context, lower-class minority women were predictably imagined as unproductive rentiers living off the unearned income of welfare benefits – welfare queens as opposed to productive workers and non-dependent reproducers.

    At first nurtured in the context of the national economy, the diagnosis of overconsumption was soon extended to the global economic space, where various postcolonial states were rapidly increasing their rates of consumption while also asserting their newfound powers to push up the costs of first-world consumption by demanding higher prices for oil. As demographers contemplated the likely economic effects of rising consumption in the developing world, they warned of the imminent disaster of overpopulation (Ehrlich; Meadows, et al.). Without proper limits to consumption and population growth, it seemed that the world would soon be faced with a series of systemic crises implicating the runaway effects of greenhouse gases on the earth’s biosphere, the toxic residues left behind by petrochemical production, and conflict over the earth’s diminishing food and energy resources.

    Although typically championed by very different constituencies, it is important to recognize that theories of under- and overpopulation subscribe to the same logic and therefore demand an overarching critique.13 In each case, a protracted episode of inflation or deflation is attributed to a literal inflation or deflation of reproductive desire, which in turn is assumed to be confirmed by rapidly escalating or waning birth rates (sex is only ever reproductive within these narratives). When prices and wages are rising with respect to profits, as in the 1970s, it is assumed that women are reproducing too much. Their excessive fertility is responsible for a surplus population of unproductive, unemployed, or underemployed youth whose outsized consumption needs are placing unsustainable fiscal demands on the state. Economic growth may be accelerating thanks to the sheer number of new workers entering the labor market, yet productivity is slacking off as workers enforce rising wages or find alternative sources of income in overabundant welfare provisions. Alternatively, when prices and wages are declining with respect to profits, and when this decline is strong enough to undermine economic growth itself, it appears that women are not fertile enough. Their refusal to reproduce is creating a surplus of unproductive old people, who in turn are unfairly burdening both the state and future generations with their excessive consumption needs. Productivity amongst employed workers may remain high, but economic growth itself is slowing down thanks to the absolute decline in the number of people entering the workforce. In each case, an endogenous cycle of inflation or deflation (endogenous because its cause lies in the structural antinomies of the capitalist mode of accumulation) is attributed to the exogenous causality of reproductive failure. With each iteration of this narrative, we are invited to identify some figure of un(re)productive surplus who is thereby made to personify the failure of economic growth itself, its unemployable and unprofitable excess.

    Karl Marx is one of the few to have mounted a serious critique of the demographic theory of crisis. What the classical political economists (from Malthus to Ricardo and John Stuart Mill) understood as external limits to an increasing rate of profit, Marx theorized as a limit internal to the capitalist mode of accumulation itself (Capital: Volume III 350, 358). That is to say, when any particular historical regime of capitalist accumulation experiences a crisis of under- or overconsumption,14 what it has come up against is not a bioeconomic limit to its further expansion but rather an inability to increase the exploitation of labor (hence productivity) without destroying its own raison d’être – an ever increasing rate of profit. At a certain point, the threat of under-consumption and unrealized demand can only be resolved by increasing wages; inversely, the threat of overconsumption and excessive demand can only be remedied by decreasing labor productivity; but to take either path would mean abandoning the need to deliver ever higher rates of profit. In simple terms, the capitalist process of accumulation is perpetually hampered by the drive to maintain and indeed exacerbate a certain structural inequality, not only between wages and profits, but also among wage earners themselves.

    Marx thus reinterprets the ostensibly natural limits to growth, identified by the classical political economists, as so many endogenous limits specific to the capitalist mode of accumulation. What looks like a natural surplus of un- or underemployed workers, excluded from a living wage by sheer weight of numbers, reflects an internal necessity of capitalism itself – the need to marginalize a certain section of the population from the core of the waged workforce in order to maintain wages as low as possible. And what look like natural demographic divisions within the workforce – divisions between women and men, adults and children, migrants and residents – are strategic borders that serve to differentiate a core workforce from a proliferating surplus of ever lower-paid workers, keeping wages as low and productivity as high as possible for all (Marx, Capital: Volume I 788). Yet this constant drive to produce a portion of under- or overemployed workers ends up sabotaging the capitalist accumulation process itself, periodically preventing it from realizing the full value of expected profits.

    Unlike the classical political economists, Marx understands the problem of realization (hence demand) as a function of wage and wealth distribution, not demographics: wages in turn are “not determined by the variations of the absolute numbers of the working population, but by the varying proportion in which the working class is divided into an active army and a reserve army” (Capital: Volume I 790). It follows that crises of over- or under-consumption are generated endogenously to the capitalist mode of accumulation; they are the counterproductive fallout of its driving logic, the need to push wage and wealth inequalities as far as possible. If the “labor market sometimes appear[s] relatively under-supplied because capital is expanding, and sometimes relatively oversupplied because capital is contracting,” it would be “utterly absurd, in place of this, to lay down a law according to which the movement of capital depended on the movement of the population. Yet this is the dogma of the economists” (Capital: Volume I 790).

    Marx’s critique of the demographic theory of crisis has rarely been surpassed. His analysis helps explain the way that capitalist failures of realization are repeatedly personified in a surplus population of unproductive, devalued humanity and thus attributed to natural laws external to capital itself. Yet Marx never quite captures the gendered and sexual dimension of this sleight of hand – the fact that unproductive surplus is also necessarily configured as un(re)productive surplus – and at times succumbs to the very fantasies he denounces elsewhere. Thus in his essays on The Class Struggles in France: 1848–1850, Marx equates the sterile accumulation of financial capitalism with the unproductive character of the non-industrial lumpenproletariat: “In the way it acquires wealth and enjoys it the financial aristocracy is nothing but the lumpenproletariat reborn at the pinnacle of bourgeois society” (“The Class Struggles” 39). Both, he claims, are animated by a perverse appetite for luxurious consumption, a desire that is “in permanent conflict with the bourgeois law” of productive labor and reproductive desire, the “same unbridled assertion of unhealthy and vicious appetites … , appetites . . . in which pleasure becomes crapuleux, in which money, filth and blood commingle” (39). Elsewhere, and more ambiguously, he contrasts the finite, reproductive development of organic life and labor with the strangely self-referential, self-regenerative, and proliferative logic of capital, where desire begets desire beyond the demands of natural reproduction – a distinction that is richly informed by Thomist and Aristotelian denunciations of usury, sodomy, and prostitution.15

    It is ultimately this equation between the nonreproductive logic of financial capital and the non- (or over- or under-) reproductive desire of the surplus population – openly endorsed in Marx’s early political writing – which lies at the heart of the demographic theory of crisis. It is this equation which drives the revival of secular stagnation theory today and this equation which must be destabilized if we are to avoid the idea that reproductive nationalism is our only answer to economic crisis.

    Footnotes

    1. The English-language journalistic literature on the subject of “why the Japanese aren’t having sex” is too vast to reference.

    2. An early and highly prescient analysis of this conjuncture can be found in Gopal Balakrishnan’s “Speculations on the Stationary State,” which predates the current revival of secular stagnation theory. Balakrishnan’s reflections on current tendencies toward deflation return to the problematic of the “stationary state” in classical political economy. In her essay “The Culture of Secular Stagnation,” Annie McClanahan also discerns a rich conceptual history behind contemporary secular stagnation discourse, one that is concerned as much with biological as with economic narratives of renewal and decline.

    3. Rosenof drives home the point, noting that

    [c]ritics often lambasted Hansen and other secular stagnationists as pessimists who were resigned to a no-growth economy. Hansen and others responded that they were in fact optimists, given the correct remedy to the diagnosed condition. That is, Hansen was not arguing that growth had come to an end but that growth based on a certain set of exogenous forces had stagnated. The key, of course, was not passive acceptance of stagnation but vigorous efforts to develop new stimuli to investment and growth to replace those in decline. The unprecedented nature of this era of secular stagnation required an unprecedented response: massive public investment. (59)

    4. By mainstream macroeconomists I refer to both New Classical and New Keynesian economists. New Classical economics emerged in the aftermath of the stagflation crisis of the 1970s and in response to the failure of Keynesian economics to explain it. It is associated with the names of Robert Lucas, Thomas J. Sargent, Neil Wallace, and Robert Barro, who sought to reestablish macroeconomics on Walrasian microeconomic foundations. Their macroeconomic models were built on the assumption of rational expectations and perfectly competitive, self-equilibrating markets free of “stickiness” or rigidities. The New Keynesians accepted many of the microeconomic principles advanced by the New Classicals but rejected the notion that labor and commodity markets could be assumed to be perfectly competitive. Instead they introduced the notion of market rigidities and coordination problems into their models and recognized a place for limited fiscal intervention to correct these failures. New Keynesian economists must be distinguished from post-war neo-Keynesian economists, such as Paul Samuelson, John Hicks, and Franco Modigliani, who engineered the so-called neo-Keynesian synthesis between neoclassical economics and Keynesian theory, and in general accepted a strong role for government intervention in markets. They must also be distinguished from the post-Keynesian economists, who remain committed to a heterodox, non-neoclassical view of Keynesian economics, often combined with the insights of later heterodox economists such as Hyman Minsky.

    Raghuram Rajan is the most prominent of the New Classical economists to have invoked the Keynesian concept of secular stagnation and its relationship to inequality. Among the New Keynesian economists who have written on secular stagnation theory are Lawrence Summers, Paul Krugman, and Robert Gordon. For an alternative, post-Keynesian view on the global financial crisis, see Stockhammer. The post-Keynesian economist Thomas Palley has written an extensive critical overview of mainstream macroeconomists’ newfound interest in the classically Keynesian issues of secular stagnation, demand, and inequality.

    5. See Goodhart and Erfurth; Teulings and Baldwin; Gordon.

    6. Although the equation between deflation and demographic trends has become seemingly ubiquitous in the wake of the financial crisis, with Japan persistently cited as incontrovertible proof, a number of mainstream voices point to the absence of any serious causal relationship. Richard Koo is certainly amongst the most well-known critics of the demographic theory of deflation, as is the current Governor of the Bank of Japan, who openly challenges his predecessor on this issue. See Warnock and Frangos. For their part, demographers have often been more circumspect than economists about the links between macroeconomic and population trends. See Bloom et al.; Herrmann. My own view, informed by Kalecki’s “The Political Aspects of Full Employment,” is that price movements, whether inflationary or deflationary, are mediated by the distribution of wealth and income, and are therefore inevitably reflective of political rather than demographic processes. Price deflation is shaped by wages, investment decisions, the proportion of employed to unemployed people, and social spending decisions, and cannot be deduced in numerical fashion from simple demographics. In the most obvious sense, the “working age population” is very rarely equivalent to the actual waged population and therefore represents a politically flexible (as opposed to natural and irreducible) limit to demand. To lament the dwindling of the working age population in the United States is to ignore the fact that a significant proportion of this population (African American men, for example) are very deliberately quarantined outside of the formal labor market as a political imperative of US capitalism. If US economic growth is suffering from a shrinking of the working age population, why not reintegrate them into the workforce? At this point it becomes clear that the driving force behind price deflation is the production of (class-based, racial, and gendered) inequalities, not numerical demographics. The same qualifications must be applied to inflation, which in the 1970s was closely correlated with the growing political power of the working class to demand higher wages and (in the case of women) to exchange unwaged for waged labor. Inflation was never simply a question of rising birth rates, but rather the effect of increasingly powerful political movements from below. Wage inflation represents the power of political movements to diminish inequality and push up demand, just as wage deflation derives from the increase in inequality and resulting contraction of demand.

    7. Even a commentator such as Douthat takes Japan to task for its tight immigration controls, citing them as evidence of its cultural and economic stagnation, while attributing much of America’s demographic dividend to its relaxed migration policies and relative cultural liberalism. “Our family structures are weakening, but high out-of-wedlock birth-rates may be preferable to no births at all. We assimilate immigrants more slowly than we should, but at least we’re capable of assimilation.”

    8. See Campbell; Kingston 42–43.

    9. See Burtless.

    10. See Driscoll for a richly detailed account of this discourse and its close imbrication with the question of public debt. Driscoll demonstrates just how influential this discourse has been in shaping recent social policy in Japan.

    11. For a critical overview of the literature on “parasite singles” in Japan, see Lunsing.

    12. See Peterson for an extensive discussion of the population question in Keynes’s work.

    13. Recent feminist critiques of demography tend to focus exclusively on theories of overpopulation, sometimes pointing to the ways in which feminists have colluded with eugenic projects of population control in the past. Yet this focus neglects the fact that underpopulation theories are equally common in the history of demography and indeed equally popular among historical feminists (Enid Charles is a case in point). The silence on this history is striking. My contention here is that a comprehensive critique of the demographic theory of crisis must capture what is common to theories of underpopulation and overpopulation. Failing this, feminist theories run the risk of proposing an alternative pronatalism or an alternative reproductive nationalism – one that is more often than not displaced onto the postcolonial nation or racial minority and thus, it is assumed, redeemed.

    14. I am in agreement with Desai, who argues that Marx was equally attentive to crises of overproduction and underconsumption, contrary to a certain Marxist orthodoxy that insists that underconsumption is a strictly reformist Keynesian problematic and was not of interest to Marx. This orthodoxy has proven particularly harmful in the current crisis, which is quite obviously connected to the questions of consumer credit and wage stagnation.

    15. See Marx, Capital: Volume I 254–257; Cooper, “The Living and the Dead”.

    Works Cited

    • Allison, Anne. Precarious Japan. Duke UP, 2013.
    • Balakrishnan, Gopal. “Speculations on the Stationary State.” New Left Review, vol. 59, Sept.–Oct. 2009, pp. 5–26.
    • Batra, Ravi. “Wage Stagnation in Japan.” Pacific Economic Review, vol. 2, no. 2, 1997, pp. 91–99.
    • Bell, Daniel. The Cultural Contradictions of Capitalism: Twentieth Anniversary Edition. Basic Books, 1978.
    • Bernanke, Ben. “The Global Saving Glut and the U.S. Current Account Deficit.” Sandridge Lecture. Virginia Association of Economists, 14 Apr. 2005, Richmond, Virginia. ———. “Remarks by Governor Ben S. Bernanke.” Conference to Honor Milton Friedman, 8 Nov. 2002, University of Chicago. Bloom, David E., et al. “Implications of Population Ageing for Economic Growth.” Oxford Review of Economic Policy, vol. 26, no. 4, 2010, pp. 583–612.
    • Burtless, Gary. “Does Population Aging Represent a Crisis for Rich Societies?” The Brookings Institution. 1 Jan. 2002.
    • Campbell, John. “Japan’s Aging Population: Perspectives of ‘Catastrophic Demography.’” Journal of Asian Studies, vol. 67, no. 4, Winter 2009, pp. 1401–1406.
    • Cooper, Melinda. Family Values: Between Neoliberalism and the New Social Conservatism. Zone Books, 2017.
    • ———. “The Living and the Dead: Variations on De Anima.” Angelaki – Journal of the Theoretical Humanities, vol. 7, no. 3, 2002, pp. 81–104.
    • Davidson, Jacob. “This Theory Explains Why the U.S. Economy Might Never Get Better.” Time Magazine, 25 Mar. 2016.
    • Dent, Harry S., Jr. The Demographic Cliff: How to Survive and Prosper during the Great Deflation Ahead. Penguin, 2015.
    • Desai, Radhika. “Consumption Demand in Marx and in the Current Crisis.” Research in Political Economy, vol. 26, 2010, pp. 101–41.
    • Dodig, Nina, and Hansjörg Herr. “Financial Crises Leading to Stagnation – Selected Historical Case Studies.” The Demise of Finance-Dominated Capitalism: Explaining the Financial and Economic Crises, Edited by Eckhard Hein, et al. Edward Elgar Publishing, 2015, pp. 162–218.
    • Douthat, Ross. “Incredible Shrinking Country.” New York Times (Sunday Review), 28 April 2012, p. SR12.
    • ———. “More Babies, Please.” New York Times (Sunday Review), 1 Dec. 2012, p. SR11.
    • Driscoll, Mark. “Debt and Denunciation in Post-Bubble Japan: On the Two Freeters.” Cultural Critique, vol. 65, Winter 2007, pp. 164–187.
    • Eberstadt, Nicholas. “Japan Shrinks.” The Wilson Quarterly, Spring 2012.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Duke UP, 2004.
    • Ehrlich, Paul R. The Population Bomb. Buccaneer Books, 1971.
    • Fisher, Irving. “The Debt-Deflation Theory of Great Depressions.” Econometrica, vol. 1, no. 4, 1933, pp. 337–357.
    • Frangos, Alex. “Japan’s Problem: Demographics or Money?” Moneybeat blog. The Wall Street Journal, 6 Dec. 2015.
    • Friedman, Milton, and Anna J. Schwartz. A Monetary History of the United States, 1867–1960. Princeton UP, 1963.
    • Friedman, Milton, and Rose Friedman. Free to Choose: A Personal Statement. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1980.
    • Goodhart, Charles, and Philipp Erfurth, “Demography and Economics: Look Past the Past.” VoxEU, 4 Nov. 2014.
    • Gordon, Robert J. The Rise and Fall of American Growth: The U.S. Standard of Living Since the Civil War. Princeton UP, 2016.
    • Hansen, Alvin. “Economic Progress and Declining Population Growth.” The American Economic Review, vol. 29, no. 1, 1939, pp. 1–15.
    • Herrmann, Michael. “Population Aging and Economic Development: Anxieties and Policy Responses.” Population Ageing, vol. 5, 2012, pp. 23–46.
    • Hicks, John R. “Mr Keynes’s Theory of Employment.” Economic Journal, vol. XLVI, no. 182, 1936, pp. 238–253.
    • ———. Value and Capital: An Inquiry into Some Fundamental Principles of Economic Theory. Clarendon Press, 1939.
    • Kalecki, Michael. “The Political Aspects of Full Employment.” The Political Quarterly, vol. 14, no. 4, 1943, pp. 322–330.
    • Katz, Richard. “Economic Anorexia: Japan’s Real Demand Problem.” Challenge, vol. 42, no. 2, 1999, pp. 77–101.
    • Keynes, John Maynard. The Economic Consequences of the Peace. London: Macmillan, 1919.
    • ———. The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money. London: Macmillan, 1936.
    • ———. “Is Britain Overpopulated?” The New Republic, 31 Oct. 1923, p. 247.
    • ———. “Some Economic Consequences of a Declining Population.” Eugenics Review, vol. 29, no. 1, 1937, pp. 13–17.
    • Kingston, Jeff. Contemporary Japan: History, Politics, and Social Change since the 1980s. Wiley-Blackwell, 2013.
    • Koo, Richard C. The Holy Grail of Macroeconomics: Lessons from Japan’s Great Recession. Wiley & Sons, 2009.
    • ———. The Escape from Balance Sheet Recession and the QE Trap: A Hazardous Road for the World Economy. Wiley & Sons, 2014.
    • Livingston, James. “Their Great Depression and Ours.” Challenge, vol. 52, no. 3, 2009, pp. 34–51.
    • Lunsing, Wim. “‘Parasite’ and ‘Non-parasite’ Singles: Japanese Journalists and Scholars Taking Positions.” Social Science Japan Journal, vol. 6, no. 2, 2003, pp. 261–265.
    • Malthus, Thomas Robert. An Essay on the Principle of Population, J. Johnson, 1798.
    • ———. Principles of Political Economy Considered with a View to Their Practical Application. 2nd ed., William Pickering, 1836.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. Volume I. Translated by Ben Fowkes, Penguin, 1976.
    • ———. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. Volume III. Translated by David Fernbach, Penguin, 1991.
    • ———. “The Class Struggles in France: 1848 to 1850.” Surveys from Exile, edited by David Fernbach, Verso, 2010, pp. 35–142.
    • McClanahan, Annie. “The Culture of Secular Stagnation.” 2016. Unpublished manuscript. Meadows, Donella H., et al. Limits to Growth: Report to the Club of Rome. Universe Books, 1972.
    • Mian, Atif, and Amir Sufi. “Secular Stagnation and Wealth Inequality.” House of Debt, 23 Mar. 2014.
    • ———. “Why the Income Distribution Matters for Macroeconomics.” House of Debt, 27 Mar. 2014.
    • Motani, Kosuke. The True Face of Deflation (Defure no shōtai keizai wa ‘jinkō no nami’ de ugoku). Kadokawa Shinsho, 2010.
    • Palley, Thomas. “Inequality, the Financial Crisis and Stagnation: Competing Stories and Why They Matter.” Real-World Economics Review, vol. 74, 2016, pp. 1–10.
    • Peterson, William. “John Maynard Keynes’s Theories of Population and the Concept of ‘Optimum’.” Population Studies, vol. 8, no. 3, 1955, pp. 228–246.
    • Rajan, Raghuram G. Faultlines: How Hidden Fractures Still Threaten the World Economy. Princeton UP, 2010.
    • Rosenof, Theodore. Economics in the Long Run: New Deal Theorists and Their Legacies, 1933–1993. U of North Carolina P, 1997.
    • Shirakawa, Masaaki. “Demographic Changes and Macroeconomic Performance – Japanese Experiences.” BOJ-IMES Conference, 30 May 2012, Bank of Japan, Tokyo. Stockhammer, Engelbert. “Rising Inequality as a Cause of the Present Crisis.” Cambridge Journal of Economics, vol. 39, no. 3, 2015, pp. 935–958.
    • Summers, Lawrence H. “Demand-Side Secular Stagnation.” American Economic Review, vol. 105, no. 5, 2015, pp. 60–65.
    • ———. “Economic Forum: Policy Responses to Crisis.” 14th Annual IMF Research Conference in Honor of Stanley Fischer: Crises Yesterday and Today, 8 Nov. 2013, IMF Headquarters, Washington, DC. Teulings, Coen, and Richard Baldwin, editors. Secular Stagnation: Facts, Causes, and Cures. Center for Economic Policy Research, 2014.
    • Teulings, Coen, and Jason Lu. “Secular Stagnation, Bubbles and the Legacy of the Contraceptive Pill.” Institute for New Economic Thinking, 28 Oct. 2016.
    • Toye, John. Keynes on Population. Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Warnock, Eleanor. “Demographics Needn’t Mean Deflation, Argues Former BoJ Official.” Wall Street Journal, 20 Dec. 2014.
    • Yamada, Masahiro. The Era of Parasite Singles (Parasaito Shinguru No Jidai). Chikuma Shobo, 1999.
    • ———. “Parasite Singles Feed on Family System.” Japan Quarterly, vol. 48, no. 1, 2001, pp. 10–16.
    • ———. “Why Isn’t This Called a Low-Birthrate Recession? (Kore o shôshika fukyô to naze iwanu).” Shokun! vol. 30, Aug., 1998, pp. 60–69.
    • Zielenziger, Michael. Shutting out the Sun: How Japan Created Its Own Lost Generation. Doubleday, 2006.
  • Looting: A Colonial Genealogy of the Contemporary Idea

    Amanda Armstrong (bio)
    University of Michigan

    Abstract

    This article deploys a genealogy of looting to mark out a history of the present. Looting entered the English language in the mid-nineteenth century. During its first decades of use, the term helped naturalize racial violence enacted along imperial infrastructures. Looting’s early history not only gives us insight into the lineaments of imperial liberalism, but also provides ways of reconceptualizing neoliberal racial capitalism. Insofar as we see the afterlives of imperialism at work in the present, we can better grasp the racial structuring of circulation – a sphere of accumulation that has, since the 1970s, gained a renewed centrality.

    We can begin with two images of the recent past. In the first, a sixteen-wheeler idles on California’s I-880, having been blocked by a crowd of people who now sit on the road. A message is projected onto the side of the truck: Black Lives Matter. In the second, a different perspective: a news helicopter looks down on a Charlotte highway, whereupon protesters have opened the rear doors of a tractor trailer and are emptying its contents onto a fire in the middle of the road. Both images were captured during 2016 protests against anti-black police violence. Together, they allow us to see supply chains and police violence as parts of a whole, the blockades entailing mediated confrontations with securitization in its various senses.

    The rise of the highway blockade, in the context of the Black Lives Matter movement, combined with the emergence of cognate tactics across various movement contexts, suggests the need for theories of the present capable of conceptualizing together dynamics of race, accumulation, and carcerality. Exemplary in this regard is Ruth Wilson Gilmore’s Golden Gulag (2007), which considers the expansion of incarceration in 1980s California in terms of the way that the prison construction boom allowed those managing capital to address surpluses of capital, labor, and land that had emerged from the economic stagnation of the 1970s. In the making of mass incarceration, more intensive techniques of policing were developed, particularly in the Los Angeles area, and revised ideologies of race came to naturalize emergent forms of criminalization and intensities of police violence. In From the War on Poverty to the War on Crime (2016), Elizabeth Hinton draws the story of mass incarceration back two decades to the 1960s, when, in the wake of urban uprisings, state officials introduced into anti-poverty initiatives a series of policing and surveillance devices, which over the 1970s would emerge as dominant features of state intervention in predominantly Black and Brown neighborhoods. Such was the context for the racially disproportionate and exponential growth in prison populations beginning in the late 1970s. Hinton’s work thus shows some of the concrete mechanisms by which the postwar welfare state was converted into a carceral apparatus. The history of this carceral turn tracks fairly closely with historical narratives of postwar political-economic restructurings, which generally hinge around the 1971 collapse of profitability in metropolitan industries. This drop in profitability sparked a management offensive, the effects of which would be codified by the 1980s in neoliberal state reforms and in new strategies of circulation-oriented accumulation, including financialization, the privatization of transit infrastructures, real estate development (including in prisons), and globally distributed just-in-time production.

    An August 1977 Time cover article, “The American Underclass,” signaled the combined carceral and circulatory turns outlined above, while also molding for its readers an ideological relation to such historical transformations:

    The barricades are seen only fleetingly by most middle-class Americans as they rush by in their cars or commuter trains—doors locked, windows closed, moving fast. But out there is a different world, a place of pock-marked streets, gutted tenements and broken hopes. … Behind its crumbling walls lives a large group of people who are more intractable, more socially alien and more hostile than almost anyone had imagined. They are the unreachables: the American underclass…. If you keep giving people stuff, that’s why they loot when the lights go out. Working is out of their minds. They think everything must be taken. (Qtd. in Mitchell 250–1.)

    In opening with a reference to the barricades, the article gestures back to Watts, Newark, Detroit, and other uprisings of the 1960s, as well as to the more immediate, widespread looting of July 1977, which took shape in the midst of an electricity blackout in New York City. This opening figure of the barricade, a technology for stopping up circulation, also sets off the figures of mobility that follow: the “cars or commuter trains—doors locked, windows closed, moving fast,” which allow “middle-class Americans” to see, fleetingly, the signs of the underclass. The magazine’s readers are assumed to rely for their safety and mobility on such motorized vehicles and transit infrastructures, whose smooth operation, the essay implies, is threatened by barricades, blackouts, and looting alike. The article’s reference to cars is particularly notable in the context of the 1977 blackout, as a widely reported tactic of those lifting goods from stores was to hitch cars to metal security grates and then to drive forward and drag the grates off storefronts, thereby freeing up what was inside.

    Following Gilmore’s account of racism as the “state-sanctioned or extralegal production and exploitation of group-differentiated vulnerability to premature death,” we can read the August 1977 Time cover article as helping remake racist ideology at a moment of historical transition. The article naturalizes racialized populations’ vulnerability to premature death in a number of ways, including by crafting an imaginative grid that allows acts of direct appropriation– “looting” – to appear worthy of criminalization and violent repression; by recoding surplus populations’ separation from the wage and state-mediated social goods as a failure of personal responsibility rather than an effect of structural dynamics and political choices; and by suggesting that lives worth regarding (those whose perspective the article takes up) are sustained by a system of circulation that operates at some remove from racialized populations. The article associates life-worth-living with infrastructures of circulation, while suggesting that those who would barricade, block-up, repurpose, or take from circulatory networks are threats to the health and well-being of those whose lives are worthy of regard. In this way, the criminalization and even police murder of racialized individuals can appear not as an attack on lives that matter, but rather as force exerted for the protection of life.

    In what follows, I am interested in thinking genealogically about the contemporary ideological complex – apparent in “The Underclass” – that is stitched together in part through the notion of looting. The origins and early history of the term looting perhaps hint at a structural similarity between the second British Empire and the post-1970s US carceral state. Across the second British Empire, and particularly in colonial India – where looting entered the English language in the 1840s – dynamics of circulation-oriented accumulation, racialization, and carcerality were woven together and helped constitute a contradictory imperial liberalism. As Lisa Lowe shows in The Intimacies of Four Continents (2015), imperial liberalism, justified on the basis of the purported capacity of the British to oversee global circuits of trade and migration effectively, involved the making of new mechanisms for regulating and hierarchizing the movements of populations. Under British rule, so-called free trade and liberty of movement were materialized through racializing technologies, including pass laws, labor market segmentation, the cordoning of urban space, the recrudescence of indentured labor regimes, differential modes of policing and border enforcement, and the segregation of rail stations and carriages. Emergent racial regimes in the era of imperial liberalism thus were effects in part of the spatial delineation of populations realized on and through transit infrastructures.1 The category of looting was suited to these racial regimes, as it marked a range of acts, often undertaken on or near transit systems, that appeared to contravene the racially hierarchizing imperatives of imperial circulatory networks. The category not only offered a way to grasp disparate acts that unsettled prevailing regimes of circulation and racial hierarchies, but also, as I discuss, was instrumental to the violent repression of such acts and their agents.2 By tracking looting’s early contexts of use, we see how this colonial keyword was variously made to act in concert with other technologies of imperial power.

    This journey through the archives of looting’s early life not only gives us insight into the lineaments of imperial liberalism, nor does it merely offer a case study with which to think through relations between language and other technologies of power; rather, above all, this study also provides ways of reconceptualizing neoliberal racial capitalism. Insofar as we see the afterlives of imperialism at work in post-1970s conjunctures, we are able more clearly to grasp the carceral underpinnings of contemporary circulatory networks and the racial structuring of circulation – a sphere of accumulation that has, since the 1970s, gained a renewed centrality. With respect to the state, circulatory networks have undergone an apparently contradictory set of transformations since the 1970s: on the one hand, they have been restructured to more directly align with the interests of capital, often by being sold off to private corporations; on the other hand, they have been further securitized, both by state and non-state agencies. As they have become more central to processes of accumulation, transit infrastructures have also become more salient as sites of racist state violence.

    The history of looting helps bring into view the racial logics sedimented in, and reproduced through, the infrastructures that daily undergird the movements of the present, showing how biopolitical and necropolitical modes of governance have been built out of, and maintain integral links to, infrastructural imperatives. This history also suggests the importance of situating accounts of nineteenth-century racial regimes and their aftereffects within a transnational and imperial frame – as modeled by Saidiya Hartman’s work on the afterlives of slavery in Lose Your Mother: A Journey Along the Atlantic Slave Route (2008). Hartman’s work links up with a body of research, at once emergent and longstanding, that studies the ways that legacies of racial slavery continue to shape regimes of governance and/as carcerality, particularly in the US (Hartman, Scenes ; Davis; Dillon). This research has shown the ways that carceral systems were built from technologies of surveillance and control associated with chattel slavery, and thus the ways that policing and prison systems have been conditioned, up through the present, by histories of racial slavery and its co-implicated anti-black discursive formations. Such a historical perspective helps clarify the inadequacy of reformist strategies that rest upon a distinction between the excesses of racist police violence, on the one hand, and an imagined, non-socially hierarchizing essence of policing that could be recuperated through legislative or judicial intervention, on the other hand. Research on the afterlives of slavery shows that policing can only be other than white supremacist if it is abolished. A similar effort to show the constitutive imbrication of circulatory systems and regimes of racial subordination animates this essay.

    In this, the essay builds upon Joshua Clover’s Riot. Strike. Riot (2016), which argues not only that circulatory networks are integrally bound up with racial subordination, but also that the sphere of circulation (as opposed to production) has, since the 1960s, come to form the central terrain of social struggle, which cannot be other than struggle for black liberation, which in turn cannot be other than struggle against state violence – violence that is at once ubiquitous, devastating, and normalized across such circulatory networks. Clover’s account of recent dynamics of capital accumulation and social antagonism is undergirded by an ambitious periodization of the history of capital – a periodization that marks out shifts in the leading spheres of accumulation (production versus circulation), in the prevailing modes of class struggle (strikes versus riots), and in the relative proximity of the state to proletarian social reproduction. With respect to the first two, Clover tells a story of the rise and fall of production-centered accumulation between 1840 and 1970 that is linked to a story of the emergence and decline of the strike as a central oppositional tactic. In this account, the 130-year phase of productioncentered accumulation appears to have been bounded by stretches of circulation-oriented accumulation and by the oppositional tactic tailored to regimes of circulation – namely, the riot – such that the eighteenth-century waves of export and grain riots appear to rhyme with cycles of anti-racist rioting that have unfolded since the 1960s. These cycles have not dissipated up through the present, as rioting and cognate tactics appear to hold priority in struggles against the nascent far right: from Berkeley to the Parisian banlieue, riots against the right have shaped this most recent Spring.

    Against this framework of the rhyming early modern and postmodern eras, Clover overlays a linear account of changes in the relative proximity of the state to proletarian social reproduction, in which an early-modern non-invasiveness of the state (revealed most starkly in the absence of standing police forces) gives way over time to a ubiquitous presence of the state (revealed, again, in the ramification and militarization of racialized policing, but also in the management of education, healthcare, and other socially reproductive spheres). This narrative of the becoming-ubiquitous of the state helps explain why recent riots, despite their determination by the dynamics of accumulation, appear responsive to forces typically understood as political rather than economic: above all, racialized policing. Taking a cue from Stuart Hall’s assertion that “race is the modality in which class is lived,” however, Clover argues that the racialization of surplus populations in an era of circulation-centered accumulation creates a situation in which class antagonism appears most starkly in the riotous confrontation, on the ground of circulatory systems, between black populations and the police. Reading a passage of Gwendolyn Brooks’s poem “Riot,” Clover asserts:

    Insofar as riot is a category recognized by state, law, and market, blacks coming down the street will always be a riot, or the moment before, or the moment after. Both socially and economically, blackness here is surplus – to the state, to the law, to the market. It promises always to exceed order, regulation. The riot is an instance of black life in its exclusions and at the same time in its character as surplus, cordoned into the noisy sphere of circulation, forced there to defend itself against the social and bodily death on offer. A surplus rebellion. (122)

    This essay engages genealogically with the surplus rebellions of the present, and in doing so offers some critical revisions to periodization such as Clover’s of modern histories of capital, race, and state violence. By considering the early history of looting, we see how a significant intensification of racialized policing took shape in the context of late-nineteenth-century imperial relations, particularly in colonial sites where circulation was central to dynamics of accumulation. While Clover generally restricts his analysis to the capitalist core, and is careful to acknowledge that his periodizing claims likely do not hold up for colonial and post-colonial contexts, he does allow that the surplus rebellions of the present bear a genealogical relation to colonial histories, noting that the “arrival of riot to the deindustrializing west” is a double arrival, having “come down from the export and marketplace riots of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and come inward from periphery to core (167). My reading of looting’s early history shows the way that aspects of carceral regimes, built up around colonial systems of circulation, “came inward” from periphery to core at the fin de siècle, and more generally the way that social antagonisms around circulation crisscrossed core and periphery during the period that Clover casts as the heyday of production-centered struggles. This inquiry helps clarify how the state, and particularly the policing power of the state, ramified through circulatory networks and thus came to play a more central role in orchestrating the lives and premature deaths of proletarianized and racialized populations at the dawn of the twentieth century – a role that such power has not ceased to play up through the present.

    A Genealogy of Looting

    “Looting,” the English gerund, derives from the Hindi verb lut (to rob). The word entered the imperial archive during the Anglo-Sikh wars, clothed in the anxious, belligerent tones of British colonial administrators. An 1845 London Times report from India records General Napier’s reply to insurgent Bijar Khan’s proposed terms of surrender: “Let him and his followers all come in and [lay down their arms]. I may then spare his life and grant him, perhaps, some land on the other side of the Indus – but if I hear any more of looting and murder, I’ll hang every one of them” (“India,” 21 April 1845). Elsewhere in the same report, we read that Napier’s war strategy had been to “drive [Khan] gradually to starvation.” This early archival appearance of looting anticipates the keyword’s mature colonial career. Late-nineteenth-century British administrators in India responded to recurrent, devastating famines—themselves exacerbated by colonial enclosures and trade policies that encouraged the export of grain via rail systems—by shoring up the capacity of the state to repress grain riots. Reports from British India register acute anxiety at the looting of food stores: “The second grain riot at Kurnool appears to have been more serious than the former one. The looting of shops went on for six hours” (“India,” 23 Nov. 1891); “Prospects considered serious in Behar. Grain riot at Sholapur; Bombay police fired, killed one, wounded two” (“Latest Intelligence”).3 In the 1890s, armed guards regularly accompanied grain shipments by rail, and colonial administrators established a system of work camps to incarcerate those suffering from famines (M. Davis, 120–170; Guha and Gadgil, 141–177; Premansukumar; Arnold).4 In this way, late-nineteenth-century British imperial responses to famines—characterized by measures that kept hungry people from accessing grain stocks, including by threats of violence, and more generally by the ramification of carceral technologies—echoed Napier’s 1845 acts of war. While imperial efforts to discipline looting thus resonated across historical distance, such efforts were materialized through discrepant practices, protocols, and institutional contexts of rule, and were imbricated with non-identical discursive complexes, such that the martial associations of looting evident at the midcentury gave way, by the end of the century, to discursive complexes conditioned by infrastructural imperatives. The vignettes to follow track this transformation, while also demonstrating how the notion of looting acquired layers of meaning as it moved across colonial contexts and from colony to metropole up through the First World War.

    Over its first decades of use, looting was made into a civilizational marker. While British writers would occasionally concede that their soldiers had engaged in looting campaigns (the “scenes of the Crimea” were sometimes referenced in this regard [“China,” 26 Feb. 1858]), they would nevertheless find some way to shield British soldiers – “their boys” – from the stigma of the act, often projecting it onto rival imperial armies, colonial forces, and/or colonized subjects.5 Letters and parliamentary transcripts published in the Times concerning the 1860 Anglo-French looting of the Summer Palace, for example, are unanimous in asserting that French soldiers had acted first, British men having only then reluctantly taken part in their own, more orderly sort of pillage.6 While French soldiers’ having broken ranks to loot the Summer Palace was seen as a strike against the otherwise well-developed state of civilization across the Channel, looting enacted by sipahis (colonial Indian soldiers) was viewed rather differently, particularly in the immediate aftermath of the 1857 uprising led by colonial Indian soldiers working for the East India Company. Reporting on the 1858 occupation of the port city of Guangzhou (Canton), a Times special correspondent notes that recently arrived sipahis “addicted themselves to looting.” The correspondent then devotes a few sentences to exculpating French guards for having shot three of these newly arrived colonial Indian soldiers:

    The evidence upon the court of inquiry which followed was very contradictory; but that they were looting and that they resisted the police were two uncontested facts. Perhaps the French were hasty; but a Sepoy in his undress is undressed in the literal sense of the term, and it is not quite to be wondered at that the Frenchmen had recourse to their arms to rid themselves of the blows and brickbats of a crowd of half-naked black ruffians. No two human creatures can be more different than a Sepoy dressed in his red coat and faultlessly clean belt, and the same animal stalking about on his long, lank shanks with a white girdle round his loins. (“China,” 30 Mar. 1858.)

    Colonial Indian soldiers’ looting is read here through a white supremacist ontological grid. The act appears to nullify sipahis’ conditional inclusion in the order of humanity, the latter indexed by the red coat and clean belt of the service. We see a similar process of racialization at work in an article published a few months later, which suggested that “the Sikhs” are “versed so far in looting that it is said one of them can appraise the value of articles in a house by walking past the hall-door, and that they can ‘smell’ gold, silver, and precious stones” (“The British Army”).7 Here, a propensity to loot is figured as a group trait, cultivated in the sensorium over generations. This racialized association of looting with Sikh soldiers functioned variously within colonial discourse. First, it projected onto a subordinate group in the colonial army practices of looting that were sanctioned for, and widely practiced by, British officers and troopers: the ubiquitous disavowal of the latter groups’ looting (“we know our boys loot, but …”) was enabled in part by the insistent condemnation and scrutiny of the former group’s looting. The racialized association of Sikh soldiers with looting also contributed to a discourse of masculinity in late-nineteenth-century colonial India that sharply distinguished between so-called “martial races” (including Sikhs) and purportedly effeminate groups of educated men, particularly Bengali men. As Mrinalini Sinha has shown, this colonial discourse of masculinity worked to exclude Indian men from posts in the colonial bureaucracy, from volunteering regiments, and from work in the higher grades of the railways (69–99). Insofar as looting was framed as a group trait cultivated over generations, the racialized polarity of essentially martial and non-martial groups, along with the forms of exclusion and subordination enabled by this polarization, could be maintained.

    Up through the 1870s, looting almost invariably appeared in a cluster of martial terms, even where the event at issue did not involve armed men or battlefields.8 An 1879 “Letter to the Editor,” for example, uses martial metaphors in arguing for the abolition of the English county fair:

    I live in East Grinstead, a sort of hobbledehoy village through which runs the high road between London and Lewes. Twice a year the street is blockaded by the undiluted offscouring of the home counties. Neither your carriage nor your wife can pass through it. A state of siege is proclaimed, and we endure it as best we can. The great majority of the respectable inhabitants are against it—as well they may be—for their horses are stolen, their hen-roosts robbed, their pockets picked—while our railway offers great facilities to London thieves to pay for their return ticket by contributing their talents to the process of general looting. (Quousque Tandem?)

    Here, the county fair—a “public nuisance and anachronism,” insofar as transit improvements, “monthly stock markets, and other results of civilization have entirely superseded the necessity of congregating spavined horses and half-starved cattle in a public thoroughfare”—appears as the site of a pitched battle, involving a blockade, a state of siege, and general looting. This “Letter to the Editor” is, notably, the first piece in the London Times wherein “looting” is used to describe actions taken by Britons in Britain. Such a leap to the metropole appears to be enabled by the discourse of criminality. The antagonists in the battle of East Grinstead are described as “thieves” and as the “undiluted offscouring of the home counties”—as a criminal underclass that ironically utilizes the above-mentioned transit infrastructures (“the rail, macadam, the improved communication between this place and that”) to congregate, blockade the street, stop up carriages, and make off with the wealth of respectable villagers.

    The link drawn here between looting and modern transit networks appears in a range of contexts over the 1870s and ’80s – a transitional period, as far as the discourse of looting is concerned. In April 1885, telegrams from Panama to London warned “that communication across the isthmus remains interrupted, and that there are rumors that looting is going on along the Panama Railway lines” (“Central America”). The uprising in Panama shortly thereafter faced repression by US marines acting in the name of a treaty the US government had signed in 1846 with the Republic of New Granada:

    The United States are not concerned with insurrections or civil wars in Central America, but they have guaranteed by treaty free and uninterrupted transit across the isthmus. For the present this is at an end, since, notwithstanding the defeat of the insurgents with great loss at Aspinwall (Colón), their marauding bands are looting the places along the line and constantly cutting the telegraph wires. (“Central America, Although”)

    The counterinsurgent violence enacted by US forces was directed in particular against black people:

    Several negroes engaged in looting premises which were burning were shot down by the marines who had been landed from the Galena. … It is said that 150 Jamaicans were shot. The general feeling expressed by the sufferers is that, had the Jamaicans not joined the rebels, the city would not have been fired. (“The Insurrection”)

    Gratuitous anti-black violence is here retroactively justified through the racialization of particular insurgent tactics (looting and burning infrastructure, above all).9 The tactic of destroying rail and telegraph lines in the context of nationalist or anti-imperialist uprisings was widely deployed over the 1880s and ’90s, following a burst of imperial rail investment and construction across the global South. In 1895, insurgents in Cuba, for example, looted and sabotaged rail lines upon which Spanish reinforcements were travelling (“The Revolt”). Attacks such as these spurred imperial powers to seek out new ways to secure transit infrastructures and nodes (as well as, ultimately, means for making imperial forces less dependent upon such vulnerable infrastructures, i.e., via aerial transit and bombing10). The securing of strategic transit corridors had been a longstanding imperial priority, as evidenced, for one, by the treaty signed between the US and the Republic of New Granada in 1846, a few years prior to the construction of the Panama Railway.11 Lauren Benton has argued that over the long span of 1400–1900, European imperial rule tended not to be organized in terms of a logic of territoriality, but rather to involve a somewhat more patchwork effort to secure corridors of control: “Enclaves such as missions, trading posts, towns, and garrisons were strung like beads along interconnected corridors” (10). But with the construction of new ports, railways, and telegraph lines over the late nineteenth century, which both ramified key transit networks and involved the dispersal of valuable fixed capital, imperial administrators felt the need to experiment with novel techniques for controlling these ever-expanding networks, above all through the establishment of standing police forces throughout a given territory. As Carolyn Steedman’s work on the history of policing in Victorian Britain has shown, the establishment of standing police forces in every British county and borough did not occur until the mid-1850s, when rail lines had begun to link previously isolated regions into a national network (21–26). Meanwhile, in colonial India, as massive construction projects laid rail networks across much of the subcontinent following the uprising of 1857–58, higher grade railway employees – uniformly British or Anglo-Indian in origin – were deputized and armed by the colonial state to police segregated railway carriages, stations, and lines (Das and Verma; Goswami). Thus, the quantitative increase in track mileage across the second British Empire was linked with qualitative changes in the modes of imperial governance, including more concerted turns to logics of territoriality, materialized through dispersed, standing police forces.

    A particularly striking illustration of the way that territorial logics of rule were associated with late-nineteenth-century railway imperialism appears in a correspondent’s report from Egypt in 1884:12

    It was most unlikely, indeed well nigh impossible, that in the event of a rebel advance on Upper Egypt Halfa would be in the enemy’s line of march, and the poverty of the village rendered it secure against the raids of looting parties. The railway stores, however, needed protection, against foes, as was then thought, nearer to us than the Mahdi’s declared leaders …. Along the bank, between the station and the village, lies scattered nigh £1,000,000 worth of railway material of every kind …. The arrival of English troops has worked numerous and rapid changes in the appearance of Halfa. The hitherto slumbering railway workshops are now lively and hideous with the grating of saws on metal, the squeaking of steam drills, the clatter of hammers, and all the thousand sounds attendant on active labour. (“The Nile”)

    The first two lines here recall the “Letter to the Editor” on county fairs, insofar as they suggest that the threat of looting along the railways comes not only from armed forces, but also from more dispersed, anonymous populations, the “offscouring of the home counties” in the letter’s version. The report on Halfa’s rail station eschews such colorful language, opting instead to mark the threat more obliquely, as “foes … nearer to us than the Mahdi’s declared leaders.” With this line, the report’s author alludes at once to a generalized threat of brigandage and to the local context (and to earlier reports on Egypt published by the Times), insofar as British officers had blamed the looting of Alexandria and adjacent cities in 1882 on troops opposed to European rule, who purportedly had disguised themselves as local residents.13 In any case, the underlying view is that railway infrastructures are perpetually vulnerable to looting, whether by armies or by local, non-insurgent populations.14 As the dispatch from Halfa tells it, British officers’ recognition of this generalized vulnerability spurred them to occupy the rail station and to compel Egyptian men to work on the materials ready to hand—a decision also explained in terms of a desire to overcome the forces of rust and idleness. Given their capital-intensity and propensity to fall into disrepair, railway infrastructures thus seemed to call for the establishment of territorially dispersed forms of governance and labor discipline. The emergence, during the era of high imperialism, of such territorial logics of rule, linked to the ramification of capital-intensive circulatory systems, thus marked a key shift in the relation of the state to proletarianized and colonized populations. To use Joshua Clover’s language: with the fin de siècle turn toward territorial logics of rule, the state moved nearer to such populations, orchestrating in more intimate ways their lives and premature deaths.

    From Colony to Metropole

    In the parade of nineteenth-century references to looting reproduced above, we’ve seen that certain periodizing distinctions can be made with respect to patterns of usage. In the decade or so after the 1857 uprising of colonial Indian soldiers, questions of military discipline were centrally at issue in most of the references to looting that appeared in the Times of London, the primary source base for this study.15 By the 1880s, while such issues had not fallen out of looting’s discursive field, the problem of anonymous expropriations along trade infrastructures had come to the fore. Cutting across these broad, temporally defined clusters, though, were certain persistent demarcations, some of which come into focus insofar as we consider looting’s recognized agents and legitimate punishments. With respect to the former, there was a persistent tendency to racialize looting—that is, to assume that racialized populations were prone to looting, while unseeing the systemic looting perpetrated by white Europeans. Some seepage between these racial demarcations occurs, however, through discourses of criminality and, secondarily, of class.

    In 1879, a letter writer could express anxiety at looting perpetrated by the “undiluted offscouring of the home counties.” The Times also ran stories on Italian railway workers’ looting of respectable passengers’ bags (“Luggage”), and participated in the general uproar following an 1886 unemployment demonstration held in London by the Social Democratic Federation, which turned by late evening into a window-smashing and goods-taking affair along West End boulevards. At the conclusion of unsuccessful legal prosecutions of SDF agitators, official opinion and the public discourse of the radicals were in consensus that the looting had been perpetrated by an incorrigible criminal element that had opportunistically attached itself to the demonstrations, and thus had little if anything to do with the properly political concerns over unemployment articulated by those who stood before the crowd.16

    The riot of 1886 also sparked a debate over municipal policing. While at least one “Letter to the Editor” criticized police use of force against demonstrators, the overwhelming majority of pieces published in the Times expressed outrage that the police had not acted more effectively to prevent or repress rioting. Hearings were held and reforms were announced. The Metropolitan police force was to be expanded, communications and coordination between different divisions of the force were to be improved, and the use of mounted police was to be considered for crowd control situations. While such debates about policing were peppered with references to the policing of colonies, and while coordination between the cavalry and mounted police forces was proposed,17 participants generally took for granted that the use of force against looters and rioters in the metropole should be restrained, and that, except in extreme cases, lethal force should remain out of bounds. This shared view would be tested in 1893, when two miners in Featherstone were shot and killed by soldiers called out to repress a riot at the colliery. Public outcry compelled parliament to hold an inquiry into the shootings, which resulted in the imposition of restrictive conditions on the domestic deployment of military forces—conditions that, as we will see in relation to the mass strikes of 1910–12, were evidently subject to certain unstated exceptions.

    Meanwhile, in the colonies, norms concerning legitimate repressive violence were less stringent and in some ways haphazard. At times, British soldiers faced military discipline for unauthorized forms of looting; at other times, superiors looked the other way, or retroactively authorized the looting that had occurred.18 In contrast, when looters were construed as insurgents or military antagonists, imperial administrators sanctioned the use of fatal violence against suspected looters. In 1886, the same year as the Times was hosting debates about the use of force against London rioters, a series of reports from Burma matter-of-factly noted the number of looters shot and killed by military police: “Colonel Middleton came upon the dacoits while looting a village, and gave them a severe lesson, killing and wounding 30, nearly all Shans” (“Burmah”).19 As we have already seen, logics of race were reproduced by, and enabling of, these discrepant norms of sanctioned violence. Racialized populations—particularly those read as black—were seen by imperial administrators as predisposed to looting, just as their unauthorized acts of taking—that is, their efforts at social reproduction—were more likely to be seen as acts of war, whether or not those doing the taking understood themselves to be insurgent subjects.

    The tensions and racializing fissures of this late imperial discourse of looting were activated and set dramatically in motion following an early-twentieth-century wave of mass strikes in Britain. From 1910 to 1912, British miners, transit employees, and their working-class supporters led a wave of mass strikes that threw key industries of the metropolitan economy into crisis and that brought about pre-revolutionary sequences in a number of British cities and regions, from Liverpool to South Wales. This sequence of class struggles and the aftershocks it registered in parliament can help us see how the late colonial discourse of looting reshaped the discursive terrain of the metropole, but also how discussions of looting in the metropole became occasions for relatively privileged actors to re-articulate discrepant norms of sanctioned violence, or, in Gilmore’s terms, to produce and exploit “group-differentiated vulnerability to premature death.” In response to the mass strikes of 1910–12, Winston Churchill and other representatives of Westminster infamously called the military against mass picketers, first during the 1910 Rhondda riots in the South Wales coalfields, and then again during the transit strikes of 1911. In the small South Wales city of Llanelli, soldiers deployed to ensure the continued operation of railway systems shot and killed two picketers in the summer of 1911. The attack followed bayonet charges against mass picketers, who had gathered at the central rail crossing in order to prevent trains from passing. After the shooting, soldiers retired to the safety of the station, while enraged working class residents looted and burned a hundred or so railway carriages, as well as the warehouse owned by a local notable seen as having encouraged the deployment of soldiers.

    Around the time of the shooting in Llanelli, national railway unionists agreed to state-mediated settlement terms with rail owners, winning little more than a government inquiry into the question of union recognition. The close of the strike was followed by protests in London against military repression, by a wave of anti-Semitic looting in South Wales (which followed the anti-Chinese riots that had occurred in Cardiff around the time of the strike [Greenberg; “Renewed Riots”; Cayford]), and by parliamentary debates on the legitimacy of Churchill’s decision to deploy troops. Keir Hardie, an Independent Labour representative from Methyr Tydfil, took up the case against the Home Secretary.

    In attempting to justify the deployment of troops, Churchill portrayed the national railway strike as a threat to the survival of working class British populations, insisting that, “had the stoppage continued for a fortnight, it is, I think, almost certain that in a great many places to a total lack of employment would have been added absolute starvation. … I do not know whether in the history of the world such a danger has been known” (“House of Commons”). Given the threat of mass starvation, Churchill implied, two working class deaths at the hands of military forces acting to ensure the circulation of trains should be weighed as relatively minor, justifiable losses. In suggesting that the strike threatened mass starvation to an historically-unprecedented degree, and that the smooth circulation of transit infrastructures ensured the proper distribution of food to subordinate populations, Churchill at once repurposed an ideological complex about the salvific effects of rail circulation for starving populations that had been built up by imperial administrators in response to recurrent famines in the Indian subcontinent, and sought to draw his audience toward a shared forgetting of these same recurrent, devastating famines in late-nineteenth-century South Asia—famines that British imperial efforts, including the expansion and securitization of railway networks, had exacerbated and prolonged. With respect to both colonial and metropolitan contexts then, imperial administrators came to maintain a fantasy that the smooth circulation of transit infrastructures indexed the health of local populations. Looting, the direct appropriation of enclosed goods by racialized, subaltern, and/or working-class populations, threatened to puncture this fantasy, suggesting possibilities of taking, sharing, and reproducing life beyond the commodity form or imperial order.

    While Churchill’s overheated defense of his decision to deploy troops involved the active forgetting of British imperial responsibility for famines in South Asia, Keir Hardie’s polemics entailed disavowals of their own. Much more than Churchill, Hardie found use for colonial comparisons. In attempting to downplay the significance of working class looting in South Wales, for example, Hardie noted: “Some working men’s wives had carried away some clothes. Did the right hon. gentleman put that forward as a justification for the employment of troops? Did he forget that during the Boxer rising at Peking, Ladies of title and of presumably good character looted the Palace to an extent that would shame a working man’s wife?” (“House of Commons”. Then again, in defending Llanelli strikers’ efforts to stop trains, Hardie insisted that those on strike

    did not go and shoot the driver or pelt the train with stones. They planted themselves on the rails. There was no finer example of British heroism in history than that of these men placing their lives in peril to advance the cause. (Laughter.) Had that same thing been done on the field of battle hon. members on both sides of the House would have shouted about the courage of the British bulldog. But it was done in a battle which would have far greater consequences for our country than any battle against foreign enemies. (“House of Commons”)

    Hardie attempted in these two moments to cast strikers’ actions in a favorable light by comparing them with the sanctioned—if not, in the former case, widely celebrated—activities of imperial civilians and soldiers. Perhaps in aligning syndicalist and imperial violence, Hardie was seeking to avoid the sort of backlash he had faced in 1908 from settlers in South Africa and from public opinion in Britain for having criticizing British policy in India while on a colonial tour (Hyslop 349–50). In any case, his efforts appear to have been met with scorn in the chamber. Presumably other members of parliament found it absurd to compare working class radicals with imperial soldiers or with Ladies of title; perhaps they also saw in his remarks an implicit challenge to the colonial unseeing of white looting. But more was at stake in Hardie’s colonial comparisons than a challenge to imperial bad faith: his comparisons can also be read symptomatically, as efforts to disavow forms of racial violence in which he, as a representative of Labour, was implicated. As mentioned in passing above, the 1911 Seamen’s strike in Cardiff was characterized by anti-Chinese riots, in which strikers attacked all of the laundries in town owned by Chinese immigrants. Hardie’s attempt to compare looters favorably to the “Ladies of title” whose looting of the Forbidden City would have “shamed a working man’s wife” ironically invoked the specter of more immediate and embodied anti-Chinese violence in South Wales, perpetrated by those whom Hardie sought to defend.

    The case of Keir Hardie in 1911 opens up the matter of European class radicalisms’ historical complicities with empire and white supremacy, in this way complicating a too-easy alignment of metropolitan working class expropriations with anti-colonial and anti-racist insurgencies—an alignment implied in the above paragraph’s reference to the possibilities of taking, sharing, and reproducing life glimpsed in histories of looting. In his debate with Churchill, Hardie drew upon colonial frameworks in order to insist that white working class British subjects should be granted certain prerogatives, including to acts of direct appropriation and to embodied violence in defense of their interests – prerogatives denied as a matter of course to colonized and racialized populations. In this way, his class radicalism was bound up with a defense of imperial whiteness. The coloniality of Hardie’s justificatory discourse of looting should give those of us interested in recuperating this tactic for ongoing struggles occasion for critical reflexivity. For if, as Joshua Clover notes, the riot has “come down” to the deindustrialized West from a long history of class radicalism, and has “come inward” from periphery to core, part of what this historical lineage presents to us is a history of the white riot, or a history of imperial looting. An adequate theory of looting – including a theory attentive to the potentials of this tactic in the present – should thus account for the coloniality of the category. Any emancipatory recuperation of looting as a tactic of class struggle must contend with the category’s longstanding co-implication with colonial relations of power, passing through this history rather than attempting to articulate, sui generis, a politics of looting for our deindustrialized, post-colonial present.

    The notion of looting entered the English language in nineteenth-century colonial India, a deindustrialized carceral society, and was carried across the second British Empire by telegraph lines, trains, and steamships, which were at once infrastructures of circulation, media of communication, and technologies of war. The term was integral to emergent discourses of race, as it worked to naturalize group-differentiated vulnerability to premature death: pervasive white looting was systemically naturalized and disavowed; acts of direct appropriation by racialized populations, particularly on and around transit infrastructures, were seen as looting and formed a pretext for state murder. These historical realities continue to weigh on the present. The early history of looting helps us see the ways the (discursive, infrastructural, and other) technologies of circulation that daily animate the present are form-determined by the racial necropolitics of (post)modernity.

    Footnotes

    1. The formulation here concerning the racializing effects of transit and other infrastructures in colonial contexts is indebted to Nemser.

    2. Another such category, instrumental to the East India Company’s policing of road systems in 1830s India, was “Thuggee” (an etymological predecessor of the contemporary anti-Black category, “thug”), which referred to an alleged cult whose members were said to engage in highway robbery and murder.

    3. See also Our Correspondent.

    4. On the guarding of food stores, see also FB.

    5. The family metaphor here is not accidental. British fathers not infrequently composed Letters to the Editor defending their sons from charges of looting. Thomas Cape, for example, wrote the Times in 1858 to note that he had

    seen private letters and Indian newspapers with reference to this sad affair, but more immediately connected with my son, and I feel assured that nothing was further from the thoughts of those two young and gallant officers than ‘looting.’ One letter was from my son’s superior officer, who speaks in the highest terms of his good conduct and soldierly bearing. It appears to me, from the concurrent testimony of many persons, that there is not the slightest ground for such a charge. It is very hard upon a bereaved father, having lost a brave and beloved son, only 19 years and a half old, to see his character thus reflected upon.

    See also The Father of a Soldier.

    6. See, for example, “House of Commons, Friday, May 27”; D et al.; One Who Was There; Foley.

    7. On the racialization of looting, see also “Holborn”; “The Rebels.”

    8. An interesting exception, from 1861:

    The Presidency of Bengal, as will be seen by the letter of our Calcutta correspondent, is in a very angry state. From the largest to the smallest every pot is bubbling away at boiling point. There is not a contented mind or tranquil tongue in all the province. In the rural districts the Indigo manufacturers have shut up their factories for lack of labourers, and are crying aloud to be delivered from Mr. Grant, to whom they attribute that their Ryots have turned out upon the “strike,” looting and pillaging and blockading the factories against all who were willing to labour. (“London”)

    9. On gratuitous anti-black violence, see Wilderson; RL.

    10. Cf. Lindqvist.

    11. The railway was constructed between 1852 and 1855. Something like 12,000 workers died over the three-year construction process.

    12. On railway imperialism, see Davis et al.

    13. See, for example: Our Correspondents, “The Destruction”; “Egypt,” 17 July 1882; “Egypt,” 24 Aug. 1882; “(By Eastern Company’s Cable”; and “Egypt,” 22 Sept. 1882; “House of Lords.”

    14. An illustration of this perennial exposure of rail infrastructures to minor acts of appropriation can be found in recent reports of organized efforts to take goods from train cars stationed overnight along Chicago’s rail lines and in yards. See, for example, Delgado.

    15. As is probably evident by now, the research process underlying this essay began with a keyword search for “looting” in the digitized archive of the London Times – a research technique that has only become possible in the last decade or so. Such an approach is not without its problems: aside from the scanning technology’s inevitable misapprehensions (so many references to “a proper footing” and to “Tooting, London”…), more consequentially, as Lara Putnam has argued, it offers merely a window into the ways the empire talked publicly to itself about its everyday incidences of violence (377–402). While this archive, as sorted by the keyword search, is marked by at least occasional dissonances and counter-imperial voices, its critical potential lies more in the possibilities it offers for tracking official histories of concepts, and for attending to the chance encounters of seemingly unrelated, though nearly simultaneous news items, reports from the colonies, parliamentary transcripts, and letters to the editor. In Imagined Communities, Benedict Anderson, drawing upon Benjamin’s On the Concept of History, suggested that newspapers and novels have been organized above all by the temporality of meanwhile: “The structure of the old-fashioned novel,” he writes, “is clearly a device for the presentation of simultaneity in ‘homogenous, empty time,’ or a complex gloss upon the word ‘meanwhile’” (25). In tracking references to particular keywords in the Times, it is possible to see the ways that similar discursive complexes were mobilized simultaneously in disparate settings, or the ways that differences in setting (i.e., colonies versus metropole) correspond with differences in usage. Tracking references over time also allows us to trace the way that a category makes the jump from one colonial context to another, and from colony to metropole. Thus, the research method employed here offers a way to see the simultaneities and chance encounters of the imperial paper—to traverse Anderson’s meanwhile—while also opening onto historical questions concerning change over time. Anderson himself takes up a similar project in Under Three Flags, which charts the trajectories of repressive technologies and of anti-colonial and anarchist politics as these forces circulate between Cuba, Spain, the Philippines, and other sites within and beyond the late Spanish Empire.

    16. “The Unemployed”; “There”; “The Social Democrats”; “The Monster Meeting”; “We”; “House of Commons, Friday, Feb. 26.”; “Central Criminal Court.”

    17. See A Well-Wisher and West-End; “The Police.”

    18. Cf. “China,” 26 Feb. 1858.

    19. See also “Upper Burmah”; Hallett.

    Works Cited

    • Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism. Rev. ed., Verso, 2006.
    • ———. Under Three Flags: Anarchism and the Anti-Colonial Imagination. Verso, 2006.
    • Arnold, David. “Looting, Grain Riots and Government Policy in South India, 1918.” Past & Present, vol. 84, no. 1, Aug. 1979, pp. 111–145.
    • Benton, Lauren. A Search for Sovereignty: Law and Geography in European Empires, 1400–1900. Cambridge UP, 2009.
    • “The British Army in India.” Times [London], 31 May 1858, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • “Burmah.” Times [London], 8 Jan. 1886, p. 5. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • Cape, Thomas. “Lieutenants Thackwell and Cape.” Times [London], 17 May 1858, p. 10. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • Cayford, Joanne. “In Search of ‘John Chinaman’: Press Representations of the Chinese in Cardiff, 1906–1911.” Llafur: The Journal of the Society for the Study of Welsh Labour History, vol. 5, no. 4, 1991, pp. 37–50.
    • “Central America.” Times [London], 6 Apr. 1885, p. 3. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “Central America, Although a Considerable Region.” Times [London], 7 Apr. 1885, p. 7. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “Central Criminal Court, April 10.” Times [London], 12 Apr. 1886, p. 7. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • “China.” Times [London], 26 Feb. 1858, pp. 9+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 7 Dec. 2015.
    • “China.” Times [London], 30 Mar. 1858, p. 6. Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • Clover, Joshua. Riot. Strike. Riot: The New Era of Uprisings. Verso, 2016.
    • D, et al. “The Summer Palace at Pekin.” Times [London], 11 Mar. 1874, p. 12. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 15 Dec. 2015.
    • Das, Dilip K., and Arvind Verma. “The Armed Police in the British Colonial Tradition: The Indian Perspective.” Policing: An International Journal of Police Strategies & Management, vol. 21, no. 2, 1998, pp. 354–367.
    • Davis, Angela. “Race, Gender, and Prison History: From the Convict Lease System to the Supermax Prison.” Prison Masculinities, edited by Donald Sabo et al., Temple UP, 2001, pp. 35–45.
    • Davis, Clarence, et al., editors. Railway Imperialism. Praeger, 1991.
    • Davis, Mike. Late Victorian Holocausts: El Niño Famines and the Making of the Third World. Verso, 2000.
    • Delgado, Jennifer. “8 Accused in Theft Ring That Took $2.8 Million in Cargo, Cars.” Chicago Tribune, 24 Mar. 2014.
    • Dillon, Stephen. “Possessed by Death: The Neoliberal-Carceral State, Black Feminism, and the Afterlife of Slavery.” Radical History Review, vol. 2012, no. 112, Winter 2012, pp. 113–125.
    • FB. “The Cyclone at Masulipatam.” Times [London], 12 Dec. 1864, p. 5. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • The Father of a Soldier. “To the Editor of the Times.” Times [London], 18 Mar. 1858, p. 10. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 7 Dec. 2015.
    • Foley, George. “The Summer Palace at Pekin.” Times [London], 14 Mar. 1874, p. 12. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 15 Dec. 2015.
    • Gilmore, Ruth Wilson. Golden Gulag: Prisons, Surplus, Crisis, and Opposition in Globalizing California. U of California P, 2007.
    • Goswami, Manu. Producing India: From Colonial Economy to National Space. U of Chicago P, 2004.
    • Greenberg, L.J. “The Jews in Wales.” Times [London], 5 Sept. 1911, p. 8. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 14 Dec. 2015.
    • Guha, Ramachandra, and Madhav Gadgil. “State Forestry and Social Conflict in British India,” Past & Present, vol. 123, no. 1, May 1989, pp. 141–177.
    • Hallett, Holt S. “Blundering in Burmah.” Times [London], 6 Oct. 1886, pp. 3+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • Hartman, Saidiya. Lose Your Mother: A Journey Along the Atlantic Slave Route. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 2008.
    • ———. Scenes of Subjection: Terror, Slavery, and Self-Making in Nineteenth-Century America. Oxford UP, 1997.
    • Hinton, Elizabeth. From the War on Poverty to the War on Crime. Harvard UP, 2016.
    • “Holborn.” The Times [London], 28 Dec. 1874, p. 4. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • “House of Commons.” Times [London], 23 Aug. 1911: 4+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed. 14 Dec. 2015.
    • “House of Commons, Friday, Feb. 26.” Times [London], 27 Feb. 1886, pp. 8+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • “House of Commons, Friday, May 27.” Times [London], 28 May 1870, pp. 6+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • “House of Lords, Thursday, August 3.” Times [London], 4 Aug. 1882, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • Hyslop, Jonathan. “The World Voyage of James Keir Hardie: Indian Nationalism, Zulu Insurgency and the British Labour Diaspora, 1907–1908.” Journal of Global History, vol. 1, no. 3, Nov. 2006, pp. 343–362.
    • “India.” Times [London], 21 Apr. 1845, pp. 5+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 7 Dec. 2015.
    • “India.” Times [London], 23 Nov. 1891, p. 5. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • “The Insurrection at Panama.” Times [London], 27 Apr. 1885, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “Latest Intelligence.” Times [London], 16 Nov. 1896, pp. 5+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 14 Dec. 2015.
    • Lindqvist, Sven. A History of Bombing. Translated by Linda Haverty Rugg, The New Press, 2003.
    • “London, Monday, January 28, 1861.” Times [London], 28 Jan. 1861, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • Lowe, Lisa. The Intimacies of Four Continents. Duke UP, 2015.
    • “Luggage Robberies on Italian Railways.” Times [London], 10 Apr. 1880, p. 14. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 9 Dec. 2015.
    • Mitchell, Katharyne. “Pre-Black Futures.” Antipode, vol. 41, no. s1, Jan. 2010, pp. 239–261.
    • “The Monster Meeting, Organized Yesterday in.” Times [London], 22 Feb. 1886, p. 9. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • Nemser, Daniel. Infrastructures of Race: Concentration and Biopolitics in Colonial Mexico. U of Texas P, 2017.
    • “The Nile Expedition.” Times [London], 16 Oct. 1884, p. 3. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • One Who Was There. “The Summer Palace at Pekin.” Times [London], 13 Mar. 1874, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 15 Dec. 2015.
    • Our Correspondent. “India.” Times [London], 14 Jan. 1892, p. 5. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 13 Dec. 2015.
    • Our Correspondents. “(By Eastern Company’s Cable).” Times [London], 26 Aug. 1882, p. 5. The Times Digital Archive. 10 Dec. 2015
    • ———. “The Destruction of Alexandria.” Times [London], 15 July 1882, p. 7. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 9 Dec. 2015.
    • ———. “Egypt.” Times [London] , 24 Aug. 1882, p. 3. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • ———. “Egypt.” Times [London] , 17 July 1882, pp. 5+. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 9 Dec. 2015.
    • ———. “Egypt.” Times [London] , 22 Sept. 1882, p, 3. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “The Police and the Mob.” Times [London] , 19 Oct. 1887, p. 7. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • Premansukumar, Bandyopadhyay. Indian Famine and Agrarian Problems. Star Publications, 1987.
    • Putnam, Lara. “The Transnational and the Text-Searchable.” AHR, vol. 121, no. 2, Apr. 2016, pp. 377–402.
    • Quousque Tandem? “Country Fairs.” Times [London], 5 Feb. 1879, p. 10. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 9 Dec. 2015.
    • RL. “Wanderings of the Slave: Black Life and Social Death.” Mute Magazine, 5 June 2013.
    • “The Rebels and the Imperialists in China.” Times [London], 29 Sept. 1863, p. 10. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 8 Dec. 2015.
    • “Renewed Riots in South Wales.” Times [London], 23 Aug. 1911, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 14 Dec. 2015.
    • “The Revolt in Cuba.” Times [London], 18 May 1895, p. 9. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 14 Dec. 2015.
    • Sinha, Mrinalini. Colonial Masculinity: The ‘Manly Englishman’ and the ‘Effeminate Bengali’ in the Late Nineteenth Century. Manchester UP, 1995.
    • “The Social Democrats in Hyde-Park.” Times [London], 22 Feb. 1886, p. 7. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • Steedman, Carolyn. Policing the Victorian Community: The Formation of English Provincial Police Forces, 1856–1880. Routledge, 1984.
    • “There is Serious Work before the New Home.” Times [London], 9 Feb. 1886, p. 9. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “The Unemployed in London.” Times [London], 9 Feb. 1886, p. 6. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 10 Dec. 2015.
    • “Upper Burmah.” Times [London], 12 Feb. 1886, p. 8. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • A Well-Wisher to Order and Liberty and West-End. “The Police and The Mob.” Times [London], 27 Oct. 1887, p. 13. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • “We Print in Full This Morning the Report of the.” Times [London], 24 Feb. 1886, p. 9. The Times Digital Archive. Accessed 11 Dec. 2015.
    • Wilderson, Frank B. Red, White & Black: Cinema and the Structure of U.S. Antagonisms. Duke UP, 2010.
  • Two Girls2: Sedgwick + Berlant, Relational and Queer

    Two Girls2: Sedgwick + Berlant, Relational and Queer

    Gila Ashtor (bio)
    Tufts University

    Abstract

    This essay asks what relationality has to do with self-transformation by analysing Lauren Berlant’s reading of Mary Gaitskill’s novel, “Two Girls, Fat and Thin,” an essay in which Berlant reads her own relationship to Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick through the novel’s lens. This essay explores the limitations of queer and affect theory to challenge the conventional psychoanalytic interpretive regime. It problematizes the Lacanian foundations of contemporary critical theory by demonstrating the failure of existing explanatory paradigms. Through a sustained engagement with Jean Laplanche, this essay elaborates an alternative metapsychological account of transformation and queer relationality.

    This essay asks what does relationality have to do with self-transformation. This essay poses this question by first exploring the ways that efforts in contemporary critical and literary theory to explain complex relational psychic experiences can be traced back to an unreflective reliance on applied Lacanian psychoanalysis. The essay ends by drawing on Jean Laplanche’s radical innovations in metapsychology to develop new narrative trajectories for the ways that knowledge is, relationally, transmitted and transformative. At the essay’s center is my encounter with Mary Gaitskill’s novel, Two Girls, Fat and Thin, and with Lauren Berlant’s essay on Gaitskill’s novel by the same name, “Two Girls, Fat and Thin.” And because I first discovered this text while Berlant was my teacher and I was her student, my critical encounter with Gaitskill is also about my pedagogic encounter with Berlant.

    The particular “girls” named by the dyad vary depending on whether it is Gaitskill’s novel (Dorothy/Justine), Berlant’s essay (Lauren/Eve), or my paper (Gila/Lauren); in every iteration the “two girls” functions as a formulation of the relationship between two girls in the moment of some kind of learning. Although Gaitskill has a distinctive place in contemporary American literature as an author of sexually and psychologically subversive fiction, and Berlant is unique in her prominence as an influential critic in both queer and affect theory, Two Girls is unusual among Gaitskill’s works for using each girl’s different relationship to a transformative teacher as the context for drawing out whatever intimacy they already or eventually share, and Berlant’s essay is not an intervention in Gaitskill’s critical reception so much as an occasion to reflect on the relationship between trauma and history via her own intimacy with, and juxtaposition to, fellow queer/affect theorist Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick. That is, rather than being exemplary of each thinker’s abiding formal or thematic interests, “two girls” has the status of being unusual in each thinker’s repertoire (Gaitskill has two protagonists, instead of one, who take turns narrating the story, and Berlant, who avowedly resists the tropes of self-experience, threads her close reading through autobiography). My choice of these atypical texts magnified the curiosity of my own critical agenda: after all, even though I might find a clever way to justify these object choices, there is, perhaps, the crude arithmetic embarrassment that by the time one counts my own trauma/history as well as my own pedagogic relation to Berlant, there are enough traumatized girls in any given sentence to feel uneasy and discouraged about the chances that critique can be anything other than a feat of extraordinary sublimation. In the name of high theory I often found myself wondering: how many “two girls” is too many girls?

    By this I mean that I was suspicious of my motives. After all, isn’t it unequivocally the case that nothing quite screams Oedipal rivalry like a younger thinker writing critically about an older one? In fact, for months the ostensible obviousness of this rhetorical/interpersonal act deterred me from approaching these texts. All I could think was that in my endeavor to problematize existing models of pedagogic transformation, I was challenging my own teacher’s explanatory paradigm, and in so doing, didn’t my radical critique of anxious influence sink before it ever sailed? Harold Bloom has most forcefully linked these terms together in The Anxiety of Influence (1973), a text that suggests that all relations between younger and older writers could be explicable as some version of the paternal drama and all creative difference as agonistic overthrowing. Maternalizing this dynamic hasn’t done much to radically challenge the explanatory hegemony of Freud’s metapsychological account, even imagining a softer, daughterly push between women – insofar as it presumes the familiar psychoanalytic teleology of transformation – invariably retains the symbolic coordinates of an Oedipal showdown.

    Naturally, I bristled at the reduction of critical thought to such primitive psychological gestures, as if the need to compete, defy, or overcome my teacher offered an appropriate explanation for my argument or object choices. I grew sometimes weary, sometimes hysterical upon noticing how defensive my self-justifications seemed (there’s no such thing as objectivity! critique is hardly the most efficient means of differentiation! difference is a tribute, not a method of retaliation!). It wasn’t difficult to concede that I was probably squeamish about my ambition, and aggression, but even when I allowed that this was something I probably needed to work through, a theoretical problem nagged at me: what was the distinctiveness of pedagogic relationality if self-transformation was always and only a reaction to the parental bond? And then I realized: what kind of motivational paradigm situates the relationship before the psychic events it enables? Wasn’t the incoherence of these tropes, and critical theory’s uncritical deployment of them, precisely the object of this critique? By using an idea of paternity as the template for all development, the Freudian/Bloomian topos of transformation generates a confused model of psychic motivation that somehow treats all the contortions of becoming as a reaction against relating rather than as emblematic of the way the pedagogic form is itself already the response to a constellation of common, overlapping questions. Enforcing linear causality belies the distinctiveness of transformational phenomena. As a result, equating each figure in the dyad with its ostensibly transparent chronological position arrantly and incongruously misplaces the way the motivation to relate comes from the experience of having one’s own knowledge challenged and provoked by its dynamic relation to the knowledge of another.

    And so, what if intellectual filiation did not need, necessarily, to culminate in the declared supersession of someone else’s thought, but could become instead the occasion for elaborating impact and relation? I want my way of reading to be a practice in the relating I seek to describe. That said, reading and relating are not in opposition here. This essay is an argument that uses style to put pressure on the way kinship is conceptualized. Throughout, I want what I’ll be calling “resonance” – the kinetic force that registers relation – to appear legible yet apart from relationality’s existing tropological forms. This is, I believe, the dehiscence that Berlant shows us Gaitskill enables, and that Berlant uses Lacan to stitch closed.

    Reading Berlant Reading Two Girls

    Lauren Berlant’s essay, “Two Girls, Fat and Thin,” is a powerful account of the connection between imagining alternative relational modes that are not reducible to conventional plots of desire and belonging, on the one hand, and understanding psychic subjectivities as too functionally incoherent and structurally inconsistent to be assimilated into dominant paradigms of attachment, history, and sociality, on the other.1 The novel tells the story of two girls who, in different but formally similar ways, are each abused by those entrusted with loving them; embody their damaged psyches through an array of compulsive fixations; and in varying degrees of rage, lethargy, and disappointment, negate psychic itineraries that promise either redemption or cure. Summarizing the book’s psycho-affective landscape, Berlant writes:

    Justine’s response to Dorothy is at first like Dorothy’s to her – a desire to tell a hard story to a stranger to whom she feels averse, followed by confusion about that impulse lived as ambivalence toward the person who animates it. Far more impersonal than Dorothy, Justine has a slower emotional metabolism (yet Dorothy is the fat one, Justine the thin), but eventually she returns to Dorothy, sensing that Dorothy knows something that Justine cannot bear to know on her own. This meeting and return frame the book. … We witness them growing up paralyzed by fear and at the same time launching into madnesses of thinking, reading, eating, masturbating, attaching, and fucking. … If she wants a good life, what’s a girl, or two girls, to do? When does the doing matter? (Cruel Optimism 128–9)

    The two girls of the novel meet through a shared interest in Anna Granite, the once famous and hypnotic Ayn Rand-like leader of social and intellectual movement/cult called Definitism. Dorothy was infatuated by her and left college to work for her, and Justine is now writing an article about her. With the prospective article as the novel’s organizing center, the story traces the awkward conversations between these two girls, who, except for a common investment in Granite, are strangers to each other. The girls keep meeting to discuss Dorothy’s firsthand experience of Granite as a teacher/leader and repeatedly find themselves instead, or in parallel, swapping stories about their lives. But rather than eventually maturing into a more typical or recognizable kind of relating, the intimacy between these girls extends without ever quite graduating into a “normal” form. Much like the “fat” and “thin” of the novel’s title, each girl seems to retain her essential size and shape throughout the novel, as if to literalize that they never merge into a unit/couple, and that neither girl ever loses or gains any weight from having taken in the other. This homeostatic situation threatens to buckle under the pressure of the novel’s end, when Dorothy feels betrayed and enraged by the scathing article Justine has written on Definitism, goes over to her house intending confrontation, but instead interrupts a dangerous S/M encounter, scares the guy away and rather than unleashing her meticulous diatribe, takes Justine’s naked, wounded body into her arms. But then, instead of climax or a breakthrough, they rest together and fall asleep.

    Berlant describes the novel’s ending as “not a lesbian ending, exactly, since exhaustion is neither sex, love, nor object choice” but at the same time is “not nothing, it’s something else” (“Two Girls” 152). This is just one example of Berlant’s indefatigable commitment to protect the possibility of perplexing subtlety in strange and sometimes bewildering personal and interpersonal moments from the critic’s interpretive overreach. One way that she navigates this critical project is by continually breathing air into dominant explanatory frameworks, coaxing her peers to try (at least once?) trading their attachment to certainty for thought-experiments with non-coherence. In another such characteristic moment, Berlant writes:

    In this habit of representing the intentional subject, a manifest lack of self-cultivating attention can easily become recast as irresponsibility, shallowness, resistance, refusal, or incapacity; and habit itself can begin to look deeply overmeaningful, such that addition, reaction formation, conventional gesture clusters, or just being different can be read as heroic placeholders for resistance to something, affirmation of something, or a transformative desire. (“Two Girls” 99)

    For Berlant, it could never be critically responsible to merely impugn people for trying, in her words, to “stay afloat” in the world under conditions of precarity and near-chronic oppression, nor could the epistemological comfort of any simple anti-formalism explain with any generosity or ingenuity how a subject can be something other than “performatively sovereign” or not “deeply overmeaningful,” and how a subject’s ways of being may be something other than “heroic placeholders for resistance to something, affirmation of something, or a transformative desire.” Berlant unrelentingly deshames the value (and necessity) of binding oneself to a life raft by insisting that any analysis involving what people do to survive must seek out language that strives to capture the infinite subtlety of experiential encounters. In this way, Berlant keeps showing that no matter how sophisticatedly posed, assailing attachment for being “ideological” leads too automatically to judging people’s efforts to manage their lives – and thereby bolsters the ideological apparatus that is meant to be critiqued.

    Perhaps because of the idiosyncratic way that the personal/psychological and the social/ideological are inextricably interdependent in Berlant’s analysis, her work is among the closest that contemporary critical theory comes to using the close-reading of a text in order to endeavor a defense of what motivates people to do whatever weird and confusing things they do, in the paradoxical and inexplicable ways they do it. Berlant’s wariness of the “overmeaningful” and “performatively sovereign” subject challenges the way psychology is typically deployed, where “a manifest lack of self-cultivating attention can easily become recast as irresponsibility, shallowness, resistance, refusal, or incapacity.” In so doing, her work can be seen to compliment and powerfully extend the range of queer and affect theory’s critical mission to unhinge psychological acts and identities from habituated tropes of a normativizing interpretive determinism. But what I show in reading the two readings of Berlant’s essay – her reading of Gaitskill’s novel and her own relationship to Sedgwick – is that, although Berlant’s analytic practice is rigorously less deterministic than conventional mobilizations of theory, the version of psychoanalysis it uses renders it ultimately no less relationally determined.

    I explore the way Berlant’s essay simultaneously elaborates the superabundance of what connects people to each other, and refuses to allow the specificity of those connections to matter. Throughout its tour de force dilation of the ways all four girls are brought into relation, Berlant’s essay performs being transformed by particular others while at the same time insisting on transformation as the formal effect of non-relational encounters. Given her singular purchase on the way interiority and ideology are inextricably linked, Berlant wants to emphasize that relationships can be powerful without being over-determined. For example, the way Berlant describes meeting Sedgwick (“She gave a paper, and we talked about it. Years later, I gave one, and she listened to it. She wrote another book, and I read it”) versus her account of being impacted by her (“For me, though, the luck of encountering her grandiosity … is of unsurpassable consequence”) seems deliberately to choreograph as a tension how little you can know the other person versus how transformed by them you can become (“Two Girls” 126) Dedramatization as a stylistic device is a powerful antidote to the inflated narratives of true love and true selves, love that occurs at first sight and the kind that completes you. But whereas Gaitskill amplifies the girls’ entanglement to intensify epistemological pressure, Berlant collapses indeterminacy and structuralism to abrogate the question of what brings and holds these girls together.

    Applying Lacan and the “poetics of misrecognition” (Two Girls” 122), Berlant turns each girl into a “placeholder” (99) that both “take personally but that has, in a sense, nothing to do with anything substantive about each other, except insofar as each woman functions formally as an enigmatic opportunity for something transformative” (127).2 Indeed, only a paragraph earlier Berlant points out that the girls’ names, Dorothy Never and Justine Shade, are “shades of The Wizard of Oz, Pale Fire, and Justine” (127), and in the accompanying footnote, that the novel’s literary history “requires a story of its own” (286). But this reference to Nabokov and the repetition of “shade” might signal more than just the novel’s general literariness and indicate instead a more substantial connection between Gaitskill’s and Nabokov’s fictional projects. It is, after all, with a passage from a different Nabokov text (Speak, Memory) that Gaitskill’s own novel begins:

    All one could do was to glimpse, amid the haze and chimeras, something real ahead, just as persons endowed with an unusual persistence of diurnal cerebration are able to perceive in their deepest sleep, somewhere beyond the throes of an entangled and inept nightmare, the ordered reality of the waking hour. (qtd. in Gaitskill, Two Girls 10)

    We are reminded here that Nabokov’s technical virtuosity is singularly focused on tracking his obsession with the occult underpinnings of human behavior. Not only is Nabokov’s oeuvre distinguished by its experimental preoccupations with doppelgängers (a pair of Nabokovian “two girls” might really be “one”?), but this prefatory passage also expressly establishes the provocative dissonance between what we see and what we follow.

    Therefore, although Berlant’s essay captures and recreates the rich panoply of relational dyads and dynamics, it does so in order to repeatedly hollow out the relational mechanisms of any meaningful content, and to insist systematically that what underlies relationality must be either determinable or “hav[e] nothing to do with anything substantive about each other” (“Two Girls” 127). This repudiation of “anything substantive” is an extreme alternative to exegetic density; the choice between a claustrophobic hermeneutics and a permissive one is an ultimatum that prefigures Berlant’s conflation of biography with psychology in the context of a text that seems so deliberately and with such virtuosity to crank up the tension between “everygirl” and peculiar ones, oracular forces and the mundane. The Marxist observation that even generic types can have eccentric variations seems insufficiently able to explain the novel’s experimental logic, because instead of recuperating agency, it dramatizes the powerlessness, awkwardness, and erotics with which people are moved towards each other for reasons that are strong and yet just out of perceptual reach. Berlant’s reading is exemplary of the limited critical imagination with which contemporary theory, and affect/queer theory specifically, approaches relationality. Although I mostly treat affect/queer theory as a homogenous discourse in relation to these questions, this essay traces a fundamental difference between Sedgwick and Berlant that is both addressed and absorbed by Berlant’s use of “two girls” as a narrative frame. Specifically, I show that in the name of resisting a kind of pre-structuralist psychoanalytic determinism, relationality, as a mechanism, has been drained of any material and psychological force and diffused instead into an empty “happening” that can determine everything that transpires around it without ever being accessible or worthy of curiosity and definition.

    Theorizing Relationality in Queer/Affect Theory

    If any discourse has seemed interested and equipped to offer a corrective to the limitations of a conventional, and conventionally deterministic, psychoanalytic interpretive regime, affect theory has been the most promising – not least because it uses as its founding text the essay by Eve Sedgwick and Adam Frank, “Shame in the Cybernetic Fold: Reading Silvan Tomkins,” in which Tomkins’s research on “affect” is hailed as the much-needed alternative to critical theory’s overly-psychoanalytic, insufficiently nuanced paradigms of human need and action. Indeed, among queer theorists, Sedgwick has arguably done the most to try to unmoor sexuality studies from its Trieb-centered Freudian base. In Touching Feeling, Sedgwick interrogates

    the post-Romantic “power/knowledge” regime that Foucault analyzes, the one that structures and propagates the repressive hypothesis, follows the Freudian understanding that one physiological drive – sexuality, libido, desire – is the ultimate source, and hence in Foucault’s word is seen to embody the “truth,” of human motivation, identity and emotion. (17–18)

    Sedgwick and Frank argue that Tomkins’s affect theory dislodges the “one physiological drive”; as a fierce critic of Freudian drive theory, Tomkins long ago insisted on untying the knots made by confusing biological needs with emotional ones. As Tomkins writes,

    in the concepts of orality, the hunger drive mechanism was confused with the dependency-communion complex, which from the beginning is more general than the need for food and the situation of being fed. In the concept of anality, the elimination drive mechanism had been confused with the contempt-shame humiliation complex… While it is true that oral, anal and sexual aspects of these complexes are deeply disturbing and central to the psychopathology of many individuals, aspects not emphasized by Freud are more disturbing and more central to the psychopathology of others. (Shame 34)

    Although Tomkins does not directly address “relating” as a distinctive psychological mechanism, his work is groundbreaking in part due to its reorientation away from the tendency to theorize the subject in isolation and toward its imbrication in affective states, the environment, and others.

    Sedgwick’s use of Tomkins to insist on a new and different motivational structure avowedly compels a reevaluation of dominant explanatory models. While this call for nuance is not aimed at relationality specifically, the critical exasperation with “over-meaningful” accounts of psychic action, and with interpretive limitedness more generally, promises fresh attention to dimensions of experience that have until now been systematically neglected. In their introduction to The Affect Theory Reader, Melissa Gregg and Gregory J. Seigworth write:

    Almost all of the tried-and-true handholds and footholds for so much critical-cultural-philosophical inquiry and for theory – subject/object, representation and meaning, rationality, consciousness, time and space, inside/outside, human/nonhuman, identity, structure, background/foreground, and so forth – become decidedly less sure and more nonsequential … . Because affect emerges out of muddy, unmediated relatedness and not in some dialectical reconciliation of cleanly oppositional elements of primary units, it makes easy compartmentalisms give way to thresholds and tensions, blends and blurs. (4)3

    As both the writing and thinking in this passage illustrate, affect theory is characterized by a language of sensation, of “thresholds and tensions, blends and blurs,” that eludes dominant critical “compartmentalisms” and that, in doing so, insists upon the “muddy, unmediated relatedness” of belonging in the world. This is an incredibly powerful framework, or slipping out from under what with a capital “F” becomes a “framework’s” noose, that testifies to the imaginative and pragmatic opportunities made possible by having “no single, generalizable theory of affect” (3).

    In keeping with its multidisciplinary resources and commitment to expanding the critical and perceptual range of our interpretive practices, affect theory presents a strong theoretical apparatus for reconceptualizing the relational context. Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenological philosophy exerts one of the most crucial influences in this discursive landscape. Not only did Merleau-Ponty seek to undermine Cartesian mind-body dualism by demonstrating that all knowledge was necessarily “embodied,” but his work on perception and psychology further demonstrates that all knowledge is not representational. Teresa Brennan’s “transmission of affect” is extraordinarily helpful in further elucidating the conceptual consequences of reorienting our dominant physiological-psychological divide. Brennan writes that “the taken-for-grantedness of the emotionally contained subject is a residual bastion of Eurocentrism in critical thinking” (2); what “the transmission of affect means [is] that we are not self-contained in terms of our energies. There is no secure distinction between the ‘individual’ and the ‘environment”(6).4 This insecure distinction “between the ‘individual’ and the ‘environment’” is important for Brennan because it opens up a new language for tracking embodied experience; “rather than the generational line of inheritance (the vertical line of history), the transmission of affect, conceptually, presupposes a horizontal line of transmission” via “olfaction and the circulation of blood,” hormones, facial expressions, touch (9).. One major claim resulting from this project is that perception is not contingent on representation; or put another way, what we sense of our/another’s affect or experience does not need to be representable in order to be perceptually operative.

    Although opening the door to materialism can often sound like slamming the door on language, in this essay I contend not that affect gets us away from discourse, but that affect theory diversifies our analytic tools by focusing on a world of forces and impacts that are not reducible to, or identical with, those thematized by the structuralist paradigm.5 This intellectual development seems to me like an especially promising innovation for theorizing subjectivity, and metapsychology generally, since it puts back at the center of analysis a rigorous respect for the singular dimensions of experiential life that are necessary to elucidating why people become the people they do, and how that happens. A narrow conceptualization of materialism (one that derogates psychology to immateriality and focuses only on such topics as capitalism or the ecology) or a narrow conceptualization of subjectivity (one that does not consider the conditions for transformation to be material in nature or effect) limits the radical potential of realist philosophy to change the ways that existence in the lifeworld is thought and lived.

    Coextensive with my conviction that metapsychological questions are integral to any materialist philosophical system is my interest in literary criticism as a “practical psychology.” By this I mean that because the exercise of close reading is charged with the task of interpreting human action as it occurs in narrative form, a psychology of the subject is never abstract, or incidental to the explanatory power of hermeneutic engagement. Throughout, I draw upon Jean Laplanche’s theoretical interventions in psychoanalysis to consider the ways that the models of subjectivity currently in use are not inevitable and are open to revision. It follows from this avowedly idiosyncratic use of literary criticism that I do not begin with an established theory of the subject but rather read closely, trying to find one. This methodology is a feature of my project’s commitment to a speculative psychology6 and informs my interest in the ways that affect/queer theory might reimagine new possibilities for understanding subjective life.

    “Textuality” and Relationality

    Dorothy’s account of how she met Justine opens the novel:

    I entered the strange world of Justine Shade via a message on the bulletin board in a laundromat filled with bitterness and the hot breath of dryers. “Writer interested in talking to followers of Anna Granite. Please call -.” It was written in rigorous, precise, feminine print on a modest card displayed amidst dozens of cards, garish Xeroxed sheets, newsprint, and ragged tongues of paper. (11)

    “Textuality” is a literal feature of their relationship and is linked, from the novel’s first words, with a dual sense of casualness and fate; an eleven-word ad “displayed amidst dozens of cards” hardly seems to augur a life-altering event, but then again, what are the chances that the writer of the “index card” and the writer in the index card will be read by someone who both reads index cards in laundromats and happens to be among the former “followers of Anna Granite”? Dorothy draws out the connection between fortuity and accident by saying, somewhat crankily, that “the owners of this laundry establishment seem to have an especially lax policy when it comes to the bulletin board, and upon it any nut can advertise himself” (11). For a moment it doesn’t matter that Dorothy happened upon the “modest card,” it only matters that she almost didn’t. Bemoaning the clutter of idiosyncratic longing, Dorothy’s indignation reflects her discomfort with offhanded characterizations of Granite and meaningfulness generally. However, whereas Dorothy is overwhelmed and indignant that intimacy is mediated by “index cards” and “bulletin boards,” Berlant is buoyed to find that getting to know Sedgwick by reading each other’s books is “one place where the impersonality of intimacy can be transacted without harm to anyone” (“Two Girls” 126).

    Elaborating on Berlant’s formulation, I consider how “textuality” is not only a pattern of interacting through texts but also a model for relating to each other as texts. Here the term “textuality” provides a non-hermeneutic account of psychological engagement. Instead of using “textuality” as a paradigm for all interpretive activity (as, Shaun Gallagher notes, some branches of hermeneutics have),7 I suggest that relationality is amplified when we consider that interpretive reading is not the only way to engage a text. For this speculative rubric I draw on Laplanche’s radical revision of psychoanalytic metapsychology.

    Where Laplanche is cited in queer theoretical discourse it is typically as the author, with J. B. Pontalis, of The Language of Psycho-Analysis (1973), whose ideas were consonant with Freud and Lacan. But for the remainder of his later work, which was extensive, Laplanche vigorously and systematically renounced the concept of “leaning-on” that was so central to his earlier work, and sought instead to develop what he called New Foundations for Psychoanalysis. According to Laplanche, “the connection between the self-preservative, instinctual relationship” and “the sexual drive” has been the dominant question of psychoanalytic theory (Temptation 4), but whereas “leaning-on” posits “a sexuality that emerges by supporting itself or leaning on self-preservation,” (Temptation 27) Laplanche shows instead that this desperate attempt to “save the Freudian hypothesis” (Temptation 5) relies, for its cogency, on the notion that self-preservation can somehow morph into sexual desire. Dominique Scarfone writes that “leaning-on gives the impression that sexuality ‘arises’ from self-preservative situations a bit as the flower blossoms forth from the bud,” and it suggests that if “an instinctual adaptive function persists long enough, the sexual sphere will kick in” (21).8 Laplanche explains:

    I have frequently, and for a long time, criticized such a “creativist” and “illusionist” conception of human sexuality. In Freud these conceptions find their apogee in the theory of the “hallucinatory satisfaction of desire,” which I reject. Indeed, the first real satisfaction can only be the satisfaction of a need; and its reproduction … can only be the reproduction of an alimentary satisfaction. There is in Freud and his successors … a veritable sleight of hand: if the sexual is not present within the original, real experience it will never be rediscovered in the fantasmatic reproduction or the symbolic elaboration of that experience. (Temptation 46)

    Laplanche locates infantile “creativity” in “the ‘drive to translate,’ which comes to the child from the adult message ‘to be translated.’” Laplanche writes: the child’s “creativity … does not in fact go so far as to create sexuality: this is in reality introduced from the earliest intersubjective experience, and introduced by the activity of the adult rather than the infant.” (Temptation 50)

    Laplanche shows why this meticulous differentiation between “instinct” and “drive” is the urgent corrective to Freud’s “biologizing going-astray.” For our purposes, Laplanche’s insistence that a “need” cannot set a “drive” in motion (because they have categorically different economies, sources, and aims) offers a genuinely alternative way of thinking about psychological development because it proposes different motivational lines (self-preservation vs. pleasure) whose relationship to each other is “not one of collaboration or of harmonious blending, but a deeply conflictual relation” (44). Dismissing “the sequence of infantile stages described by Freud [as] a barely credible fiction,” and prying apart “two respective modes of functioning – ‘the pursuit of excitation’ and ‘the pursuit of pleasure in the object,’” Laplanche outlines the profound and original hypothesis that what propels psychological becoming can be simultaneously forceful and enigmatic, external and nowhere we could know. This depiction of the subject’s constitution by its necessary response to an-other’s desire is crucial for what I call “questions.” By “questions,” I refer to the force of the “messages” a subject bears within himself but cannot access, or encounter, on his own.

    If having one’s “questions” reactivated by someone else’s “questions” sounds like science fiction, that isn’t incidental to Nabokov’s effort – through webs of fortuities that stretch realism’s range – to complicate the representation of reality’s operation. We can observe a similar project at work in Gaitskill’s text in the form of Dorothy as someone whose hyper-vigilance about connections and deeper meanings often seems desperately superstitious and vaguely paranoid. For example, after discovering the fateful “index card,” Dorothy says: “When I woke in the afternoon, I called ‘writer’ again. Again, no response. Instead of relief, I felt irritation. Why had this person put his/her number on a bulletin board if he/she didn’t have a machine to take calls? . . . ‘Writer’ had sent a quivering through my quotidian existence, and now everything was significant” (15). Even though Dorothy’s exaggerated responses threaten to undermine her narrative credibility, Gaitskill’s text instead consistently frustrates and disorients the distinction between Dorothy’s acuity and her self-deception. Reaching Justine and arranging their first interview, Dorothy says, “I invented possible scenarios daily, growing more and more excited by the impending intellectual adventure” (17). This sounds like the kind of inflated imaginative reverie we come to expect from Dorothy, until suddenly Dorothy’s description aligns exactly with the story the novel will tell:

    My wildest invention, however, didn’t prepare me for what actually happened … I had thought of Anna Granite as the summit of my life, the definitive, devastating climax – and yet perhaps she had only been the foreshadowing catalyst for the connection that occurred between me and Justine, the bridge without which our lives would have continued to run their spiritually parallel courses. (17)

    By positioning Dorothy as the indefatigable apostle of life’s mysterious underpinnings (and not just the deluded counterpart to Justine’s jagged skepticism), the novel appoints Dorothy as the occult’s eccentric beholder, whose perspicacity accurately captures the strange-yet-ordained quality of transformation.

    Transformation and Relating

    Dorothy’s vivid depictions of her encounter with Granite are especially striking for their contrast with the scripted, impatient manner she has for talking about anything else. Consider the juxtaposition between the matter-of-fact style in which she reports having “been forced to have an incestuous affair with my father, starting at age fourteen” (26) with her recollection of first discovering Granite:

    I read Anna Granite and suddenly a whole different way of looking at life was presented to me. She showed me that human beings can live in strength and honor … And then the rest was just … the sheer beauty of her ideas … She held up a vision for me, and her vision helped me through terrible times. I mean, by the time I discovered Granite, I had just about given up. (28)

    Unlike the other moments where Dorothy dutifully and begrudgingly itemizes her traumas, this description of Granite is the first time Dorothy sounds narrative. Whereas trying to answer the interview questions felt coarse and unintuitive – at one point Dorothy even says, “I regarded Justine with dislike and awaited her next prepackaged question” (32) – talking about Granite recreates the aura of romance and transformation.

    In her descriptions of discovering Sedgwick, Berlant imitates Dorothy’s narrative arc when she says,

    Eve Sedgwick’s work has changed sexuality’s history and destiny. She is a referent, and there is a professional field with a jargon and things, and articles and books that summarize it. For me, though, the luck of encountering her grandiosity, her belief that it is a good to disseminate the intelligent force of an attachment to a thing, a thought, a sensation, is of unsurpassable consequence. (Cruel Optimism 122)

    When later in the essay Berlant offers an account of how it is that another person can effectuate such impactful transformation, the concept of “emancipatory form” is introduced to suggest that, “in its spectacularly alien capacity to absorb a person, to take her out of her old way of being whether or not she finds a place elsewhere,” the “emancipatory form does not require a particular content but instead the capacity to be both surprised and confirmed by an attachment of which one knows little” (140). Non-specificity is an essential feature of the “emancipatory form,” since what the subject experiences as transformative isn’t anything “particular” about the object per se, but is “in the spectacularly alien capacity to absorb a person, to take her out of her old way of being.” Transformation is a version of absorption, and given the immense burden of Dorothy’s traumatic past, it is no wonder that, according to Berlant, “the most thematic but not least dramatic instance of this double movement is in Dorothy’s encounter with Granite” (“Two Girls” 140).

    Privileging the formalism of a transformative event is crucial to understanding what people do to have and hold onto their optimism, but in the commitment to “deshame fantasmatic attachments” (“Two Girls” 122) there is a wholesale flattening of relational forms into things that have value despite their “particular content.” Working against the critical tendency to devalue and dismiss the subject’s strategies for “staying afloat,” Berlant’s essay seeks to redeem the silly or sentimental cathexis by demonstrating that fantasy-based attachment is on a spectrum of projective need, not a symptom of errancy. The twofold implication here is that fantasy is the universal mechanism of everyone’s object relations (everyone does it) and that it is the common ground for all different kinds of object relations (every relationship is equally fantasmatic). An interpretive model that takes the subject’s self-alienation as presumptive opens up innumerable possibilities for being curious and compassionate about all that compels us toward/away from each other and ourselves. But then what is the specificity of being transformed as a process of becoming-different? Here I think we can begin to perceive a non-difference, in Berlant’s account, between “absorption” as a technique for managing anxiety and pain versus “relating” as the connection to an object that enables psychic change. In fact, extrapolating from this conflation of absorption with relating, it is as though all attachment becomes functionally identical to any other compulsion for managing distress. Can individuals use objects outside overdetermined circuits of meaning? This seems indisputable to me. And where in doubt, Berlant’s oeuvre resolutely shows that pleasure and relief are not derived from necessarily “coherent” or “appropriate” activities. But how can we make the leap from this observation to the notion that there is no difference between being absorbed and being transformed because an identical mechanism underlies both – a need getting met – unless we consider transformation as somehow dissociable from psychic relating?

    Indeed, Berlant insists on severing the association between “particular content” and “emancipatory form” even as the novel and essay proliferate evocative glimpses of barely symbolized, non-conscious, non-representational “communication” between each set of girls. Dorothy describes the power of Granite as “the first writer, ever” who “showed me that human beings can live in strength and honor, not oppositional to it” (Two Girls 27). Berlant replicates the rhythm of this scene when she says of Sedgwick’s work, “to admit your surprising attachments, to trace your transformation over the course of a long (life) sentence, is sentience – that’s what I’ve learned” (Cruel Optimism 122–3). Here and elsewhere, scenes of learning refer to something specific about the object-as-teacher that makes a given interchange transformative. And yet, when Berlant conflates “absorption” and “relating,” it is because “a poetics of misrecognition” (122) redescribes all attachment as motivated by the projection upon the object of a fantasmatic need. In his theory of the “mirror stage,” Lacan uses the child’s experience of registering the disjunction between his “unorganized jumble of sensations and impulses” and the reflection of a “unified surface appearance similar to that of the child’s far more capable, coordinated, and powerful parents” (Écrits 13) to demonstrate the subject’s foundational self-estrangement, the impossibility of aspiring to a true self, and the comedy of encountering, in every other, a self that is always already mediated by fantasy. Using Lacan’s formulation, Berlant writes that

    misrecognition (méconnaissance) describes the psychic process by which fantasy recalibrates what we encounter so that we can imagine that something or someone can fulfill our desire: its operation is central to the state of cruel optimism. To misrecognize is not to err, but to project qualities onto something so that we can love, hate, and manipulate it for having those qualities – which it might or might not have. (Cruel Optimism 122)

    The subject of this scenario attempts to get what it needs, and what it needs is, ultimately, to manage confusion and get some relief. There can be a diversity of objects who provide this and a multiplicity of means, but the need to “imagine that something or someone can fulfill our desire” is the subject’s most elementary wish.

    Berlant treats the “poetics of misrecognition” as an analytic formulation that, despite their slightly different critical investments, she and Sedgwick share. According to Berlant,

    Sedgwick seeks to read every word the subject writes (she believes in the author) to establish the avowed and disavowed patterns of his or her desire, and then understands those repetitions in terms of a story about sexuality that does not exist yet as a convention or an identity. … The queer tendency of this method is to put one’s attachments back into play and into pleasure, into knowledge, into worlds. It is to admit that they matter. (Cruel Optimism 123)

    But “my world,” Berlant writes a few paragraphs later, “operates according to a proximate, but different, fantasy of disappointment, optimism, aversion, and attachment than the one I attribute to Eve” (126). Berlant avers that “this distinction is not an opposition” (125) since,

    like Eve, I desire to angle knowledge toward and from the places where it is (and we are) impossible. But individuality – that monument of liberal fantasy, that site of commodity fetishism, that project of certain psychoanalytic desires, that sign of cultural and national modernity – is to me a contrary form … . There is an orientation toward interiority in much queer theory that brings me up short and makes me wonder: must the project of queerness start “inside” of the subject and spread out from there? (124–5)

    To illustrate this point biographically, even though “in writing this way I am working against my own inclination,” Berlant writes:

    My story, if I wrote it, would locate its optimism in a crowded scene too, but mine was dominated by a general environment not of thriving but of disappointment, contempt, and threat. I salvaged my capacity to attach to persons by reconceiving of both their violence and their love as impersonal. This isn’t about me. This has had some unpleasant effects, as you might imagine. But it was also a way to protect my optimism. Selves seemed like ruthless personalizers. In contrast, to think of the world as organized around the impersonality of the structures and practices that conventionalize desire, intimacy, and even one’s own personhood was to realize how uninevitable the experience of being personal, of having personality, is. (125)

    In what might otherwise be a heartbreaking glimpse of a terrifying childhood, Berlant insists instead that the subject’s capacity to survive and the quality of her object-relating are not, necessarily, linked. This breach between attachment and personhood anticipates the disconnection between particular objects and impacted subjectivity that Berlant asserts is fundamental to every transformative relation. Moreover, by applying “this isn’t about me” to object-relating tout court, and to transformative encounters especially, Berlant uses her interpretation of what transpires between two sets of fat and thin girls to prove that transformation is not about getting “personal” (since look at all the ways these women do not know or even care about each other), and subjectivity is not about being transformed (since motivation and the interiority it fabricates is a psychological and hermeneutic luxury for those who aren’t simply desperately trying to “stay afloat”).

    What “staying afloat” shares with the “poetics of misrecognition” is a conceptualization of what constitutes the subject’s basic needs. But this idea of the subject who relates by fantasmatically conforming the outside object to his internal needs depends upon the assertion that biological self-preservation and psychological growth are structurally and economically identical and, moreover, that psychic development works the way eating does. Laplanche vigorously warns: “we must refuse to believe in the illusion that Freud proposes. From the hat of hunger, from a self-preservative instinct, Freud the illusionist claims to produce the rabbit of sexuality, as if by magic. This is only possible if sexuality has been hidden somewhere from the start” (Freud and the Sexual 69). While the experience of being fed and the mirror stage are different developmental moments, Laplanche identifies the way that both fables share the modeling of all psychic need on the mechanism of alimentary satisfaction. Since for Laplanche, the satisfaction of needs (milk) is always part of someone else’s sexuality (breast), the notion that adult desire is autocentric, conscious, or necessarily even aligned with self-preservation belies the fact that there never was an object who was only or simply the provider of alimentary needs. Even the “provider” had a psychology that, while dispensing food, was also “enigmatic” and whose enigmas demanded the subject’s “translation” and response. Therefore, whereas “self-preservation” (eating) works according to a principle of pleasure (satiety and the reduction of tension), the “drive” denotes a force that is “not goal-directed,” “variable from one individual to the next,” “determined by the individual’s history,” and that works according to a principle of excitation (increase in tension) (Laplanche, Temptation 121). Since the drive “is bound to fantasy, which for its part is strictly personal,” Berlant’s insistence that desiring transformation is governed by the principle of “self-preservation” (survival) is incoherent to the extent that transformation is a product of the subject’s fantasmatic life as constituted by relating to others. Transformation is not a basic need that can be efficiently met, but a function of an idiosyncratic psyche pursuing becoming. Asking why an individual would attach to things that militate against flourishing presumes that somehow flourishing is dissociable from attachment. But while this construct makes sense within a Marxist frame, in a psychological one there is no way to separate what’s in a subject’s “interests” from the objects of attachment; the “interest” of the subject is survival and attachment is the means. “Cruel optimism” risks tautology by using psychological principles to redescribe a problematic those same principles presume.

    Fat Vs. Thin, Personal/Impersonal

    Gaitskill uses the “fat/thin” distinction to denote the different psychic and environmental textures of each girl’s experiential world, and in her essay, Berlant elaborates this imagined juxtaposition by grafting onto “fat” and “thin” literal distinctions between Sedgwick and herself (Sedgwick writes about being fat, Berlant talks about her asceticism) as well as conceptual distinctions between personal and impersonal, biography and anti-biography, attachment and detachment. This overarching categorization meditates on fat/thin as a difference of relational intensity that is concretely expressed in each girl’s relationship to the pedagogic object at the novel’s center: Dorothy is over-identified with Granite, imitative, infatuated, evangelical, while Justine is skeptical of Granite, journalistic, curious, interested in writing about her but not in becoming an actual acolyte. And so, although both “fat” and “thin” represent modes of impersonality, they each also figure for notably different relational tendencies, such as: Dorothy/Sedgwick/Fat = voracious, entitled, outstretched, versus Justine/Berlant/Thin = aloof, apart, contained. (Since I’m insisting on relating and what my relating might mean, I think, though I’m skinny, we know whose company I’m in.) What is suggestive about Berlant’s metaphoric framing of relational styles in metabolic terms is that it consigns relationality to a spectrum of “greater” or “lesser” degrees of aggression (grandiosity) and demand (projection), the result of which is that Justine behaves fantasmatically and Dorothy tends to make-believe. However, the novel and essay contradict the classification Berlant constructs: not only are both girls compelled by Granite, even if Justine seems impassive and Dorothy feels cosmically ordained, but both the novel and the essay depend for their existence on thin girls trying to be intimate with what fat girls say they love.

    The implications of this fat/thin distinction are not limited to analyses of each girl’s fantasmatic range, but serve, in Berlant’s essay, to characterize the different appetitive profiles of critical interpretation. Although the essay begins by sketching her and Sedgwick’s “different, but proximate” fantasies of personhood, and Berlant assures us that this “distinction is not an opposition,” the essay progresses by systematically collocating possible avenues to psychological meaning, then dispersing them onto an all-exterior landscape of un-interpretable sensation and non-comprehensible events. If the subject is only ever fumbling and stumbling and trying to survive with a bare minimum of optimism intact, then attributing behavior to interiority and interpreting what motivates sexual or “textual” desire already aspires to explain overmeaningfully—as if trying to understand the subject in psychological terms becomes itself a sign of critical greed. Or critics more wounded and austere would never even be that hungry.

    Berlant’s suggestion to be less hungry critics, or at least to train ourselves to evacuate whatever “meaning” we ingest, complemented the discourse’s interpretive focus on adumbrating the “thresholds and tensions, blends and blurs” (Gregg and Seigworth 4) and on rejecting the big “compartmentalisms” of subject/object, representation, memory, time/space, etc. But it also enabled psychoanalysis to retain its status as the absolute explanatory paradigm of human behavior by ratifying “transference” as the preeminent mechanism of object-relating. If, beyond insinuating that opposite body types attract because they are symbolically complimentary, Berlant’s essay cannot account for what brings these girls together, it is because when everyone is a “ruthless personalizer,” what motivates contact is not much deeper than how well (or badly) the other serves one’s own projective longings. This uncritical reduction of all relating to “transference” and projection preserves the psychoanalytic ideology of the autocentric subject, and in doing so, simplifies intimacy and transformation precisely where queer theory seemed uniquely poised to complicate it.

    Since the concept’s debut in Freud’s early writings to the contemporary proliferation of diverse typologies, “transference” has become the ur-mechanism for understanding how subjects experience each other as familiar objects. Initially Freud defined “transference” as “new editions or facsimiles of the impulses and fantasies that are aroused and made conscious during the progress of the analysis; but they have this peculiarity … that they replace some earlier person by the person of the physician” (116). No matter what brand of transference it is (sexual, negative, oedipal, narcissistic, etc.), certain key features are consistent: temporality moves forward and/or backward, shuffling between present, past, and future tenses; the directionality of affect flows only from inside and toward outside, in varying permutations of projection and identification; fantasy and need are the main impulses for transporting affect between objects, even if other mechanisms like the body or landscape function interactively as well.

    As we will see, it is impossible for transference to be used without invoking its ideology of affect. The word transference itself, with the root verb “transfer” describing the movement of something in someone to someone/thing somewhere else, bears the trace of the concept’s particular genealogy in classical Freudian psychoanalysis, where transference represented the patient’s affective “resistance” to the “talking cure.” Although the term’s antagonistic dynamics have been notably softened by the development of a “two-person” framework, I argue that no matter how brazenly contemporary clinicians insist on increasing the ratio between neutrality and the reality of an interpersonal context, the philosophical foundations of transference retain the infrastructure of a psychic subject whose experience originates in a monolithic historical past that gets reimposed on an otherwise innocent relational present. Sedgwick’s mobilization of Tomkins’s affect theory is directed at dethroning Freudian/Lacanian metapsychology at exactly the point where psychoanalytic formulations reduce subjectivity to a crude relational determinism and psychobiology; by showing that affects (and not just alimentary “drives”) motivate, new possibilities emerge for interpreting the subject’s experience. How, then, can we understand the totalizing reductiveness by which what happens between “two girls” becomes no more than a transferential event, the formal effect of the general wish each girl projects “for something transformative” (Berlant, Cruel Optimism 127)?

    As a critique of individuality – “that monument of liberal fantasy, that site of commodity fetishism, that project of certain psychoanalytic desires, that sign of cultural and national modernity” (Berlant, Cruel Optimism 124) – Berlant’s impersonality would seem, nearly automatically, to demand the dissolution of the autocentric subject. However, by conflating psychology with (available/interior) consciousness, and flattening relating into need-based projection, Berlant corroborates transference and its enforcement of the most persistent and totalizing myth of psychoanalysis: that transformative relating is exogenous to the constitution of subjectivity. As an argument, Berlant’s use of her relationship to Sedgwick, and Dorothy’s relationship to Justine, to prove that relating does not need to be personal to be transformative, depends for its cogency on conflating biography with psychology, but they are not, after all, the same thing. In fact, it is precisely the tension between them that animates and challenges the critic’s interpretive task. As such, while defending the subject’s rights to incoherence is a vital hermeneutic precept, limiting the subject’s psychological processes to originating “basic” needs and meeting them consolidates the subject’s absolute, autarkic role. What about becoming-different as a form of relating that is irreducible to “getting by” or ontogenesis? After all, a girl whose compulsions we can’t read is different from one whose compulsions have no meaning. Ruth Leys echoes this observation in her seminal critique of affect theory’s anti-intentionalism9 when she writes, “a materialist theory that suspends considerations of meaning or intentionality in order to produce an account of the affects as inherently organic (indeed inherently mechanical) in nature” is necessarily committed to an idea of emotions as “inherently objectless” so that, even though “I laugh when I am tickled,” “I am not laughing at you” (463). Laughing, but “not at you” helpfully demonstrates the way that affect theory’s “anti-intentionalism” is practically contingent upon, and responsible for, a non-relational metapsychological framework. To extrapolate even further from these observations, I would suggest that the compatibility of Lacanian metapsychology with a Deleuzian ontology of immanence and non-representational theory occludes affect theory’s depsychologization of relationality because linguistic structuralism effectively materializes psychic action into generalized “forms” that are beyond personal, relational, or concrete “content.” I think it is a specific kind of formalism that is organized against the content of anything “personal” about the object or relation that enables Berlant to claim that what is transformative is the self’s “impersonal,” non-psychological attachment to the object, not something – however imperceptible or non-representational – that happens between them.

    “Resonance” and Relationality

    Perhaps the extent to which affect theory moves us toward a new vocabulary for describing relational experience while simultaneously circumscribing the theoretical range of what it will capably radicalize is evident in the different ways “resonance” can be understood. Berlant uses “resonance” to characterize the sensation Dorothy and Justine experience when they first meet:

    At the time of their meeting, neither Justine nor Dorothy has had a good conversation with anyone in many years. … Yet from the moment of their initial phone call they resonate with each other, a resonance that they take personally but that has, in a sense, nothing to do with anything substantive about each other. (Cruel Optimism 127)

    “Resonance” recurs often in affect theory and the phenomenological thought influenced by Merleau-Ponty, offering, as it does, a term for signaling a “felt” occurrence that is not necessarily assimilable into linguistic representation or more concrete signification.

    I want to suggest that in order for each girl to function “formally” rather than “substantive[ly]” for each other, for “formalism” to be juxtaposed to “content” in this way, we also have to imagine that the “resonance that they take personally” can be physiological without being psychological, or, put another way, that in order to be perceptual, meaning has to be perceptible too. But Merleau-Ponty uses “perceptual meaning” in a functionally similar way to Laplanche’s “psychic reality,” namely, to denote an alternative logic of development that is simultaneously constitutive of subjectivity and relationality, irreducible to biological or linguistic reductionism, singular and not-me, singular because I am where I respond to the other. If it is through the self’s movement in relation to others that a self develops, then “resonance” is an exemplary encounter with movement as being-moved that is not necessarily accessible to signification.

    Therefore, whereas “resonance” within an applied Lacanian model merely compliments the affective topography of an ultimately transferential event, in a Laplanchian-inflected formulation of relational encountering, “resonance” is the way the impact of a transformative “textual” engagement becomes registered, non-meaningfully. This means that we can “resonate” with an other even though we cannot know what or why or even how – only that we are resonant and, since our knowledge is embodied, since “textuality” lives in our gestures and glances, our resonance means even if we will never know what it means. This “resonance” that happens between subjectivities is not, then, a narrative moment where form exceeds or supersedes content, but a psycho-physiological instant that attunes me to my “textual” self, and to myself as “textual.”

    I have used “textuality” to refer to the questions (Laplanchian “messages”) that propel transformative “relating” and “textual desire” to the need/wish to experience these questions as questions. What I want now to add to this formulation is the mechanism that links these two concepts, something Laplanche calls “reactivation”:

    The translation of the enigmatic adult message doesn’t happen all at once but in two moments … . In the first moment, the message is simply inscribed or implanted, without being understood. It is as if maintained or held in position under a thin layer of consciousness, or under the skin. In a second moment the message is reactivated from within. It acts like an internal foreign body that must at all costs be mastered and integrated. (Freud 208)

    The psychic mechanism Laplanche outlines makes it possible to imagine relationality as an experience of one’s own “messages” being “reactivated” by the “messages” of an other. What distinguishes this model from what Laplanche often refers to as the “trans-individual structures” of Lacanian “language,” or the fantasmatic activity of Kleinian “projection,” is that only a specific, concrete other whose “messages” resonates with my own can provoke the “reactivation” of my “untranslated” questions. This is the reality of the “message,” i.e., of the signifier as it is addressed by someone to someone. According to Laplanche,

    to project, to introject, to identify, to disavow, to foreclose, etc. – all the verbs used by analytic theory to describe psychical processes share the feature of having as subject the individual in question: I project, I disavow, I foreclose, etc. What has been scotomised … , quite simply, is the discovery that the process originally comes from the other. Processes in which the individual takes an active part are all secondary in relation to the originary moment, which is that of a passivity: that of seduction. (Essays 136)

    It is no longer possible to think psychic life archeologically, since development is mediated by the concrete “other,” and what the child bears as “knowledge” is only ever already a product of the way that “enigmatic” content has been idiosyncratically “translated.” Laplanche offers a way out of the determinism of “transference,” since there is no unified or legible scene that could be wished-for or repeated; there are only implanted “messages” shot through with affect and signification that in their exigency compel us toward we know not what, or whom.

    Two Girls, Relational and Queer

    This essay suggests that Two Girls is an exemplary dramatization of how relationality unfolds in non-hermeneutic, non-teleological, indeterminate ways, for not only is Dorothy’s response to Justine’s “index”-card call for “followers of Anna Granite” literally an answer to Justine’s question about Granite, but Dorothy’s relationship to Granite is something that, for whatever reason, Justine wants an occasion to live with (and through) for a while. Why else would Justine want to write about it? And even then, why interview ex-acolytes? This is not an attempt to deduce unconscious motivations but instead to insist we take seriously the conditions that bind any of the “two girls” writing or being written about. This means that we cannot treat as narrative coincidence that these two girls are brought together on either side of Granite (a teacher) and Definitism (a movement compelled by the search for Truth), even if it looks as though the intimacy between someone detachedly curious and someone who cathects heroically is reducible, merely, to the structural drama of a thin girl experiencing proximity to a fat one. Because even when the manifold effects of this comic méconnaissance seem weird and queer and enigmatic, sadly, the motivational mechanisms that underlie it never are. For although putting each girl’s desperate, justifiable need for a transformative object at the center of whatever transpires between them purports that phenomenological rawness proves attachment has been stripped unsentimentally down to the bone, it only, really, strips attachment of the complexity that renders it any kind of relationship whatsoever.

    While the biographical data we’re given is at once too limited and conventional to explain their respective attraction to Definitism or to each other, the novel seems decidedly more provocative as an exercise in rendering, as links, the possible knots of psychic entanglement that it could sketch but barely, if ever, begin to untangle. Therefore, insofar as “resonance” aims to describe the powerful, mostly nonlinguistic and non-representational relational current connecting psychic subjectivities to each other, I want to read the ending as the beginning the novel has been working its way to elaborating. The ending is therefore not only “not nothing,” (“Two Girls” 152) but is also radical because it isn’t any kind of ending at all but rather a singular moment of elaboration, where the “sonorous” sense of “resonance” can only emerge little by little, halting and halted in a holding embrace, where the force undergirding their “resonance” emerges and can glimpse something of what “resonance” would look like if it never had to assume a relational form. Whereas for Berlant, this ending resists categorization by being ambiguous, I want to read the ending as the concrete expression of a “resonance” these girls have experienced in relationship to each other from the beginning.

    In her essay’s countermanding conversion of all meaningfulness into abstraction, Berlant valorizes their inscrutable “falling asleep” by ignoring that Dorothy interrupts Justine during an S/M scene, which, in a novel this bracingly deliberate, we have to consider as being about more than just salvation from violence (they’ve each had so much of that already), and more about the ways their complimentary or enigmatic “questions” dramatically intersect. For Justine, this final S/M scene marks an escalation of the danger/pleasure ratio she has been testing throughout the novel. While Dorothy spends the novel attempting to regulate her desire by idealizing then denigrating her objects, Justine tries outsmarting her detachment by finding a viable spot between terror and indifference. Although each girl is preoccupied privately and outside any dialogue they’re explicitly having, the novel’s trajectory plots them on parallel paths that converge when they experience their struggles in relation to each other. Of course, to every thin girl, sureness looks big, and to every fat girl, deprivation needs saving. But calling this a relational dynamic is not to imply a conventional love plot. We need terms for distinguishing relationality from structures of compulsory kinship – otherwise all attachment is effectively heterosexual and all relationality automatically non-queer.

    What Do Teachers Have to Do with “Two Girls”?

    It is, after all, the pedagogic context that first brings all these unlikely pairs of girls into each other’s orbit. Of course Dorothy and Justine both perform rituals of projective appetitiveness that can make their cathexis to Anna Granite seem like the desperate attachment of students onto the teacher-hero as empty form. But as we observe the way they circle and evade each other, the force that compels them to keep sharing something simultaneously becomes concrete and more vague. This isn’t what happens to two girls in spite of their history, but what happens between them because of it.

    Alas, not only is Gaitskill’s novel a story of “two girls” who meet through a teacher, and not only is Berlant’s essay an account of what she learned and “Professor Sedgwick” taught, but Berlant’s essay itself begins, and ends, with the sentence – “history hurts” – a reference to an idea from her own teacher’s text (“Two Girls” 121). Although Fredric Jameson is nowhere situated as her teacherly interlocutor, Berlant implicitly avows the essay’s pedagogic context when, in addition to her opening riff “history hurts, but not only” (Cruel Optimism 121), she later adds: “Here is a stupidity of mine: ‘History is what hurts,’ that motto of The Political Unconscious, is a phrase that I love. It resonates as truth; it performs a truth-effect in me. But because it is in the genre of the maxim, I have never tried to understand it. That is one project of this essay” (126). Again there is “resonance” – this time between Berlant and something her teacher said that she loves. And what is that “phrase I love” without ever “try[ing] to understand it,” but her own teacher’s idea of history’s relation to subjectivity, genre, and trauma, a theory of transformation and impact that she distills her own meditation on traumatized subjectivity in relation to?

    For that matter, what is that sentence from Jameson she calls “a stupidity of mine” but precisely a knowledge that she just does not yet “understand” because before she has a chance to intervene, it “performs a truth-effect in me?” Berlant blames the sentence’s formalism for obstructing her access to critical self-reflection: “because it is in the genre of the maxim,” she says, “I have never tried to understand it.” But isn’t it actually the “genre” of pedagogy that makes this motto feel so unavailable to critique? For if teacher-student relationality has no phenomenological integrity that can’t eventually be reduced to the hysterical relay of impersonal projections, then endeavoring to elaborate one’s own textual objects has no recourse to engage a material, specifiable other. Indeed, her account of “a phrase that I love” is surrounded at every turn by references to its mystical genealogy, as if attachment can be either sensible or magical, legible or stupid, desperate or depressive. But if pedagogy is the condition of Berlant’s attempt to push against what she calls her “stupidity” while writing about someone else from whom she’s learned, and if pedagogy is the context of Dorothy’s initial struggle to become a girl whose not her father’s daughter, a project she begins with Granite and resumes in relation to another girl’s learning, it may be because resonating with the question an other asks is the only way to reactivate the knowledge I did not know could ever be a question.

    What I think this means is that teachers are not those whom we learn from by “overthrowing” – besides, rage against temporal difference seems far more like the aging father’s problem than the younger son’s. Rather, we learn from those who help us survive our questions by inviting us into their own. Since resonances are partial and non-meaningfully known, difference is constitutive of attachment, not its retributive form. As such, if the pedagogic relation is so essential to every iteration of “two girls,” it is because pedagogy cannot be reduced to merely another non-specific psychic mechanism of survival-by-any-projective-means necessary. Relationality is not only what happens in the suspension and disorganization of genre – a formulation that ultimately reifies social categorization by locating potentiality in materiality’s elusive “elsewhere.” Relationality is the way that “textuality” becomes transmissible and transformed. While contemporary critical and literary theory proliferates generative and rich possibilities for the ways that subjectivity can be non-symptomalogically experienced and expressed, it maintains a distinctly more limited imagination about what happens between subjects who are not only structural placeholders for abstract psychic functions but also concrete others carrying “enigmatic messages” that “resonate” and compel. Insofar as relationality requires a methodology that foregrounds between-ness epistemologically, we need a metapsychology that can wonder about how strangers reach and turn away from each other, how Two Girls is about what happens between two girls, and how it is what’s elaborated between girls that is potentially transformative for each girl. To the extent that “history” is not only what “hurts,” it is also in no small part a result of whom we meet and what, because of who they are, we find transformable, and transformed, about ourselves.

    Footnotes

    1. The essay was originally written for Barber and Clark’s Festschrift honoring Sedgwick and later reprinted in Berlant’s Cruel Optimism.

    2. Berlant’s formulation relies upon Leo Bersani’s radical transformation of sexuality from a mechanism of self-knowledge into a site of ego-“shattering” (Bersani and Phillips 57) that he later calls “impersonal narcissism” (85). Bersani writes, “might there be forms of self-divestiture not grounded in a teleology (or a theology) of the suppression of the ego and, ultimately, the sacrifice of the self?” (57). Adam Phillips elaborates the transformative power of “impersonal narcissism,” when he explains that “the psychoanalyst becomes intimate with someone by not taking what they say personally” (Bersani and Phillips 92).

    3. See also Clough and Halley’s introduction to The Affective Turn.

    4. The development of affect theory belongs to a broader moment in philosophy that, often exuberantly, avows its disinterest in representation’s familiar limits and instead calls for stretching perception beyond the linguistic/symbolic frame. As Levi Bryant, Nick Srnicek, and Graham Harman write in “Towards a Speculative Philosophy,”

    Even while disdaining the traditional idealist position that all that exists is some variation of mind or spirit, continental philosophy has fallen into an equally anti-realist stance in the form of what Meillassoux calls ‘correlationism’ – the ‘idea according to which we only ever have access to the correlation between thinking and being, and never to either term considered apart from the other.’ This position tacitly holds that we can aim our thoughts at being, exist as beings-in-the-world, or have phenomenal experiences of the world, yet we can never consistently speak about a realm independent of thought or language. (3–4)

    Variously called Speculative Realism, Object-Oriented-Ontology, New Materialism, Transcendental Materialism, and Non-Philosophy, these related developments share the wish to distance themselves from the linguistic paradigm.

    5. As my use of Laplanche and “textuality” shows, affect does not invalidate the grip of language on the formation of subjectivity and sociality, but instead alerts us to the need to put what we know about signification in relation to other things we know about affective transmission, nonhuman lifeworlds, brain synapses, etc.

    6. I use “speculative” in Tom Sparrow’s sense, which builds upon work in Speculative Realism and related philosophy. Sparrow writes:

    the proliferation of speculative philosophy in recent years may be unnerving to some. Is this the return of dogmatic, ungrounded, free-floating knowledge claims? Has the Kantian lesson withered away, leaving us just where we were before the 1780s? . . . In a less alarmist tone, the speculative turn is not a rejection of the critical philosophy, but “a recognition of [its] inherent limitations. Speculation in this sense aims ‘beyond’ the critical and linguistic turns. As such, it recuperates the pre-critical sense of ‘speculation’ as a concern with the Absolute, while also taking into account the undeniable progress that is due to the labour of critique” [Brassier]. (19)

    7. Shaun Gallagher, p81. I am thinking of Paul Ricoeur’s The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays on Hermeneutics, where the focus on a “hermeneutics of selfhood” outlines the way the subject emerges through interpretation; we could think of Roland Barthes’s S/Z and The Pleasure of the Text as expanding our ideas of what a text can refer to and the varieties of ways we can engage a text.

    8. Laplanche further delineates a difference between “sexual instinct” and “sexual drive” in order to show that instinctive sexuality is not identical with drive sexuality. See Freud and the Sexual (2011).

    9. Cf. the work by Walter Benjamin, Gilles Deleuze, Michel de Certeau, Brian Massumi, and Nigel Thrift that studies performativity and bodily practices in the everyday rather than focusing on representation and meaning. In his seminal Non-Representational Theory, Thrift writes, “non-representational theory is resolutely anti-biographical and pre-individual. It trades in modes of perception which are not subject-based” (7).

    Works Cited

    • Barber, Stephen M., and David L. Clark, editors. Regarding Sedgwick: Essays on Queer Culture and Critical Theory. Routledge, 2002.
    • Barthes, Roland. The Pleasure of the Text. Translated by Richard Miller, Hill and Wang, 1975.
    • ———. S/Z: An Essay. Translated by Richard Miller, Hill and Wang, 1970.
    • Berlant, Lauren. The Anatomy of National Fantasy: Hawthorne, Utopia, and Everyday Life. Chicago UP, 1991.
    • ———. “Compassion (and Withholding).” Compassion: the Culture and Politics of an Emotion, edited by Lauren Berlant, Routledge, 2004, pp. 1–14.
    • ———. Cruel Optimism. Duke UP, 2011.
    • ———. The Female Complaint: The Unfinished Business of Sentimentality in American Culture. Duke UP, 2008.
    • ———. “Intimacy: A Special Issue.” Intimacy, edited by Lauren Berlant, Chicago UP, 2000.
    • ———. “The Pedagogies of ‘Pedagogy of Buddhism.’” After Eve, In Honor of Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, 18 March 2010. ……. Supervalent Thought, http://supervalentthought.com/2010/03/18/after-eve-in-honor-of-eve-kosofsky-sedgwick/. Accessed 12 February 2014.
    • ———. The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship. Duke UP, 1997.
    • ———. “The Subject of True Feeling: Pain, Privacy, and Politics.” Left Legalism/Left Critique, edited by Wendy Brown and Janet Halley, Duke UP, 2002, pp. 105–133.
    • Berlant, Lauren, and Lee Edelman. Sex, or the Unbearable. Duke UP, 2014.
    • Berlant, Lauren, and Jane Gallop. “Loose Lips.” Our Monica, Ourselves: The Clinton Affair and the National Interest, edited by Lauren Berlant and Lisa Duggan, NYU Press, 2001, pp. 246–267.
    • Bersani, Leo, and Adam Phillips. Intimacies. Chicago UP, 2008.
    • Bloom, Harold. The Anxiety of Influence: A Theory of Poetry. 2nd ed., Oxford UP, 1997.
    • Brennan, Teresa. The Transmission of Affect. Cornell UP, 2004.
    • Britzman, Deborah P. After-Education: Anna Freud, Melanie Klein, and Psychoanalytic Histories of Learning. SUNY UP, 2003.
    • ———. Lost Subjects, Contested Objects: Toward a Psychoanalytic Inquiry of Learning. SUNY UP, 1998.
    • Bryant, Levi, et al. “Towards a Speculative Philosophy.” The Speculative Turn: Continental Materialism and Realism, edited by Levi Bryant et al., re.press, 2011, pp. 1–18.
    • Caruth, Cathy. Unclaimed Experience: Trauma, Narrative, and History. Johns Hopkins UP, 1996.
    • Clough, Patricia Ticineto, and Jean Halley, editors. The Affective Turn: Theorizing the Social. Duke UP, 2007.
    • Cooper, Arnold. “Changes in Psychoanalytic Ideas: Transference Interpretation.” Essential Papers on Transference, edited by Aaron H. Esman, NYU Press, 1990, pp. 511–528.
    • Cvetkovich, Ann. Depression: A Public Feeling. Duke UP, 2012.
    • De Man, Paul. Blindness and Insight: Essays in the Rhetoric of Contemporary Criticism. Minnesota UP, 1983.
    • ———. Resistance to Theory. Minnesota UP, 1986.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Translated by Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Duke UP, 2004.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Fragment of the analysis of a case of hysteria.” The Standard Edition. Vol. VII (1905). Translated and edited by James Strachey, pp. 3–124.
    • Gaitskill, Mary. Bad Behavior. Simon and Schuster, 1998.
    • ———. Because They Wanted To. Simon and Schuster, 1997.
    • ———. Don’t Cry. Simon and Schuster, 2009.
    • ———. The Mare. Pantheon, 2015.
    • ———. Two Girls, Fat and Thin. 1991. Simon and Schuster, 1998.
    • ———. Veronica. Simon and Schuster, 2005.
    • Gallagher, Shaun. Hermeneutics and Education. SUNY UP, 1992.
    • Gregg, Melissa, and Gregory J. Seigworth, editors. The Affect Theory Reader. Duke UP, 2010.
    • Halberstam, Judith. The Queer Art of Failure. Duke UP, 2011.
    • Halperin, David M. How to Be Gay. Harvard UP, 2012.
    • ———. Saint Foucault: Towards A Gay Hagiography. Oxford UP, 1995.
    • James, Ian. The New French Philosophy. Polity, 2012.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Late Marxism: Adorno Or The Persistence Of The Dialectic. Verso, 1990.
    • ———. Representing Capital: A Rereading of Volume One. Verso, 2011.
    • Lacan, Jacques. Anxiety: The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Book X. Translated by A.R. Prince, edited by Jacques-Alain Miller, Polity, 2014.
    • ———. Écrits. Translated by Bruce Fink, Norton, 2006.
    • ———. The Ethics of Psychoanalysis. Book VII: 1959–1960. Translated by Dennis Porter, edited by Jacques-Alain Miller, Norton, 1992.
    • ———. The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis. Translated by Alan Sheridan, Norton, 1998.
    • ———. On the Names-of-the-Father. Translated by Bruce Fink, Polity, 2013.
    • Laplanche, Jean. Essays on Otherness, edited by John Fletcher, Routledge, 1999.
    • ———. Freud and the Sexual: Essays 2000–2006. Translated by John Fletcher et al., edited by John Fletcher, International Psychoanalytic Books, 2011.
    • ———. The Temptation of Biology: Freud’s Theories of Sexuality. Translated by Donald Nicholson-Smith, Unconscious in Translation, 2015.
    • Leys, Ruth. “The Turn to Affect: A Critique.” Critical Inquiry, vol. 37, no. 3, Spring 2011, pp. 434–472.
    • Merleau-Ponty, Maurice. Phenomenology of Perception. Translated by C. Smith, Routledge, 1962.
    • Mitchell, Stephen. Influence and Autonomy in Psychoanalysis. Routledge, 1997.
    • ———. Relationality: From Attachment to Intersubjectivity. Routledge, 2000.
    • Ricoeur, Paul. The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays on Hermeneutics. Northwestern UP, 2007.
    • Scarfone, Dominique. Laplanche: An Introduction. Translated by Dorothée Bonnigal-Katz, Unconscious in Translation, 2015.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. Epistemology of the Closet. UC Press, 1990.
    • ———. “Teaching/Depression.” The Scholar and Feminist Online, vol. 4, no. 2, Spring 2006.
    • ———. Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Duke UP, 2003.
    • ———. The Weather in Proust, edited by Jonathan Goldberg, Duke UP, 2011.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky and Adam Frank. “Shame in the Cybernetic Fold: Reading Silvan Tomkins.” Tomkins, Shame and Its Sisters, pp. 1–28. Sparrow, Tom. The End of Phenomenology: Metaphysics and the New Realism. Edinburgh UP, 2014.
    • Tomkins, Silvan. Exploring Affect: The Selected Writings of Silvan S. Tomkins, edited by E. Virginia Demos, Cambridge UP, 1995.
    • ———. Shame and Its Sisters: A Silvan Tomkins Reader, edited by Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick and Adam Frank, Duke UP, 1995.
  • Notes on Contributors

    Christopher Breu is Professor of English at Illinois State University. He is author of Insistence of the Material: Literature in the Age of Biopolitics (Minnesota, 2014) and Hard-Boiled Masculinities (Minnesota, 2005).

    Judith Goldman is the author of Vocoder (Roof 2001), DeathStar/rico-chet (O Books 2006), l.b.; or, catenaries (Krupskaya 2011), and agon (The Operating System 2017). She is core faculty in the Poetics Program at SUNY Buffalo.

    Robert S. Lehman is Assistant Professor of English Literature at Boston College as well as Co-Chair of the Mahindra Humanities Center Seminar in Dialectical Thinking at Harvard University. His research and teaching focus on the relationship between historiography and literary form, particularly in literary modernism, as well as on the history of philosophical aesthetics. He is the author of Impossible Modernism: T. S. Eliot, Walter Benjamin, and the Critique of Historical Reason (Stanford University Press, 2016).

    James D. Lilley is Associate Professor of English at the University at Albany. He is the author of Common Things: Romance and the Aesthetics of Belonging in Atlantic Modernity (Fordham, 2014). His articles have appeared in such journals as ELH and New Literary History. In his next book, Impersonal Movements: On Literature and Gesture, he turns to Edwards, Poe and Melville in order to explore how voice, movement, habit, and script can function as vital gestures of literary expression.

    Ramsey McGlazer is a Postdoctoral Scholar at the University of California, Berkeley, where he works in both the Department of Comparative Literature and the International Consortium of Critical Theory Programs.

    Adam R. Rosenthal is Instructional Assistant Professor in the Department of International Studies at Texas A&M University. He researches and teaches Romantic poetry, deconstruction, love, and technology. His articles have appeared in Studies in Romanticism, MLN, Nineteenth-Century French Studies, and Pli. He is writing a book entitled, The Gift of Poetry: Romanticism, Poetic Language, and the Allure of Giving, which analyzes the Western discourse of poetic donation and its reception in the Romantic period.

    Lauren Shufran is a PhD candidate in the Literature Department at UC Santa Cruz, where she is finishing her dissertation on the impact of Reformed theology on early modern British love poetry. Her first book, which won the Motherwell/Ottoline Prize, was published by Fence Books in 2013.

    Susan Vanderborg is Associate Professor of English at the University of South Carolina. Her research focuses on contemporary book-poems, artists’ books, and multi-media poetry. She has published articles on Fiona Templeton’s Cells of Release, Johanna Drucker’s artist’s books, Darren Wershler’s the tapeworm foundry, Steve Tomasula and Stephen Farrell’s VAS, and Rosmarie Waldrop’s A Key into the Language of America.

  • Ruined Vitality

    Adam R. Rosenthal (bio)
    Texas A&M University

    A review of Wills, David. Inanimation: Theories of Inorganic Life. U of Minnesota P, 2016.

    Inanimation is the third installment of David Wills’s technological trilogy of the human, which began with Prosthesis (1995) and Dorsality: Thinking Back through Technology and Politics (2008). Like those prior works, Inanimation traces the difficult-to-sound border between life and death, the human and non-human, humanity and animality, and man and machine. In distinction to those first two forays, however, Inanimation‘s focus on figures of inorganic life sets it on a new path, one still concerned with but in no way determined by the human’s technological hang-ups. Instead, it explores the supposed dead-ends of vitality: a search for life in “all the wrong places,” as Wills puts it in his preface, including such unlikely concerns as punctuation, mechanical angels, and plush stuffed birds (x). Inanimation thus emerges out of the rubble of Wills’s now twenty-year long deconstructive project, rising up like a mechanical phoenix whose passage through life’s technicity allows it to speak (and sing) from the other side of this ruinated notion of vitality. As such, its song is both compelling and at times difficult to make out, for like any “new” species that doesn’t conform to traditional taxonomic principles, the foreignness of its cry strains the ear. At its most daring moments, Inanimation takes this risk—which is also that of catachresis—and initiates a re-education of the senses to perceive what “lives” within those inorganic structures whose ostensibly merely nominal claims to vitality Wills forces us to rethink.

    The process of sensorial retraining, and above all of hearing and seeing life otherwise, is a theme that recurs throughout Inanimation, beginning of course with its title. “Inanimation,” Wills reminds us, is not a figure of his own coinage but one born in the early seventeenth century whose verbal form, “to inanimate,” would become largely obsolete by the eighteenth (ix). Before any hint of privation or lifelessness entered its semantic field, inanimation referred to the act of enlivening or animating. Only by the mid-seventeenth century did the privative sense of dis-animation emerge. This key figure, like a Freudian primal word, thus serves to name the interpenetration of the living with the non-living, which is to say the inseparability of animate and inanimate structures that problematizes our most basic and fundamental assumptions about what it is to live. At the same time, the resuscitation of the term “inanimation” from near obsolescence constitutes the first of what we might now consider to be Wills’s acts of necromancy, in which he gives an old word new life. Like Derrida’s practice of paleonymy (the re-inscription of an old word with a new meaning), Wills’s revitalization of certain strategic figures within Inanimation— a practice he repeats with each of the work’s three main headings—alters not only their meanings and conceptual bearing but their historical trajectory, opening them to alternative survivals. It is no exaggeration to say that a kind of vital paleonymy is at the heart of Inanimation, or to note that the metaphorical value of such resuscitative acts has never been more in question. If the concept of life should not be adopted from the natural sphere but instead applied to everything that has a history (as Wills, following Benjamin, suggests), then it is precisely the vital signs of language that must above all be reckoned with, for it is a central tenet of Inanimation that “language itself generates and self-generates as a privileged form, perhaps the privileged form, of inanimate life” (xii). This also means that Inanimation is as much a force of in/animation as it is a strictly theoretical venture, and this ambivalence is inextricable from the project itself.

    What, then, is life? Inanimation enters the contemporary fray surrounding this ancient question by way of three somewhat improbable motifs. For while the prospects of artificial intelligence and androids today pose high-tech specters of the automation of the organic, by comparison Wills’s selection of the topoi of “Autobiography,” “Translation,” and “Resonance” for his work’s three parts comes as an (ostensibly) low-tech surprise. Indeed, turning back in this way to such traditional figures lends this timely work a distinct air of untimeliness, as it shows, time and again, that many of the most compelling sites of inorganic life lie less in the technological reproducibility of the human than in the structure of a textuality that has always been technological and whose performances, in spite of originating in the living subject, nevertheless remain independent of it. On each of these old figures depends a certain conception of the animate and inanimate, and Wills’s project both demonstrates the vital stakes implicit in the conceptualization of each term and rethinks—or revitalizes—the term itself as in-animated/in-animating. As such, the interrogation of each figure becomes a matter of life and death.

    Before I turn to the theoretical stakes of each of Inanimation’s three parts, it is worth noting that the thematic and conceptual links that bridge each of its nine chapters also tell a compelling story—one that, at times, threatens to overshadow these very partitions. From the autobiographical birth of the father of modern philosophy (1) and the origin of life in the father of psychoanalysis (2), to the proto-technicity of the breath that is the ostensibly organic origin of poetic spacing (4) and the spaceless frontier that marks the heartlessness of war (6), to the bloodless beating heart at the origin of love (7) and the mechanical repetition that grounds the sounds of life’s most animated mating rituals (9), Wills’s recurrent attentiveness to the automated yet bodily figures of shame, the heart, breath, and blood generate a second set of citational relations at the border of what we might think of as the organic body of the book. The effect of such underground or unconscious pathways is not so much to contradict Inanimation’s three-part structure (which certainly captures the broadest conceptual interests of the text) as it is to raise certain questions about this structure’s historical and theoretical pertinence. In what, after all, consists the urgency of juxtaposing these three problematics? And what sort of relation do they bear to modernity, or, at least, to post-Cartesian thought? Even if the “autobiography” that concerns Wills will always already have been at work in the writing of life, in reading Inanimation one wonders whether something vital within “autobiography,” or “resonance,” becomes visible only after Descartes and the emergence of the philosophico-theoretical milieu out of which modern biology surfaces.

    Whatever the historicity of these terms, one cannot read Inanimation without sensing that something radical is happening to each in the course of Wills’s meticulous analyses. In what can be classed as his cinematic style of reading, each chapter weaves together its problematic by cutting back and forth between theoretical, literary, visual, and filmic texts. The result is a juxtaposition not only of unexpected theorists and artists but also of unthought connections and constellations among the disseminated senses and conceptual fields of each term. Take, for example, the problem of “autobiography,” whose centrality to the notion of the human orients the first part of Inanimation. The question of autobiography goes straight to the heart of humanity’s claim to species superiority, or the human-animal divide; for Wills it is not merely a form or genre of writing produced by human authors, but one that embodies the alleged human privilege of autodeixis, or self-referentiality. By combining readings of explicitly autobiographical moments within the work of Descartes, Freud, and Derrida with these authors’ theoretical writings on the human and animal, and life and non-life in the Discourse and Meditations, Beyond the Pleasure Principle and Introductory Lectures, and The Animal that Therefore I am, Wills extends the autobiographical beyond its traditional, anthropomorphic sense. As Wills, following Derrida, asks in chapter one: How could we ever rigorously differentiate between the human reliance on a naming language and the organism’s writing of itself in general? The question of autobiography thus becomes not only that of anthropomorphic life writing, but a “minimal autodeictic or autobiographical ‘impulse’” as it may manifest in an organism’s tendency to replicate and self-(re)generate its vital codes in response to environmental factors (44). Such an impulse, although manifest in Descartes’s philosophical project and Freud’s psychoanalytic one, also becomes indissociable from every form of “graphic automation or inanimation that precedes and even gives rise to life” (52). In chapter two such a notion is explored through the question of “instinctual reinscription” as treated by Freud, most notably in figures of the pseudopodium and the lifedeath drive (59). If, on the one hand, the practice of autobiographical writing serves to extend (automatically) the life of the writing subject who lives on in the text and prolongs his life in its inscription, on the other hand, life itself—engaged in the automated practice of autoextension in space and time—must also be read as a form of auto-bio-graphy. Additionally, if life is understood on the basis of autokinesis and autodeixis, then language itself must be included within the living as soon as it is a matter of iteration. Thus, while autobiography may initially be understood to refer to the writing of life or the writing of the self, Wills shows that it must encompass as well something like the life of writing, which is to say, the mechanical positing of a graphic self that constitutes a kind of minimal kernel of vitality, and one that is shared by organic and inorganic entities alike. Autobiography thus comes to name, for Wills, a structural point of contact between the inorganic productions of an organic subject attempting to survive, and the vitality of a textuality whose self-differentiation is no less a marker of autoextension.

    Much of the provocation of Inanimation lies in the absolute seriousness with which it approaches the question of the vitality of text. The figures of “Autobiography” in part one, and “Translation” in part two, present points of access through which to do just this: to ask how the “life” of text, grounded in iteration, can be understood to relate in a nonmetaphorical way to the vitality of organic life. “Translation,” as a figure of transportation, metaphor, and displacement, and of literary as well as non-literary provenance, vehiculates just such an interrogation of the transitions between ostensibly divergent domains: from life into non-life in “Living Punctuations: Cixous and Celan”; from a pre-linguistic divinity into a linguistic mundanity in “Naming the Mechanical Angel: Benjamin”; and from pre-modernity into post-modernity in “Raw War: Schmitt, Jünger, and Joyce.” In each case, Wills problematizes the narrative of a fall (which is to say, of a translation) from a living, ideal, or natural state into a mechanized, automated, or technologized one. Instead, it becomes necessary to think life and afterlife in the same breath, to understand—as Wills suggests through a reading of Benjamin’s “On Language as Such and on the Language of Man” in chapter five—how the absence of “literal transfer,” or the “impossibility of such an uninterrupted passage,” makes life possible in the first place (161). Only once we have rethought the life/afterlife dichotomy through translation will we begin to be able to understand “how an afterlife retains its vital relation to life…[or] to develop an unprejudiced concept of life” (161).

    In “Living Punctuations,” such a translative critique aims at dealing a double blow, by demonstrating both the originary technicity within the organic breath of the poetic voice and the unpredictability of the life of the graphic text that is, through the diacritical punctuation mark, ostensibly tasked with re-inscribing both the presences and absences of the “original” pneumatic flow. No synopsis can do justice to the force of Wills’s considerations of Mallarmé’s and Cixous’s graphic signifiers, or to his expounding of the effects of iterability, which turns “[e]very phoneme, syllable, or word—indeed, every blank space that utters…[into] a homonym of itself, no longer being enunciated a single time but instead resounding within the echo chamber of its own space” (125). Through such iteration, the blank of the page or the point of the period are shown to live no less than the material letter, and their collective survival in literature becomes inextricable from the organic life thought to precede them.

    “Translation” thus ultimately comes to name for Wills less a process of linguistic transcription, or even, more broadly, the process of doubling that turns an original presence into a secondary, artificial representation, than it does an act that betrays the originary technicity that haunts any displacement and that makes displacement im/possible in the first place. Indeed, before there is even any translative “act,” the translatability of life, we could say, renders it always already prosthetic, and thus structurally dependent on an afterlife to come.

    In turning from “Translation” to “Resonance,” the third and final section of Inanimation moves from the problems of borders and thresholds towards those of harmonies and compatibilities. It takes up the assumed synchrony of sonic and bodily couplings to show the impossibility of immediacy within these figures of fusion. In this way, through explorations of Nancy’s “exscription” in chapter seven, Godard’s struggle with music and image in eight, and Descartes’s meditations on animality in nine, Wills asks whether an immediate contact—between bodies, the elements of filmic narrative, or birds in song—could ever be possible. If not, if the natural effusions of the heart and the amorous embrace (like the hand-to-hand combat between enemy combatants explored in chapter six) can never express themselves without succumbing to some degree, however slight, of rhetorical flourish or technical prostheticization, then, Wills concludes, the animacy of the animate will also necessarily be contaminated by inanimacy, automation, and technicity. Resonance thereby turns from a figure of harmonious or organic continuity, into one of originary discontinuity and mediacy, and life, whether cinematic or sexual, begins only on the condition of this disjunction.

    Like both Prosthesis and Dorsality, Inanimation tirelessly draws out the structural parallels between so-called organic life and its inorganic others. Like those other works, its writing betrays an adeptness, sprinkled with playfulness, that culminates in Wills’s distinct, even unmistakable voice. Yet for all that, this voice somehow remains unfamiliar and perhaps even unclassifiable, indistinguishably human and inhuman, autobiographical and auto-bio-graphical. What kind of animal is Inanimation? I proposed, in beginning this review, that its call was that of a hybrid beast: both animal and machine, living and dead, yet also, and irreducibly, fantastic, as any new addition to the bestiary must at first appear. The forms of inorganic life that Inanimation advances lie at the edge of comprehension, and this is its greatest risk and reward.

  • Intimacies of Exile

    James D. Lilley (bio)
    University at Albany

    A review of Agamben, Giorgio. The Use of Bodies. Trans. Adam Kotsko. Stanford UP, 2016.

    At the close of The Use of Bodies, Giorgio Agamben describes a peculiar mode of thinking that is less concerned with any fixed outcome, goal, or particular purpose than it is with the purely formal dimension of its ponderings: a hiatus that thinking installs in the normal operation of the everyday, a fragmentation of the actual through which something (necessarily vague, shimmering at the threshold of possibility) might emerge. At stake in the style of such thought is not only the cogency and coherence of Agamben’s massively influential Homo Sacer series, which The Use of Bodies attempts to conclude in a complex intertextual manner. Such a dimension of thinking also plays a pivotal role throughout Agamben’s varied attempts to reanimate the potentialities of philosophy, politics, ethics, language, the body, nature, art, and love. After all, “Politics and art,” as Agamben avers, “are not tasks nor simply ‘works’: rather, they name the dimension in which works . . . are deactivated and contemplated as such in order to liberate the inoperativity that has remained imprisoned in them” (278). But what does such contemplative deactivation look like, in what ways has “inoperativity” been fettered in the past, and how might this work of thinking ultimately free it from its chains? These are some of the most important questions that drive both the form and the content of The Use of Bodies.

    Before we look at the movement of Agamben’s thought across the three sections of his book, it might be helpful to return—as the author does on several occasions—to the central claim of the work that inaugurated his Homo Sacer series. Here we learned that the history of Western philosophy is rooted in a particular form of relation between two new dimensions of life, zoè and bios, that define for Aristotle in De anima the sphere of politics (196). In the same way that, in The Open, Agamben explores the movement of an “anthropological machine” that obsessively polices the threshold between animal life and its properly human form, we might say that politics in Homo Sacer names the machine that governs the relation between the mere, natural fact of living (zoè) and the particular, political form of life (bios) (29). This form of life can exist only insofar as it is distinguished from bare life; but at issue here is not simply a matter of formal classification and demarcation: what is peculiar and new (even modern) is the way that these two terms relate to each other. Instead of a simple, binary opposition between zoè and bios, Agamben argues that Aristotle relates these conceptual couples in the manner of what he (following Jean-Luc Nancy) calls the “ban.” More akin to a state of exception than to utter indifference or unbridled otherness, “the relation of exception is a relation of ban. He who has been banned is not, in fact, simply set outside the law and made indifferent to it but rather abandoned by it, that is, exposed and threatened on the threshold in which life and law, outside and inside, become indistinguishable. It is literally not possible to say whether the one who has been banned is outside or inside” (28-29). Homo Sacer shows how this paradoxical form of sovereignty has continued to pattern our political destiny in the West, and most famously dwells on the ways in which of the “ban” is transformed by more recent, biopolitical accelerations, where the abandoned homo sacer no longer dwells along the exceptional outskirts of the polis but is instead included among its population. As such, Agamben’s assessment of modern forms of community and politics mirrors the nomos of the concentration camp. Put more formally, then, the “ban is the simple positing of relation with the nonrelational” (29).

    If Homo Sacer offers a genealogy of the ban and shows how it has foreclosed the potential for properly political forms of mobilization and resistance, in The Use of Bodies Agamben offers readers something that his originary text could only gesture toward: a critique of the ban itself. As he anticipated in Homo Sacer, such a critique would “have to put the very form of [the ban’s] relation into question, and to ask if the political fact is not perhaps thinkable beyond relation” (29). For example, Agamben now finds in Plotinus (in many ways the unexpected hero of his text) “a new and more enigmatic figure of the ban. . . . in which bare life is . . . transformed and inverted into something positive, having been posed as a figure of a new and happy intimacy” (236). Plotinus’s reworking of the ban opens onto “a superior politics” insofar as it “no longer has the form of a bond or an exclusion-inclusion of bare life but that of an intimacy without relation” (236).

    Here and throughout the text, The Use of Bodies challenges readers to rethink the potentialities of how we relate to life. The first part is concerned with a specific dimension of that relation, use, and the ways in which a certain mode of use (what Agamben will call “use-of-oneself”) resists capture and escapes the logic of exchange (33). The second part explores our relation to life from a more formal, ontological perspective; in chapters that foreground a dazzling array of different approaches to the relationship between existence and essence, Agamben shows how only a radically new, modal ontology can help Western philosophy avoid its dangerous pitfalls and troubling aporias. In the final, third part, Agamben outlines the particular relation to life that such a modal ontology demands, a “form-of-life” that is not so much “defined by its relation to a praxis (energeia) or a work (ergon) but by a potential (dynamis) and by an inoperativity” (247). It is the same peculiarly inoperative, non-directional effort that we originally located at the heart of Agamben’s challenge to thinking—and that here becomes identified with the task to “think contemplation as use-of-oneself” (64).

    I want to conclude by briefly following some of the major developments of this style of thought over the three parts of The Use of Bodies. If the goal of the book is to “liberate the inoperativity that has remained imprisoned” in the concepts of Western thought, it is hard to imagine a more audacious starting point for such a project than the notion of use itself (278). In what ways is it possible to contemplate, let alone deactivate, a concept that seems so inseparable from the work of praxis and the instrumentality of operation? Even stranger—and destined to stir controversy—seems Agamben’s choice to turn to the figure of the slave in Aristotle as the paradigmatic articulation of a “dimension of use entirely independent of an end” (12). Although ultimately perverted by the institution of slavery, Aristotle’s slave here functions for Agamben as a salutary figure of relation between the master and his world. Whereas the work of the human being is constituted, according to Aristotle, by “‘the being-at-work of the soul according the logos‘,” Agamben argues that the slave is differentiated from his master solely in terms of the “use of the body” (5). With respect to this particular term, however, “use must . . . be understood not in a productive sense but in a practical one: the use of the slave’s body is similar to that of a bed or clothing, and not to that of a spool or plectrum” (12). Thus emptied of productive content and instrumental intent, the slave that remains names an utterly impersonal form of intimacy—an inessential and purely formal possibility for “mediating one’s own relation with nature through the relation with another human being” (14).

    Of course, such an inoperative dimension of the intimacies of life must be repressed and abandoned by the originary “anthropogenic operation” of Western thought, which seeks to capture experience solely in terms of the dialectical opposition between zoè and bios (14). But here, and throughout The Use of Bodies, Agamben insists on the possibility that such a purely formal notion of use still persists, stowed away beyond the spectacle and its myriad commodifications of the relationship between public and private life. This is why he is so interested in the notion of the clandestine in Debord, Foucault, and de Sade—and in seeking out the “political element that has been hidden in the secrecy of singular existence” (xxi). Indeed, Agamben points to Benveniste’s analysis of the Greek verb “to use” (chresis) in order to illustrate that even the word itself, in its refusal to adopt an active or passive form, gestures toward a purely relational mode of language that “does not seem to have a proper meaning but acquires ever different meanings according to the context” (24). Readers of Agamben might recognize here a line of argument reminiscent of the discussion of “whatever being” in The Coming Community. Agamben’s approach to chresis in The Use of Bodies productively extends and develops some of the most provocative insights regarding the ontological and political potentialities of “Whatever” (quodlibet). At stake in his earlier text, as in his most recent work, is a mode of relation both immanently singular in terms of the specific mediations it facilitates and yet purely formal and content-less, what The Coming Community calls “a solidarity that in no way concerns an essence” (18-19). If the style of this earlier work is more suggestive and elliptical, in The Use of Bodies Agamben compliments these mannerisms with a more exhaustive and systematic methodology that mirrors the parts, sections, sub-sections, and thresholds at work in Homo Sacer. The effect is just as impressive, and, for this reader at least, there is a sense that Agamben has managed to bring together threads of argument that had been developed not only in the series of books that The Use of Bodies ostensibly closes, but also in a number of his other important works such as Potentialities, The Time that Remains, Means Without Ends, and The Man Without Content.

    It is not unusual to find Agamben working in the archives of Medieval philosophy and theology, seeking out extremely nuanced concepts that might be capable of deactivating key tendencies and habits of the Western philosophical tradition. In The Use of Bodies more than anywhere else we watch as he mobilizes an array of neo-Platonic, Stoic, Epicurean, and scholastic thinkers in order to adumbrate the contours of a different ontological tradition, a tradition that thinks existence and essence without the aporias and biopolitical impulses implicit in our current approaches to language, history, life, self, and the landscape. It is the sixteenth-century Spanish Jesuit priest, Francisco Suárez, not Alfred North Whitehead, whom Agamben credits with the idea that, “Mode is therefore an affection of the thing” (155); and it is the theologian Bartholomew des Bosses who takes the position, in his correspondence with Leibniz, that “existence is not an entity but a mode of being, which does not add to the essence anything but a modification” (158). In addition to uncovering and connecting a rich vein of thought dedicated to exploring an ontology of mode and relation rather than substance and essence, in the second part of the book Agamben revisits more familiar ontological terrain in the work of Plato, Foucault, and, most extensively, Heidegger and Plotinus. The method here, as elsewhere in the book, is to deactivate certain tendencies within their work and demonstrate their shared commitment to a modal ontology—even if these thinkers themselves, as in the case of Heidegger, were ultimately unable to develop their ideas in such a fashion. It is as if Agamben here plays the role of Levinas at Davos, seeking to “find a way out of the master’s [Heidegger’s] thought” (189) by carefully re-reading “Da-sein . . . not [as] a substance but something like an activity or a mode of existing that the human being must assume in order to approach the truth” (177). At other times Agamben channels Plotinus who, when faced with the aporias inherent in the zoè/bios distinction, “profoundly transforms Aristotelian ontology: yes, there is a unique substance, yet this is not a subject that remains behind or beneath its qualities but is always already homonymically shared in a plurality of forms of life, in which life is never separable from its form and, quite to the contrary, is always its mode of being” (218).

    What this all means in terms of the pressing need to reconfigure the contours of the polis and reconfigure its central political concepts is, perhaps inevitably, rather opaque. The Use of Bodies is unlikely to satisfy those readers of Agamben in search of a specific manifesto for political action; indeed, the final pages declare such a translation of ideas “into act” something “that is not within the scope of this book” (278). The closest Agamben comes to defining explicitly political concepts comes in his discussion of “intimacy” and “destituent power” in the final section of the book. Borrowing Plotinus’s expression of an intimacy in which one is “‘Alone by oneself’”—”We are together and very close, but between us there is not an articulation or a relation that unites us. We are united to one another in the form of our being alone”—Agamben approaches intimacy as “a political concept” insofar as it has the potential to deactivate the dead-ends of our current political and ontological choices, “rendering them inoperative” (236, 239). “What then appears,” Agamben concludes, is “something like a way out” and “if one reaches it and holds oneself there in it, the machine can no longer function” (239). Here, as in his discussion of destituent potential (which “means interrogating and calling into question the very status of relation”), it is hard not to picture Melville’s Bartleby, a character strangely absent from The Use of Bodies but far from alien to the Agamben corpus (271). In Potentialities, this scrivener functions for Agamben as a model for a certain kind of contemplative deactivation: an “idea of thought thinking itself, which is a kind of mean between thinking nothing and thinking something, between potentiality and actuality” (251). “Thought that thinks itself,” Agamben continues, “neither thinks an object nor thinks nothing. It thinks a pure potentiality . . . ; and what thinks its own potentiality is what is most divine and blessed” (251). While undoubtedly lacking from the perspective of political actuality, Agamben’s work has always preferred to make its home in this threshold between the potential and the actual. There is no better example of the blessings of such thought than The Use of Bodies.

    Works Cited

    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2003.
    • —–. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • —–. The Open: Man and Animal. Trans. Kevin Attell. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2004.
    • —–. Potentialities: Collected Essays in Philosophy. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
  • The Neoliberal University

    Christopher Breu (bio)
    Illinois State University

    A review of Di Leo, Jeffrey R. Corporate Humanities in Higher Education: Moving Beyond the Neoliberal Academy. Palgrave MacMillan, 2013.

    Academia has been embattled for the last forty years. Uncoincidentally, this same time span has seen the rise of neoliberalism as a cultural ideology, a political practice, and, most devastatingly, as a series of increasingly global economic policies. Given the violence of neoliberalism on US society, from the destruction of the middle-class, to the growth of economic inequality, to the warehousing (in prisons, in schools, and in devastated neighborhoods) of a growing surplus population, it is not surprising that it has had a similarly destructive impact on the American academy. As Jeffrey Di Leo puts it in his timely new book, “academia today resides within a culture of neoliberalism” (133). Perhaps the first manifestation of the impact of neoliberalism on the American academy was ideological and cultural rather than economic. This was the era of the so-called culture wars, beautifully detailed in Andrew Hartman’s recent book, A War for America’s Soul. While the battle, in this context, seemed cultural rather than economic, and seemed to be spearheaded by neoconservatism rather than neoliberalism, in retrospect it was clearly the first of a two-part assault on public education in general and higher education specifically, as Christopher Newfield points out. While humanists seemed to hold their own in the culture wars, as far as the general public was concerned, the war was won by conservatives, who may not have had the argumentative subtlety of many of their academic sparring partners, but knew how to make an effective soundbite (the seemingly evergreen rhetoric of “political correctness”) do their work for them. As Newfield points out, the culture war had the effect of softening up public support for public education, so that when the explicitly neoliberal economic war was launched in the new century, the academy was vulnerable and had few resources, rhetorical or otherwise, to combat it.

    It is into this twenty-first century context—in which economic neoliberalism has savaged the ranks of tenure-line professors, destroyed many of the tenets of shared governance and academic freedom, overseen the concomitant growth of administration and tuition, and undermined the public support for higher education—that Jeffrey Di Leo’s book Corporate Humanities in Higher Education makes its intervention. Di Leo’s stated intent to tackle neoliberalism head-on. Whereas many recent books of institutional critique still seem focused on the culture wars (see, for example, Gregory Jay’s The Humanities ‘Crisis’ and the Future of Literary Studies), Di Leo recognizes and understands the challenges presented by neoliberalism’s transformation of higher education:

    Neoliberalism is recalibrating academic identity. The paradigmatic neoliberal academic is a docile one. He is the product of an academic culture dominated by the recording measurement of performance, rather than the pursuit of academic freedom or critical exchange–an academic climate that renders him risk averse and compliant. Neoliberal managerialism constructs and functions through manageable and accommodating subjects. These docile neoliberal subjects excel when they ‘follow the rules’ regarding say ‘outcomes-based curricula’ and the ‘culture of continuous improvement,’ but risk failure when they begin to question the neoliberal academic practices to which they are subjected. (ix)

    Di Leo’s argument thus importantly engages not only the economic costs of neoliberalism, but more precisely the subjective and institutional effects of such economic costs. While this shift may seem to put the emphasis back onto culture, it is culture with a difference: what Di Leo is most focused on are the institutional and discursive effects of neoliberalism as a political-economic policy and practice on the university and its mission.

    In this sense, Di Leo’s book can be situated in relationship to a distinction that Wendy Brown makes in Undoing the Demos between neoliberalism in its first phase (from, say, 1980 to 2000 or so), in which the neoliberal logics of human capital and homo oeconomicus are applied to the logic of exchange (hence the star system, the commodification of various academic processes in the ’90s); and its second phase, in which the same logics are applied to the financialization of all aspects of human existence (organized in large part via what David Harvey calls “accumulation by dispossession” and operating more by stripping various entities of their assets than by investing in them) (159). Brown’s account pushes past earlier, foundational accounts of neoliberalism by Harvey and Foucault. If the former theorized neoliberalism as both an ideology and a loose set of economic practices, and the latter theorized it as a new form of governmentality organized by reorganizing non-economic life around an economic rationality in which the citizen becomes an entrepreneur of the self, what Brown adds to this discussion is an attention to the self as a site of resource extraction and depletion. Thus, within the logic of financialization, the subject no longer becomes an entrepreneur of self, but a site of resource mining. While in Brown’s model the two modes of human capital overlap, this latter dynamic leaves the worker in an even more precarious state. Di Leo addresses this precarity and its impact on faculty.

    Di Leo emphasizes the depoliticizing impact that neoliberalism has on faculty as a result of manufactured scarcity and austerity. Where liberal arts faculty were once celebrated for ground-breaking research and for relying on the protections of academic freedom to articulate potentially unpopular and often counter-hegemonic positions, they are increasingly being rewarded for adhering to best practices, allowing themselves to be micromanaged via the language of assessment, and sacrificing academic freedom and shared governance to the ideals of political and institutional quiescence. In other words, if the practice of critical pedagogy, as articulated by Henry Giroux, bell hooks, and others, represented the professorial ideal for the politicized 90s, then the practice of adhering to neoliberal managerial dictates increasingly represents the professorial ideal for what I have called elsewhere the “post-political” university (241).

    Fortunately, however, there are many dissenters from the post-political university, and it is clear that Di Leo writes Corporate Humanities in Higher Education for them. For this reason, it is not surprising that the volume appears in Henry Giroux and Susan Searls Giroux’s series, Education, Politics, and Public Life. Yet Di Leo occupies a distinctive position for someone practicing critical pedagogy: he is the Dean of Arts and Sciences at the University of Houston, Victoria and the editor of both the theory journal, Symplokē, and the American Book Review. He has an insider’s perspective on the business of academia, including the business of ensuring that academia means more than just business. This insider’s perspective might suggest why, in the book’s opening two chapters, he argues for a partial embrace of the language of the market in reconceptualizing both literary studies and the humanities. For Di Leo, we cannot merely bemoan the demise of the liberal arts, we need to get our hands dirty and take risks in working to save and transform them: “No one is better qualified to make the case for the humanities amidst the remonstrations of the corporate university than we humanists. But with this qualification comes responsibility–a responsibility to not just reveal the nature of the crisis, but also to strive for solutions to it” (2). Di Leo asserts the need to move beyond the work of critique to produce workable solutions to the depoliticization of the academy. Both the possibilities and the problems of such a position are captured in the book’s first chapter, “Corporate Literature,” which is not the name of an object of criticism but of a curricular and pedagogical practice that Di Leo supports. He defines it as a series of “curricular and pedagogical compromises,” which combine the critical with the vocational in order to secure a place for the liberal arts in the new university (12). Thus literature classes, writing classes, and philosophy classes would teach students both the forms of critical citizenship that will help them be politically engaged and vocational skills that will help them navigate the corporate world in which they find themselves post-graduation.

    I think Di Leo’s argument for the mixing of the critical with the vocational, the political with the practical, makes sense. A purely liberal humanist approach not only seems outmoded by both the theory and practice of the humanities in the present—with its emphasis on posthumanism, the interface of the digital and the human, and yes, critical vocationalism,—but often exists as an implicitly nostalgic and class-bound fantasy for a period when the academy was imagined to be made up of gentleman scholars. Writing from the position of a satellite campus, Di Leo knows the populations that are excluded from this older, gendered, and genteel version of the academy. An emphasis on the combination of the critical, the literary, and the vocational emphasizes the political stakes that neoliberalism wants to silence while engaging the very real desire of students to get a job. At its best, such a vision might be part of a new “laboring” of the U.S. academy, to borrow a term from Michael Denning (xvi). However, writing this transformation under the sign of “corporate literature” seems unfortunate. The emphasis on the corporation rather than on the critical worker cedes too much to the language of neoliberalism and its specifically corporate transformation of the university.

    Other chapters are more incisive in their criticisms of neoliberalism. One of the most powerful arguments in Di Leo’s book addresses the way in which neoliberalism erodes debate and dissention. In place of the forms of parologism advocated by Lyotard and affirmatively cited by Di Leo, much of the neoliberal academy is organized around a kind of corporate groupthink and risk adversity that represents a destruction of the principled conflict that has been at important to the humanities as a critical enterprise, “a method aimed at dissent and justice” (35). Di Leo argues for paralogism as “a model of dialogue” that “calls for academics to become emotionally involved in the university dialogue and encourages tough metaprofessional criticism (41).” He links this practice to the Kantian vision of the modern university that represents the critical impulse that fostered its genesis and continues to be part of its most powerful contemporary realizations.

    Another standout chapter considers the work of editing both a cutting-edge, scholarly journal and an independent book review. Much can be made of the present composition of the humanities by noting that the theory journal has much more international and professional recognition than the book review. While many academics have defended the centrality and importance of theory, it is striking that the book review is treated, according to Di Leo, almost as an afterthought. Rather than a defense of either older, more humanist values or of the contemporary rigors of the posthumanist, theory-saturated contemporary academy, the chapter nicely argues that scholarly publishing needs to change as the context for the production of scholarship changes. The central work of critique needs to persist even as the academy changes. This chapter manifests what is best about Di Leo’s vision. Neither hand-wringing nor cynical, nostalgic nor disparing, Di Leo’s book reflects the role of an administrator who enables and supports the provocative and political work done in the academy. Other chapters address the effects of neoliberalism on the publishing market, on conceptions of the author, and on the production of scholarly knowledge itself.

    All the chapters represent valuable interventions into the neoliberal academy of the present, but the last one on scholarly knowledge is particularly rich. In it Di Leo argues for a two-pronged approach in which we both continue to value conventional scholarly publication but also embrace “alternative modes of publication such as blogs, Twitter, chatrooms, websites, documentary video, and magazine and newspaper articles” (131). While such a development is already happening, it is heartening to see an administrative vision that values diverse forms of scholarly production. Di Leo argues powerfully against typical metadata understandings of academic impact (such as “mentions”) as well as traditional understandings of productivity, represented by scholarly publication in isolation, and instead places an emphasis on the cultural and scholarly impact ideas have, whatever the form of their dissemination. At its most visionary, the chapter argues for a renewed and revitalized conception of the public intellectual, one enabled by social media.

    While the unchecked growth of administration has been one of the problems of the contemporary academy and one wishes, occasionally, that Di Leo were more attuned to the specific dimensions of academic labor in the present (especially precarious labor), his challenge to neoliberalism is a necessary and important one. Administrators who want to see the humanities continue to exist as part of a critical and utopian enterprise in the twenty-first century could do much worse than reading Di Leo’s book.

    Works Cited

    • Breu, Christopher. “The Post-Political Turn: Theory in the Neoliberal Academy.” Capital at the Brink: Overcoming the Destructive Legacy of Neoliberalism. Eds. Jeffrey Di Leo and Uppinder Mehan. Ann Arbor: Open University Press, 2014. 241-258.
    • Brown, Wendy. Undoing the Demos: Neoliberalism’s Stealth Revolution. New York: Zone Books, 2015.
    • Denning, Michael. The Cultural Front: The Laboring of American Culture in the Twentieth Century. London: Verso, 1997.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Birth of Biopolitics: Lectures at the Collège de France, 1978-1979. Trans. Graham Burchell. New York: Picador, 2008.
    • Hartman, Andrew. A War for the Soul of America: A History of the Culture Wars. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2015.
    • Harvey, David. A Brief History of Neoliberalism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2005.
    • Jay, Paul. “The Humanities ‘Crisis” and the Future of Literary Studies.” New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2014.
    • Newfield, Christopher. Unmaking the Public University: The Forty-Year Assault on the Middle Class. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2008.